JP2024045634A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can prevent a problem that causes a player to quickly become bored. [Solution] A plurality of different indicators are arranged, and when an indicator determined to be a specific indicator among the indicators becomes an alarm state, a special benefit is given to the player, so that all indicators have the possibility of becoming specific indicators, and the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the indicator determined to be a specific indicator. Furthermore, an indicator is divided into a plurality of regions, and the specific indicator is determined so that a high determination region where a high proportion of indicators are determined to be specific indicators and a low determination region where a low proportion of indicators are determined to be specific indicators are formed, so that the proportion of specific indicators varies depending on the region of the indicator, and the degree of expectation for the specific indicator can be configured to vary even within the indicator. This has the effect of allowing a change in the player's expectation, preventing the game from becoming monotonous, and preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. [Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning decision is made, and the result of the decision is announced by rotating multiple rotating bodies with multiple different patterns arranged on the front side, which are lined up and rotated, and the combination of patterns that stops at a predetermined position.

As a result of this notification, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is executed in which a variable winning device is changed so that a gaming ball can enter when a predetermined number of the same symbols (e.g., three) are lined up and stopped.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318

In this conventional gaming machine, players play in the hope of matching a certain number of the same symbols and stopping, but since the number of combinations of winning symbols on the rotating body corresponds to the type of symbols arranged on each, and is always constant, the game can become monotonous, and players quickly become bored, which is a problem.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players getting tired of the game early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and based on the fact that the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to a player; an identifier in which a plurality of different identifiers are arranged; a determining means for determining a particular one of the identifiers in the identifier; notification state setting means for setting the specific identification section to a notification state when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result; and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect to notify the player of the determination result by the discriminating means, and the determining means divides the identifier into a plurality of areas, and the determining means divides the identification object into a plurality of areas, The specific identification portion is determined such that a high determination region is formed with a high percentage of being determined by the identification portion and a low determination region is with a low percentage of being determined by the specific identification portion.

The gaming machine of claim 2 is the gaming machine of claim 1, which has a moving means for moving the identifier, and the notification state setting means moves the identifier with the moving means and stops the identifier determined by the specific identifier at a predetermined position, thereby setting the identifier to the notification state.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 is the gaming machine described in claim 2, which has a presentation body, a moving means capable of moving the presentation body to the predetermined position, and a movement control means for moving the presentation body to the predetermined position by the moving means in accordance with the timing at which the identification body stops.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, and when the identification section determined as a specific identification section among the identification sections enters the notification state, a privilege is given to the player. , there is a possibility that all the identification parts become specific identification parts, and the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the identification part determined to be a specific identification part.

Furthermore, the identifier is divided into a plurality of regions, and a specific region is divided into a plurality of regions, and a high-determination region with a high percentage of determination by a specific identification portion and a low-determination region with a low percentage of determination by a specific identification portion are formed. Since the identification part is determined, the proportion of the specific identification part can be varied depending on the region of the identification object, and the degree of expectation for the specific identification part can be configured to vary even within the identification object.

This has the effect of varying the player's expectations, preventing the game from becoming monotonous, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, by moving the identification body and entering a notification state in which a specific identification part is stopped at a predetermined position, the player is notified that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, the player can be interested in the position at which the identification object is stopped.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 2, since the presentation object is moved to a predetermined position in accordance with the stop timing of the identification object, the presentation object can be stopped at a predetermined position. This has the effect of being able to notify the player of the identification part in an easy-to-understand manner.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper lifting unit. FIG. 1A is a front view of a first gear, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the first gear, FIG. 1C is a front view of a second gear, and FIG. 1D is a rear view of the second gear. FIG. It is a front view of an elevating body and a transmission device. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side slide member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive-side slide member. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the drive-side slide member. 26(a) is a front perspective view of the connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26(a), and (c) is a rear view of the connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIc in FIG. 26(a). 13 is a rear view of the second passage forming member and the connecting member. FIG. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the second passage forming member and the connecting member. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in FIG. 29 . FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. 1 is a front perspective view of the game board and the left swing unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the swing operation unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. FIG. 4 is a partial front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit and the left swinging unit. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit and the left swing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the rotation unit with the guide member removed. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit with the guide member removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotation unit with the rotation member, a part of the pitching device, and the guide member removed. FIG. (a) is a front view of the one-side rotational driving member and the other-side rotational member, and (b) is a sectional view of the one-side rotational member and the other-side rotational member taken along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51(a). be. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member. FIG. 54(a) is a front view of the rotating member, and FIG. 54(b) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 54(a). 55(b) is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54(b). 4A is a front perspective view of a divided member, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the divided member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the dividing member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the dividing member. (a) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the divided member in a state arranged in the first section. (a) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the divided member in a state arranged in the second section. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the pitching device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the pitching device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pitching device in a state in which the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism is placed at the holding position. 13 is a front view of the pitching device with the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism positioned in the separated position. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece extending and retracting mechanism in a state in which the holding piece is disposed at the protruding position. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece extending and retracting mechanism when the holding piece is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 68(a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is placed in the protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 69(a) is a front oblique view of the holding piece extension and retraction mechanism when the holding piece is placed in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece extension and retraction mechanism taken along line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69(a). FIG. FIG. FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (a) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotational drive member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 7 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase and the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotational drive member and the other-side rotational drive member with respect to the dividing member. (a) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged side view of a first section of the rotating member. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit according to a second embodiment. 79(a) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member of the tip wall member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 79(b), and (d) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the left swing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the left swing unit. (a) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising/lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit. 89(a) is a partial front view of the driving side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the driving side slide member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in Figure 89(a), and (c) is a partial front view of the driving side slide member. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a changing display of patterns, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a losing pattern combination is displayed stationary. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a combination of symbols that result in a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution of the time-saving suggestion effect. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a miss is indicated in the time-saving suggestion effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a hit is indicated in the time-saving suggestion effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of an increase effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a roulette chance effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a pitched ball is performing a swinging motion on a holding piece. . (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a ball misses and falls into a pocket in a roulette chance performance, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a ball hits and falls into a pocket. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when an additional performance is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when an additional lucky number is announced in an increase performance. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rear LED. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a case where a part of the lighting area of the back LED is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. 13 is a front view of the rotating member when a part of the lighting area of the rear LED is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. FIG. 1A is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state has been set for each lighting area of the rear LED, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the rotating member when the lighting state has been set for each lighting area of the rear LED. (a) is a front view of the rear LED when the rear LED has completed 1/3 revolution after setting the lighting state, and (b) is a front view of the rear LED when the rear LED has completed 1/3 revolution after setting the lighting state. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotating member. 1A is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the rotating member when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected. (a) is a diagram showing the case where the ball during the swinging motion is placed outside the detection range of the ball detection sensor, and (b) is a diagram showing the case where the ball during the swinging motion is placed within the detection range of the ball detection sensor. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams regarding control of a stepping motor. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main controller, b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first random number table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the winning type selection table for special figure 1. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the winning type selection table for special figure 2. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of state transition of a pachinko machine. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium jackpot table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the short-time medium jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detailed contents of the consecutive game table included in the short-time medium jackpot table. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving miss table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the detailed contents of the consecutive win table included in the time-saving miss table. (a) is a timing chart showing a change in time measurement in the form of a losing roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing a change in time measurement in the form of a winning roulette chance when fluctuations are interrupted during time reduction. be. 1A is a timing chart showing the change over time in the state of a winning roulette chance, and FIG. 1B is a timing chart showing the change over time in the state of a winning roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time-saving period. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a game result setting table, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a status setting table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM in the audio lamp control device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the upper lifting unit table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the specific opening table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an initial operation table. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a rotational position discrimination table; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a hit position storage area. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first storage area, and (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area. FIG. 12(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area; FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display data table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-on state setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a return-to-origin process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a swing performance process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a discharge detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a connection release determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an execution command process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an initial operation process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning pocket distribution process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing special drawing 2 winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a display number selection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows accessory motion setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the arrangement of each ball detection sensor and the sections in a second control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the amplitude discrimination table in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a swing angle discrimination table in a second control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking|fluctuation effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall control process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the amplitude discrimination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a swing angle control process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rotation setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing execution command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a placement determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the during rotation specification process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the non-specific time process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rocking determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a time measurement change in the performance mode when the winning middle variation is set during the consecutive game mode in the third control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a time measurement change in the performance mode in the third control example. It is a timing chart showing an example of a time measurement change in the performance mode when the off-middle variation is set during the consecutive game mode. (a) is a timing chart showing the change over time in the presentation mode when a winning short fluctuation is determined after two consecutive missing short fluctuations have been determined during consecutive win mode in the third control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the change over time in the presentation mode when three consecutive missing short fluctuations have been determined during consecutive win mode. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in a third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the third control example. be. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for consecutive big wins in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for consecutive hits and misses in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional area selection table. . FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the hit position storage area in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning pocket allocation process 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the additional position determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. (a) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuating pattern selection table during consecutive games in the fourth control example. (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table in the fourth control example, and (d) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper swing effect table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM in a sound ramp control device in a 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 4 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. 13 is a flowchart showing a rotation setting process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 winning command processing 4 executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. A flowchart showing the upper shaking performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing the operating mode of the left swing unit when a left swing performance is being executed in the fifth control example. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams illustrating the pitch press performance in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the left swing unit table in the fifth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first left swing unit table in the fifth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second left swing unit table in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall control process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitch press effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning pocket allocation process 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 winning command processing 5 executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing the display mode of the variable display executed during the "normal mode" in the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode of a variable display executed during the "preparation mode" in the sixth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol position selection table in the sixth control example. It is a diagram. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display position selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th example of control. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing a stop position selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a sixth control example. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of a signal waveform of a lighting control command in a first control example.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 1 to Fig. 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on its left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased toward the front, and by sliding it toward the rear against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 54b is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640a, the second variable prize winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the inner frame 12 (Fig. (see) can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device indicates the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. As the types of jackpots determined here, variable jackpots A to K and normal jackpots A and B are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, each of the "probable variable jackpots A to K" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2, and after the jackpot ends, it shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. On the other hand, when it becomes "normal jackpot A, B", the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol after a jackpot of two rounds.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640a. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, and the second entry point is increased. Refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to land in 640a. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is opened is changed, and it takes a longer time than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 640b is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a than when the electric accessory 640b is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640a, and the number of jackpot lottery events can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640b opens with one hit may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the hit probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is opened and the number of times the electric role 640b opens with one hit may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is opened and the number of times the electric role 640b opens with one hit may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third display in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640a. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and the LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 640b of the second ball entrance 640a open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640a.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640a during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640b opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640b opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device 83, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display device unit 80. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main control device At 110 (see FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is drawn, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640a through which a ball can enter is located to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640a, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second ball entrance switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a are also prize entrances through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the prize entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a may be five.

An electric accessory 640b is attached to the second ball entrance 640a. This electric accessory 640b is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (extended state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640a. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b is in the open state ( (retracted state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640a.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640b is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 640b is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640a than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. be. However, as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is achieved, the selection rate of the jackpot type that allows a relatively large amount of prize balls to be won is set to be higher when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a. has been done. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640a, and is in a state where balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640a is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second ball entrance 640a. 64, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by landing the ball in the first ball entrance 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery. , it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by letting the ball pass through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is likely to be in the open state, making it easy to win a prize in the second ball entry port 640a. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640a so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and fires the ball into the electric accessory. It is more advantageous for the player to open the ball and aim for a jackpot by hitting the second ball entrance 640a.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game because it allows them to change the way they hit the ball.

A first variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first ball entry hole 64, and a first specific winning hole 82 is provided near the first variable winning device 82a. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, in the case of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot A), the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type. The predetermined opening patterns include an opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds is repeated 20 times (opening pattern A), and an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is repeated only once (opening pattern B). ) is provided.

The opening/closing operation according to a predetermined opening pattern by the first variable prize winning device 82a can be repeated, for example, twice (two rounds) at most. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held. In addition, in each round, even if the opening pattern is not completed, if it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more have entered the first specific winning hole 82, the first The variable winning device 82a is closed and the end of the round is set.

A second variable winning device 65 is disposed to the right of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning port (large open port) 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the second variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. If the jackpot type corresponds to the second specific winning port 65a, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning port 65a. In this special game state, the second specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). That is, a longer opening time is set compared to the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened, in many cases, the upper limit number of balls (for example, 10 balls) can be won in the second specific winning port 65a, so that the player can win more prize balls. Therefore, in the event of a jackpot, the player can hope for the jackpot type in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened, and therefore, in the event of a jackpot, the player can pay attention to the second specific winning port 65a.

This second specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this second specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, two times (two rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The second variable winning device 65 specifically comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the second specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The second specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the second specific winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the second specific winning port 65a forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, various sensors 230, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 10. Figure 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and Figure 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and Figures 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

Note that Figures 6 and 7 show the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 in the lowered position, Figure 9 shows the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 connected, and Figure 10 shows the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 in the raised position. Also, Figures 6 to 10 show the upper lifting unit 300 in the raised position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and an upper lifting unit 300, a liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and a left swing unit are provided in the inner space of the back case 210. 500, a rotation unit 600, and a light emitting decorative member 700 are housed therein.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall 211 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer walls 212 that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 211 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side open by these walls 211, 212. A generally circular recess is provided in the center of the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210, and the rotation unit 600 is stored in this recess. The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotation unit 600, and the upper lifting unit 300, left swinging unit 500, and decorative light-emitting member 700 are disposed on the upper edge, left edge, and lower edge of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, respectively.

The upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) arranged in parallel in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12 and 13). When the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is placed in the lowered position, when the lifting body 330 is placed in the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8); When 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is arranged in a vertical position with its axis along the vertical direction, and has a pair of guide rods 451 arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and the guide rods 451 have opposite ends in the width direction. The drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are supported so as to be slidable, and a drive motor 441 drives the drive-side slide member 420 up and down, and the drive-side slide member 420 is driven up and down by the drive motor 441. As a result, the driven side slide member 430 is moved up and down.

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while when the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered, As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

The second passage forming member 422 is disposed on the driving side slide member 420, and the third pattern display device 81 is disposed on the driven side slide member 430. When the driving side slide member 420 is disposed in a connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). When the driving side slide member 420 is disposed in the raised position, the upper area of the third pattern display device 81 is disposed on the rear side of the upper lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction that moves the distal end up and down with the base end as the center. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the distal end side, it is placed in the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the distal end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. When the distal end side is swung in the direction of swinging down, it is placed in the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.

The balls flowing down the game area are allowed to flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 is configured such that the balls flowing down the game area are allowed to flow into the left swing unit 500 when the first passage forming member 520 is placed in the connecting position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). , the ball that has flown in is sent to the game area via a path that is provided separately from the first path forming member 520 and will be described later.

The rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a rotatably formed wheel (rotating disk), and a member (rotating member 640) that is formed by dividing the wheel in the circumferential direction, are colored red or black, and are each marked with a different number. The ball B, which is pitched from the device (throwing device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel, is provided with portions corresponding to the pockets (display board 646 and partition board 647) that correspond to the plurality of pockets. Formed to fall either way.

When the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is in the lowered position (see Figure 8), almost the entire rotation unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 so that it cannot be seen by the player, while when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is in the connected position (see Figure 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is in the raised position (see Figure 10), in addition to a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel, ball B held on the inner circumference of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path that ball B takes from when it is thrown until it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket are exposed and can be seen by the player.

The luminous decorative member 700 comprises a case body made of a light-transmitting material and a number of LEDs arranged inside the case body, and creates a lighting effect by changing the form of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, the number of emitting LEDs and the duration of light emission).

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper lifting unit 300, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, the left swinging unit 500, the rotation unit 600 and the illuminating decorative member 700 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 20. First, the upper lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 20.

FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. Note that FIGS. 11 and 12 illustrate a state in which all the elevating bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged in the raised position, and in FIG. The state in which it is placed at the position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in this embodiment) disposed in the width direction of a base member 310 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate. It is configured to be movable up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described.

Figure 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and Figure 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. a rear cover 320 fastened and fixed to the rear side; a lifting body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the rear cover 320, and a circular presentation part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; Mainly includes a drive device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates the driving force necessary for the elevating movement of the elevating object, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating object 330. Be prepared.

The cover member 310 has a semicircular shape with the center of the circle located at the lower end, and a semicircular concave portion 311 that is recessed from the front side surface toward the back side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the back side surface. The guide rib 312 is provided in a rib-like manner and protrudes toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

The semicircular concave portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the production portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular concave portion 311 and the center of the production portion 331 are in a vertical line. will be placed at the matching position. As a result, when the production section 331 moves upward, it can be moved to the front side of the base member 310 before the position where it interferes with the semicircular recessed section 311, while maintaining the vertical width of the base member 310. , it is possible to secure a large upward movement width of the production section 331.

The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction (parallel movement or tilting operation) during the vertical movement.

In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is expanded compared to the case where it is a space penetrating in the front and back direction. be able to. Therefore, a large area can be secured for arranging mechanical parts (parts such as gears and motors that are not intended to be seen by the player).

The back cover 320 includes a main body part 321 configured in a case shape with the front side and the bottom open, a cylindrical shaft support 322 projecting from the main body part 321 toward the front side, and a cylindrical shaft support 322 extending from the front side from the shaft support 322 to the front side. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole, is drilled with the extension direction aligned with the vertical direction at a position shifted in the left-right direction in view, and a shaft support is formed from the bottom of the periphery where the upper shaft support 322 is protruded. 322 and a rib-shaped locking portion 324 extending in the radial direction.

The shaft support 322 is a portion that pivotally supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the ascending and descending movement of the elevating body 330.

The locking portions 324 are disposed vertically above and below the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and are portions against which the ends of the locking arc portions 351c of the first gear 351 can abut in the rotational direction when the lifting body 330 is in the raised or lowered position.

The lifting body 330 comprises a performance section 331 configured in the shape of a circular plate, and a rack 332 fixed to the rear surface of the performance section 331 and extending vertically at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the performance section 331.

The effect part 331 is a part that has a circular liquid crystal panel arranged inside a circular outer frame and performs effects by displaying patterns and figures on the liquid crystal panel.

The rack 332 is provided with a slide shaft 332a that is protruding from the rear side and is protruding to a position where it can be inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320.

The slide shaft 332a is not configured such that a plurality of slide shafts 332a are provided protrudingly, but that one is provided protrusively. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 can be reduced to one (reduced), it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the rack 332 while suppressing the space for installing the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can come into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one location, the rack 332 can not be moved in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent it from tilting. This prevents the directing section 331 from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and also prevents the interlocking relationship from worsening due to fluctuations in the distance between the second gear 352 and the rack 332. be able to.

The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 that is a drive source that is fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits the drive force to the transmission device 350. .

The transmission device 350 includes a first gear 351 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and a first gear 351 that is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and is pivotally supported by the shaft support 322. A second gear 352 is provided.

In this way, the multiple (four in this embodiment) lifting bodies 330 each have an independent drive motor 341, so in addition to all of the lifting bodies 330 moving up and down in unison, each lifting body 330 can also move up and down individually. Note that the technical concept of each lifting body 330 is the same, so the following describes the lifting body 330 located at the left end of Figure 11, and the other lifting bodies 330 will not be described.

Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16(a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16(b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16(c) is a front view of the second gear 352, and FIG. 16(d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

As shown in Figures 16(a) and 16(b), the first gear 351 includes a main body 351a having a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see Figure 14) is inserted and on whose outer circumferential surface gear teeth are formed, abutment portion 351b formed to protrude radially with a protrusion length of about half the tooth height of the gear teeth (protrusion length extending to pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth) on the portion of the outer circumferential surface of the main body 351a where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted, and a locking arc portion 351c protruding from the rear side surface of the main body 351a in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis.

The abutting portion 351b has a radial end surface shaped like an arc with a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body 351a, and has a tooth thickness (arc) of about two to three gear teeth formed on the main body 351a. The angle formed by the center of the tooth is approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees (tooth thickness). That is, since the shape growth in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 351a is made longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, strength in the circumferential direction can be ensured compared to the gear teeth of the main body portion 351a.

The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose circumferential tip can come into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

As shown in Figures 16(c) and 16(d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears with different tooth shapes on the front and rear sides, and includes an intermediate plate 353 configured in a doughnut plate shape, an irregular gear section 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially irregular tooth shape, and a transmission gear section 355 formed in a spur gear shape on the rear side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshing with the rack 332 (see Figure 15).

The intermediate plate 352 is formed to extend radially outward beyond the tips of the gear teeth of the irregular gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, it can abut against the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) by overlapping in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17), and the mating member can be prevented from moving in a direction parallel to the tooth surface when the lifting body 330 is lifted or lowered.

The irregular gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and includes a main body portion 354a having a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted and on whose outer circumferential surface gear teeth are formed, a receiving portion 354b that is formed by protruding from a portion of the outer circumferential surface of the main body portion 354a where the formation of gear teeth is omitted, and an adjacent gear tooth 354c that is provided adjacent to one end of the receiving portion 354b (the end portion on the right side of FIG. 16(c)).

The receiving portion 354b is located along the outer circumferential surface of the main body portion 354a from the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front (the side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when moving the elevating body 330 upwardly). ) is formed at an angle of about two gear teeth (approximately 30 degrees to 50 degrees), and when the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support 322, the tip surface of the contact portion 351b The tooth height of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. (a tooth height that extends to the pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the teeth that mesh with each other). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 has an overhang length that is approximately half the radial overhang length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2. It is configured to be integrally formed with the connecting wall portion 354b2 and projecting from the connecting wall portion 354b2 in the radial direction.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), when the transmission device 350 is supported by the support 322, and the second gear 352 is in a position where the curved wall portion 354b1 is positioned along the arc shape of radius r formed by the tip surface of the abutment portion 351b, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are positioned outside the arc of radius r (on the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c are formed at a position where they do not interfere with the circle of radius r).

Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. It should be noted that since the movement paths for the ascending motion and the descending motion are common, the ascending motion will be explained here, and the explanation of the descending motion will be omitted.

Figures 17 to 20 are front views of the lifting body 330 and transmission device 350, illustrating the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 in chronological order. 17 shows the state in which the lifting body 330 is placed in the lowered position, and FIG. 18 shows the state in which the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 17, the lifting body 330 is raised a predetermined distance, and the circumferential end of the abutment portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352. FIG. 19 shows the state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 18 and the abutment between the circumferential end face of the abutment portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c is released, and FIG. 20 shows the state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated a predetermined amount clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 19.

As shown in Figures 17 to 20, the lifting body 330 is raised and lowered by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see Figure 14) to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. In detail, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 that meshes with the drive gear 342 to the irregular gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 that meshes with the first gear 351, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack that meshes with the transmission gear portion 355 (see Figure 16 (d)) of the second gear 352, thereby lifting and lowering the lifting body 330.

In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

In addition, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351c of the first gear 351 comes into contact with the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320, so that the first gear 351 rotation in the clockwise direction (direction in which the rack 332 is moved downward) when viewed from the front is mechanically prevented.

As a result, even if the drive gear 342 over-rotates due to poor control of the drive motor 341 and a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 moves downward can be avoided. 15) can be prevented from being pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) and damaging the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323.

As illustrated in FIG. 18, in the process of the ascending movement of the elevating body 330, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b, which has a circumferential tooth thickness larger than that of other gear teeth, meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354c. Therefore, the load transmitted in the opposite direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b, which has greater strength than other gear teeth. , the durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is extended to the pitch circle C1, and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 is extended to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state shown in FIG. It is brought close to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

Further, since the adjacent gear tooth 354c has one side surface in the circumferential direction connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2, the strength against the load applied from the circumferential direction is improved compared to other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial overhang length of the side surface on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, resistance to deformation in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction of the adjacent gear tooth 354c increases, and the connecting wall portion 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. , the resistance to circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c increases. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

As shown in FIG. 19, immediately after the elevating body 330 is placed in the raised position, the arcuate tip of the abutment portion 351b abuts the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. Ru.

Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is no longer transmitted from the first gear 351, and the elevating body 330 begins to move in the direction of falling, so the second gear 352 supports the rack 332. Start rotating in the direction of downward movement (counterclockwise in Figure 19).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is arranged within the range in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c rotates (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the second gear 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component directed toward the shaft side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

The axial component Fa is not a direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state in which the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (a structure that does not expand or contract in the radial direction), it is difficult for the axial component Fa to push the abutment portion 351b outside the movement trajectory of the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

The circumferential component Fb points in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but since the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b contact at a point, there is no slippage between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b. occurs, and the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate. Therefore, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential direction component Fb.

Therefore, since the adjacent gear tooth 354c prevents the contact portion 351b from being pushed outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

The contact portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed from an arc shape with a radius r centered on the first gear 351, and as shown in FIG. 19, they are in surface contact with the first rotating gear 351 along the circumferential direction, so that the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received by utilizing the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. This makes it possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating even if there is a delay in stopping the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) after the lifting body 330 reaches the raised position, and prevents the delay in stopping the drive motor 341 from affecting the operating state of the lifting body 330.

As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates until the locking arc portion 351c contacts the upper locking portion 324, and then stops. From FIG. 18 to FIG. 20, the second gear 352 is rotated by the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushing against the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, and a state can be reliably formed in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c contacts the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b in the state shown in FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the lifting body 330 is placed in the raised position, so the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction that moves the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise relative to the second gear 352 in FIG. 19, the second gear 352 does not rotate with it. Therefore, it is possible to reliably create a state in which the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the lifting body 330 is in the raised position, the second gear 352 is oriented such that the curved wall portion 354b1 is positioned along the arc shape of radius r formed by the tip surface of the abutment portion 351b, and the adjacent gear teeth 354c are positioned outside the arc of radius r (on the second gear 352 side). Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 19, only the first gear 351 can be rotated in the same rotational direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

At this time, the tooth thickness of the abutment portion 351b is made thicker (approximately the thickness of two to three gear teeth) compared to the other gear teeth, so the precision of the stopping position of the first gear 351 can be relaxed. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at an intermediate phase between the state shown in FIG. 19 and the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship at the abutment position between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the abutment portion 351b is secured in the same manner, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be regulated.

Moreover, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is kept moderate. That is, even if the second gear 352 begins to rotate clockwise in FIG. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same way as when the provided gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b come into contact. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving both up and down when the elevating body 330 is placed in the raised position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the elevating body 330. Regulation in both the up and down directions (especially regulation in the upward direction) is difficult to achieve with a conventional crank mechanism, and can be achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. It is something.

In this way, the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 makes it possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating when the elevating body 330 is placed in the raised position. It is not necessary to continue applying the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) at a magnitude greater than the weight of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) in order to maintain it in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

It is also possible to maintain the elevating body 330 in the raised position by using the dead center of the crank mechanism, but in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes larger in size to correspond to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In this embodiment, a crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be regulated by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be downsized.

A method for releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be explained. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the abutting portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the opposite direction, no separate member is provided that interferes with the abutting portion 351b in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20). Therefore, the first gear 351 is allowed to rotate in the direction of lowering the elevating body 330 (clockwise in FIG. 20).

When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. (the distal end surface is spaced apart from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the elevating body 330 can move downward. That is, the rotational action of the first gear 351 can release the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352, and it is possible to cause the first gear 351 to perform another operation in order to release the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352. Since this is not necessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

Next, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 will be described with reference to Figs. 21 to 33. Fig. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in Fig. 21, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 comprises a driving side slide member 420 that has a performance part 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a driven side slide member 430 that moves up in response to the driving side slide member 420 and has a third pattern display device 81, and the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are connected to a common guide rod 451 and are configured to move in the same direction.

22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is mainly composed of a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-like members, a driving side slide member 420 configured to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, a driven side slide member 430 arranged above the driving side slide member 420 and configured to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, a driving device 440 that generates a driving force for the driving side slide member 420 to move up and down, a transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 that transmit the driving force generated by the driving device 440 to the driving side slide member 420 and guide the operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, a lower front plate member 460 that connects the lower ends of the pair of base members 410 and is connected to the driving side slide member 420, and a cover member 470 arranged on the front side of the left, right, and upper parts of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400.

The base member 410 is made up of a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, guide rod support parts 412 arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 at positions that coincide with each other in the vertical direction and configured as U-shaped recesses that open to the front, a locking part 413 arranged inside (the side close to the other base member 410) from a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support part 412 and extending to the front side of the main body member 411, and a locking part 413 arranged between the locking part 413 and the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support part 412. It mainly comprises a first support 414 that is cylindrically protruding from the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side to 413, a descent restriction member 415 that is supported by the first support 414 and restricts the descent of the driving side slide member 420, a second support 416 that is positioned below the first support 414 and protruding from the front side of the main body member 411, and an ascent restriction member 417 that is supported by the second support 416 and restricts the ascent of the driven side slide member 430.

The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In this embodiment, by fastening and fixing the cover member 470 to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support part 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support part 412.

The locking portion 413 is a portion that abuts the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven slide member 430 in the vertical direction, and prevents the driven slide member 430 from further descending from this contact state. to regulate.

The descending regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are members that rotate in accordance with the vertical movement of the driving sliding member 420 and have the role of regulating the movement of the driven sliding member 430, and the details will be described later.

The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 and is moved up and down by the sliding movement of the rack 452.

The driven side slide member 430 does not have an independent drive device, is slidably supported by the guide rod 451 at both left and right ends, and moves up and down in accordance with the up and down movement of the drive side slide member 420. The driven side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having a third symbol display device 81 and configured to be elongated in the left-right direction, functional parts 432 arranged at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and the functional parts. A guide hole 433 that is vertically drilled in 432 and into which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 434 that extends upwardly and slanted in the left and right outward direction at the lower end of the functional portion 432; It mainly includes a drop prevention part 435 extending to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional part 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433).

The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked onto the rise-regulating member 417. When the driven slide member 430 is in the lowered position, the rise-regulating member 417 wraps around and hooks onto the engagement surface 434a, which is the upper surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), thereby preventing the driven slide member 430 from moving in the upward direction (for example, preventing it from bouncing in reaction to a fall). In addition, the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward, and the engagement claw portion 417e of the rise-regulating member 417 is configured parallel to the inclination, so that the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rise-regulating member 417 can also suppress wobbling in the left-right direction.

The shape of the tip of the hook portion 434 (outside the tip of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the part on the right side of FIG. 29)) is shaped to be below the movement trajectory of the engaging claw portion 417e. Therefore, even when the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook portion 434 are engaged and apply a load to each other, the rise restricting member 417 can rotate.

The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor.

The transmission device 450 mainly comprises a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, a rack 452 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, a drive side slide member 420 fastened and fixed to the rack 451, and a vertically long plate-like abutment wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the base of the teeth of the rack 452 toward the front side.

The contact wall 453 has the role of rotating the rise regulating member 417 toward the release side and the role of moving the rack 452 in a direction away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the biasing force of the rise regulating member 417, which will be described in detail later. do.

The lower front panel member 460 mainly comprises a main body member 461, the left and right ends of which are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a central portion which is bent in such a manner that it is offset a predetermined amount toward the rear side compared to the left and right ends, a guide hole 462 drilled in the left-right direction in the left half of the main body member 461 (inclined upward as it approaches the outside), and a cylindrical passage portion 463 which is a cylindrical member extending above the main body member 461 and has an upper end which opens toward the front side.

The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a ball can pass, and forms a second passage of the drive-side slide member 420 when the drive-side slide member 420 is placed in the connected position (see FIG. 31). This is the member through which the ball flowing down passes through the member 422.

The detailed configuration of the driving side slide member 420 will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 25. Figure 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving side slide member 420, Figure 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the driving side slide member 420, and Figure 25 is a rear view of the driving side slide member 420.

As shown in Figures 23 to 25, the driving side slide member 420 mainly comprises a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member long in the left-right direction, a second passage forming member 422 in which a disk portion having a performance portion 422a configured from a circular liquid crystal is fastened and fixed from the front side to the center of the main body member 421 and a groove through which a ball can pass is provided extending from the disk portion to the left as viewed from the front, a wiring storage member 423 having one end journaled to the lower left end as viewed from the front of the second passage forming member 422 and the other end supported by a guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a connection member 424 journaled to the second passage forming member 422, having a passage portion penetrating along the circumferential direction of the shaft, and serving as a portion for introducing a ball into the groove portion 422b of the second passage forming member 422.

The main body member 421 has a guide portion 421a that forms part of a cylindrical portion through which a guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a portion that extends from the center to the left in front view and is open to the front side. It mainly includes a groove 421b that is arranged to be inclined downwardly to the left in this manner, and a discharge opening 421c that is larger than the diameter of the sphere and that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .

The guide section 421a is a groove with an arc-shaped cross section that opens on the rear side and extends vertically. The open section is closed by the rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450 to form a cylindrical section through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted.

The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a passage for the balls together with the second passage forming member 422, and the balls that flow down along the groove portion 421b are discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c.

The second passage forming member 422 includes a directing portion 422a made of a circular liquid crystal, a shaft support 422b protruding from a disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal toward the back side in a cylindrical shape, A sensor member 422c is disposed below the shaft support 422b to detect the passage of a ball, and a groove is opened to the back side with a width that allows the ball to flow down after passing through the sensor member 422c. A groove portion 422d having a matching shape, a guide portion 422e forming a cylindrical portion through which a guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connecting member 424 between the shaft support 422b and the sensor member 422c. It mainly includes a housing recess 422f recessed therein.

The pivot support 422b is the part on which the connection member 424 is pivotally supported. When the liquid crystal lift unit 400 is placed in the connection position, the ball that flows down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connection member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b.

The wire storage member 423 is a member that accommodates wires extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and connected to the production section 422a and the like, and is a long wire that is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a main body portion 423a that is a rod-shaped portion with a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b that protrudes from the lower end of the main body portion 423a toward the back side.

The main body portion 423a is a member that stores wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shape in cross section, and has a curved shape that is convex in the direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. Ru. Thereby, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the pivot position with the second passage forming member 422, and it is possible to suppress the wiring from being bent and disconnected.

The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

Next, the configuration of the connecting member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. 26(a) is a front perspective view of the connecting member 424, FIG. 26(b) is a front view of the connecting member 424 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26(a), and FIG. 26(c) is a front perspective view of the connecting member 424. , is a rear view of the connecting member 424 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIc in FIG. 26(a).

26(a) to 26(c), the connecting member 424 mainly comprises a cylindrical portion 424a that is formed in a cylindrical shape and supported by the support portion 422b, a plate-like upper wall portion 424b that extends radially from the cylindrical portion 424a, a curved plate-like lower wall portion 424c that is disposed opposite the upper wall portion 424b below the upper wall portion 424b in a front view with a distance of at least the diameter of a sphere, a connecting cover 424d that connects the rear end portions of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c and covers the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c, and a torsion spring 424e that is wound around the cylindrical portion 424a and applies a downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25(b)) biasing force to the connecting member 424.

The upper wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface thereof is formed along a straight line in FIG. 25(b). It is a plate-like part.

The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion that is curved along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and has a space between it and the upper wall portion 424b that is long enough for a ball to pass through. will be placed.

The connecting cover 424d is a plate member that prevents balls passing through the connecting member 424 from spilling out to the back side. The opening of the connecting member 424, which is formed on the opposite side (front side) of the connecting cover 424d, is blocked by the bottom of the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. This makes it possible to prevent balls from spilling out of the opening of the connecting member 424.

The operation of the connection member 424 relative to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to Figs. 27 and 28. Figs. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connection member 424. Fig. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces in the left-right direction, and Fig. 28 illustrates an upwardly inclined state in which the open portion formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces diagonally upward compared to the state in Fig. 27. Fig. 27 corresponds to the separated state (see Fig. 41) described later, and Fig. 28 corresponds to the connected state (see Fig. 42) described later.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connecting member 424 is rotatable about the shaft support 422b while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422. The front end surfaces of the upper wall 424b and the lower wall 424c are brought into contact with the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

The accommodation recess 422f is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the shaft support 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall 424c in a portion of the connecting member 424 that is disposed opposite to the lower wall 424c in the state shown in FIG. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in the direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). and a facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface.

When the connecting member 424 is in a downwardly inclined state, the curved wall portion 422f1 comes into radial face contact with the lower wall portion 424c, thereby preventing the connecting member 424 from shifting in the axial radial direction.

Therefore, even if the engagement between the pivot support 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a state in which the gap is large, for example, a state in which there is a gap of between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), when the connecting member 424 is in a downwardly inclined state, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high precision due to the abutment between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

On the other hand, when the engagement between the pivot support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the pivot support portion is reduced, and therefore, unless a load is applied from other members, the connecting member 424 can be reliably maintained in a downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 424 from being maintained in an upwardly inclined state even when no load is applied from other members.

The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In this embodiment, the surface that faces the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved, so that the ball can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.

The upward inclination state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 are in communication. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, so that the ball that rolls through the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, passes through the opening of the sensor member 422c, and flows down the groove portion 422d.

On the other hand, the downwardly inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f (sensor member 422c By setting the dimension between the connecting member 424 and the wall surface (extending vertically upward) to be less than or equal to the diameter of the ball, the ball is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the ball is not ejected from the lower end).

Therefore, as will be described later, even if the balls reach the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the balls can be stopped at the connecting member 424.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the elevating and lowering operations of the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, driven side slide member 430, and base member 410 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

Figure 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and Figure 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in Figure 29. In Figures 29 and 30, the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are shown in the lowered position, and the pair of left and right cover members of the cover member 470 are omitted from the illustration, so that the transmission member 450 can be seen. In Figure 29, the descent restricting member 415 and the ascent restricting member 417 on the right side as viewed from the front are partially enlarged, and the outline of the rack 452 just before the abutment wall 453 and the release protrusion 417c of the ascent restricting member 417 abut against each other is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, when the driven side slide member 430 is in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 abuts against the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 abuts against the rise restriction member 417 from above. In this way, the driven side slide member 430 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions, so that the driven side slide member 430 can be prevented from rattling in the up and down directions when in the lowered position.

Further, the rise regulating member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed with the guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 interposed therebetween, and these can come into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430, so that the function It is possible to suppress the portion 432 from shaking in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs to the driven slide member 430, such as at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by a player, the driven slide member 430 will not rattle. can be suppressed, and the presentation effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Further, since the vertical positions of the rise regulating member 417 and the locking portion 413 are shifted from each other, the functional portion 432 may wobble in an oblique direction (for example, in the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the rise regulating member 417). can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs to the driven side slide member 430, such as at the moment it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by a player, the driven side slide member 430 will not shake. can be suppressed, and the presentation effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

In addition, since the locking part 413 is displaced upward compared to the rise regulating member 417, the locking part 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the locking part 413 is positioned far from the drive side slide member 420. This makes it difficult to inhibit the movement of the member 420 up and down. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 30, the descent restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the ascent restricting member 417, and the forming height of the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the length of overhang from near the base of the teeth of the rack 452) is set to a height just before reaching the descent restricting member 415, so the descent restricting member 415 and the abutment wall 453 do not abut in the direction of rotation of the descent restricting member 415. Also, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at a position equivalent to the ascent restricting member 417 in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descent restricting member 415 do not abut in the up-down direction.

On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end of the contact wall 453 toward the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can come into contact with the descent regulating member 415 in the rotational direction.

Figure 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Note that Figure 31 illustrates the state in which the driving side slide member 420 has been moved upward from the downward position and is disposed in the connected position, and the pair of left and right cover members of the cover member 470 are omitted from the illustration. Also, Figure 31 illustrates a partial enlarged view of the descent restriction member 415 and the ascent restriction member 417 on the right side as viewed from the front.

When the drive side slide member 420 is positioned in the connected position, a ball can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see Figure 42).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the rise regulating member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end of the contact wall 453 comes into contact with the rise regulating member 417, It is possible to rotate between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. 31. Note that the released state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31, but refers to a state in which the rise regulating member 417 is rotated from vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a position in which the rise regulating member 417 is retracted.

The rise restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a supported by the second support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending in a straight line in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, a release protrusion 417c protruding vertically from one end (lower end) of the extension plate 417b, and an engagement protrusion 417d protruding vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, which extends parallel to the extension direction of the hook portion 434 in an engaged state at the protruding end of the engagement protrusion 417d. It mainly comprises an engaging claw portion 417e disposed above and inward from the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (upper left in the enlarged view of FIG. 29), a separating inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end of the engaging protrusion 417d, and a torsion spring 417g that is wound around the cylindrical portion 417a and has one end that is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410, thereby biasing the rise restricting member 417 in an inward winding direction (counterclockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 29).

The extension plate 417b extends upward beyond the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. This allows the other end of the extension plate 417b to move away from the driven side slide member 430 when the release protrusion 417c is pushed up, thereby performing the release operation.

When in the engaged state, even if the driven slide member 430 begins to move upward, the engaging claw portion 417e meshes with the hook portion 434 (the engaging claw portion 417e fits between the hook portion 434 and the functional portion 432), thereby firmly restricting the movement of the driven slide member 430.

The release operation of the rise regulating member 417 will be explained. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release protrusion 417c, while the rise regulating member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. When the rack 452 is raised from this state to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutment wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, causing the rise regulating member 417 to move in the outward winding direction (in the clockwise direction in the enlarged view in FIG. 31). ), and the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

In other words, the release operation of the rise restricting member 417 can be performed only by the rising operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, compared to a case where a separate solenoid member is provided to release the rise restricting member 417, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be used as the drive device that releases the rise restricting member 417, and the number of drive devices can be reduced (product costs can be reduced). Inadvertent operation of the rise restricting member 417 can also be prevented.

In other words, according to the present embodiment, the rise regulating member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, so compared to the case where the rise regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), It is possible to prevent malfunctions due to mismatched operation timings between the rack 452 and the rise regulating member 417, and when the driven side slide member 430 moves upward, the rise regulating member 417 is reliably shifted to the released state. can be done. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being moved upward while the rise regulating member 417 is in the engaged state, thereby preventing an excessive load from being applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the rise regulating member 417.

Further, the rack 452 is moved upward, and the rise regulating member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 come into contact, so that the rack 452 continues the upward movement. When the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, they form an engaged state (see FIG. 29) and prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a released state (see FIG. 31) is established, and the driving force required to move the driven-side slide member 430 upward can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of a configuration in which the driving side sliding member 420 pushes up the driven side sliding member 430 during the upward movement of the driving side sliding member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven side sliding member 430 and the engagement portion are released from each other. It is also possible to perform this by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, the engagement state needs to be such that it can be released by the pushing up force of the driven slide member 430, making it difficult to achieve a strong engagement. becomes. Further, in this case, there is a problem in that the driven side sliding member 430 vibrates due to the reaction generated when the driven side sliding member 430 and the engagement portion are released, making the posture unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the rise regulating member 417 and retracting the rise regulating member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven slide member 430 and the force that rotates the rise regulating member 417 can be made different. Therefore, while suppressing the force required for release, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven slide member 430 in the engaged state.

In addition, since the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact when the rise restricting member 417 is released, reaction is less likely to occur in the driven side slide member 430, and the posture of the driven side slide member 430 during release can be stabilized.

In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are connected. This makes it possible to discharge the balls that have flowed down the second passage forming member 422 into the cylindrical passage portion 463.

Figures 32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Note that Figure 32 shows a state in which the driving side slide member 420 has risen from the state shown in Figure 31, and the protruding plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is about to abut against the descent restricting member 415, while Figure 33 shows a state in which the driving side slide member 420 has risen from the state shown in Figure 32, and the protruding plate 453a has been placed in an elevated position on top of the descent restricting member 415. Also, Figure 33 shows a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the descent restricting member 415.

In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the rise regulating member 417 comes into contact with the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In this embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically, and the directions in which the release protrusions 417c abut against the contact wall 453 are also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive-side slide member 420 from shaking in the left-right direction during the vertical movement.

The rise regulating member 417 is biased by the torsion spring 417g in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, so that the load in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is applied from the release convex portion 417c to the contact wall 453. Can be applied. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is biased in a fixed direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive-side slide member 420 during the vertical movement can be stabilized.

Furthermore, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release convex portion 417c to the contact wall 453 returns the drive-side slide member 420 to the center position. The rise regulating member 417 is left and right asymmetrical.

That is, on the side where the abutment wall 453 moves in a direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rise regulating member 417 is further rotated toward the release side, thereby increasing the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g and increasing the biasing force. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release protrusion 417c, the rise regulating member 417 is rotated in the opposite direction to the release side, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation of the contact wall 453 is reduced, the biasing force is reduced, and the force pushing the abutment wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

Since the drive gear 442 and the rise regulating member 417 are disposed on the same side of the rack 452, the biasing force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to move the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 from moving closer to each other due to rattling in the left-right direction, thereby preventing an increase in drive resistance (the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction approaching the drive gear 442, the rise restriction member 417 rotates outward (the rotation direction in which the engagement protrusion 417d moves in the left-right outward direction of the liquid crystal lift unit 400), increasing the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g, and the biasing force that pushes back the drive side slide member 420 is increased. On the other hand, when the rack 452 moves in a direction away from the drive gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, thereby restricting the rack 452 from moving away from the drive gear 442 beyond the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. As a result, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes narrow, preventing excessive meshing resistance, and the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes wide, preventing tooth misalignment.

As shown in FIG. 33, when the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are arranged in the raised position, the lower surface of the protrusion plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is aligned with the release protrusion 415c of the descent restriction member 415. Contact with the upper surface (locked state).

The protruding plate 453a has an inclined side 453a1 on the lower surface that slopes upward toward the left and right outside.

The descending inclination member 415 mainly comprises a cylindrical portion 415a supported by the first support portion 414, an extension plate 415b extending in a straight line in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, a release protrusion 415c protruding vertically from one end (upper end) of the extension plate 415b and having a semicircular tip, and a torsion spring 415d wound around the cylindrical portion 415a and having one end engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410, thereby biasing the descending restriction member 415 in an inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of Figure 33).

As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, the supply of driving force from the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

The rotation of the descent restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by raising the rack 452 and causing the protruding plate 453a to climb over the release protrusion 415c of the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the descent restricting member 415 can be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). In other words, the drive motor 441 can be used for both purposes, which reduces product costs accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulating member 415, the ascending regulating member 417, and the abutment wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the descent regulating member 415 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 30. At the same time, the rear side surface of the descent regulating member 415 is configured to come into contact with the front side surface of the abutment wall 453.

Returning to FIG. 33, the descent restricting member 415 and the abutment wall 453 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutment wall 453 and the rise restricting member 417 abut in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33), and the abutment wall 453 and the descent restricting member 415 abut in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 33). As a result, the rise restricting member 417 can suppress left-right rattling of the driving side slide member 420, and the descent restricting member 415 can suppress rattling in the front-rear direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area of the toothing surface due to relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to prevent the rack 452 from falling forward in the raised position. can be prevented.

When the rack 452 starts to descend by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction to lower the rack 452 from the state shown in FIG. 33, the protruding plate 453a applies a load to the release protrusion 415c, causing the descent restricting member 415 to rotate outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). This releases the engagement by the descent restricting member 415, allowing the drive side slide member 420 to move downward. In other words, the engagement by the descent restricting member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (the drive source can be shared), thereby reducing product costs.

In addition, since the lowering movement of the drive-side slide member 420 releases the locking of the lowering restricting member 415, the lowering restricting member 415 is unlatched due to a shift in the operation timing, as in the case where the lowering restricting member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive side slide member 420 from being lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, and thereby overloading the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415.

In addition, in a structure in which both the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained in the raised position as in this embodiment, it is possible to lock each member in the raised position by locking the driven side slide member 430. In that case, however, the structure for connecting and disconnecting the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 becomes complicated, resulting in increased costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is maintained in the raised position by engaging the driving side slide member 420, so the configuration required to maintain the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 in the raised position can be reduced (only the drive unit 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be required). In addition, the linkage between the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 is solely due to the action of gravity, so the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 can be simplified.

When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 descends on the rack 452. However, if the resistance between the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22) is large, for example because the guide rod 451 is dirty, the descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be slower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven slide member 430 abuts against the rise restricting member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separating inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, causing the rise restricting member 417 to rotate, so that the weight of the driven slide member 430 can engage the rise restricting member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434.

Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 42. Figure 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in Figure 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning port 82 of the game board 13, and has an internal flow path through which a ball that has won in the first specific winning port 82 passes. In this embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects the passage of a ball is disposed between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning port 82. The sensor member 82b is part of the various switches 208 (see Figure 4).

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swinging unit 500 is configured with a first passage forming member 520 hanging down to the lower right in front view, and is a unit that performs effects by swinging this first passage forming member 520. be.

36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510 and swings, and a base A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates the driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and a transmission device 540 that is covered on the front side. It mainly includes a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical part 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specific winning hole 82 of the game board 13.

The base member 510 mainly comprises a main body member 511 made of a plate-like body having an L-shape when viewed from the front, a shaft support hole 512 drilled in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body member when viewed from the front, a first wall portion 513 arranged vertically above the shaft support hole 512 and configured as a flat plate with a surface facing the front-rear direction, a second wall portion 514 arranged from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 to the left when viewed from the front with a gap of at least one sphere and configured as a curved plate with a surface facing the left-right direction, a flow-down passage 515 arranged on the back side of the second wall portion 514 through which the balls that reach the second wall portion 514 flow down, a shaft support portion 516 arranged on the lower left side of the shaft support hole 512 when viewed from the front and projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a locking wall portion 517 arranged around the axis of the shaft support portion 516, and a detection sensor 518 arranged above the shaft support portion 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device.

The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left and right direction toward the front side.

The locking wall portion 517 includes an arcuate wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 516 above the shaft portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending to the lower right in front view. .

The arcuate wall portion 517a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to the circumferential end surface of the shaft support 516.

The first passage forming member 520 mainly comprises a long rod-shaped sorting base member 521 which is supported by the shaft support hole 512, and a passage cover member 522 which is disposed on the front side of the sorting base member 521, fastened and fixed to the sorting base member 521, and forms a passage between the sorting base member 521 and the passage cover member 522, through which the balls can flow down.

The distribution base member 521 is composed of a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that forms one side of the ball flow passage, an intermediate plate portion 521b that is disposed at a position spaced apart from the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a by a gap V1 equivalent to one ball along the extension direction of the hanging plate portion 521a, a support portion 521c that is cylindrically protruding from the rear side near the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a and that is inserted into the support hole 512, and a plate-shaped portion that extends radially from the support portion 521c. It mainly comprises a long hole 521d drilled in the direction of extension, a distribution protrusion 521e that protrudes from the end of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a toward the rear side and is configured in such a way that its width decreases toward the radially outer side of the support portion 521c, and a curved wall portion 521f that extends along the left side surface of the distribution protrusion 521e when viewed from the rear side toward the front side of the gap V1 and curves along an arc shape centered on the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a.

The hanging plate part 521a has a shape in which the lower side from the middle part is bent downward compared to the upper side from the middle part, and the lower end part has a ball sending part where the plate thickness on the front side is shaved to make the plate thinner. 521a1.

The gap V1 is a space through which the ball that has reached the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in the front view passes in the front direction.

The passage cover member 522 includes a plate-shaped part 522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and a plate-shaped part 522a that extends from both ends of the plate part 522a in the short direction toward the back side. It mainly includes upper and lower wall portions 522b.

The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed from a light-transmitting resin material and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent toward the rear side at the portion of its lower end that is located in front of the ball sending portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521.

The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions for rolling the ball that has passed through the gap V1, and like the hanging plate portion 521a, the inclination angle changes with the intermediate portion as a boundary, so the falling velocity of the ball cannot be changed at the intermediate portion. can.

The lower wall of the upper and lower wall sections 522b has a step on the inside of the tip. The step displaces the rolling ball in the opposing direction of the upper and lower wall sections 522b (the direction from one wall section to the other), slowing the ball down.

In addition, the ball that reaches the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed toward the rear side by the ball sending section 521a1 and the ball receiving section 522a1. This allows the speed of the ball to be slowed down before it is discharged, stabilizing the discharge of the ball.

The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is supported and rotated on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is meshed with a main gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

The transmission device 540 mainly comprises a main gear portion 541 supported by the support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, an eccentric protrusion 542 that protrudes cylindrically from an eccentric position of the main gear portion 541 toward the front side and is inserted into the long hole 521d of the first passage forming member 520, and an extension portion 543 that extends radially from the main gear portion 541 and is configured to be able to abut against the locking wall portion 517 and to be able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518.

The cover member 550 includes a plate-shaped main body member 551 covered by the base member 510, and a right end of the main body member 551 in a front view connected to the first specific prize opening 82, and a rear end thereof connected to the first specific prize opening 82. A cylindrical introduction cylinder part 552 that comes into contact with the wall part 513 and a pair of guide walls 553 that extend downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylinder part 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare for the Lord.

The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The ball that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 and flows downward.

The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to Figures 38 to 40. Figures 38 to 40 are front views of the swinging motion unit 500. Note that in Figures 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is omitted from illustration, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 is shown in cross section at the midpoint in the fore-aft direction of the hanging plate portion 521a, and the outer shape of the passage cover member is shown by imaginary lines.

Further, FIG. 38 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position, and FIG. In FIG. 39(b), the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39(b) and is placed in the connection position. Ru.

As shown in Figures 38 to 40, the swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521d moves with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the released position, the direction X1 connecting the pivot support 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extension direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the pivot support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the first passage forming member 520 starting to rotate is directed toward the pivot support 516, so that the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. This allows the attitude of the transmission device 540 to be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the release position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap between the detection sensor 518 and comes into contact with the end of the arcuate wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both the role of a portion used to detect the phase of the transmission device 540 and the role of a rotation prevention member.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed by the distribution convex portion 521e to a path on the left side in front view, and is discharged to the outside of the gaming area through the downstream passage 515. be done.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), at an intermediate position between the release position and the connected position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide walls 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (it remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

As shown in FIG. 39(b), just before the first passage forming member 520 abuts against the connecting member 424, the distribution protrusion 521e is positioned between a pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, when the ball reaches the first wall 513 and passes between the guide walls 513a and 553, it is stopped from flowing down by the distribution protrusion 521e (it remains on the tip of the distribution protrusion 521e). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39(b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520 and is sent to the connecting member 424, preventing the ball from reaching the opposing wall 422f2.

Here, since the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downwardly inclined state (see FIG. 41). The upper wall portion 424b is configured to project from the lower end portion to the left in front view. Therefore, if a ball is thrown to the connecting member 424 in a downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end of the opposing wall 422f2, there is a risk that the opposing wall 422f2 will be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39(b), the introduction of balls into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2, and therefore the opposing wall portion 422f2 can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and a direction X2 that coincides with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. do. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 begins to rotate, the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 is directed to the shaft support 516, so that the load that causes the transmission device 540 to rotate can be suppressed. Thereby, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuing to apply a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

In addition, at the connection position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 comes into face contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. This makes it possible to stabilize the phase at which the transmission device 540 stops by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b, while improving the durability of the extension portion 543 compared to when a load is applied locally to the extension portion 543.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the right path in front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Then, it rolls along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

The flow of spheres in a connected state will be explained. First, the ball that enters the first specific winning hole 82 from the gaming area through the first variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylinder part 552 (see FIG. 36), and the ball enters the first wall part 82a. 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide walls 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower walls of the passage cover member 522 It rolls on the lower wall of 522b.

That is, before the ball flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the first specific prize opening 82 in a string, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the balls and allow the balls to smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. Furthermore, by causing the balls sent in the front-rear direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the speed of the balls can be changed, and the balls can smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. can be done.

In the first passage forming member 520, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend in a direction that changes with the intermediate portion as a boundary. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (the shaft support 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (the opposite side of the proximal end side). up to the straight line Y2, which is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

As a result, the speed of the ball rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end to the middle section than from the middle section to the tip section. This makes it easier for the player to see the ball immediately after it is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

In addition, compared to when the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the angle between the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 and the direction in which the ball is introduced to the sensor member 422c (vertical direction) can be made smaller at the connection position (see FIG. 42). This makes it possible to stabilize the sending of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

As shown in Figures 38 to 40, the first passage forming member 520 is oscillated by the rotation of the transmission device 540, and the path along which the balls flow is switched depending on the arrangement of the distribution protrusions 521e.

Here, when a wall member is arranged to face the distribution convex part 521e in the rotational direction of the distribution convex part 521e, the distribution convex part 521e can be brought close to the wall member to be less than or equal to the diameter of the sphere. If this configuration is adopted, when the ball stays in the rotational direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, there is a risk that the ball will be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, causing malfunction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the connection position shown in FIG. No wall member is disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across 521e, and the wall member is left open. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotating direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

The connection of the flow paths between the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 41 and 42. Figures 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500. Note that in Figures 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is shown in cross section, making the connecting member 424 visible, and the first passage forming member 520 is shown in its external shape at the midpoint in the fore-aft direction of the hanging plate portion 521a, making the distribution protrusion 521e visible.

In addition, Figures 41 and 42 show the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 in the connected position (see Figure 31), Figure 41 shows the left oscillating unit 500 in the released position (see Figure 38), and Figure 42 shows the left oscillating unit 500 in the connected position (see Figure 40).

When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, its tip abuts against the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, causing the connecting member 424 to swung. That is, since the connecting member 424 moves in the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stopping position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly shifted from the ideal position, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. This prevents the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and stabilizes the sending of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower wall portion 424c along which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520, thereby narrowing the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and preventing the ball from falling through the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, thereby stabilizing the throw of the ball.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower wall portion 424c is tilted downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along the downward slope, and the throwing of the ball to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

The swinging action of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of balls through the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, when the first passage forming member 520 is placed in the connecting position shown in FIG. 42, the first passage forming member 520 can be caused to start swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing when the number of balls detected by the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (no balls remain in the first passage forming member 520), thereby preventing balls from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 outside the play area.

As shown in Figures 41 and 42, the driving force required for distributing the balls by moving the distribution protrusion 521e and for forming a ball flow path by swinging the first passage forming member 520 to bring the first passage forming member 520 into contact with the connecting member 424 is shared (the driving force is provided by the driving motor 531 (see Figure 36) that operates the first passage forming member 520). Furthermore, since the states of both are synchronized, it is possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which a ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 when the first passage forming member 520 is placed in the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent balls from being discharged outside the play area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

The distribution protrusion 521e is disposed at the upper end of the distribution base member 521, and also serves as a wall that defines (forms the upper end of) the passage for the balls flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). This allows for reduced component costs compared to when distribution is performed using other parts, and also ensures that the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side can be introduced reliably into the passage between the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member 522.

Next, the rotation unit 600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 600.

As shown in Figures 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 mainly comprises a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covering one side of the case member 610, a drive mechanism 630 arranged between the case member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotation member 640 that is driven to rotate by the driving force of the drive mechanism 630, a pitching device 650 arranged on the inner side of the rotation member 640, and a guide member 680 arranged on the outer side of the rotation member 640.

The case member 610 has a bottom wall portion 611 that is substantially circular when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 that stands upright from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and is formed into a container shape with one side open by these walls 611, 612. The guide member 620 is formed into a circular disk shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed (fixed) at the erected tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. As a result, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in this internal space.

The guide member 620 is a member for movably holding the rotating member 640, and a connecting link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in the front surface of the guide member 620. These connecting link working grooves 621 and undulating link working grooves 622 are concave grooves extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 and have a U-shaped cross section. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.

The groove width of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion parts 644a, 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion parts 644a, 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (be guided) along the extension direction of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622.

When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link working groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link working groove 622 It acts on the undulation link member 648 to undulate the display board 646 and the partition board 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.

Figure 49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the rotation member 640, part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 removed, and Figure 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In Figure 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are illustrated using two-dot chain lines. The two-dot chain lines are illustrated as lines passing through the center of the groove width of each action groove 621, 622.

As shown in Figures 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 is composed of a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc with a radius R1 around the axis O, a small diameter portion 621b that curves in an arc with a radius R2 around the axis O, and a pair of connecting portions 621c that connect the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to a dimension larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2<R1).

The undulating link action groove 622 has a large diameter portion 622a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R3 around the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b that curves in an arc shape with a radius R4 around the axis O, and these large diameter portions. 622a and a pair of connecting portions 622c connecting between the small diameter portion 622b. Note that the radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4<R3).

In this embodiment, the large diameter part 621a and the small diameter part 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large diameter part 622a and the small diameter part 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation of the rotating member 640. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a, 622a and the small diameter portions 622a, 622b of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required by the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Also, a pair of connection parts 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 are arranged at positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees. Similarly, a pair of connection parts 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the force acting from one connection part 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 to the connecting link member 644 and the force acting from the other connection part 621c to the connecting link member 644 can be offset. Similarly, the force acting from one connection part 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 to the undulating link member 648 and the force acting from the other connection part 622c to the undulating link member 648 can be offset. As a result, the force acting on the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion of the undulation link action groove 622. In a state where the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into either one of the portions 622b and the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621a or the small diameter portion 621b of the working groove 621.

Since the connecting parts 621c and 622c are parts for changing the interval between the dividing members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion part receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting parts 621c and 622c. By preventing the connecting portions 644a and 648a from being inserted through the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (first gear) attached to the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train meshed with the transmission gear 633a) and a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train; One side distribution gear train and the other side distribution gear train are meshed with the first gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) on the gear 634a, and the last gear (first distribution gear train) of the one side distribution gear train and the other side gear train It mainly includes a rotational drive member 637 on one side and a rotational drive member 638 on the other side, which have gears 637a and 638a meshed with three distribution gears 635c and 636c). Note that second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

The one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 are members that serve as the end of a transmission path (output end in the drive mechanism 630) that transmits the rotational drive force generated from the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force causes the rotation member to rotate itself, and the rotation causes the rotation member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 will be explained with reference to FIG. 51.

Figure 51(a) is a front view of one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation member 638, and Figure 51(b) is a cross-sectional view of one side rotation member 637 and the other side rotation member 638 taken along line LIb-LIb in Figure 51(a).

Note that since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed to have the same shape, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will only be indicated by the reference numeral in FIG. 51 and its description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and engagement portions 637b are recessed at multiple locations (three locations in this embodiment) that are equally spaced around the circumference of the outer edge.

The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the width (distance between opposing surfaces) increases from the open side toward the inner side of the recess. ) is formed into a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the axial direction). As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is rotated. It can be rotated.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (in the axial direction) centering on the axis of the one-side rotational drive member 637, and is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial direction). Only the inner surfaces on the outer edge side of the engaging portion 637b are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces on the inner side of the recessed portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected to each other.

Here, when the rotating member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are repeatedly engaged and disengaged intermittently (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 begins to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, which may damage the one-side rotation drive member 637. On the other hand, if the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

In this case, according to this embodiment, the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, so that it is possible to effectively achieve both reinforcement against the impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to engage and weight reduction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 while improving the durability of the one-side driving member 637.

The explanation will be given by returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is arranged in the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, a structure for holding the central transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 taken along a plane that includes the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmission body 634 is circular in front view and shaped like a hat with a concave central part, and a gear 634a is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the central concave part, and A projecting portion 634b is formed to project outward in the radial direction in the shape of a flange.

A pair of retaining collars 623, 624 (see Figures 47 and 48) are arranged on the back side of the guide member 620 in three equally spaced circumferential positions (i.e., positions spaced 120 degrees apart), one above the other, and the protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of opposing retaining collars 623, 624. This allows the central transmission member 634 to be rotatably held on the guide member 620 via the pair of retaining collars 623, 624.

In other words, the radial displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 52) of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 can be regulated by abutting the outer peripheral surfaces of a pair of retaining collars 623, 624 against the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634, and the axial displacement (horizontal direction in FIG. 52) of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 can be regulated by abutting the protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 against the opposing surfaces of the pair of retaining collars 623, 624.

In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 have a circular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of retaining collars 623, 624 and the outer circumferential surface of the central transmission member 634 can be set in a relationship such that their arc shapes circumscribe each other (that is, point contact), so that the contact area between them can be reduced. As a result, frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by adopting a structure that holds the outer edge side (projection portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 in this way, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 can be axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since there is no need to support the pitcher and there is no need for space for arranging components for the pivot support, the space for arranging a pitching device 650, which will be described later, can be secured accordingly.

Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to Figure 53. Figure 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and illustrates the state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 53, the drive mechanism 630 includes a central transmission member 634 disposed at a position concentric with the axis O, which is the center of rotation of the rotating member 640, and a second transmission to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. Note that the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions facing each other across the axis O).

When the drive motor 631 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b rotates the central transmission member 634.

When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated together with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is caused to rotate the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear. It is transmitted to the gears 637a, 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 through the gears 635c, 636c, and the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 are rotated. be done.

In this way, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other rotational drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In this case, the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, so that the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637, 638 can be disposed inward (toward the axis O) of the outer edge of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the axis O. In other words, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637, 638 do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the rotating member 640, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

Note that when the guide member 620 is disposed in the case member 610, the engaging portions 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the other-side rotary drive member 638 are located radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotational member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portions 637b, 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

In this case, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions facing each other across the axis O). Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized by maximally separating the positions where driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (the engaging positions).

The one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged in positions (rotation positions) in which the phases of their engagement parts 637b and 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engagement parts 637b and 638b is disengaged from the engaged part 641, the other of the engagement parts 637b and 638b is engaged with the engaged part 641 (avoiding disengagement of one and the other at the same time). Therefore, as described below, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the rotating member 640 from becoming intermittent, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The explanation will be given by returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the rotating member 640 is a member having an annular shape when viewed from the front and is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630. is placed on the front side. Note that in the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

Figure 54(a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and Figure 54(b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in Figure 54(a). Also, Figure 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in Figure 54(b).

As shown in Figures 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 has multiple divided members DV (30 in this embodiment), and the multiple divided members DV are endlessly connected to each other along the circumferential direction, forming a circular ring shape when viewed from the front.

In this case, the multiple divided members DV are formed so that the spacing between adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 is formed with a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are circumferentially connected at a first spacing, and a second section S2 in which the divided members DV are circumferentially connected at a second spacing that is narrower than the first spacing. Between the first section S1 and the second section S2, a section is formed in which the spacing between the divided members DV transitions from the first spacing in the first section S1 to the second spacing in the second section S2 (or vice versa).

FIG. 56(a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 56(b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. In addition, in FIGS. 56 to 58, in order to understand the connection structure between the divided members DV, the connecting link members 644 of adjacent divided members DV are schematically illustrated using chain double-dashed lines.

Here, in this embodiment, the detected portions 641c are formed in some (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while in the remaining divided members DV, Formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted have the same structure except for the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 56 to 58, the dividing member DV is mainly composed of an engaged portion 641, a rear body 642 with the engaged portion 641 disposed on the rear side, a front body 643 disposed on the front side of the rear body 642, a connecting link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear body 642 and the front body 643, a plate holding member 645 disposed on the front side of the front body 643, a display plate 646 and a partition plate 647 displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and a hoisting link member 648 disposed between the front body 643 and the plate holding member 645 so as to be slidably displaceable.

As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that engages with the engaging portions 637b, 638b of the rotational drive members 637, 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a generally isosceles triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed in a position that protrudes from the rear surface of the rear body 642 on one longitudinal side (the lower side in FIG. 56(b)).

A facing portion 641a is formed on the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear body 642, facing the rear surface of the rear body 642 at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surface of the facing portion 641a and the rear body 642. This makes it possible to prevent the divided member DV (one longitudinal side of the rear body 642) from floating up from the front surface of the guide member 620.

Furthermore, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a cylindrical shape are rotatably supported on the side of the attachment surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear main body 642. The sliding roller 641b has its rotation axis perpendicular to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (i.e., the plane of movement of the divided member DV), and its outer circumferential surface can come into contact with the outer circumferential surface of the outer edge of the guide member 620. It is arranged in a posture. Thereby, sliding resistance when the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed to protrude from the surface of the engaged portion 641 opposite to the attachment surface to the rear main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion that is detected by a detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and is positioned horizontally on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (i.e., the moving plane of the divided member DV). Ru.

The back side main body 642 is a part whose back surface is placed on the front side of the guide member 620 and slides on the front side of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed into a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. When the rotating member 640 is disposed on the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed with its longitudinal direction along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body part 642 is arranged in a radial straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

The rear body 642 includes a connecting link opening 642a and a hoisting link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, a pivot support portion 642c formed on the front of one longitudinal side (lower side in FIG. 57) that pivotally supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the front body 643 (pivot support portion 643b), and a bent portion 642d protruding from the rear of the other longitudinal side (upper side in FIG. 58).

The connecting link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is slidably inserted, and by inserting the insertion portion 644a into this connecting link opening 642a, the divided member DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. In addition, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connecting link opening 642a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

Note that the opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the connecting link opening 642a.

When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is acted upon by the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620, and the insertion portion 644a slides along the connecting link opening 642a, allowing the attitude of the connecting link member 644 to change in response to the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the attitude of the connecting link member 644 relative to the rear side main body 642 is changed, and the distance between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

The opening 642b for the hoisting link is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the hoisting link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted into the opening 642b for the hoisting link is inserted into the hoisting link action groove 622 of the guide member 620.

The opening width of the hoist link opening 642b is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the hoist link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the hoist link 648 can slide (be guided) along the extension direction of the hoist link opening 642b.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a of the hoisting link member 648 is acted upon by the hoisting link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, and the insertion portion 648a slides along the hoisting link opening 642b, thereby raising and lowering the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647.

As described above, the pivot support 642c is formed on one longitudinal side (lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the engaged portion 641 when viewed from the front. Can be pivoted at overlapping positions. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is It is possible to easily transmit the information to the divided member DV via the connecting link member 644.

The bent portion 642d projects from the back surface of the other longitudinal side of the back main body 642 (upper side in FIG. 58), and its protruding tip faces the back surface of the back main body 642 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The inner edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the facing surface of the back side main body 642. Thereby, lifting of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front side of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

Further, the bent portion 642d is arranged in such a manner that its base can come into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the facing distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the above-mentioned sliding roller 641b is as follows. The width is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the divided member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in a posture with its longitudinal direction along the radial direction of the guide member 620. This allows the guide member 620 to be displaced in the circumferential direction.

The front side body 643 is a member formed in the shape of a rectangular plate when viewed from the front and is approximately the same size as the back side body 642, and is equipped with an undulating link slide groove 643a, which is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, a pivot support part 643b formed on the back surface on one longitudinal side (lower side in Figure 58) and pivotally supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the back side body 642 (pivot support part 642c), and a support plate 643c protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the partition plate 647.

The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends parallel to the undulating link opening 642b. That is, by sliding the undulation link member 648 along the undulation link slide groove 643a, the insertion portion 648a thereof is slid along the undulation link opening 642b.

When viewed from the front, the rear main body 642 and the front main body 643 have a width smaller on the other longitudinal side than on one longitudinal side. That is, the rotary member 640 is formed into a wedge shape in front view, with the width of the portion located on the inner peripheral side being smaller than the width of the portion located on the outer peripheral side. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are brought into contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

The connecting link member 644 is an elongated member, whose base end side is rotatably supported by shaft supports 642c, 643b of the back side main body 642 and front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion at the distal end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, connects the connecting link of the guide member 620 through the connecting link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. It is inserted into the working groove 621.

The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the width of the connecting link opening 642a and the connecting link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the positional deviation of the divided members DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. This makes it possible to suppress variations in the position of the detected portion 641c, thereby improving the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71).

The base end side (i.e., the support parts 642c, 643b of each main body 642, 643) that are rotatably supported on the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connecting link member 644 is disposed at a position closer to the engaged part 641 than the connecting link opening 642a. In this embodiment, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is disposed at a position that overlaps with the engaged part 641 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotational drive members 637, 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and by the rotation of the one-side and other-side rotational drive members 637, 638. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The hoisting link member 648 is a member that is held in a slidable manner in the hoisting link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion 648a formed on the rear side and an action groove 648b formed on the front side. The insertion portion 648a protrudes in a position parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the hoisting link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the hoisting link opening 642b of the rear side main body 642.

The action groove 648b is a portion that acts on the acted portion 646d of the display plate 646 when the hoisting link member 648 is slid and displaced, thereby raising or lowering the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. It is formed as a groove that extends linearly along the sliding direction of the hoisting link member 648, and the acted portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove-shaped portion.

The display board 646 includes a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an opposing working groove 648b of the undulating link member 648. It includes a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d that is inserted between the surfaces. Since the actuated portion 646d is bent into a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the actuated portion 646d is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the sliding displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b.

The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. A shaft support 647c is formed and rotatably supports a connecting shaft 646c of the display board 646.

Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is a performance device configured in a manner similar to a roulette wheel that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction and causes a pitched ball to fall into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and partition plate 647 of one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is defined as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has a red Alternatively, each is colored black and a different number (1 to 29) is displayed.

In this embodiment, the first display board 646 is colored green and displays a predetermined mark (star shape). Furthermore, of the rotating member 640, only the display board 646 located in the first section S1 is visible to the player. In other words, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed in front of it and is not visible to the player.

The board holding member 645 includes a shaft support 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display board 646, and a shaft support 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front main body 643 by the pivots 645a and 645b.

In this case, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the pivot support 647c, so that when the display plate 646 rotates around the pivot 646b as the hoisting link member 648 slides, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the pivot support 647c, and the partition plate 647 rotates around the pivot 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to Figures 59 and 60.

Figures 59(a) and 59(b) are top and bottom perspective views of the divided member DV when placed in the first section S1, and Figures 60(a) and 60(b) are top and bottom perspective views of the divided member DV when placed in the second section S2. Note that in Figures 59 and 60, in order to facilitate understanding, some of the configuration is shown in a see-through state, and the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the dividing member DV is placed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the hoisting link member 648 is inserted into the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) in the hoisting link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. Therefore, the hoisting link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other longitudinal side of the rear body 642 and the front body 643 (i.e., the inner periphery side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axis O side), whereby the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is placed in a horizontal position, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is placed in an upright position.

The horizontal position is a position in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the rear surface of the rear side main body 642 (i.e., the plane of movement of the dividing member DV), and the upright position is a position in which the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is perpendicular to and parallel to the rear surface of the rear side main body 642 (i.e., the plane of movement of the dividing member DV).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the divided member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the large diameter portion 622a of the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). is inserted into the Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted from the horizontal position toward the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 and placed in an inclined position, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is lifted from the upright position. The display board 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a side and arranged in an inclined posture.

In this way, in this embodiment, the display board 646 and the partition board 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c, so by rotating the display board 646 as the undulating link member 648 slides, The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

This eliminates the need to provide separate undulating link action grooves and undulating link members for the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and allows the undulating link action grooves and undulating link members to be common to both mechanisms. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and product costs can be reduced.

Here, in this embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is made heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (i.e., the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. 59 (i.e., the display When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in a horizontal position and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in an upright position, the rotation effect of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) due to its own weight is utilized. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and quickly formed.

That is, because the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can rotate under its own weight in a direction that tilts it downward to form a horizontal position, and the rotation (weight) of the display plate 646 is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the pivot support portion 647c, so that the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright position. Therefore, even if rotation is hindered by the adhesion of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and quickly formed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the length of the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 extending from the shaft portion 646b is set to be larger than the length of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 extending from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 can be moved away from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be brought closer to the shaft portion 647b, and as a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. This can be done more reliably and quickly by using the weight of the display board 646.

The explanation will be given by returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. The pitching device 650 is a device for pitching the ball B to the rotating member 640, and is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The pitching device 650 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. In addition, in FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and illustration of the passage member 655 is omitted.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the ball throwing device 650 mainly comprises a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 and a holding piece extension and retraction mechanism 670 disposed inside the case body 651, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a ball B formed into a spherical shape from a translucent material.

The case body 651 includes a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that stands upright from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outward portion from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. The projecting wall portion 651c is provided with a flange-shaped projecting portion 651c, and the projecting wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, so that the erected tip (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is disposed at a position substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (plate portion 646a of the display panel 646).

A ball holding portion 652 is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed in the front of the ball holding portion 652, and this depression is used as the holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is placed in the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in such a manner that the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is located at the lowest position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved toward the outer wall. It rolls on the inner circumferential surface (inner circumferential passage 651c1) of the holding piece 651b and is held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 with the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the pitching device 660 with the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed at the separated position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the pitching device 660 is in a state shown in FIG. 64 and 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 is shown with the front case 662 removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in Figures 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, a crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664.

Shafts 661a and 661b are provided in a protruding manner on the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a, and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a with which a pinion gear 676 is engaged is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is provided protrudingly at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (shaft 661a). Further, the arm member 664 has a linearly extending sliding groove 664a into which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted, and a rotation center (axis 661b) with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ) is formed on the opposite side with a curved portion 664b having a front view shape obtained by dividing an annular shape in half.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 665 to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated via the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 acts on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, so that the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other with the shaft 661b as the center of rotation.

That is, the arm member 664 has two holding positions (see FIG. 64) in which the curved shape of the curved portion 664b is aligned with the outer circumference of the ball holding portion 652 to hold the ball B on the ball holding portion 652 (see FIG. 64), and a holding position in which the curved portion 664b is held in the ball holding portion 652 (see FIG. 64). It is possible to rotate (swing) between a separated position (see FIG. 65) where the ball B is separated from the part 652 and dropped from the ball holding part 652 to the inner circumferential passage 651c1.

In the present embodiment, a part of the inner circumferential surface of the curved portion 664b (range within a center angle of approximately 90 degrees on the side (lower side) spaced apart from the shaft 661b) is formed by a cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-shaped body that curves along the inner circumferential surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end thereof is rotatably supported on the curved portion 664b, and The limit switch 667 is maintained in an upwardly lifted position (inwardly in the radial direction) by the elastic force of a leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (outer peripheral surface side) of the limit switch 667.

Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding part 652 with the arm member 664 in the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c with the shaft 664c1 as the center of rotation. While the limit switch 667 is turned on, if the ball B is not held in the ball holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is placed in the lifted position as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 can be detected.

In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed to a size that allows the ball B to be displaced when the arm member 664 is placed in the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by a player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, by displacing (vibrating) the ball B, the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced along with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on and off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, it is possible to detect the input of external force to the pachinko machine 10 using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

Returning to Figures 61 and 62, the explanation will be given. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B rolls on the inner circumferential surface (inner circumferential passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and is held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 (see Figure 68). The holding piece retraction mechanism 670 is formed so that the holding piece 677 can protrude and retract between the protruding position and the retracted position, and when the holding piece 677 retracts to the retracted position, the ball B is thrown onto one of the divided members DV (display plate 646) of the multiple divided members DV of the rotating member 640. Here, the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 will be explained with reference to Figures 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 with the holding piece 677 placed in the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 with the holding piece 677 placed in the retracted position. It is an exploded front perspective view of.

Figure 68(a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is in the protruding position, and Figure 68(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in Figure 68(a). Figure 69(a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is in the retracted position, and Figure 69(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece protruding/retracting mechanism 670 taken along line LXIXb-LXIXb in Figure 69(a).

As shown in Figures 66 to 69, the retaining piece extending and retracting mechanism 670 includes a rear case 671 that is curved in an arc shape along the inner circumferential surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 672 that is disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 that is held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672 so as to be capable of sliding displacement, a drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the slide member 673, and a retaining piece 677 that extends and retracts in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member 673.

The rear case 671 has two pairs of roller members 674 arranged facing each other at a specified distance, and holds the slide member 673 between the opposing roller members 674 of each pair so that it can slide. The rear case 671 also has a sliding base 671a that is a rectangular plate when viewed from above and is formed by projecting from one circumferential end side (lower part) toward the front side, and guides the sliding displacement (protruding toward the front side and retracting into the rear side) of the holding piece 677 between the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the front base 672.

The slide member 673 has a pin portion 673a protruding from one circumferential end (lower portion) thereof, and a rack gear 673b meshing with a pinion gear 676 is engraved along the inner circumferential surface at the other circumferential end (top portion). In addition, a sliding groove 677a, into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted, is bent in a substantially Z-shape and extended in the holding piece 677. That is, one end (right side in FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset toward the front side from the other end (left side in FIG. 66).

Therefore, by rotating the drive motor 675 in the forward or reverse direction and rotating the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675, the slide member 673 is slid and displaced via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or retracted to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slid between a protruding position (see FIG. 68) in which it is protruded toward the front side and a retracted position (see FIG. 69) in which it is retracted toward the back side.

Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side of FIGS. 68(b) and 69(b)) and the inner circumferential surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner circumferential passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b concentrically curved and smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and directed toward the front side (left side in FIGS. 68(b) and 69(b)) An upwardly inclined surface 677c that is inclined upwardly according to the above-mentioned condition, and a downwardly inclined surface 677d that is connected to the edge of the upwardly inclined surface 677c and inclined downwardly toward the front side are formed.

Therefore, when the retaining piece 677 is positioned in the protruding position (see Figures 68(a) and 68(b)), the ball B that falls from the ball retaining portion 652, rolls through the inner passage 651c1, and reaches the curved surface 677b of the retaining piece 677 is prevented from rolling toward the front side (left side in Figure 68(b)) by the upward inclination of the upward inclination surface 677c, and can be retained on the retaining piece 677 (curved surface 677b).

On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is retracted from this protruding position to the rear side and placed in the retracted position (see FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b)), the front side of the front case 672 moves toward the rear side (see FIG. 69(b)). ) The ball B, whose movement to the right side) is restricted, climbs over the upward slope 677c and is positioned on the downward slope 677d as the holding piece 677 moves in the retracting direction (back side). Thereby, the ball B can be rolled along the downward slope of the downwardly inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be pitched toward the front side (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

Note that the curved surface 677b has both sides in the circumferential direction smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, so that the ball B that has been dropped from the ball holding part 652 and rolled in one of the inner circumferential passages 651c1 is held by the curved part of the holding piece 677. It can be made to pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Furthermore, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner circumferential passage 651c1, when the momentum of the ball B is lost and its rolling is stopped, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 61 for explanation, as described above, a passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece extending and retracting mechanism 670, and is provided with a ball sending passage 655a which is a passage for sending the pitched ball B onto the dividing member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 by the retracting action (retraction into the retracted position) of the holding piece 677, and a return passage 655b which is a passage for returning the thrown ball B from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding section 652.

The ball throwing passage 655a has a groove portion 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross section extending toward the front side and has a width dimension that is approximately the same as the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670. A front section 655a2 that extends to the side edge and is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the divided member DV of the rotating member 640; A pair of opposing portions 655a3 are provided that face each other at substantially the same spacing as the opposing spacing of the partition plate 647.

Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece extension/retraction mechanism 670 is retracted into the retracted position, the ball B rolling along the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1, and by rolling along the extension direction of the groove portion 655a1, the ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

In addition, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the opposing distance between the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is approximately the same as the opposing distance between the partition plates 647 of the dividing member DV, so that the thrown ball B can be smoothly placed on the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotating member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) where the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV coincides with the opposing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described below.

The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that receives the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and rolls it downstream, and an erected portion 655b2 that is erected downstream of the rolling portion 655b1 and is curved to direct the rolling direction of the ball B toward the back side.

When viewed from the front of the pitching device 650, the upstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 is located on the inner peripheral edge of the rotating member 640, and the downstream side is located in front of the ball holding portion 652b. The rolling portion 655b1 is also inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward toward the ball holding portion 652.

The ball B, which is placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and transported in the circumferential direction as the rotating member 640 rotates, is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later, and when it is sent to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls downstream on the rolling portion 655b1 and is guided by the erected portion 655b2 and falls into the ball holding portion 652.

The explanation will be given by returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower part of the rotating member 640, and guides the ball B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 during conveyance as the rotating member 640 rotates (i.e., A detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is also held. Here, the guide member 680 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

Figure 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and Figure 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in Figure 70, the guide member 680 mainly comprises a base 681 disposed in the case member 610, a plate-shaped transparent plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, a cantilever plate 683 disposed on the rear side of the transparent plate 682, and a plurality of detection sensors 684 (six in this embodiment) disposed on the base 681.

The base 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing a circular ring shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (i.e., a shape curved like an arc when viewed from the front), and a guide surface 681a is formed on its inner peripheral surface. The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member 640, and faces the ball B arranged on the dividing member DV (i.e., the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). In other words, it supports from below the ball B that is arranged on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and is transported as the rotating member 640 rotates.

Further, a return guide 681b is formed on the inner circumferential surface side of the base portion 681 and continues to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a. The return guide 681b is a part for sending the ball B conveyed as the rotating member 640 rotates to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and is formed to have a width smaller than that of the guide surface 681a, and a radial direction. By being formed in a shape that protrudes inward, it is disposed facing the dividing member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

Therefore, when the ball B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction as the rotating member 640 rotates, the dividing plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the dividing member DV serves as a return guide. Ball B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is tilted downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate The ball B can be dropped along the downward slope 647 into the return path 655b. However, in this case, since the ball B is transported upward by the time the ball B starts rolling under its own weight, the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes higher, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the downward slope, the momentum of the ball B falling is large. Therefore, there is a possibility that the return passage 655b may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the falling position when the ball B is dropped into the return path 655b can be lowered, and the ball B can slide on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is thrown to the return path 655b while being thrown, the throwing speed can be weakened. As a result, damage to the return path 655b can be suppressed.

The transparent plate 682 faces the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined distance (a distance that can hold a ball B), and a part of the upper edge side part in the center of the width direction is extended upward to a position facing the ball throwing passage 655a (front part 655a2) of the passage member 655. This makes it possible to prevent the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 from flying out to the outside.

In addition, the transparent plate 682 is formed with a size (width dimension) that allows it to partially face not only the dividing member DV through which the ball B is thrown (i.e., the dividing member DV that is in phase with the front portion 655a2 of the ball throwing passage 655a), but also the dividing member DV adjacent to the dividing member DV on the downstream side (downstream in the transport direction of the ball B), so that the movement of the ball B thrown from the ball throwing passage 655a can be easily converged between the transparent plate 682 and the ball B can be transported stably to the return guide 681b.

On the other hand, the transparent plate 682 is sized (width dimension) to face the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown and the dividing member DV adjacent to that dividing member DV on the downstream side, but does not face the dividing member DV that is positioned downstream of the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown and the dividing member DV adjacent to that dividing member DV. In other words, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transparent plate 682 on the downstream side of the transport direction of the ball B (right side in Figure 70) and the return guide 681b, making it easier for the player to see the transport of the ball B.

Note that since the transmission plate 682 is entirely made of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the members and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Therefore, the pitched ball B passes through the ball throwing path 655a and falls between the opposing display plate 647 and the transparent plate 682 of the divided member DV, and is also rotated by the rotation member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. A series of transport modes can be made visible to the player.

The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner circumferential surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-shaped body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner circumferential surface of the base 681). The cantilever plate 683 has one end in the circumferential direction rotatably supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. It is maintained in a lifted position upward (radially inward).

When the other end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off, and when the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the The weight pushes down the cantilever plate 683 around the shaft 685, turning on the limit switch. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B pitched from the pitching device 650 is placed at an appropriate position (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

On the other hand, as the rotating member 640 rotates, the ball B is transported, and when the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 falls below a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 returns to the lifted position as described above, turning off the limit switch.

The detection sensors 684 are sensor devices for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and are formed as non-contact sensors with light-emitting and light-receiving parts arranged opposite each other, and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while their detection areas (opposing spaces of the light-emitting and light-receiving parts) are positioned on the movement trajectory of the detected parts 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected parts 641c) in the first section S1.

Therefore, a plurality of circumferentially adjacent divided members DV (six in this embodiment) can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, and the rotating member 640 can be arranged by a predetermined amount (i.e., corresponding to the first interval). Each time the divided member DV is rotated by the amount of rotation), the divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

In this case, as described above, the detection portion 641c is formed in some (15 in this embodiment) of the divided members DV, while the formation of the detection portion 641c is omitted in the remaining divided members DV. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is formed is arranged, the light receiving portion of the light irradiated from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detection portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on, while in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is not formed is arranged, the light receiving portion of the light irradiated from the light emitting portion can receive the light, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, as described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of each detection sensor 684.

In this embodiment, six detection sensors 684 each produce two detection results (on and off) based on the presence or absence of the detectable portion 641c of the divided member DV, so 64 (=2 to the power of 6) combinations can be formed. In this case, there are 30 divided members DV arranged, so as described below, it is always possible to determine which of these divided members DV is located at the reference position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 684.

Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, the operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

Figure 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. Also, Figure 73(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and Figure 73(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2.

In order to simplify the drawings and make them easier to understand, in Figs. 72 and 73, only the rear body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 are shown among the components of the divided member DV, and in Fig. 73, the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are shown hatched.

As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable around the axis O (i.e., along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and is formed in an endless shape by connecting multiple divided members DV in the circumferential direction. That is, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 of each divided member DV is rotatably supported on the back side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the tip side of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the connecting link action groove 621 via the connecting link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV.

As described above, the rear body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one longitudinal side and the bent portion 642 on the other longitudinal side in contact with the outer and inner circumferential surfaces of the guide member 620, so that when it is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, its orientation relative to the guide member 620 is maintained in such a manner that the axis O is located on the longitudinal extension of the rear body 642 (i.e., a radial straight line centered on the axis O). In other words, only movement while maintaining that orientation is permitted.

In this case, the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connecting link member 644 than the small diameter portion 621b, so that when the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 (see FIG. 73(a)), the connecting link member 644 can be tilted relative to the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642, and the rear side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. In other words, the distance between the divided members DV (rear side main bodies 642) in the first section S1 can be set to a large distance (first distance).

On the other hand, since the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the proximal end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connecting link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a, this connecting link action When the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73(b)), the connecting link member 644 is placed along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642, and the back side The side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be made small (second interval).

As described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed to resemble a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display board 646 (board portion 646a). That is, the effect is achieved by having the player visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, it is preferable that the display board 646 (display of the identification information) is large, and in order to ensure a variety of effect effects, it is preferable that there are many display boards 646 (types of identification information).

In this case, when considering the visibility of the player, it is necessary that the display of the identification information (i.e., the plate portion 646a of the display board 646) is secured to be at least a certain size. However, if the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is increased while maintaining that size, the diameter of the rotating member 640 becomes large and it will no longer be able to fit into the designated installation space. On the other hand, if the diameter of the rotating member 640 is reduced so that it will fit into the designated space, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) will decrease, making it impossible to ensure variety in the presentation effects.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, there is a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected at a first interval in the circumferential direction, and a second section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected at a first interval in the circumferential direction. The display plate 646 (plate part 646a) located in the first section S1 can be formed in the rotating member 640 with the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. The display board 646 located in the second section S2 is made visible to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

Therefore, compared to the case where all the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of pieces of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) while ensuring that the size of the display of the identification information (that is, the display plate 646) is larger than a certain level. As a result, visibility for players and variations in presentation effects cannot be ensured.

Here, in the first section S1 of the divided member DV, since the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is arranged in a horizontal position (a position parallel to the moving plane of the divided member DV), such a display board The identification information displayed at 646 can be easily recognized by the player.

Meanwhile, in the second section S2, as described above, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is in a position where the tip side of the dividing member DV is raised higher than the horizontal position in the first section S1, so that interference with adjacent dividing members DV can be suppressed and the dividing members DV can be moved closer to each other. In other words, the distance (second distance) between the dividing members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened and the space required for its arrangement can be reduced.

In particular, according to this embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a can be raised above the upper surface of the adjacent divided member DV (plate holding member 645) (i.e., to a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Thus, the divided members DV can be brought close to each other to a position where the rear body 642 and the front body 643 abut against each other. In other words, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member can be reduced.

Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotational drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotational drive member 637 viewed from the front is illustrated.

Note that Figures 74(b), 74(c), and 74(d) correspond to states rotated 30 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees from Figure 74(a), respectively. Also, in Figures 74(a) to 74(d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is shown in cross section, and the movement trajectory of the engaged portion 641 is shown using a two-dot chain line.

Here, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed to have the same shape as each other. In the driving operation of the rotation member 640 by these, only the driving operation by the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d), in the one-side rotational drive member 637, the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is partially the same as the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. They are disposed at overlapping positions, and are rotatable with the engaging portion 637b engaged with the engaged portion 641 in the overlapping portion. Note that the circular shape of the movement trajectory of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle with a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the movement trajectory of the engaged portion 641.

When the one-side rotary drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the divided member DV through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. The divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided members DV via each connecting link member 644, so that the rotating member 640 is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620. rotated in the direction

In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 relative to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive of the rotating member 640 (particularly the rotational drive from a stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a rotational drive member 637 on one side and a rotational drive member 638 on the other side, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotational member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and it is possible to prevent the driving force from being applied unevenly to some of the plurality of divided members DV. That is, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting a plurality of divided members DV in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In particular, according to this embodiment, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 are disposed at positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotational member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each rotary drive member 637, 638 can be applied to the two most distant locations of the rotary member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotary member 640 can be It can be stabilized.

In this case, in the state of the divided member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644, which is pivotally supported by the divided member DV, is inserted into the first large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. There are three types of states: a second state in which it is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b, and a third state in which it is inserted in the connecting portion 621c. The rotational drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging parts 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged part 641 of the divided member DV in the third state) ) location.

This allows a driving force to be applied to the divided members DV in a state in which the distance between the divided members DV adjacent to them is transitioning from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since such divided members DV receive a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, they tend to become a part that inhibits the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which multiple divided members DV are endlessly connected (the movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction). However, by directly driving the divided members DV that receive a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the entire rotating member 640 in which multiple divided members DV are endlessly connected can be stably displaced (rotated).

The period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the divided member DV does not need to completely coincide with the period during which the divided member DV is in the third state described above, and it is sufficient that the period during which the driving force is transmitted for the former and the period during which the latter is in the third state overlap at least partially.

In this embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are formed at positions where they are in different phases. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the divided member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622.

Therefore, when the divided member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the divided member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621. After that, the insertion part 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting part 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 (or vice versa).

This prevents reaction forces from both the connection portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 at the same time, and allows the reaction forces to be received at different times. As a result, the necessary driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, since the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotational member 640 can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 will be explained with reference to FIG. 75.

Figure 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase and the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the divided member DV. Note that in Figure 75, the state relationship diagram in the upper row corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the state relationship diagram in the lower row corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. In Figure 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the state of engagement or disengagement.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three locations on the one-side rotational drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. If the phase at the time when the rotation is started is defined as 0° (reference position), the one-side rotational drive member 637 will rotate until the phase reaches approximately 100° (that is, until it rotates 100° from the reference position). The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV, while the engagement is released between approximately 100° and 120°. Then, the transmission of the driving force to the dividing member DV is released.

After that, the second and third engaging portions 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at three locations on the one-side rotation drive member 637 repeat the same states of engagement and disengagement as the first engaging portion 637b (i.e., engagement for a rotation angle of approximately 100° and disengagement for a rotation angle of approximately 20°).

As shown in the lower part of Figure 75, the other-side rotation drive member 638 also has three engaging portions 638b formed thereon, which each repeat the same states of engagement and disengagement as in the case of the one-side rotation drive member 637 described above (i.e., engagement for a rotation angle of approximately 100° and disengagement for a rotation angle of approximately 20°).

In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (the rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b, 638b) different from each other. That is, the other-side rotation drive member 638 has three engaging portions 638b, and the phase at which the first engaging portion 638b of the engaging portions 638b starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40° from the phase (reference position) at which the first engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts to engage.

As a result, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the divided member DV (i.e., the transmission of the driving force is released), the phases (rotational positions) of the engagement portions 637b, 638b are set so that the other of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 engages with the divided member DV. This makes it possible to avoid a state in which the engagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the divided member DV is simultaneously released. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the drive mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 is prevented from becoming intermittent, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In other words, as described above, in a configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting multiple divided members DV, if the transmission of the driving force from the drive mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, the distance between the divided members DV is likely to increase or decrease due to the transmission and release of the driving force. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, even if either the one-side rotational drive member 637 or the other-side rotational drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is in the engaged state, and a driving force is applied to the rotational member 640. Since it is possible to create a state in which the information is constantly being transmitted, it is possible to easily maintain a constant interval between the divided members DV. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to Figures 76 and 77. Figure 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation of the rotating member 640, and illustrates the state in which the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV are arranged in a straight line.

In addition, in FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, the detection sensors 684 are shown with codes "A to F", and the divided members DV are shown with codes "1 to 10, 30", and the detection sensors 684 are shown with codes "1 to 10, 30". The detection state is illustrated by "on, off" symbols. Furthermore, in FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for ease of understanding.

In the explanation of FIG. 76, the reference symbols "A-F" and "1-10, 30" are used to refer to the detection sensors 684 as detection sensor A, detection sensor B, ..., detection sensor F, and the divided members DV are referred to as the first divided member DV, the second divided member DV, ..., the 30th divided member DV, to distinguish between them.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) detectable by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV to the sixth divided member DV is rotated. The divided members DV are arranged at phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

Therefore, in detection sensors A, C to F, the light irradiated from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, but is blocked by the detectable portion 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV, causing the detectable portion 641c to be detected and the detection state to be turned on. On the other hand, in detection sensor B, the light irradiated from the light emitting unit can be received by the light receiving unit, and the detectable portion 641c is not detected, causing the detection state to be turned off.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76(a), the divided member DV is (to the left), the divided members DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on due to the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portions 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76(b), the divided member DV to be detected by each detection sensor A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D, F, the detection state is turned on due to the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection state is turned on. The detection state of sensor E is turned off.

After that, each time the rotating member 640 rotates a unit rotation, the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one), and this is repeated the number of times for the number of divided members DV (30 in this embodiment) (i.e., the rotating member 640 rotates once), and the state shown in Figure 76 (a) is restored.

In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating member 640: one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged at predetermined intervals that are unequal in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement means that no matter which six adjacent divided members DV are taken out of the 30 divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction, the combination of the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c (i.e., the detection sensor A . . . Detection states of F) are all different combinations.

Therefore, by creating a table of such combinations (a table that associates the detection states of the detection sensors A to F with the divided members DV that are the detection targets at that time) in advance and storing it in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table each time the detection sensors A to F perform detection. In other words, it is possible to determine which divided member DV out of the multiple (30 in this embodiment) divided members DV is located at the reference position.

Here, a slit that is continuous in the circumferential direction is provided in the rotating member 640, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. Based on the cumulatively added number of pulses, , it is also possible to detect the amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to poor light reception by the light receiving part of the detection sensor 684, a discrepancy will occur between the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition of the number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 will be accurately determined. becomes undetectable. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects subsequent detection results, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the rotating member 640 is provided with a plurality of detectable parts 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction thereof, and a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A-F) arranged on the movement trajectory of the plurality of detectable parts 641c. Therefore, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A-F. In other words, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the detection sensors A-F, and the detection of the phase of the rotating member 640 does not require the past detection results of the detection sensors A-F. Therefore, even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, the detection will not be affected by the detection failure, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

As described above, the spacing between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the spacing (first spacing) between the divided members DV (detectable portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combination of detection results of the detection sensors AF can be made different. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected using the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any one of the plurality of split members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, to any pocket of the rotating member 640 imitating a roulette). be able to.

In addition, in this way, the intervals between the detection sensors A to F are set based on the intervals between the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the intervals between the divided members DV in the first section S1 are set as a reference). (are arranged in a position where the detected portion 641c of the sensor can be detected), the space required for arranging the detection sensors A to F is reduced compared to the case where the interval between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. It is possible to easily secure the design, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In other words, when the detection sensors A-F are disposed at positions in the second section S2 where they can detect the detectable portion 641c of the divided member DV, it is necessary to secure space for disposing these detection sensors A-F, which places restrictions on narrowing the spacing between the divided members DV (second spacing). In contrast, by disposing the detection sensors A-F on the first section S1 side, there are no restrictions on setting the spacing between the divided members DV (second spacing) in the second section S2, and the second spacing can be made narrower. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, two detection results (on and off) based on the presence or absence of the detectable portion 641c of the divided member DV are detected by six detection sensors 684, so 64 (=2 to the power of 6) combinations can be formed.

In this case, since the number of division members DV arranged is 30, five detection sensors 684 are sufficient (i.e., 32 (=2 to the power of 5) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which the detection results of all five detection sensors 684 are off (light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c), and therefore, at the specified phase (rotational position) corresponding to that state, it is not possible to obtain the detection results of the detection sensors 684.

On the other hand, by using six detection sensors 684 as in this embodiment, all of the six detection sensors 684 have their detection results turned off (a state in which light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c). ) can be avoided. That is, at least one of the six detection sensors 684 can turn on the detection result (light is blocked by the detected part 641), so all phases (rotation position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display board 646 of the divided member DV has its board part 646a arranged in a horizontal position, and the shaft part 646b of the board part 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). (see left side in FIG. 77) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

In this embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed with a curved arc-shaped side surface opposite the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b and placed in a horizontal position, the side opposite the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be prevented from interfering with the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV. As a result, the distance between the side opposite the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (the arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

As a result, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 By bringing the side surface into contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645, such relative displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the detected portions 641c of these divided members DV from shifting in the direction of narrowing the distance between them, and as a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the terminal end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) lower side) (see FIG. 73(a)), so when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in the direction of widening the interval (first interval) between them, This phase displacement can be regulated by the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 coming into contact with the terminal end of the connecting link opening 642a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the detected portions 641c of these divided members DV from shifting in the direction of increasing the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , including a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the passageway. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that Figure 78 illustrates the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is placed in the release position.

As shown in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 is mainly composed of a base member 2510 that ejects balls to the rear right side of the first wall portion 513 when viewed from the front, a first passage forming member 2520 in which the extension direction of the distribution base member 2521 and the extension direction of the long hole 2521d are configured to be substantially in a straight line, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The base member 2510 has a side flow passage 2515 that extends rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Note that the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from that of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, but since the technical concept is the same, a description of this embodiment will be omitted.

The lateral flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging balls that reach the first wall portion 513 when the first passage forming member 2520 is placed in the release position.

The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate part 2521a constituting one side of the ball flow path, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate part 2521a, and a gap V1. A second distribution convex portion 2521g facing the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side when viewed from the front, and a rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g when viewed from the front. A discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface is provided.

The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 at its lower end, which is formed by cutting out the side of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in Figure 78), and a shaft support hole 2521a3 at the lower end, which is drilled in a circular shape in the direction facing the passage cover member on the side opposite the passage cover member 2522.

The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 together with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by rotation.

The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is located at a position corresponding to (coaxial with) the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522.

The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the balls that have reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521h is arranged with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere between it and the first wall 513, and reaches the first wall 513 to the right side of the second distribution convex 2521g when viewed from the front. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow down passage 2515, and then discharged outside the game area.

The passage cover member 2522 includes a plate-shaped portion 2522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and a plate-shaped plate portion 2522a that extends from both ends of the plate portion 2522a in the short direction toward the back side. It mainly includes upper and lower wall portions 2522b.

The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed in a circular shape coaxially with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower tip. Be prepared. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 that is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2, and together with the recessed portion 2521a2 constitutes an opening through which a ball can pass.

The tip wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates into a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 that is pivotably supported and has a substantially Z-shape when viewed from the front, and a torsion spring 2562 that biases the main body member 2561 clockwise when viewed from the front.

The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm abuts a locking pin 2561e protruding from the distal end wall member 2560 toward the back side.

With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79(a) and 79(d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the distal wall member 2560, and FIG. 79(b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the distal wall member 2560. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79(b). In addition, in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and in FIG. 79(a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the released position ( 79(d) shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in the connecting position (see FIG. 81).

As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 is made up of a cylindrical main body portion 2561a supported coaxially with the pivot holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), a plate-shaped plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line in the radial direction from the main body portion 2561a, a flow hole 2561c drilled in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere, and ... It mainly comprises a curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a, a locking pin 2561e projecting parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the tip of the curved wall portion 2561d, and a push-in portion 2561f arranged on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d across the main body member 2561a and configured with a shape smaller than the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the length in the radial direction (the length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Ru. Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to the position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b come into contact (see FIG. 79(d)).

In the released state (see FIG. 79(d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 2520 by causing the ball to collide with the abutment wall 2561d1 that is disposed to face the ball. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow hole 2561c is transferred to the rolling wall disposed on the back side of the contact wall 2561d1. By rolling it on top of 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow down.

Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 82. Figs. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. Note that in Figs. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is omitted, and Fig. 80 illustrates the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed in the release position, Fig. 81 illustrates the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated a predetermined amount clockwise as viewed from the front from Fig. 80, and Fig. 82 illustrates the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed in the connection position. Also, in Figs. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the midpoint in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution protrusion portion 2521g is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the ball that flows down from the play area and reaches the first wall portion 513 is sorted to the right of the second sorting protrusion 2521g when viewed from the front, and is retained between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513. The first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the discharge recess 2521h is positioned on the front side of the side flow-down passage 2515, allowing the ball to flow down the side flow-down passage 2515 and the ball is discharged outside the play area. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position.

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 80, the ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h remains in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next ball can be prevented from entering the discharge recess 2521h and the next ball can be kept outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution protrusion 2521g (upper side of Figure 80).

The first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides the ball that is fixed outside the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80). By being arranged along the right side wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex part 2521g and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Ru. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, only one ball can be introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the proximal end (the left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (the right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured in an upwardly inclined manner. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the supplied balls remaining between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and reaches the state shown in FIG. Since the ball flows toward the base end due to the action of gravity, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the distal end.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in a state between the release position and the connection position, the ball that has flown down from the game area and has reached the first wall part 513 is It rides on the tip of part 2521g and stops flowing down. This ensures that when the first passage forming member 2520 is placed between the release position and the connected position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. It can be prevented.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the distal end thereof. Therefore, if the opening at the tip is always open, if the ball remains between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and is brought into the state shown in FIG. There is a risk that the ball may fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (such as the rotating unit 600 (see FIG. 5)), causing malfunction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid for the opening, so that the ball can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is positioned in the connected position, a ball that flows down from the play area and reaches the first wall portion 513 is sorted to the left of the second sorting protrusion 2521g when viewed from the front, moves to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and flows down along the extension direction of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the connected position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f of the driving side slide member 420 come into contact (the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the pushing portion 2561f), and the curved wall portion 2561d of the tip wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction in which it protrudes outward from the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). In other words, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 occurs due to the change in position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. This allows for a reduction in product costs.

At this time, in the connection position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a plane position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, thereby smoothing the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The ball can be thrown into the downstream hole 2561c (without bouncing as would be the case when there is a difference in level between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

The ball that has passed through the flow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d has the role of stopping the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the role of guiding the ball thrown from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow hole 2561c. , is also used for.

In addition, in the connected position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is flush with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that just before reaching the connected position, the plate portion 2561b is in a state of being inserted further inward (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. In other words, it is only when the connected position is reached that the ball can pass through the flow hole 2561c (the ball is kept stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d until the connected position is reached).

As a result, even if the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate from the connected position toward the released position while the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball can be reliably prevented from falling off the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. This is also maintained when multiple balls are thrown in a row.

Referring to FIG. 83, a case will be described in which a plurality of balls are thrown to the first passage forming member 2520 in a row. 83(a) to 83(c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Note that in FIGS. 83(a) to 83(c), the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. A state in which the forming member 2520 is placed in the connecting position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83(b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83(b) from the state shown in FIG. 83(a). In FIG. 83(c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83(b) from the state shown in FIG. 83(b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The state shown in FIG.

Further, in FIGS. 83(a) to 83(c), a ball flowing down in a row connected to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the push-in portion 2561f abuts against the storage recess 422f in the connected state, and has a recess 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83(a) starting from the position of abutment. The recess 2561f1 is recessed toward the pivot support portion 516 (see FIG. 37) from the arc C21 centered on the pivot support portion 516. Therefore, as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. 83(a), the tip wall member 2560 begins to rotate due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83(a), the ball located on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is the feed ball P21, and the ball located on the left side is the remaining ball P22.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), when the first passage forming member 2520 begins to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower walls 2522b. As a result, the remaining ball P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the downward flow of the remaining ball P22 is stopped.

On the other hand, since the sending ball P21 is positioned on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, its flow is not stopped by the abutting wall 2561d, and it can be sent through the flow hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520.

In this case, the ball P21 may be lifted up by the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83(b)), but since the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b is arranged opposite the direction of movement of the curved wall portion 2561d, the ball P21 is pushed into the wall portion, ensuring that the ball P21 passes through the flow hole 2561c. This makes it possible to keep the diameter of the opening of the flow hole 2561c to approximately the same as the diameter of the ball, stabilizing the flow path of the ball flowing down the flow hole 2561c.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 83(b) and the curved wall portion 2561d is moved above the curved wall portion 422f1 of the driving side slide member 420, even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a part for rolling the feed ball P21, and the feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the rolling wall 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball (the first passage forming member 2520 is stopped at the position of FIG. 83(c) or the speed is slowed down near FIG. 83(c) until the feed ball P21 stops flowing down), so that it is possible to ensure that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422.

Third Embodiment
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 84 to Fig. 88. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the third pattern display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430. However, in the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 in the third embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 3430. Note that the same parts as those in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 in the third embodiment, illustrating the lifting and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 84 to 88, illustrations of the left and right members of the cover member 470 are omitted, and the vicinity of the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 is partially enlarged.

...

As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner to prevent the driven slide member 3430 from falling.

The descent restricting member 415 and the ascent restricting member 417 of the base member 410 are arranged only on the left side when viewed from the front, and are omitted on the right side when viewed from the front.

The driven side slide member 3430 mainly comprises a main body member 3431 having a third pattern display device 81 in a position offset to the left of the center position when viewed from the front and configured to be long in the left-right direction, functional parts 432 arranged at both left-right ends of the main body member 3431, a guide hole 433 drilled vertically in the functional part 432 and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted, a hook-shaped part 434 extending at an upward incline in the left-right outward direction at the lower end of the functional part 432, and a fall prevention part 435 extending toward the rear side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional part 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433).

The main body member 3431 has a locking protrusion 3431a that protrudes to the left when viewed from the front at its upper end. The locking protrusion 3431a is a part that is locked to the solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 to prevent it from falling. The locking protrusion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface approaches the tip in the protruding direction.

The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 that can extend and retract from the right side when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is tilted upward toward the tip in the projecting direction. The solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized, and is in an extended state when not energized, and in the extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 protrudes further toward the left and right center than the tip of the locking convex portion 3431a. Consists of.

As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in front view. As a result, while ensuring the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas that were separated on the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 are gathered in one place (the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84), By configuring the area as a large area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in determining the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area.

Since the third pattern display device 81 is positioned toward the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied from the driven side slide member 420 to the rack 452 is asymmetrical (larger on the left side). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the driving side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the attitude of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, a wiring storage member 423 is disposed at the lower left end portion of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, since the center of gravity G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is placed to the left of the center position of the drive-side slide member 420, the weight of the wiring storage member 423 and the wiring stored in the wiring storage member 423 causes the drive-side The slide member 420 may receive a load and tilt counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In this way, the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are made more likely to tilt counterclockwise when viewed from the front. 452 maintains a horizontal position (see FIG. 87) and a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It is possible to suppress the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise in front view from the horizontal position.

Therefore, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 disposed on the left side in front view guide the vertical movement of the driving sliding member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving sliding member 420 and the rack 452. do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right side in front view, it becomes unnecessary to arrange the descent restriction member 415 and the rise restriction member 417 outside the functional section 432 on the right side in front view, and the product Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driving side slide member 420 is placed in the raised position, the wiring storage member 423 rises up compared to the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity position G31 moves to the left when viewed from the front compared to the state shown in FIG. 84.

As a result, the load acting on the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 in the direction of tilting counterclockwise when viewed from the front increases, and this may cause the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the driving gear 442 to deteriorate.

In contrast, when the driving side slide member 420 is in the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is abutted against and supported by the descent restricting member 415. This makes it possible to prevent the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven slide member 3430 is placed in the raised position, the locking protrusion 3431 climbs over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking protrusion 3431 rests on the rod member 3481.

At this time, the bar member 3481 is pushed left and right along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking protrusion 3431, so that the locking protrusion 3431 overcomes the bar member 3481. This allows the locking protrusion 3431 to be placed on the bar member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without electricity being passed through the solenoid 3480.

As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered with the driven-side slide member 3430 disposed in the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 will be held in the locking protrusion 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting , the driven side sliding member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the driving side sliding member 420, and the driven side sliding member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is located at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is located to the left in front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is located to the left, so when the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Also, it is possible to suppress the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

That is, when the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven slide member 3430 may wobble both clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to vibration or the like. If the driven slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise in front view in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, there is a risk that the locking convex portion 3431a may slip off from the rod member 3481.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side in the front view, so the driven slide member 3430 tilts clockwise from the horizontal position (see FIG. 87) due to vibration etc. What people are saying - Write a review

Therefore, the locking protrusion 3431a tends to be inclined in the direction approaching the bar member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the abutment between the locking protrusion 3431a and the bar member 3481 is maintained, so that the locking protrusion 3431a is attached to the bar member 3481. This prevents it from slipping down.

Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained in the raised position without disposing solenoids 3480 on both the left and right sides of the driven side slide member 3430, so the operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved while reducing the number of solenoids 3480 disposed.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is retracted, the driven slide member 3430 falls. During the process of the driven side slide member 3430 falling, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-shaped portion 434 is prevented from getting caught on the lowering regulating member 415 and causing malfunction. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls while contacting the separating slope portion 417f of the rise regulating member 417, thereby rotating the rise regulating member 417 outward (counterclockwise in FIG. 87). release state).

As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is placed in the lowered position, the rise regulating member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rise regulating member 417 is rotated. The hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged to face each other in the vertical direction (engaged state).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state by rotating the rise regulating member 417 with respect to the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, so there is no change in posture. The load and the amount of change in posture required to change the released state and the engaged state are increased compared to the case where the parts are engaged with each other (such as when the released state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member). be able to. Thereby, the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430 and the rise regulating member 417 are engaged can be easily maintained.

In addition, as shown in Figures 87 and 88, the fall of the driven slide member 3430 rotates the rise-regulating member 417. In other words, there is no need to provide a separate drive device to create the engagement state of the rise-regulating member 417. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts and therefore a reduction in product costs.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 89. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the opposing wall portion 422f2 protrudes from the lower end of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined position. However, in the driving side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, the opposing wall portion 4422f2 arranged opposite the curved wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 89(a) is a partial front view of the driving side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, Figure 89(b) is a side view of the driving side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in Figure 89(a), and Figure 89(c) is a partial front view of the driving side slide member 4420. Note that in Figures 89(a) and 89(c), the driving side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of Figure 89(a)). Also, Figures 89(a) and 89(b) show the downward inclination of the connecting member 4424, and Figure 89(c) shows the upward inclination of the connecting member 4424.

The connecting member 4424 includes an extending claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end of the upper wall portion 424b to the right in front view.

The extended claw portion 4424f is disposed opposite the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is curved and recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and has a pair of recesses in the middle portion in the front-to-rear direction (left-to-right direction in FIG. 89(b)), as shown in FIG. 89(b).

The second passage forming member 4422 has an opposing wall portion 4422f2 arranged opposite the curved wall portion 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and has a recessed portion arranged in a manner that does not interfere with the extended claw portion 4424f, and extends to a position that overlaps with the extended claw portion 4424f in the state shown in Figure 89 (a).

In this embodiment, in the downward tilt state shown in FIG. 89(a), there are no parts (protruding parts, etc.) in the ball's path that could be damaged by the collision of the ball, so that when a ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 to the connecting member 4424, damage to the member due to the collision with the ball can be suppressed.

In the upwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89(b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball, preventing the ball from becoming stuck near the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, the first control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figs. 90 to 179. In this control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a probability variable state, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is configured to be more advantageous for the player than the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. More specifically, compared with the case where a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol executed based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as a lottery of a special symbol 1), the case where a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol executed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640a (hereinafter referred to as a lottery of a special symbol 2), is configured to make it easier to select a jackpot type (a jackpot type in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened) that can obtain a large number of prize balls. That is, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the electric device 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is easily opened, and the lottery for the special pattern 2 is easily executed, so that the player is likely to win a large number of prize balls in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal pattern, the electric device 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is less likely to be opened, and the lottery for the special pattern 2 is less likely to be executed (the lottery for the special pattern 1 is more likely to be executed), so that it is difficult to win a large number of prize balls even if a jackpot is won. Therefore, compared to the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the normal state of the normal pattern is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the jackpot ends. This time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, once a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the jackpot and the time-saving state of the normal pattern are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the time-saving state continues to be set after a jackpot, it is possible to repeatedly win a jackpot without reducing the number of balls held, which is an advantageous state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Hereinafter, the state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set to continue until the next jackpot occurs is referred to as the "consecutive mode."

On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal pattern, even if a jackpot is hit, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is difficult to set after the jackpot ends. Also, even if the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given, most of the time-saving states that have been set will end before the lottery for the special pattern is executed seven times. In other words, the time-saving period of the normal pattern that is set after the jackpot is mostly seven times or less (1 time or 7 times). As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won during this time-saving state, there is a high probability (97.5%) of transitioning to the "consecutive mode", but since it is difficult to win again in the limited number of lotteries after the jackpot ends, in many cases, the jackpot does not win and the normal state of the normal pattern is returned to. In other words, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal pattern, in which the balls are easily reduced, and the jackpot in which it is difficult to get prize balls (the jackpot in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened) are easily repeated. Therefore, the normal state of the normal pattern is a disadvantageous state for the player. For ease of explanation, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbols will be referred to as the "normal mode." Also, the time-saving state that can be entered a limited number of times after the end of a jackpot (ending when a set number of special symbol draws have been performed after the end of a jackpot) will be referred to as the "preparation mode."

By configuring the system to include a "consecutive game mode" that is advantageous for the player and a "normal mode" that is disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to add variety to the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

First, various types of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 90 to 96. Figs. 90 and 91(a) are diagrams showing an example of a variable display (variable pattern effect) executed when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in "normal mode" (normal state of normal symbols), Figs. 91(b) and 92 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode executed in the event of a jackpot being hit in "normal mode", and Figs. 93 to 96 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode suggesting whether or not to switch from "preparation mode" to "consecutive mode" when the mode transitions to "preparation mode" after the jackpot has ended (a short time period of 1 or 7 times has been granted).

First, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91(a), the effect mode when variable display is executed in the "normal mode" will be described. In the "normal mode", a number displayed on the production section 331 of the upper elevating unit 300 is used to notify whether the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot. More specifically, among the five types of numbers selected in advance (predetermined) by the player, one of four types is displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d constituting the presentation section 331. This will notify you of the jackpot. On the other hand, by displaying a number different from any of the five predetermined numbers on at least one of the display sections 331a to 331d, it is notified that the special symbol has missed.

Five combinations of numbers indicating the results of the lottery for the special symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), five combinations of numbers (lucky numbers) are displayed inside a small vertically elongated rectangular area Ds2 formed on the right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In the example of FIG. 90(a), five combinations of numbers (lucky numbers) are displayed as predetermined five combinations of numbers (lucky numbers), namely, "2", "7", "13", "17", and "25". In addition, the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "GET LUCKY NUMBER!!". These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the five numbers ("2", "7", "13", "17", and "25") displayed as lucky numbers on the performance unit 331 will result in a big win for the special symbols. The five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 can be selected by the player from, for example, a game menu screen. This game menu screen is a screen that is displayed, for example, by operating the frame button 22 when the game is stopped. By configuring the lucky numbers to be selectable by the player, the combination of numbers (symbols) displayed on the presentation unit 331 when a special symbol wins can be set to the player's preferred numbers (symbols). In other words, the winning symbol can be changed to suit the tastes of each player.

Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol indicating the current number of reserved balls is displayed inside a vertically long, substantially rectangular small area Ds1 formed on the left side when viewed from the front. The example of FIG. 90(a) shows a case where the number of reserved balls is four, so four reserved symbols indicated by black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. By visually checking the number of reserved symbols, the player can easily recognize the number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), when the lottery of special symbols is started, a variable display of symbols is executed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the presentation section 331. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display section (see FIG. 90(b)). FIG. 90(b) shows that in the variation display of misses, numbers different from the lucky numbers ("8" and "1") are displayed on the display section 331b and the display section 331c, and the display section 331a and the display section 331c An example is shown in which lucky numbers ("17" and "2") are displayed in the section 331d.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), when a losing combination is stopped and displayed on the presentation unit 331, the word "Sorry..." is displayed in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that the result of the lottery for this special symbol was a losing combination.

The numbers displayed on each display unit 331a-331d of the presentation unit 331 are set in different ways depending on whether they are lucky numbers or not. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(b), when any number defined as a lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in white (display units 331a, 331d). On the other hand, when a number other than the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black (display units 331b, 331c). By changing the display mode of the numbers depending on whether they are lucky numbers or not, it is possible for the player to more easily recognize whether the numbers displayed on each display unit 331a-331d are lucky numbers or not.

In this control example, the lucky numbers are displayed as white numbers and the numbers other than the lucky numbers are displayed as black letters, but this is not limited to this. For example, the lucky numbers may be displayed in red letters to make it easier to distinguish whether they are lucky numbers or not, or the background of the lucky numbers may be set to red and the background of the numbers other than the lucky numbers may be set to white to make it easier to distinguish whether they are lucky numbers or not, or the font size of the lucky numbers may be increased to make it easier to distinguish whether they are lucky numbers or not.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, one of five types of lucky numbers is displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91(a), among the five lucky numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”), “17”, “25”, “ 2" and "13" are each displayed as white numbers. In addition, a lucky number is displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d, and the words "Success!!" are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents make it easy for the player to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot.

In this control example, a jackpot is notified by displaying four of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81, one on each of the display sections 331a to 331d. , but not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is notified by simply displaying the same number on each of the display sections 331a to 331d without specifying a lucky number. As a result, you only need to focus on whether or not the same numbers match, and there is no need to compare the lucky number with the numbers displayed on each display section 331a to 331d, so you can better understand whether or not you will hit the jackpot. It can be made easier. Further, for example, the variable display of the symbols does not necessarily need to be executed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d, and the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute the variable display of the symbols. Thereby, each of the display sections 331a to 331d can be omitted, so the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Furthermore, by reducing the number of parts, the yield rate during production can be improved. Furthermore, the failure rate can be reduced.

Next, the effects executed in the event of a jackpot in "normal mode" will be described with reference to Figures 91(b) and 92. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has an opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which the first variable winning device 82a opens for 0.6 seconds and closes for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round, and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the first variable winning device 82a opens for 0.052 seconds only once per round. Figures 91(b) and 92 will describe the jackpot effects when opening pattern A is set.

FIG. 92(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in a jackpot in which opening pattern A is set. Here, if a jackpot type in which opening pattern A is set in the "normal mode" is won, first, the drive side sliding member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected. placed in position. Thereafter, the first variable prize winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern A. By connecting the drive-side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all the balls that have won into the first variable prize winning device 82a can be transferred to the first passage forming member. 520 to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. In this control example, each time the ball that entered the first variable prize winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (every time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422). , a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set is executed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Get the lucky numbers!!" Also, the lucky numbers displayed when announcing a big win continue to be displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d even during the big win. Furthermore, the performance unit 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 performs a variable display of the symbols. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set by displaying the remaining one number of the five lucky numbers (see small area Ds2) different from the numbers displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d on the performance unit 422a. The variable display of the symbols performed on the performance unit 422a is performed by stopping the display every time the ball reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c).

92(a) is a diagram showing a case where a ball that entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lift unit 400 and a miss is notified. As shown in FIG. 92(a), when a miss is notified, a number "3" different from the lucky number (see small area Ds2) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed stationarily on the performance unit 422a. In addition, the word "Fail..." is displayed on the large area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that it is not yet determined whether or not a time-saving state will be granted after the end of the jackpot. Even if a miss is notified, if the opening period of the opening pattern A remains, the variable display of the pattern is resumed again on the performance unit 422a (see FIG. 91(b)). That is, the more the ball enters (wins) the first variable winning device 82a, the more variable displays are executed, so that the player can be made to actively want to win the first variable winning device 82a. This can increase players' motivation to participate in big win games.

92(b) shows a case where the ball that entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the time-saving state of the normal pattern is notified. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when it is determined that the ball has passed through the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, one type of lucky number, "7", is displayed on the performance unit 422a. That is, of the five types of lucky numbers, a number different from the four types of lucky numbers displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d to notify a jackpot is displayed on the display unit 422a. In addition, the words "Great success! Get a roulette chance!" are displayed on the large area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. These displays allow the player to easily recognize that the game will move to "preparation mode" (time-saving state of the normal pattern) after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this control example, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed on the production section 422a when the transition is not made to the "preparation mode", and a number (design) different from the lucky number is displayed when the transition is made to the "preparation mode". Although the configuration is such that one of the numbers (designs) is displayed on the presentation section 422a, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image of a wall may be displayed on the effect section 422a at the start of a jackpot, and an effect may be performed in which the displayed wall gradually collapses each time the passage of a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c. The more the wall collapses, the more the lucky number displayed behind the wall becomes exposed, and when the wall collapses completely, the lucky number can be obtained (the "preparation mode" is announced). It's okay. In this way, each time the sensor member 422c detects a ball that has won a prize into the first variable winning device 82a, an effect is performed in a manner that makes it seem as if the winning of a lucky number is approaching, thereby giving the player a chance to win a prize. On the other hand, it is possible to make the ball hit more aggressively during a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to participate in the jackpot game.

In this control example, when notifying the "preparation mode", the lucky number is displayed on the production section 422a, but the numbers (symbols) displayed on the production section 422a are not necessarily lucky numbers. It is not limited to numbers. A symbol unrelated to the lucky number may be displayed, for example, a symbol with the letter "V" may be displayed to notify the transition to the "preparation mode".

In this control example, in a jackpot where "opening pattern A" is set, the variable display is executed every time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the variable display (" It is not necessary to notify whether or not to shift to "preparation mode". For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is performed only once during a jackpot. Specifically, for example, an effect (fluctuating display) is executed to indicate whether or not a lucky number is displayed when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) pass the sensor member 422c. Good too. With this configuration, the ball can be hit more actively in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the jackpot game. In this case, if the number of balls that have passed through the sensor member 422c is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) by the end of the final round of the jackpot, the system will switch to the "preparation mode" during the ending period. It may be possible to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode", or it may be configured to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" when the jackpot ends and the first variable display is executed. As a result, even if a predetermined number of balls cannot be entered into the first variable winning device 82a during a jackpot, it is possible to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". This allows the player to accurately grasp the gaming status after winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the number of balls to be won into the first variable winning device 82a before the production (fluctuating display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed does not need to be fixed every time, and can be set to "open pattern A". It may be changed by a lottery or the like every time a jackpot is set.

In this control example, in a jackpot where "Opening Pattern A" is set, the variable display is executed each time the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c, but this is not limited to the above. The variable display may be executed each time the sensor member 422c detects the passage of the ball a predetermined number of times (e.g., two or five times). By configuring in this way, even if balls consecutively enter the first variable winning device 82a, a sufficient time interval can be left between the completion of each variable and the start of the next variable (preventing the conditions for starting the next variable from being met during a variable). This allows the player to more reliably check the results of each variable display.

Although not shown in the figures, in the case of a jackpot with an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the reel is opened only once for 0.052 seconds per round, whether or not the reel will transition to "preparation mode" is immediately notified. In other words, if the reel transitions to "preparation mode" after a jackpot, a lucky number is displayed on the presentation section 422a when the first variable winning device 82a opens, regardless of whether the ball has won. On the other hand, if the reel does not transition to "preparation mode", a number (design) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a opens.

The jackpot for which this "opening pattern B" is set will be explained in detail. The jackpot for which "Opening Pattern B" is set consists of a 3-second opening period, a 0.052-second round period (2 rounds), a 0.5-second interval period, and a 3-second ending period. has been done. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. Using this 6.6 seconds, the fluctuating display of symbols is executed in the presentation section 422a. When shifting to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the production section 422a after 5.6 seconds have elapsed, and continues to be displayed for about 1 second remaining after the jackpot. This allows the player to easily recognize that the game has entered the "preparation mode." On the other hand, when shifting to the "normal mode" after hitting the jackpot, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the presentation section 422a. This allows the user to easily recognize the transition to the "normal mode." By executing the effect as to whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" during the jackpot when the "opening pattern B" is set, attention can be drawn to the effect part 422a during the jackpot period. That is, even if "opening pattern B" is set in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened only for a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is extremely difficult to win prize balls), During the open period, the player's attention can be diverted from the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the "opening pattern B" has become a set jackpot, so that it can be recognized as if it were one aspect of the variable performance selected in the "normal mode". In other words, the player can be made to recognize that the mode is directly transitioning from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode." Therefore, it becomes a jackpot in which "opening pattern A" is set, and during the jackpot, a lucky number is given to the production unit 422a by the time-saving suggestion performance executed by placing a ball into the first variable winning device 82a. Since it is possible to make the player aware that there is a possibility of transitioning to "preparation mode" without going through the multiple steps of displaying the It can make you feel like. Therefore, the player's motivation for playing the game can be further improved.

Next, referring to Figs. 93 to 96, an example of the presentation in the case where the mode transitions to the "preparation mode" after the end of the jackpot (one or seven time-shortened periods are granted) will be described. As described above, in this control example, when a jackpot occurs in the time-shortened state of the normal pattern, the mode transitions to the "consecutive mode" (the time-shortened state of the normal pattern that continues until the next jackpot) which is advantageous to the player with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the jackpot. In the "consecutive mode", the drawing of the special pattern 2 is more likely to be executed. When a jackpot occurs by drawing the special pattern 2, the jackpot type (the special jackpot H to K, the normal jackpot B) that opens the second specific winning port 65a is selected, so that the player can win more prize balls. Therefore, the player can play with the transition to the advantageous "consecutive mode" as one of his goals.

To transition from "normal mode" to "consecutive win mode", it is basically necessary to transition to "preparation mode" and win a jackpot during this "preparation mode". For this reason, whether or not a jackpot is won in "preparation mode" determines the degree of advantage a player has playing this pachinko machine 10, and is therefore one of the most important aspects of the game. For this reason, in this control example, in this "preparation mode", a relatively large-scale (flashy) "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" (see Figures 94 and 95) is executed, which involves the rotation of the rotating member 640 (see Figure 45).

...

Specifically, the "success mode suggestion production" includes a production that sets (lights up) a winning pocket (lucky number increase production) and a production that throws ball B into any pocket of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance). It consists of a performance (direction) and an ending performance. In the lucky number increase performance, each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers). By increasing the number of winning pockets, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to shift to the "consecutive game mode", thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the lottery to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket, whether the transition to "Continued Game Mode" is confirmed (if the winning of a certain variable jackpot is changing, or if there is a "Continuous Game Mode" in the pending ball) The lottery probability of increasing the number of winning pockets is varied depending on whether or not there is a probability-variable jackpot (in the middle). Specifically, if the transition to the "continuous shot mode" is confirmed, the number of hit pockets increases with a high probability (25% each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a). is determined. On the other hand, if the transition to "consecutive home mode" is not confirmed, or if it is confirmed that the transition to "continuous home mode" will return to "normal mode" without transitioning to "consecutive home mode" (when set, the last time within a short period of time If the lottery of the special symbol is a loss), the number of winning pockets is determined to increase with a low probability (at a rate of 5% each time a ball enters the second ball entry port 640a). When the transition to the "continuous game mode" is confirmed, the number of winning pockets is more likely to be increased, and by increasing the number of winning pockets, the player's expectations for the "consecutive game mode" are improved. Can be done.

Note that before the number of winning pockets is increased, a pocket to which the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is attached is set as a winning pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 plays a role in notifying the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode" (see FIG. 91(a)) and in the "preparation mode" after the jackpot ends. In addition to the role of notifying whether or not to shift to the "continuous game mode" (see FIG. 92(b)), it also serves to notify whether or not to shift to the "consecutive game mode". Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, by knowing the lucky number, the result of each performance can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand presentation. In addition, notification of a special symbol jackpot in the "normal mode", notification of the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) executed in the jackpot, and "continuous winning mode" executed in the "preparation mode" With this notification, all performances aimed at obtaining lucky numbers will be carried out. Therefore, these three different types of notifications can be made to feel like one performance to the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance with a sense of unity.

The lucky number increase effect will be described in detail with reference to Figure 93. Figure 93(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 during the lucky number increase effect. As shown in Figure 93(a), during the lucky number increase effect, the words "Roulette chance preparation in progress" are displayed in the large area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that the roulette chance effect is being executed by the rotating member 640 configured to resemble a roulette.

Additionally, below the text "Preparing for a roulette chance," the words "Put your right hand to increase your lucky numbers!!" are displayed. By displaying this character, the player is informed that while the lucky number increase effect is being executed, by hitting the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right), the number of winning pockets may increase. Can be notified. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" in which the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can be made to hit right, so the lottery of the special symbol 2, which is advantageous for the player, is executed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. It becomes easier. Therefore, since the game can be played under conditions that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Figure 93 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers) increases during the lucky number increase performance. As shown in Figure 93, when a winning ball (entry into the second ball entrance 640a) is detected during the lucky number increase performance and the lottery for increasing the number of winning pockets is won, an additional winning pocket (lucky number) is notified on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the words "10 GET!!" are displayed in the large area Dm. This notifies the player that one winning pocket has been added, which makes the player happy. When the increase in the winning pockets is notified, the back side of the winning pocket is set to a lit state. This makes it easy to determine the position of the winning pocket on the rotating member 640.

In addition, in this first control example, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers). The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers) when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, or depending on the elapsed time (for example, when the jackpot ends) The configuration may be such that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers) (every 3 seconds elapsed from 2) A lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers).

In this first control example, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is changed depending on whether or not the transition to the "consecutive winnings mode" is confirmed. However, variations in the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, if the transition to "consecutive winning mode" is confirmed, or if it is undecided whether to shift to "consecutive winning mode" (the number of starting winnings during the time saving state is The probability (ratio) at which the number of winning pockets is determined to increase may be different depending on the case in which the number of winning pockets is increased (if the number of winning pockets is not reached) and the case in which it is certain that the transition to the "consecutive winnings mode" will not occur. Specifically, for example, if the transition to the "consecutive game mode" is confirmed at the time of the lottery, the probability is relatively high (e.g., 25% when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a). If the configuration is such that the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased at a relatively high probability (for example, the second ball entrance 640a The number of hit pockets may be increased at a rate of 5% when the ball hits the target. In addition, if it is undetermined whether to shift to the "continuous shot mode", the probability between the above two cases (for example, a 10% ratio when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a) The number of winning pockets may be increased. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have variations in how the number of winning pockets increases, which further improves the interest in the lucky number increase effect.For example, it is not yet decided whether to shift to "continuous winning mode" or not. In this case, the probability that the number of winning pockets will be increased may be varied depending on the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode". In other words, when the "preparation mode" with one time period is set, the probability that the winning pocket will be increased is lower than when the "preparation mode" with seven time periods is set. You may. More specifically, for example, the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers) may be increased by 8% when the time period is one time, and by 12% when the time period is seven times. As a result, it is possible to predict the time period based on the increase in the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), so by increasing the number of winning pockets, it is possible to expect the game to shift to "consecutive winning mode". In addition, it is possible to make the player expect a short period of time during the 7th inning, which is advantageous for the player (there are many chances to shift to the "consecutive game mode").

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, the roulette chance performance, which is one of the performances constituting the "successive game mode suggestion performance", will be explained. As described above, this roulette chance performance is a performance for notifying whether or not to shift to the "consecutive winning mode" depending on whether or not the ball B hits and falls into the pocket.

When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, the text "Roulette Chance!!" is displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and below the text, "A ball is in a glowing pocket" is displayed. If you fall, you will be in continuous mode.'' will be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that when the ball B falls into the pocket whose back side is set to be lit among the pockets of the rotating member 640, the transition to the "success mode" occurs. .

FIG. 94(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the arm member 664 of the pitching device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65) and the ball B is performing a swinging motion on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position. In FIG. 94(b), the hit pockets of the rotating member 640 are shown hatched, and the missed pockets are shown outlined.

In the roulette chance effect, when the period of the swinging motion of ball B becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), ball B is caused to fall into the target pocket (either a missed pocket or a winning pocket). (The holding piece 677 is retracted to the retracted position). By once swinging the ball B on the holding piece 677 and dropping the ball B after the period of swing becomes small, it is possible to make the ball B seem to be falling naturally. In other words, when the ball B is performing a swinging motion on the holding piece 677, more attention can be drawn to the movement of the ball B, so that the player's interest in the roulette chance performance can be improved. In the following explanation, a series of performances from when the ball B is pitched toward the holding piece 677 until it falls into any pocket in the roulette chance performance will be referred to as a swing performance.

Figure 95 (a) shows a case where ball B falls into a missing pocket. Here, a case where ball B falls into a missing pocket is when, specifically, a swing effect is executed without a jackpot being won in the lottery for a special symbol during "preparation mode" (when a missing fluctuation is in progress or the fluctuation is stopped at the start of the swing effect). In this case, because the transition to "consecutive win mode" has not been confirmed at the start of the swing effect, control is performed so that ball B falls into the missing pocket.

If the swing effect is started without a special symbol hitting the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the rotation of the rotating member 640 causes a detached pocket (pocket shown in white) to be created directly under the holding piece 677. The ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 as it is placed. In addition, the word "Unfortunate" is displayed on the presentation section 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. This allows the player to easily understand that the transition from the "preparation mode" to the "consecutive game mode" has not been possible.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode will transition to the "consecutive wins mode" at the start of the swing effect, ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 as a hit pocket (a pocket shown with hatching) is placed directly below the holding piece 677, as shown in Figure 95 (b). In addition, the word "great success" is displayed on the effect section 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. This allows the player to easily recognize that the mode will transition to the "consecutive wins mode".

When ball B falls into a missed pocket or a winning pocket, as described above, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of ball B, and the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the on state of the limit switch, it is easy to determine whether ball B has fallen normally. When ball B's fall is detected, the rotation of the rotating member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket (pocket into which ball B fell) with a number (identification information) indicating the result of the current "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is stopped directly below the holding piece 677 as ball B falls. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the performance by observing the same position (directly below the holding piece 677) in each "consecutive mode suggestion performance". Therefore, a performance in which the result of the performance is easier to understand can be provided.

Note that the arrangement of each pocket while the rotating member 640 is rotating is determined by monitoring the outputs of each of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) arranged on the guide member 680, as described above. It is determined by the combination of That is, the type of pocket placed directly below the holding piece 677 is determined by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684). In the following description, the position directly below the holding piece 677 will be referred to as the falling position.

In this control example, while ball B is swinging on holding piece 677, the type of pocket at the drop position is identified (determined) from the combination of outputs from detection sensors A to F. Then, depending on the result of this determination, the type of pocket to be placed at the next drop position after the pocket currently placed at the drop position (the pocket adjacent to the pocket currently placed at the drop position) is determined. If the type of pocket to be placed at the next drop position matches the type of pocket into which ball B will be dropped in this swing performance (whether it is a winning pocket or a losing pocket), and the period of the swinging motion of ball B is less than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), ball B is dropped into the pocket to be placed at the next drop position.

Here, the reason why the type of pocket to be placed next at the falling position is determined based on the rotational movement of the rotating member 640, rather than the type of the pocket at the falling position, is that after it is determined that the ball B is to be dropped, the actual This is because it takes time for the ball to reach the pocket where it fell. That is, this is because there is a time lag between when the drive motor (holding piece motor) 675 is driven to move the holding piece 677 to the retracted position and when the ball B actually falls. If the configuration is such that the drop of ball B is controlled (movement of the holding piece 677 to the retracted position) by determining the type of pocket at the falling position, the time until ball B actually falls will become longer. For example, there is a possibility that the ball B may fall after passing the targeted pocket. Further, for example, while the ball B is falling down the throwing path 655a, the division plate 647 provided on the right side of the pocket placed at the falling position in the front view moves due to a rotational movement, so that the ball B is thrown. There is a possibility that it will be caught between the passage 655a and the partition plate 647, and the rotational movement of the rotating member 640 will be hindered.

In contrast, in this control example, the type of pocket to be placed in the next drop position is determined, and the drop control of ball B based on the determination result is performed before the pocket is placed in the drop position. In other words, when dropping ball B, the holding piece 677 can be immersed in the immersion position at a timing that allows the ball to be dropped sufficiently into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the drop position). This makes it possible to more reliably drop ball B into the pocket of the targeted type. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) ball B from falling into a winning pocket even though there is no transition to the "consecutive win mode", or, conversely, to prevent ball B from falling into a missing pocket even though the transition to the "consecutive win mode" has been confirmed.

Note that in this control example, the type of pocket to be placed next to the falling position after the pocket currently placed at the falling position is determined, and the falling control of the ball B is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, the type of the pocket two or three pockets ahead from the current falling position may be determined in advance, and the fall control of the ball B to the determined pocket may be executed. With this configuration, the drop control can be executed with more margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

The rotation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the detection that the ball B has fallen into a missed pocket or a winning pocket, and when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the stop, an ending indicating the end of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is started. In the ending, the result of the performance is notified again on the third pattern display device 81, and the rotating member 640 is rotated in the opposite direction to the direction of the rotation in the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" (i.e., clockwise direction when viewed from the front). This rotation continues until the rotating member 640 is positioned in a position (e.g., five pockets in the counterclockwise direction) where the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled into the return passage 655b. During the rotation of the rotating member 640, when the pocket into which the ball B has fallen is positioned in the upper right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the return passage 655b, the ball B falls from the opening of the pocket into the return passage 655b. When ball B falls into return passage 655b, it rolls along the slope of rolling section 655b1 and is placed in ball holding section 652. In this way, by returning ball B to a state in which it can be thrown by throwing device 650 during the ending, it is possible to execute an effect in which ball B falls into one of the pockets in each "consecutive win mode suggestion effect."

In addition, when the rotation operation for returning the ball B to the ball holding part 652, which was performed during the ending, is completed, the rotation member 640 remains in a stopped state until the "successive shot mode suggestion performance" is performed next time. drooping That is, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the "success mode suggesting performance" is completed differs depending on the pocket into which the ball B has fallen. By configuring the rotating member 640 to simply rotate five pockets from the position where the ball B was dropped without returning it to a fixed position, the time required to complete the rotating operation can be shortened. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be reliably ended during the ending of the "successive game mode suggestion performance".

Next, referring to FIG. 96, we will explain the add-on effects that are executed in "normal mode" to make the player look forward to transitioning to "preparation mode" or "consecutive win mode". "Add-on" here means adding to the number of winning pockets (number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect of the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect", and if the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" is executed before all reserved balls are used up, the number of winning pockets is increased by the number added in the add-on effect. By adding on winning pockets (lucky numbers), it is possible to make the player feel as if it is easier to win in the roulette chance effect, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the roulette chance effect.

Whether or not to execute the top-up performance is determined by a lottery (top-up lottery) that is executed when the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 is reserved in the "normal mode". In this top-up lottery, the percentage at which the top-up performance is determined varies depending on the contents of each reserved ball. Specifically, when the reserved balls contain a lottery result corresponding to a transition to the "preparation mode" (a jackpot in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set) and a lottery result corresponding to a transition to the "consecutive mode" (a jackpot with a probability of a special jackpot during a time-saving state of normal symbols) (when the roulette chance performance is confirmed to be successful), the top-up performance is determined to be executed with the highest percentage (25%). On the other hand, when the reserved balls do not contain a lottery result corresponding to a transition to the "consecutive mode" or a lottery result corresponding to a transition to the "preparation mode" (when the roulette chance performance is not executed), the top-up performance is determined to be executed with the lowest percentage (5%). Furthermore, if the reserved balls do not contain a lottery result corresponding to a transition to "consecutive mode" but only a lottery result corresponding to a transition to "preparation mode" (when only the execution of the roulette chance effect is confirmed and the effect result is unconfirmed), the execution of the additional effect is determined at a rate intermediate between the two cases mentioned above (15%).

In this way, the more advantageous the lottery results contained in the reserved balls are for the player, the more likely it is that the execution of the added effect will be decided, so that when the added effect is executed, the player can expect that using up the reserved balls will result in an advantageous state for the player. This can increase the player's motivation to play.

Next, a specific aspect of the additional performance will be described with reference to FIG. 96(a). As shown in FIG. 96(a), when the reserved balls increase in the "normal mode", the reserved patterns (patterns displayed as black circles) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 increase by one to three. Also, when the execution of the additional performance is decided by the additional lottery executed in response to the increase in the reserved balls, the characters "Added!! +1" are displayed in the large area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and "+1" indicating the cumulative number of additional performances is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. When the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is executed, the display of the number of additional performances in the small area Ds2 continues to be displayed until the performance is executed in which the winning pockets are increased by the number of additional performances in the "consecutive mode suggestion performance". On the other hand, if the added effect is executed but the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" is not executed (if the reserved balls do not include a jackpot for which a time-saving state is set), the cumulative added number will continue to be displayed until the reserved balls that triggered the execution of the added effect are used up (the lottery for the special pattern based on the reserved balls ends).

FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when one winning pocket (lucky number) is added as a result of the additional effect, and after that, the "consecutive shot mode suggestion effect" is started while the reserved balls are being used up. be. As described above, the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance" is executed when a special symbol hits the jackpot in the "normal mode" and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, at the start of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance", the lucky numbers (i.e., "17", "25", "2", "13") displayed at the time of notification of the jackpot are displayed on each display section 331a to 331d. symbol) continues to be displayed, and furthermore, the lucky number (i.e., the symbol "7") that was displayed when notifying the production section 422a of the "preparation mode" continues to be displayed (see FIG. 96(b)).

In addition, when the "Continued Game Mode Suggestion Performance" is started with the addition being added, as part of the lucky number increase performance, a performance will be executed to notify the added lucky number in the addition performance during the "Normal Mode". Ru. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the words "Added lucky number" are displayed in the large area Dm. Then, the words "5GET!!" are displayed below the characters. This character is displayed inside the speech bubble that appears from where the cumulative number of additions is displayed, so the player can confirm that the lucky number added by the addition effect was "5" before hitting the jackpot. be able to recognize that. Further, the pocket of the rotating member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this performance is newly set as a winning pocket. That is, the pocket numbered "5" is set to the lit state. By executing a performance that increases the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), it is made to feel as if there is a higher possibility of being notified of a win (transition to "continuous winning mode") in the subsequent roulette chance performance. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the roulette chance performance.

In this way, in this control example, in "normal mode", an additional effect is provided that is more likely to be executed the more lottery results that are advantageous to the player are pending. This allows the player to anticipate a transition to various advantageous states simply by executing the additional effect. For example, the additional effect is more likely to be executed when a jackpot type that sets "preparation mode" after a jackpot is pending, so the player can play with a stronger expectation of hitting a jackpot than usual (when no additional effect is executed). This is because the expectation of transitioning to "preparation mode" increases if a jackpot is hit.

In addition, if the player wins the jackpot as expected, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation level for moving to the "preparation mode" is higher than normal (if no additional effect is executed). , it is possible to make the player more strongly expect that the lucky number will be displayed on the production section 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, it is better to hold the lottery results corresponding to the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" compared to when the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" has not been confirmed. Since the execution rate of additional effects is configured to be high, when the "preparation mode" is announced as expected by the player, the player has a higher expectation of shifting to the "consecutive game mode" than usual. It can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of anticipation for the transition to the "consecutive game mode". Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to gradually create a sense of expectation in the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, there are two cases: a case in which the transition to "continuous shot mode" is determined within the range of the held balls, and a case in which the transition to only the "preparation mode" is determined within the range of the held balls. , the percentage (probability) of additional effects being executed was different in three cases: the case where the game did not even shift to "preparation mode" (25%, 10%, and 5%, respectively), but the additional effects were executed. The lottery probability of whether or not the result is true may be divided into more detailed cases. More specifically, for example, if all the reserved balls are out, an additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, and the lottery results corresponding to the jackpot are included in the reserved balls, and the jackpot type is It may be configured such that an additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 5% when only a jackpot type that shifts to the "normal mode" after a jackpot is included. In addition, if the reserved balls include a jackpot type that moves to "preparation mode" and it is confirmed that it will not shift to "consecutive shot mode" at the time of the additional lottery, 7% It may be configured such that the additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of . Here, the case where it is certain that the transition to "continuous winning mode" will not occur means, for example, when only the lottery results corresponding to the jackpot type that is awarded for a short period of time are held, and the winning This is the case, for example, when an additional lottery is executed due to newly reserved balls corresponding to the lottery result. Furthermore, if only the transition to "preparation mode" is confirmed at the time of the additional lottery, the additional effect is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, and the transition to "consecutive game mode" is configured. If the transition is confirmed, the additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to divide the situation into more detailed stages and create expectations for various advantageous states. That is, at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot more strongly than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). This is because if the player hits the jackpot, expectations for the transition to "preparation mode" or "succession mode" will be high. If the player wins a jackpot as expected, the player can expect more strongly than usual that the player will be notified of the transition to the "preparation mode" at the jackpot. This is because if the player shifts to the "preparation mode" after the additional performance, expectations for the shift to the "successive game mode" will increase. Furthermore, if the player wins the jackpot as expected, he or she is more likely to be notified of the win (i.e., to move to the "consecutive winning mode") through the roulette chance effect executed in the "preparation mode." can be done.

Next, referring to Figs. 97 to 102, the lighting control of the rear LED 625 will be described. As described above, the rear LED 625 is provided to light the winning pocket of the rotating member 640 from the rear side. As shown in Fig. 97, the rear LED 625 is composed of three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, which are combined to form a ring shape when viewed from the front. Also, as shown in Fig. 97, each LED bar 625a, 625b, and 625c has six lighting areas (lighting areas A1 to A18) with four LED chips densely arranged at equal intervals. By lighting each of the lighting areas A1 to A18, it is possible to light up an area of approximately the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640. Therefore, by lighting the lighting areas arranged on the rear side of the winning pocket, it is possible to make the winning pocket look like it is lit up.

Here, the lighting of each LED chip included in the rear LED 625 is controlled by a known LED driver. This LED driver can switch the ratio of the LED's on period to its off period (DUTY ratio) and vary the lighting frequency based on the lighting control command received from the audio lamp control device 113. For example, if a lighting control command indicating an on period of 80% (DUTY ratio 80%) and a frequency of 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver repeatedly sets an on period with a time width of 80% of one cycle (1/320 seconds) and an off period with a time width of 20%. This operation continues until a new lighting control command is received.

The method of specifying the on-period by the lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described in more detail. The data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the on-period (lighting rate) is composed of multiple bits (e.g., 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means a lighting rate (duty ratio) of 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), it means a lighting rate (duty ratio) of 100%. In addition, the lighting rate data is set so that the lighting rate increases at equal intervals as it moves from 00H to FFH. For example, if 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting rate will be 50% (i.e., 128/255).

The reference signal (synchronization signal) that serves as the basis for the LED lighting frequency can be generated by the LED driver itself (set to free-running) at a frequency specified by the lighting control command, or it can be configured to use a synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) input from outside the LED driver. In addition, whether to use free-running or an external synchronization signal can be specified by the lighting control command, and if an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, there is no need to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

In addition, in one cycle of turning the LED on and off, the position of the on period can be varied by the lighting control command. In other words, the on period of the LED can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, and the off period of the LED can be set after the on period ends, or, for example, the off period of the LED can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, and the on period can be set after the off period ends.

A specific example of a lighting control command that sets the position of this on-period will be described in detail. The set start position of the on-period is specified, for example, by 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and the 8-bit data can be used to specify which section the on-period will start from. If the data specifying the position of the on-period is 00H, the on-period will start from the first section of the 255 equal parts of one cycle (i.e., at the same time as the start of the cycle). Also, if the data specifying the position of the on-period is 1EH (i.e., 30 in decimal notation), the on-period will start from the 31st section of the 255 equal parts of one cycle.

The lighting control command also includes data that specifies the lighting area. That is, some or all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 can be specified to set the lighting rate, lighting frequency, lighting phase, and the like. The lighting area is specified, for example, by 3 bytes (24 bits) of data. Specifically, bits corresponding to each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 are set (for example, lighting areas A1 to A18 are associated in order from the least significant bit), and the lighting state specified by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver for the lighting area corresponding to the on bit.

In this way, the LED driver for controlling the LED in this embodiment is configured to be able to accept a lighting control command that includes multiple pieces of data. This multiple pieces of data are output using a serial transfer method such as the I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to output a signal corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as the lighting rate, and a signal (serial clock) indicating what data (which bit of data) is the serial data currently being output.

More specifically, for example, the audio lamp control device 113 sends, as serial data, 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the specified lighting area, and corresponding to the lighting frequency. 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the on-period, etc. are output. For example, each time the LED driver receives 8 bits of data, it outputs a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that the data has been received normally to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 waits until it receives an ACK, and when the ACK is received, outputs the next 8 bits of data. This makes it possible to prevent data from being missed. Furthermore, the output order of each type of data output by the audio lamp control device 113 is fixed each time, and the order of the data types output from the audio lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. , it is possible to easily understand what data has been received. Each piece of data is output in synchronization with a serial clock that repeats on (1) and off (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, depending on whether the serial data state is on (1) or off (0) when the serial clock is on (1), the bit indicated by the serial clock in the output data is on. or off.

Here, a specific example of the serial clock and serial data will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting control command composed of a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and serial data can each be set to either on or off values. Depending on the state of the serial data when the serial clock is on (1), data of each bit forming the lighting control command can be notified. In this example, a command for setting a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% for lighting areas A1 and A2 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and serial data are set to on (1) when no data is being output. When outputting a lighting control command, the serial clock is on (1) and the serial data changes from on (1) to off (0). This displacement allows the LED driver to easily recognize that a lighting control command will be notified from now on.

When the serial data shifts from on (1) to off (0) and notifies the start of output of the lighting control command, first, lighting area data (data specifying which of lighting areas A1 to A18 data is to be output) is sent. is output. This data is composed of 24 bits and is output in three parts of 8 bits each. As shown in the figure, the serial data is set on while the serial clock repeats on and off twice after the start of output of the lighting control command is notified. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and 1st bit of the lighting area data are on. Although not shown in the drawing, after that, the serial data is set to off while the serial clock repeats on and off 22 times. That is, it is notified that the 3rd to 24th bits of the lighting area data are all off. This allows the LED driver to easily recognize that the current lighting control command is a command to notify the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th bit and 1st bit of the lighting area data. Can be done.

Note that the on-period of serial data is configured such that its start period is earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and its end period is later than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be. This makes it possible to more reliably keep the serial data on during the period when the serial clock is on. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the LED driver from determining that OFF data has been received even though ON data has been output, and various data can be notified more accurately. For the same reason, the start of the serial data off period is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end period is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be slow.

The lighting area data is output in three parts, each of which is 8 bits, and when an ACK is returned from the LED driver for each of the three outputs (notifying the LED driver that each of the 8 bits of data has been received normally), the 8 bits of data are then output as lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, a lighting rate of 100% (11111111B in binary notation) is notified, so the serial data is set to on while the serial clock is set to on 8 times. This allows the LED driver to be notified of "11111111B" as lighting rate data. Although not shown in the figure, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating the start position of the on period, etc.) are also output according to the same rule. Then, when all the data constituting the lighting control command has been output, first the serial clock is set to on (1), and then the serial data rises from off (0) to on (1). When the serial data rises from the OFF (0) state to the ON (1) state while the serial clock is in the ON (1) state, the LED driver can be notified that all data has been output.

In this way, in this control example, by using two types of signals, the serial clock and the serial data, it is possible to accurately notify the lighting state. Since there is no need to use different wiring for each type of data, the number of wiring can be saved. Therefore, the unit cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

The LED driver is not limited to one that accepts the lighting control command of the above-mentioned aspect. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the on-period with a simpler lighting control command may be used. For example, an LED driver that can accept a lighting control command that corresponds to each bit of 8-bit data with the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts may be used. Specifically, the sections that are earlier in time are associated in order from the lowest bit, and the section corresponding to the bit with data of 1 is set to the lighting state, and the section corresponding to the bit with data of 0 is set to the extinguished state. For example, if the control data is 07H (i.e., 00000111B in binary notation), of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts, the first three sections are set to the lighting state, and the latter five sections are set to the extinguished state. This simplifies the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver, thereby reducing the processing load of the MPU 221. In addition, an LED driver that can change the LED current value (anode voltage value) of each lighting area A1 to A18 may be used.

Figure 98 shows a state in which lit areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to a lit state (lighting rate 100%), and the other lit areas are set to an unlit state (lighting rate 0%). Note that the dotted line in Figure 98 indicates the outline of the rotating member 640 disposed in front of the rear LED 625. As shown in Figure 98, the arrangement of each divided member DV (each pocket) disposed in the first section S1 (see Figure 54) in which the divided members DV (each pocket) are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a first interval matches the arrangement of the lit areas A1, A2, A12 to A18.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the appearance of the rotating member 640 when set to the lighting state shown in FIG. 98. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 arranged on the front side thereof appear to be shining. (The hatched area in Figure 99). In this way, by setting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, it is possible to make the winning pocket look shiny. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish between winning pockets and missing pockets from their appearance.

The rear LED 625 is controlled to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640, centered on the rotation axis O of the rotating member 640. Therefore, while the rotating member 640 is rotating, a lighting area with a lighting rate of 100% can be made to follow the winning pocket, so that the winning pocket can be kept illuminated in the roulette chance presentation. This can prevent (suppress) the loss of the correspondence between the lighting position and the winning pocket, causing the player to mistakenly identify a winning pocket for a losing pocket.

As described above, the rotating member 640 has a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a second interval narrower than the first interval, and a total of 30 divided members DV are formed in a circular ring shape in the front view. In contrast, the rear LED 625 has 18 lighting areas arranged at equal intervals. In other words, while the rear LED 625 rotates once, the rotating member 640 can only rotate 18/30 times, so the type of each divided member DV (pocket) and the type of lighting area arranged on the rear side of that divided member DV (pocket) will differ depending on the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the examples of Figures 98 and 99, the lighting area A17 is set to a lighting rate of 100%, so that the pocket P2 appears to be illuminated. However, if the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625 are rotated in this state until the back LED 625 makes one revolution, the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 will change. That is, while the back LED 625 makes one revolution, the rotating member 640 moves by 18 pockets, so the type of pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 will change to pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is simply kept illuminated, the pocket that appears to be illuminated will change every time the back LED makes one revolution, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the back LED makes one third revolution (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the winning pocket is controlled so that it always appears to be illuminated. More specifically, each time any of the LED bars coincide with the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar that coincides with that correction section RA is corrected (switched) according to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotating member 640.

The correction section RA is a section that is hidden from the player's view by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 that is positioned in the raised position. Therefore, even if the lighting state of each lighting area positioned in the correction section RA is switched, it is impossible (difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switch. In other words, the winning pocket always appears to be illuminated to the player. This allows the player to more reliably distinguish between winning pockets and losing pockets based on the appearance of the pockets.

Next, referring to Figs. 100 to 102, the correction (switching) of the lighting state will be described with a concrete example. Fig. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as winning pockets. In this control example, when the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" starts, the lighting control of each lighting area starts when the arrangement of the LED bar 625a matches the correction section RA for the first time after the rotating member 640 is rotated. Here, whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are arranged in a matching state is detected by a rotation position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the rear LED 625.

In the example of FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is initially positioned to coincide with the correction section RA after the rotating member 640 starts rotating, the pocket positioned at the drop position is pocket P1 (see FIG. 100(b)). In this case, the types of six pockets (pockets P25-P30) in the direction of the rotation from pocket P1 (whether they are winning or losing pockets) and the types of 12 pockets (pockets P1-P12) in the opposite direction to the direction of the rotation are read out, and the lighting state corresponding to each pocket type is set for each lighting area A1-A18. That is, the types of pockets P25-P30 are read out, and the lighting states corresponding to the respective pockets are reflected in the lighting areas A7-A12. Also, the types of pockets P1-P12 are read out, and the lighting states corresponding to the respective pockets are reflected in the lighting areas A6-A13.

More specifically, among the pockets P25-P30, the pockets P28-P30 are winning pockets, so the corresponding lighting areas A10-A12 are set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. Also, among the pockets P1-P12, the pockets P3 and the pockets P9-P11 are winning pockets, so the lighting area A15 corresponding to the pocket P3 and the lighting areas A3-A5 corresponding to the pockets P9-P11 are set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 100(a)). As a result, among the lower half of the rotating member 640 (arrangement visible to the player), the pockets P3 and the pockets P28-P30 appear to be glowing (see FIG. 100(b)). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that these glowing pockets are winning pockets. The type of each pocket P1-P30 (whether it is a winning pocket or a losing pocket) is stored in the winning position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the rear LED 625 and the rotating member 640 at the time when the rear LED 625 has made one-third of a turn from the state shown in FIG. 100. As shown in the figure, each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 remains in the state set in FIG. 100 until it completes 1/3 rotation. That is, the lighting areas A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting area A15 rotate ⅓ at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640 while being maintained in a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. As a result, the LED bar 625b is arranged to match the correction section RA. Since the rear LED 625 rotates in the state described in FIG. 100, each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 forming the LED bar 625b has a lighting state corresponding to the type of pocket P25 to P30 (whether or not it is a winning pocket). It remains as it is. However, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the order of the pockets in the correction section RA is from pocket P13 to pocket P30. That is, if the rotation operation is continued while maintaining the state of each lighting area A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the lighting corresponding to pockets P25 to P30 will be turned on for the six pockets P13 to P18. The state will be applied. Therefore, there is a possibility that the correspondence between winning pockets and losing pockets will be disrupted, which may confuse the player.

Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction area RA, the lighting state of the lighting area forming the LED bar included in the correction area RA is corrected (switched). It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction section RA are read out from the beginning of the section (in other words, in the order of being placed in the non-correction section NA by the rotation operation). Control is performed so that the lighting state according to the type is reflected in each lighting area included in the correction section RA. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the types of all the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA from being misaligned with the lighting states of the lighting regions arranged on the back side of each pocket.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are corrected according to the types of pockets P13 to P18. As mentioned above, among the pockets P13 to P18, there are two winning pockets, P15 and P16. That is, due to the rotational operation, the third and fourth pockets among the six pockets to be placed in the non-correction section NA become winning pockets. Therefore, the third and fourth lighting areas A9 are arranged among the lighting areas A7 to A12 that make up the LED bar 625b so that the third and fourth pockets have a shiny appearance. , A10 are each set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 102). As a result, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 that will be placed in the non-correction section NA by the rotation of the rotating member 640 is changed in advance to the appearance corresponding to the type of each pocket (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, or a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%). (off state).

After this, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, each time any of the LED bars 625a-625c are placed in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area that constitutes the LED bar placed in that correction section RA is corrected. This makes it possible to always maintain the appearance of the pockets placed in the non-correction section NA according to the type of pocket (winning pockets appear bright and losing pockets appear dark). Because the player can only see a portion of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from mistaking winning pockets for losing pockets.

Next, referring to FIG. 103, a configuration for determining the period of the rocking motion when the ball B is rocking on the holding piece 677 will be described. As shown in FIG. 103(a), the front case 672, which is arranged on the rear side of the movable piece 677 and the ball B that rocks on the upper part of the movable piece 677, has an opening 678 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. Inside this opening 678, a ball detection sensor 679 is provided for determining whether the ball B is located on the near side. When the ball B is not located on the near side of the ball detection sensor 679 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 103(a)), the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes L (low). On the other hand, when the ball B is located on the near side of the ball detection sensor 679 due to the rocking motion of the ball B (see FIG. 103(b)), the ball B is detected and the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H (high). In this control example, when ball B is performing a rocking motion, the period of the rocking motion of ball B is determined based on the interval (period) at which the output of ball detection sensor 679 becomes H. For example, if the period from when the H output of ball detection sensor 679 is detected (see FIG. 103(b)) to when the next H output is detected is 1 second, this means that half the period of the rocking motion currently being performed by ball B is 1 second, so the period of the rocking motion is determined to be 2 seconds.

As mentioned above, in this control example, when ball B is performing a rocking motion, the period of the rocking motion is determined, and if the period is less than a predetermined period (1 second), ball B is allowed to fall. is configured to do so. That is, the period of the swinging motion is sufficiently short, and the ball B is dropped at a timing that does not make the player feel unnatural even if the ball B is dropped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the type of pocket into which the ball B falls is being intentionally manipulated in the roulette chance presentation. Therefore, the player can enjoy the roulette chance performance until the end without doubting the outcome of the performance.

Note that the holding piece 677 in this control example is configured with a width that is sufficient to hold the ball B above it when the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). Therefore, by immersing the holding piece 677 into the immersion position when the amplitude of the rocking motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), the ball B can be reliably dropped.

Next, the driving method of the various drive motors (upper lift motor 341, liquid crystal lift motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotation motor 631, throwing motor 665, retaining piece motor 675) will be described. These various drive motors are, for example, composed of known stepping motors, and are provided in multiple numbers corresponding to each role in order to operate each role mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a command to the motor control IC (motor driver) that includes at least the number of rotation steps, the direction of rotation (positive or negative), and the rotation speed. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding various drive motors based on the output command. Note that the motor control IC (motor driver) may be one that can set the operation for multiple drive motors with a single IC, or multiple motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided to operate the drive motors corresponding to different roles. When using a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc., can be output with information included to identify the type of drive motor.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be explained using the upper lift motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper elevating motor 341 based on the set command, it executes the operation on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 every time one step of operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) is output to notify that the process has been executed. This execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. Note that the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has moved from its origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set as the 0 step position, and its value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extrusion) position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the position moves one step in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (extended) position to the origin (retracted) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is a position to which the origin is returned upon power-on. Specifically, each accessory is equipped with an origin sensor (not shown) to detect whether it is at the origin position, and if the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor will turn on. The accessory is varied (that is, various drive motors are driven) until it is detected. This origin position becomes the reference position for the movement of each accessory. Note that the step counter described above is reset to 0 when the accessory returns to the origin position (that is, when the origin sensor is detected to be on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by 1 based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper lift motor 341) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, we will use a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, rotates once in four steps) as an example, but the actual upper lifting motor 341 rotates 90 degrees in one step. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more precisely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once per step.

First, FIG. 104(a) is a diagram showing an overview of the upper lift motor 341, which is composed of a stepping motor. The upper lift motor 341 is configured so that the parts corresponding to the excitation control data are excited by sending excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC excites the motor with excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 104(a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (i.e., any of A, B, C, and D) of the upper lift motor 341 is "1", it is excited, and if the excitation control data is "0", it is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is specified in the excitation table (see FIG. 104(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from among a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 104(b)). It is provided. This excitation counter is a loop counter that can be updated by 1 in the positive direction starting from "0", and when the value of the excitation counter reaches "3" and is updated, the value returns to "0". It has become. Every time this excitation counter value is updated, corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, each part is immediately excited based on the excitation control data (that is, the upper lifting motor 341 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the upper lifting motor 341 is opposite to that when updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (positive direction or negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory whose motion is to be set. Note that the maximum value of this excitation counter changes depending on the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once per step (that is, it takes 360 steps for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". It becomes a loop counter.

Next, specific examples of excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper lifting motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. 104(b). FIG. 104(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between an excitation table that specifies the excitation control data, and the state of the upper lifting motor 341 excited based on the excitation control data specified in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the excitation table specifies excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(b), the excitation control data for the upper lift motor 341 is specified in the order of excitation counter "0" to "3" as the sequence data for the upper lift motor 341, with "1100", 0110, 0011, and 1001. When "1100", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "0", is set, the A and B positions of the upper lift motor 341 are excited. When "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the B and C positions of the upper lift motor 341 are excited, and the motor rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the excitation counter value "0". When "0011", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "2", is set, the C and D positions of the upper lift motor 341 are excited, and the motor rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the excitation counter value "1". Furthermore, when "1001", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "3", is set, the A and D positions of the upper lift motor 341 are excited, causing the motor to rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the excitation counter value of "2". Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 104, the upper lift motor 341 rotates 90 degrees clockwise each time the excitation counter value is updated by 1 in the positive direction. Note that, as described above, when the excitation counter value is updated in the negative direction, the upper lift motor 341 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.

As mentioned above, the control of the upper lifting motor 341 has been explained using a simplified operation model, but in the upper lifting motor 341 actually used in this embodiment, the excitation counter is It can be rotated by 1 degree each time it is updated. That is, when varying each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be changed accurately.

In this way, in this control example, by setting commands to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, direction, and number of rotation steps specified by the commands. This makes it possible to realize a variety of dramatic actions using props.

Note that each accessory has a unique motion pattern (motion scenario) set according to the performance. Although details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines commands to be set for the above-mentioned motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time.

In addition, in this control example, whether or not the various drive motors have completed their operations based on the commands set to the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. In other words, whether or not the operations set to the various drive motors have completed is determined based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times an execution signal is received from the motor driver each time the motor driver sets the operation of one step, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time since the commands for operating the various drive motors were set, and to determine whether or not the operations of the various drive motors have completed based on that elapsed time.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be explained. The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 105, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform settings and the like.

To set the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. A first winning type counter C2 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a first initial value used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 139), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the ball entry timing into the first winning hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640a. A lottery for a special symbol is executed based on the various counter values stored in the common execution area. Meanwhile, the execution of the lottery for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is suspended until the lottery conditions for the special symbol are established for the various counter values stored in each reserved area. In this control example, only the drawing of special symbol 1 is reserved, and the drawing of special symbol 2 is not reserved. Therefore, when a ball is detected entering the second ball entrance 640a, the drawing of special symbol 1 is not reserved, and if the pattern is not changing, the various counter values are stored in the common execution area and the drawing of special symbol 2 is executed.

The RAM 203 also has a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), it becomes 0. It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second ball entering hole 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)). When the value matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: period (period) in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)) is composed of a first random number table for low probability times and a first random number table for high probability times, and each table includes The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B when a special pattern jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and is stored in the common execution area of RAM 203 or the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second ball entry hole 640a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that results in a big win for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37A, 37B will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special pattern jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37A, 37B will be that of a special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are 40 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 39" are the first winning random number for low probability times. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 40 out of a total of 1000 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/25".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 41 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the values "500 to 540" are stored in the first winning random number table 202a (Fig. 106(b) ) is stored in ). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 41 out of a total of 1000 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/24.4". That is, the probability of the special symbol hitting the jackpot is almost the same when the special symbol has a high probability (the probability of the special symbol is variable) and when the special symbol has a low probability. This is because in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, there is little benefit to the player if the player only wins a jackpot in the "normal mode". That is, as mentioned above, in the "normal mode", the first variable winning device 82a is opened (that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is relatively small), and it is easy to get a jackpot, and in many cases when a jackpot is achieved, After that, the game shifts to "normal mode" again without shifting to "continuation mode". Therefore, the normal mode and the jackpot where the number of prize balls that can be obtained are relatively small are likely to be repeated, so it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the "normal mode".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the player can be highly advantageous by transitioning to the "consecutive mode". In order to transition to the "consecutive mode", it is necessary to win a jackpot during the "preparation mode", and in order to transition to the preparation mode, it is necessary to win a jackpot type that grants a time-saving state in the "normal mode". Therefore, a jackpot in the "normal mode" only plays the role of transitioning to the "preparation mode", and the player does not play in the "normal mode" with the main purpose of winning a jackpot. Under these circumstances, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is extremely low compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, far from transitioning to the "consecutive mode" or "preparation mode", there may be a long period of time in which the player does not even win a jackpot, which is the previous stage of these. This may significantly damage the player's motivation to play. Therefore, in this control example, the probability of a jackpot is set to be roughly the same in the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol, making it relatively easy to win a jackpot in either case. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) a prolonged state in which a jackpot is not even reached, which is the stage preceding the "casual mode" or "preparation mode," and therefore keeps the player highly motivated to play.

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are set in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106(c)). The correspondence between the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the determined jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106(c) to 108.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “completely missed” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89), in which no reach occurs (for example, in the range of 0 to 89). The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second ball entering hole 640a. is stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the detailed variation pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main processing. Note that a variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110(b)) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table (see FIG. 110(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4 is set by the second win random number table (see FIG. 110(a)). , it is determined that the normal symbol has won if it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second win random number table (see FIG. 110(a)). In addition, this second winning random number table is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state) and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods) and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random number value that results in a winning normal symbol, and the value is "5". This random number value is stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined that a win has been won, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric device 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, the second ball entrance 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" if a normal pattern is hit, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a jackpot for a normal symbol, and the range is 5 to 204. These random number values are stored in the second jackpot random number table for high probability. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are a total of 240 random number values, and the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, if a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (normal pattern), and the second ball entrance 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640a is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the ball is more likely to enter the first winning port 64. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the second ball entrance 640a opens only "1 second x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times."

In this way, in this control example, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the probability of a normal symbol hitting is significantly lower than when the probability of a normal symbol is high, and when the probability of a normal symbol is a hit, the second ball is By reducing the number of times the opening 640a is opened and reducing the period during which the second ball entry opening 640a is opened once, the ball can enter the second ball when the probability of a normal symbol is low (i.e., "normal mode"). The structure is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entrance 640a. As a result, by letting the ball enter the second ball entry port 640a when the probability of normal symbols is low (that is, "normal mode"), a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained by hitting the jackpot (the second specific winning port 65a is opened). It is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods of aiming for the jackpot (type of jackpot). If an irregular game method is played and the second special prize opening 65a is opened and the jackpot is won consecutively, the ball payout rate will greatly exceed the ball payout rate due to the design of the pachinko machine 10. There is a risk that this may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. On the other hand, in this control example, when the probability of normal symbols is low (that is, "normal mode"), it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640a, so the game It is possible to prevent (suppress) a player from playing an irregular game method in which a player shoots a ball aiming at the second ball entry port 640 in the "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to achieve the ball payout rate as designed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 139).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

FIG. 106(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 106a, the ROM 202 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f. is provided at least.

The first win random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter C1 is stored, as described above. Specifically, 40 determination values from "0 to 39" are specified as jackpot determination values in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 41 determination values from "500 to 540" are specified as jackpot determination values in the high probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. If the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in this first win random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(b)), it is determined to be a jackpot for the special symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (FIG. 106(c)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type. They are defined in correspondence. Here, details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 106(c) to 108.

Figure 106 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b described above. As shown in Figure 106 (c), the first winning type selection table 202b is composed of a special pattern 1 winning type selection table 202b1 used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing special pattern 1, and a special pattern 2 winning type selection table 202b2 used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing special pattern 2. First, the details of the special pattern 1 winning type selection table 202b1 will be described with reference to Figure 107.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1. This special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 has 8 types of jackpots: "probable variable jackpot A" to "probable variable jackpot G" and "regular jackpot A" in association with the possible values of the first winning type counter C2. The type is specified.

More specifically, the range of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 4" is associated with "Probable jackpot A". As mentioned above, the first winning type counter C2 is a counter that can take on 1000 values from "0 to 999". Of these, the number of judgement values that result in a "Probable jackpot A" is 5, from "0 to 4", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 1, the probability of it becoming a "Probable jackpot A" is 0.5% (5/1000).

"Probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2, and the second specific winning hole 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (until 30 seconds pass or until 10 balls are won) in each round. be. If the player continues to hit the balls continuously, he or she can win enough 10 balls into the second special winning slot 65a before 30 seconds have passed, so in many cases, the player can A relatively large amount (300) of prize balls can be won. Moreover, after the end of "probability variable jackpot A", the state shifts to a variable probability state with a special symbol, and also shifts to a time saving state with a normal symbol. In addition, the time-saving state of the normal symbol awarded after the end of "Probable Jackpot A" is regardless of the state at the time of winning ("normal mode", "preparation mode", or "consecutive winning mode"). , and continue until the next jackpot. That is, after the end of the "probable variable jackpot A", the game directly shifts to the "consecutive winning mode" without going through the "preparation mode". In addition to being able to obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls, the player can directly move to the most advantageous "Continuous Shots Mode", so "Probable Variable Jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types that can be selected in the special symbol 1 lottery. , is the type of jackpot that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, especially in the "normal mode", when a jackpot is announced (lucky numbers are displayed on all of the production sections 331a to 331d), the player has strong expectations for a "probable jackpot A." can be done.

“Probable variable jackpot B” is associated with the range of “5 to 84” in the first winning type counter C2. Among the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot B” is 80 from “5 to 84”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of "probable variable jackpot B" is 8% (80/1000).

The "Probable Big Win B" is a big win with two rounds, in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) in each round. The opening time per round is a maximum of 12 seconds in total (0.6 seconds x 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the second specific winning port 65a, and since the opening period is short at 0.6 seconds per round, it is difficult to make the balls win consecutively. Therefore, compared to the type of big win in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened, the number of prize balls that can be won in one big win is smaller, so it is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls compared to the type of big win in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened.

Moreover, after the end of "probability variable jackpot B", the state shifts to a probability variable state with a special symbol. In addition, the type of the time-saving state of the normal symbol that is awarded after the end of "probable variable jackpot B" is the gaming state at the time of "probable variable jackpot B" (the time-saving state of the normal symbol, or the low probability state of the normal symbol) ). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, when a "probable variable jackpot B" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the time-saving state of the normal symbol, which continues until the next jackpot. In other words, the mode shifts to the "consecutive home mode." As mentioned above, the "consecutive winning mode" is the most advantageous state for the player, so the "probable variable jackpot B" can be achieved in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, thereby making the player happy.

On the other hand, if it becomes a "probable variable jackpot B" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, after the jackpot ends, it will shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol, which will continue until the special symbol lottery is completed 7 times. do. That is, it shifts to the "preparation mode". As described above, if a special symbol hits the jackpot in the "preparation mode", the game shifts to the "consecutive winning mode" which is most advantageous for the player with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, in the "preparation mode" to which the player shifts after the end of "probable variable jackpot B", the player can play the game with the expectation of winning the jackpot. In addition, unless you win a jackpot in the limited number of drawings (7 times), you will not be able to switch to "continuous winning mode", so you may feel anxious about returning to "normal mode" without winning a jackpot. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the transition to the "continuous game mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game in the "preparation mode".

As described above, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640a, so basically the special symbol 2 lottery is executed. Conversely, the possibility that the special symbol 1 lottery will be executed in the "normal mode" is low. However, since the drawing of special symbol 1 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, it is possible that the ``probable jackpot B'' in ``preparation mode'' may be included among the held balls when the game moves to ``preparation mode.'' There is sex. In this case, it would be harsh for the player not to shift to the "consecutive game mode" (shift to the "preparation mode"). Therefore, in this control example, when the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is extinguished during the "preparation mode" or when the ball is accidentally launched in the direction of the first ball entrance 64 during the "continuous shot mode", In order to provide relief, the system is configured to shift to the "consecutive winning mode" when a "probable variable jackpot B" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol ("preparation mode" or "consecutive winning mode"). Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game, and to make the player enjoy playing the game more. Similarly, for the other variable probability jackpots (i.e., "probable variable jackpots C to G") specified in the special pattern 1 winning type selection table 202b1, if the winning occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, "continuous" It is configured to shift to ``Manor mode''.

The range of the first winning type counter C2 from "85 to 274" is associated with a "Certain jackpot C". Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "Certain jackpot C" is 190, which is "85 to 274", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 1, the probability (proportion) of the result being a "Certain jackpot C" is 19% (190/1000).

"Probable variable jackpot C" has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a opens pattern A (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds is repeated 20 times). It is a jackpot that opens and closes according to the following. Therefore, similar to "probable variable jackpot B", the number of prize balls that can be won in one jackpot is smaller, so compared to the jackpot type in which the second specific prize opening 65a is opened, the player will receive less prize balls in terms of the number of prize balls. be disadvantageous to

As shown in FIG. 107, if a "C jackpot C" occurs in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, the game will transition to a special symbol's C jackpot state and to a time-saving state of a normal symbol that will continue until the next jackpot. In other words, it will transition to a "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if a "C jackpot C" occurs in the low probability state of a normal symbol (non-time-saving state), the game will transition to a special symbol's C jackpot state and to a time-saving state of a normal symbol that will continue until the special symbol's lottery is completed once after the jackpot ends. In other words, it will transition to a "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" that is set after the end of a "C jackpot C" has fewer lottery entries for the special symbol than the "preparation mode" that is set after the end of a "C jackpot B", so in the "normal mode" (non-c jackpot state), a "C jackpot C" is at a disadvantage to a "C jackpot B".

A “probable variable jackpot D” is associated with the range of “275 to 774” in the first winning type counter C2. Out of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot D” is 500 of “275 to 774”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of a "probable variable jackpot D" is 50% (500/1000).

The "Probable Variable Jackpot D" is a jackpot that has two rounds and in each round the first variable winning device 82a opens and closes according to opening pattern A (an opening pattern that repeats 20 times between opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds). Therefore, like the "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C," the number of prize balls that can be won in one jackpot is reduced, so it is at a disadvantage to the player in terms of the number of prize balls compared to the jackpot type in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 107, when the time saving state of the normal symbol becomes "probable variable jackpot D", the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot as well as transitioning to the variable probability state of the special symbol. transition to the state. In other words, the mode shifts to the "consecutive home mode." On the other hand, if a "probable variable jackpot D" occurs in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the variable probability state of the special symbol, but the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since the player does not shift to the "preparation mode", he is not given a chance to shift to the "successive game mode". Therefore, if you get a "probable variable jackpot D" in the "normal mode" (non-probable variable state), you will get a "probable variable jackpot A" that will directly shift to the "repeat mode", or a "probable variable jackpot that will shift to the "preparation mode" after hitting the jackpot". This is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case where the winning result is ``B'' or ``probable jackpot C''.

The range of the first winning type counter C2 from "775 to 804" is associated with "Probable jackpot E". Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of judgment values that will result in a "Probable jackpot E" is 30, from "775 to 804". Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 1, the probability (probability) of the result being a "Probable jackpot E" is 3% (30/1000).

"Probable variable jackpot E" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two, and the first variable winning device 82a opens and closes in accordance with opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds) in each round. be. The maximum opening time per round is 0.052 seconds, which is a much shorter opening period than when the second specific winning hole 65a is opened or when opening pattern A is set, so it is possible to win a jackpot. During this period, it becomes difficult to make the first variable winning device 82a win the ball, and in many cases, the jackpot is ended without even a single ball winning. Therefore, "probable variable jackpot E" is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types in terms of prize balls.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107, if a "high probability jackpot E" occurs in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, the game will transition to a high probability state of a special symbol, and will also transition to a time-saving state of a normal symbol that will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, it will transition to "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if a "high probability jackpot E" occurs in a low probability state of a normal symbol (non-time-saving state), the game will transition to a high probability state of a special symbol, just like a "high probability jackpot B", and will also transition to a time-saving state of a normal symbol that will continue after the jackpot ends until seven special symbol draws have been completed. In other words, it will transition to "preparation mode". With the exception of "Chance Special Jackpot A," which transitions directly to "Continuous Win Mode," this is a type of jackpot that continues in "Preparation Mode" (time-saving state for normal symbols) for the longest number of draws, so if you get "Chance Special Jackpot E" in "Normal Mode," it gives the player an advantage over "Chance Special Jackpot C," which has fewer draws that lead to "Preparation Mode," and "Chance Special Jackpot D," which does not transition to "Preparation Mode."

“Probable variable jackpot F” is associated with the range of “805 to 874” in the first winning type counter C2. Out of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot F” is 70 from “805 to 874”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of a “probable variable jackpot F” is 7% (70/1000).

The "Chance Vary Big Win F" is a big win that has two rounds and in which the first variable winning device 82a opens and closes according to opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which the opening lasts only once for 0.052 seconds). Therefore, like the "Chance Vary Big Win E," it is one of the most disadvantageous big win types for players in terms of the number of winning balls.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107, if a "probable jackpot F" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the game will transition to a special symbol probable jackpot state and a time-saving state of the normal symbol that will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, it will transition to a "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if a "probable jackpot F" occurs in the low probability state (non-time-saving state) of the normal symbol, the game will transition to a special symbol probable jackpot state and a time-saving state of the normal symbol that will continue until the special symbol lottery is completed once after the jackpot ends. In other words, it will transition to a "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of a "probable jackpot F" has fewer lottery draws for the special symbol than the "preparation mode" set after the end of a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot E", so in the "normal mode" (non-probable jackpot state), a "probable jackpot F" is at a disadvantage compared to a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot E". On the other hand, compared to the "Chance Random Big Win D" where "Preparation Mode" is not set, the player is given a chance to move to "Continuous Win Mode", even if only once, which is advantageous for the player.

“Probable variable jackpot G” is associated with the range of “875 to 974” in the first winning type counter C2. Out of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot G” is 100 “875 to 974”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of a "probable variable jackpot G" is 10% (100/1000).

"Probable variable jackpot G" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2, and the first variable winning device 82a opens and closes in accordance with opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds) in each round. be. Therefore, like the "probable variable jackpot E" and "probable variable jackpot F", this is one of the jackpot types that is most disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 107, when a "probable jackpot G" occurs in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, the game moves to a special symbol probable state and to a time-saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, it moves to a "consecutive mode". On the other hand, when a "probable jackpot G" occurs in a low probability state (non-time-saving state) of a normal symbol, the game moves to a special symbol probable state, but the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not set as with a "probable jackpot D". In other words, since it does not move to a "preparation mode", there is no chance to move to a "consecutive mode". Therefore, when a "probable jackpot D" occurs in a "normal mode" (non-probable jackpot state), it is disadvantageous to the player compared to a "probable jackpot A" that moves directly to a "consecutive mode", or a "probable jackpot B", "probable jackpot C", "probable jackpot E", or "probable jackpot F" that move to a "preparation mode" after a jackpot.

“Normal jackpot A” is associated with the range of “975 to 999” in the first winning type counter C2. Out of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “normal jackpot A” is 25 “975 to 999”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of "normal jackpot A" is 2.5% (25/1000).

The "normal jackpot A" is a jackpot with two rounds, in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) in each round. Therefore, like the "variable jackpot B" to "variable jackpot D", the number of prize balls that can be won is smaller than in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning port 65a is opened. On the other hand, the number of prize balls that can be won is greater than in the jackpot type in which opening pattern B is set. Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls, the "normal jackpot A" is less advantageous than the "variable jackpot A", but more advantageous than the "variable jackpot E" to "variable jackpot G".

Also, as shown in FIG. 107, if a "normal jackpot A" occurs during the time-saving state of normal symbols, the game will transition to a low probability state of special symbols, but will not transition to the time-saving state of normal symbols. In other words, it will transition to "normal mode". For this reason, if a "normal jackpot A" occurs during "preparation mode", the game will transition to "normal mode" regardless of the number of time-saving turns remaining, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to other jackpot types. Also, if a "normal jackpot A" occurs during "consecutive mode", the game will transition to "normal mode" after the jackpot, which ends the "consecutive mode", which is the most advantageous mode for the player. For this reason, in "preparation mode" and "consecutive mode", the game will transition to "normal jackpot A", which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if it becomes "normal jackpot A" in the low probability state of the normal symbol (non-time saving state), it will shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot ends, one special symbol lottery will be completed. Shifts to a time-saving state with normal symbols that lasts until . That is, it shifts to "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" that is set after the end of "regular jackpot A" has fewer special symbols drawn than the "preparation mode" that is set after the end of "probable jackpot B" and "probable jackpot E". In the "normal mode" (non-probability variable state), the "normal jackpot A" is more disadvantageous than the "probability variable jackpot B" and the "probability variable jackpot E." On the other hand, compared to "Probable Variable Jackpot D" and "Probable Variable Jackpot G" in which "preparation mode" is not set, it is advantageous for players because they are given a chance to shift to "Continuous Shot Mode", albeit only once. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the special symbol 2 winning type selection table 202b2 that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the special symbol 2 lottery results in a jackpot will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the special figure 2 winning type selection table 202b2. This special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2 has five types of jackpots: "probable variable jackpot H" to "probable variable jackpot K" and "normal jackpot B" in association with the possible values of the first winning type counter C2. The type is specified.

The range of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 4" is associated with "Probable jackpot H". Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "Probable jackpot H" is 5 (0 to 4), so if a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 2, the probability (probability) of the "Probable jackpot H" is 0.5% (5/1000).

The "Probable jackpot H" is a jackpot with two rounds, in which the second specific winning port 65a is open for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been entered). Thus, like the "Probable jackpot A", the player can win a larger number of prize balls compared to the jackpot types in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened ("Probable jackpot B-G", "Normal jackpot A"). Note that, like this "Probable jackpot H" and the above-mentioned "Probable jackpot A", the second specific winning port 65a is opened for all jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 2. Thus, when a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 2, it is more advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won than a jackpot by drawing special pattern 1 (excluding the "Probable jackpot A").

Also, as shown in FIG. 108, when a "high probability jackpot H" occurs, regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not the normal symbol time-saving state) the player will transition to a high probability jackpot state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols that will continue until the next jackpot. In other words, the player will transition directly to "consecutive mode". Therefore, when a "high probability jackpot H" occurs, especially in "normal mode" (non-time-saving state), it is more advantageous for the player than jackpot types that transition to "preparation mode" or "normal mode".

The value "5" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with "Probable jackpot I". Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is only one judgment value that is "Probable jackpot I", so the probability (proportion) of a "Probable jackpot I" occurring when a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 2 is 0.1% (1/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, if "Probable jackpot I" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the game will transition to a special symbol probable state and a time-saving state of the normal symbols that will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, it will transition to "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if "Probable jackpot I" occurs in the low probability state (non-time-saving state) of the normal symbols, the game will transition to a special symbol probable state, as with "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot E", and after the jackpot ends, it will transition to a time-saving state of the normal symbols that will continue until seven special symbol draws are completed. In other words, it will transition to "preparation mode". With the exception of "Probable Jackpot A" and "Probable Jackpot H", which transition directly to "Continuous Win Mode", this is a type of jackpot that continues in "Preparation Mode" (time-saving state for normal symbols) for the longest number of draws, so when it becomes a "Probable Jackpot I" in "Normal Mode", it is more advantageous for the player than "Probable Jackpot C", "Probable Jackpot F", and "Normal Jackpot A", which have fewer draws that lead to "Preparation Mode", or "Probable Jackpot D" and "Probable Jackpot G", which do not transition to "Preparation Mode".

As mentioned above, when the "probability jackpot I" occurs in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal pattern, the time period is shifted to the "preparation mode" with 7 times in order to prevent (suppress) the irregular playing method of shooting balls at the second ball entrance 640a in the "normal mode". More specifically, if the "consecutive mode" is shifted to when any of the probability jackpots (i.e., "probability jackpot H-K") is obtained by drawing special pattern 2 in the "normal mode", there is a possibility that a player will shoot balls at the second ball entrance 640a (so-called right shot) even in the "normal mode" with the aim of shifting to the "consecutive mode". If the "normal mode" is directly shifted to the "consecutive mode" by an irregular playing method, there is a possibility that a number of prize balls far exceeding the designed ball payout rate will be paid out, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. Therefore, in this control example, when a jackpot is achieved by drawing special symbol 2, the game state after the jackpot is changed depending on whether the jackpot occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. This configuration eliminates the advantage to the player when the special symbol 2 is drawn in the normal state of the normal symbol (i.e., "normal mode"), and prevents (suppresses) irregular gameplay. This makes it possible to more reliably keep the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall within the design range, making it easier to make sales forecasts for the hall.

The value "6" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with a "probable jackpot J". Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is only one judgment value that is a "probable jackpot J", so the probability (probability) of a "probable jackpot J" when a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 2 is 0.1% (1/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 108, if a "probable jackpot J" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the game will transition to a special symbol probable state and a time-saving state of the normal symbol that will continue until the next jackpot. In other words, it will transition to a "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if a "probable jackpot J" occurs in the low probability state (non-time-saving state) of the normal symbol, the game will transition to a special symbol probable state and a time-saving state of the normal symbol that will continue until the special symbol lottery is completed once after the jackpot ends. In other words, it will transition to a "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of a "probable jackpot J" has fewer lottery draws for the special symbol than the "preparation mode" set after the end of a "probable jackpot B", "probable jackpot E", and "probable jackpot I", so in the "normal mode" (non-probable state), a "probable jackpot J" is at a disadvantage to "probable jackpot B", "probable jackpot E", and "probable jackpot I". On the other hand, compared to the "Chance Random Big Hit D" and "Chance Random Big Hit G" which do not have a "Preparation Mode", this gives the player an opportunity to switch to "Continuous Win Mode", even if only once, which is advantageous for the player.

“Probable variable jackpot K” is associated with the range of “7 to 974” in the first winning type counter C2. Out of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot K” is 968 from “7 to 974”, so it is a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery. In this case, the probability (proportion) of a "probable variable jackpot K" is 96.8% (968/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, if a "high probability jackpot K" occurs in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the game will transition to a high probability state of the special symbols, and will also transition to a time-saving state of the normal symbols that will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, it will transition to a "consecutive mode". On the other hand, if a "high probability jackpot K" occurs in a low probability state (non-time-saving state) of the normal symbols, the game will transition to a high probability state of the special symbols, but the time-saving state of the normal symbols will not be set, as with a "high probability jackpot D" or "high probability jackpot G". In other words, it will not transition to a "preparation mode", and there will be no chance to transition to a "consecutive mode". Therefore, if a "high probability jackpot D" occurs in the "normal mode" (non-high probability state), it will be the most disadvantageous for the player.

The range of the first winning type counter C2 from "975 to 999" is associated with "normal jackpot B." Of the 1000 possible judgment values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot B" is 25, from "975 to 999." Therefore, if a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 1, the probability (proportion) of the jackpot being "normal jackpot B" is 2.5% (25/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, if a "normal jackpot B" occurs during the time-saving state of normal symbols, the game will transition to a low probability state of special symbols, but will not transition to the time-saving state of normal symbols. In other words, it will transition to "normal mode." For this reason, just like a "normal jackpot A," if a "normal jackpot B" occurs during "preparation mode," it will transition to "normal mode" regardless of the number of time-saving turns remaining, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to other jackpot types. Also, if a "normal jackpot B" occurs during "consecutive mode," it will transition to "normal mode" after the jackpot, and the "consecutive mode," which is the most advantageous mode for the player, will end. For this reason, in "preparation mode" and "consecutive mode," a "normal jackpot B" will result, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if a "normal jackpot B" occurs in a low probability state (non-time-saving state) for normal symbols, the game will transition to a low probability state for special symbols, and after the jackpot ends, the game will transition to a time-saving state for normal symbols that will continue until one special symbol lottery is completed. In other words, the game will transition to a "preparation mode." The "preparation mode" that is set after the end of a "normal jackpot B" has fewer special symbol lottery draws than the "preparation mode" that is set after the end of a "variable jackpot B," "variable jackpot E," or "variable jackpot I," so in the "normal mode" (non-variable state), a "normal jackpot B" is at a disadvantage compared to "variable jackpot B," "variable jackpot E," or "variable jackpot I." On the other hand, compared to "variable jackpot D," "variable jackpot G," or "variable jackpot K," which do not have a "preparation mode," the game is given a chance to transition to the "consecutive mode," even if only once, which is advantageous for the player.

In this way, in this control example, multiple jackpot types are provided that differ in the number of winning balls that can be obtained and the state after the jackpot ("normal mode", "preparation mode", or "consecutive win mode"). By providing a wide variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested in which jackpot type will result if a jackpot is obtained. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this control example, even if the special symbol 2 hits the jackpot in the "normal mode", there is a jackpot that shifts to the "repeat mode" (i.e., "probable strange jackpot H") or a shift to the "preparation mode". Although it is configured to provide jackpots that transition to ``probable variable jackpot I'' and ``probable variable jackpot J'', it is not necessarily necessary to provide all of these jackpots. For example, if a jackpot is won by drawing special symbol 2, a ``probable variable jackpot K'' will be determined with a probability of 97.5%, and a ``regular jackpot B'' will be determined with a probability of 2.5%. Good too. In other words, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing special symbol 2 in the "normal mode", the system will either switch to the "normal mode" again after the jackpot (in the case of "probable jackpot K"), or the time period will be 1 after the jackpot. It may be configured such that the game shifts to the "preparation mode" for the second time (in the case of "normal jackpot B"). With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the disadvantages of hitting the ball aiming at the second ball entry port 640a in the "normal mode", so that it is possible to more reliably prevent irregular gaming methods ("normal mode"). (a game method in which a ball is hit aiming at the second ball entrance 640a) can be prevented.

Next, regarding the state transition that is performed when the jackpot type is determined based on the winning type selection table 202b1 for special symbol 1 (see Figure 107) and the winning type selection table 202b2 for special symbol 2 (see Figure 108). , will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for switching between three types of states ("normal mode", "preparation mode", and "consecutive game mode") in this control example. First, the state transition in the "normal mode" (non-time saving state), which is the most disadvantageous for the player, will be explained. This "normal mode" is shown in the upper part of FIG. 109. As shown in FIG. 109, in the "normal mode", if a jackpot is achieved, the game shifts to another gaming state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1/24.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For simplification, the jackpot probability is expressed as 1/25 in FIG. 109. As mentioned above, this "normal mode" is a low probability state (non-time saving state) with normal symbols, so the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is difficult to open, so the player basically A ball is launched aiming at the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, since the special symbol 1 lottery is executed, the jackpot type is basically determined from the special symbol 1 per type selection table 202b1.

In "Normal mode" (variable non-time saving state and non-probable variable non-time saving state), if you get a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, there is a 60% chance of a "probable variable jackpot D" (50%) or "probable variable jackpot G" (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these types of jackpots occur in the "normal mode", the game shifts to the "normal mode" again after the jackpot ends (see the upper left side of FIG. 109). That is, the "normal mode" is looped. Even if you win "Probable Variable Jackpot D" or "Probable Variable Jackpot G", the number of prize balls you can win is relatively small, so you will continue to win "Probable Variable Jackpot D" and "Probable Variable Jackpot G" (Loop "Normal Mode") ), in many cases, more balls are consumed in the "normal mode" than prize balls obtained by winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, the result is either "probable jackpot B, C, E, F" or "regular jackpot A" at a rate of 39.5%. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probable variable non-time saving state) (see the upper center part of FIG. 109). That is, since the state is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive game mode", it is more advantageous to the player than the "probable variable jackpot D" or the "probable variable jackpot G".

If the lottery results in a "Chance Special Jackpot A," which has a 0.5% chance of winning when special symbol 1 is drawn, the player will move directly to "consecutive jackpot mode" after the jackpot ends (see the upper right side of Figure 109). As mentioned above, in this "consecutive jackpot mode," the player is likely to repeatedly experience a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot, and jackpots that are likely to yield a relatively large number of prize balls ("Chance Special Jackpot H" to "Chance Special Jackpot K," and "Regular Jackpot B"), making it the most advantageous mode for the player.

In this way, in "normal mode" (non-time-saving state with special probability, non-time-saving state with special probability), in the event of a jackpot, there is a 60% chance that the game will loop back to the same state (i.e., "normal mode"), while there is a 40% chance that the game will transition to a "preparation mode" or "consecutive mode," which are more favorable than the current state. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the state after the jackpot.

Next, we will explain the state transition in the "preparation mode," which is more advantageous for the player than the above-mentioned "normal mode" (it is easier to transition to the "consecutive mode"). This "preparation mode" is shown in the center of Figure 109. Since this "preparation mode" is a time-saving state for normal symbols, the electric device 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is more likely to open. Therefore, since the player basically plays by aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is more likely to be held. However, if the lottery for the special symbol 1 is held before or during the jackpot, the lottery for the reserved special symbol 1 is executed after the "preparation mode" starts. Therefore, in the "preparation mode," if the player is playing normally, it is possible that the lottery for the special symbol 1 will result in a jackpot, or that the lottery for the special symbol 2 will result in a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 109, in "preparation mode", the mode will transition to another state if a jackpot is hit or if the time period for the normal symbols granted after the previous jackpot has elapsed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, if a normal jackpot is hit in "preparation mode", which has a 2.5% chance of being hit (if "normal jackpot A" is hit by drawing special symbol 1, or if "normal jackpot B" is hit by drawing special symbol 2), the mode will transition to "normal mode" after the jackpot ends (see bottom left center of FIG. 109). In other words, since the player will fall into a disadvantageous state, in "preparation mode", the player can be made to play in the hope that a normal jackpot will not be hit.

On the other hand, in the "preparation mode", a guaranteed variable jackpot that is won at a rate of 97.5% (if the special symbol 1 lottery results in any of the "probable variable jackpot A" to "probable variable jackpot G", and the special symbol 2 lottery) If the result is one of "probable variable jackpot H" to "probable variable jackpot K"), the mode shifts to "continuous winning mode" (see the center part of FIG. 109). Therefore, the player can expect to win a large number of prize balls through the "successive game mode", thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 109, when the set number of time-saving times (1 or 7 times of drawing the special pattern) has elapsed in the "preparation mode", the mode will transition (fall) to the "normal mode" which is less favorable than the current state, just as in the case of a normal jackpot. For this reason, it is possible to play in the "preparation mode" in the hope of winning one of the special jackpots before the time-saving times have elapsed. In general gaming machines, the time-saving state of the normal pattern merely makes it difficult to reduce the number of balls held, and in most cases, the benefit of a jackpot does not change depending on whether the jackpot occurs in the time-saving state or in the non-time-saving state. In contrast, in this control example, if a special jackpot occurs during the "preparation mode" (time-saving state), the mode transitions to the "consecutive mode", which is the most favorable mode for the player, but even if a jackpot occurs during the "normal mode" (non-time-saving state), the majority of players will loop through the most unfavorable "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which whether or not a special jackpot can be won during the time-saving state has a significant impact on the subsequent development. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the "consecutive game mode" shown in the lower part of FIG. 109 will be explained. As described above, since the "continuous winning mode" is a time-saving state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, it becomes easier for the special symbol 2 to be drawn. In addition, in many cases, the "consecutive game mode" is entered from the "preparation mode" in which the special symbol 2 lottery is likely to occur, so the "consecutive game mode" is entered with the special symbol 1 lottery being suspended. This is rare. Therefore, in the "continuous winning mode", the special symbol 2 lottery is basically executed.

As shown in the lower part of Figure 109, in "consecutive mode", there is a possibility of transitioning to another state only if a jackpot with a special symbol occurs. Specifically, in "consecutive mode", if a "normal jackpot B" occurs, which is determined with a probability of 2.5% when a jackpot is obtained by drawing special symbol 2, the game will transition to "normal mode" after the jackpot ends (see the lower left part of Figure 109). In other words, the game will fall from the most advantageous state to the most unfavorable state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is determined with a 97.5% rate from the lottery of special symbol 2, from "probable variable jackpot H" to "probable variable jackpot K," after the jackpot ends, the system will switch to "continuous winning mode" again. Transition (loop "Continuous House Mode"). Therefore, in the "continuous winning mode", as long as you continue to win any of the guaranteed variable jackpots, you can win a jackpot that allows you to win a relatively large amount of prize balls (a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened), and the next jackpot. Since the time-saving state of normal symbols that continues until the jackpot is repeated, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the "consecutive game mode", it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that he will continue to win the probability-variable jackpot, so that the player's interest in playing the game in the "consecutive game mode" can be improved. Can be done.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to shift to the "preparation mode" where it is easy to shift to the "consecutive game mode" when there is a part of the jackpot in the "normal mode". Then, by winning one of the probability-variable jackpots in the "preparation mode", the game shifts to the "continuous winning mode" after the jackpot ends. In this "Consecutive Shots Mode", it is easy to get a jackpot where you can win a large amount of prize balls, and if it becomes a probability-variable jackpot that is determined at a rate of 97.5% of the jackpots, after that jackpot, you can replay the "Consecutive Shots Mode". mode” is set. Therefore, by continuing to win the probability variable jackpot, a large amount of prize balls can be continuously obtained, which is a very advantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the player will move to this "consecutive game mode" and that the "consecutive game mode" will loop more times. It is possible to improve interest in games.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 110(a)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, as described above, in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, "5" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 110(a)). In addition, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 110(a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the winning of the normal symbol is We are determining whether or not there is.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that defines the variation time of symbol variation indicating the current special symbol lottery result in association with the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. The details of this variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 110(b) to 113.

FIG. 110(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110(b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is used to determine the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot in the normal state of the regular symbol (i.e., "normal mode"). The normal medium jackpot table 202d1, the normal medium out hit table 202d2 for determining the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure in the normal state of the normal symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol (i.e., "preparation mode"). , or "consecutive winning mode"), the time-saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is used to determine the variable time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. 202d4 is provided for determining the fluctuation time. Each of these tables will be explained in more detail with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113.

First, the normal medium jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 111(a). FIG. 111(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal medium jackpot table 202d1. As described above, this normal medium jackpot table 202d1 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot in the normal state of the regular symbol. There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns: normal winning fluctuation (7 seconds) and long winning fluctuation (10 seconds), and for each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as the judgment value. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(a), for a winning normal fluctuation (7 seconds), "0 to 99" is specified as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a winning long fluctuation (10 seconds), "100 to 198" is specified as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot during the normal state of a normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from this normal jackpot table 202d1.

FIG. 111(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal out-of-center table 202d2. As described above, the normal out-of-center table 202d2 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the normal state of the normal symbol. There are two types of deviation patterns: normal deviation (7 seconds) and long deviation (10 seconds), and for each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used as the judgment value. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(b), for the normal deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 150" is the fluctuation, and for the long deviation (10 seconds), the fluctuation is "151 to 198". It is defined as the determination value of the type counter CS1. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the normal state of the normal symbol, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from this normal medium jackpot table 202d1.

Figure 112 shows the contents of the time-saving jackpot table 202d3. As described above, this time-saving jackpot table 202d3 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time when the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (i.e., "preparation mode" or "consecutive mode") When a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, nine types of fluctuation patterns are provided: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), medium fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 112, in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, different change patterns (change times) are selected according to the previous jackpot type and the number of times (change times) of the special symbols that have been drawn since the previous jackpot ended. This is to ensure a sufficient presentation period for the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" (see FIG. 93 to FIG. 95) to be performed in the "preparation mode". The "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" performed in the "preparation mode" has a fixed presentation time of 90 seconds. However, as mentioned above, there are two maximum number of changes in the "preparation mode", 1 time or 7 times (see FIG. 107 and FIG. 108). Furthermore, even if the "preparation mode" is set to a time-saving period of 7 times, if a jackpot occurs before the end of the 7 times of changes, the mode will transition to another state before all 7 changes are displayed. Therefore, the number of times of drawing the special symbols that will continue the "preparation mode" will be different each time depending on the number of time-saving times that has been set and the results of the selection during the time-saving state.

Therefore, in this control example, the previous jackpot type and It is configured such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the number of variations (number of special symbol drawings) after the end of the jackpot. The selected variable time is the same amount of time (90 seconds, which is the production time of "Succession mode suggestion production"), regardless of the set number of time reductions (1 time or 7 times) and the lottery result during time reduction. ) is configured so that all fluctuation displays end. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure a sufficient performance period for the "successive game mode suggestion performance" executed in the "preparation mode". In addition, since the performance time of the "successive game mode suggestion performance" can be unified, there is no need to prepare multiple patterns of performance modes with different performance times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce processing load and storage capacity.

The contents of the time-saving jackpot table 202d3 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type was any of the "probable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K," the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected by referring to the consecutive jackpot table (at the time of the jackpot) shown at the bottom of FIG. 112, regardless of the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol is drawn) since the jackpot ended. This consecutive jackpot table (at the time of the jackpot) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the "consecutive jackpot mode." The reason for determining the fluctuation time as the "consecutive jackpot mode" regardless of the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol is drawn) is that there is no transition to the "preparation mode" after the "probable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K." In other words, if the time-saving state of the normal symbol is reached after the end of each of the above jackpots, the "consecutive jackpot mode" will always be selected, so there is no need to ensure the performance period for the "consecutive jackpot mode suggestion performance."

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 112, in the consecutive winning table (at the time of jackpot), short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99". There is. On the other hand, the range of the variation type counter CS1 from "100 to 198" is associated with a middle variation of 3 seconds as the variation type. In this way, in the "continuous game mode", the variable time is determined to be shorter than the variable time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so it is difficult to play during the "continuous game mode". can be executed quickly. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "continuous game mode" from becoming monotonous.

As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type was any of the "Probable jackpot B, E, or I," a different fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined according to the number of fluctuations (number of times special symbols are drawn) after the jackpot. More specifically, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing after a "Probable jackpot B, E, or I," long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This allows the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to be matched with the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance," so that the timing when the preparation mode ends and a jackpot occurs and the timing when the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" ends can be matched.

In addition, if the second special symbol lottery wins after the "probable jackpot B, E, I", the long fluctuation B (87 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, but in this control example, if the special symbol lottery is a miss in the "preparation mode", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is determined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is a miss after the "probable jackpot B, E, I" and the second lottery wins, the "preparation mode" ends after a total of 90 seconds of fluctuation time, consisting of 3 seconds of middle fluctuation and 87 seconds of long fluctuation B, and the jackpot is reached. In other words, even if the second special symbol lottery wins after the "probable jackpot B, E, I", the fluctuation time until the "preparation mode" ends can be adjusted to the 90 seconds of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance".

Similarly, if a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot in the 3rd to 7th time after "probable variable jackpot B, E, I", the variation that indicates the failure of the special symbols executed up to the jackpot. Long fluctuation C so that the total of the fluctuation time of the display (middle fluctuation) (3 seconds x number of misses) and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display indicating a jackpot (any of long fluctuation C to G) is 90 seconds. ~G fluctuation time is set. For example, if you hit the jackpot for the 5th time after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation time of the 1st to 4th miss fluctuation display will be 3 seconds each (middle fluctuation), and the fluctuation time of the 5th fluctuation display will be 78 seconds ( Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds (3 seconds x 4 + 78 seconds). Therefore, in the "preparation mode" where the time period of 7 times is set, even if you get a jackpot in any of the 1st to 7th variations (the number of special symbol drawings), you can execute it before you hit the jackpot. The sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (middle fluctuation) corresponding to the miss of the special symbol that has been given and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A to long fluctuation G) corresponding to the jackpot is calculated as "Continuous winning mode suggestion production". This can be adjusted to the 90-second performance time. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient performance period for the "successive game mode suggesting performance" executed in the "preparation mode". Furthermore, since the performance time of the "continuous game mode suggestion performance" can be unified, there is no need to prepare multiple patterns of performance modes with different performance times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce processing load and storage capacity.

If the number of times that the game changes (the number of times that the special symbols are drawn) after the end of the "Special Jackpot B, E, I" exceeds seven times, the game will select the change pattern (change time) by referring to the consecutive wins table (at the time of the jackpot) shown at the bottom of Figure 112. If the game transitions to "Preparation Mode" after the end of the "Special Jackpot B, E, I", the time-saving period is always set to seven times, so if the time-saving state of the normal symbols continues for more than seven times after the end of the "Special Jackpot B, E, I", this means that the game is in "Consecutive Win Mode".

Here, even when transitioning to the "consecutive game mode" after the end of the "probable variable jackpot B, E, I", the time-saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, so 7 times after entering the "consecutive game mode" If you hit the jackpot within that time, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) will be set. If a long variable time is set in the "consecutive game mode", the period until a jackpot is reached becomes longer, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) that "probable variable jackpot I" will be determined is extremely low at 0.1%. (See Figure 108). In addition, in the "consecutive game mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "consecutive winning mode" and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the "consecutive winning mode" is looped), "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot E" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "continuous game mode" becomes long.

As shown in FIG. 112, after the "probable variable jackpot C, F, J", if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the long variation A is set as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, it is possible to match the variation time of Long Variation A (90 seconds) with the production time of "Succession Mode Suggestion", so the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot is It is possible to match the timing at which the "performance" ends.

In addition, if the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol is drawn) after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot" is two or more times, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected by referring to the consecutive wins table (at the time of a jackpot) shown at the bottom of Figure 112. When moving to "preparation mode" after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot", the time-saving period is always set only once, so if the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues for more than two times after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot", it means that the "consecutive wins mode" is in effect.

As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type was a "normal jackpot A or B" and then a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the long jackpot A (90 seconds) is determined as the jackpot pattern regardless of the value of the jackpot type counter CS1, just as in the case where the previous jackpot type was a "certain jackpot C, F, or J." This allows the jackpot time of the long jackpot A (90 seconds) to be matched with the performance time of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance," so that the timing when the preparation mode ends and a jackpot occurs and the timing when the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance" ends can be matched.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) is two or more times, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the transition to "continuous winning mode" occurs after the end of "normal jackpots A and B" (see Figures 107 and 108), and the time saving state is set after the end of "normal jackpots A and B". This is because the "preparation mode" is always one time period.

In this way, the time-saving jackpot table 202d3 is configured so that the total time until a jackpot occurs matches the presentation time of the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation", which is 90 seconds, regardless of the number of times the time is saved in the "preparation mode" or the results of the lottery for the special symbol during the "preparation mode". This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient presentation period for the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" executed in the "preparation mode". In addition, since the presentation time of the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" can be unified, there is no need to prepare multiple presentation patterns with different presentation times. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and memory capacity.

The time-saving jackpot table 202d3 is also configured so that the time to change during the "consecutive jackpot mode" is shorter than that during the "normal mode". This allows the game to be played quickly during the "consecutive jackpot mode". In addition, the time until the next jackpot can be shortened, which prevents (suppresses) the gameplay during the "consecutive jackpot mode" from becoming monotonous.

Here, even when transitioning to the "consecutive game mode" after the end of the "probable variable jackpot C, F, J", the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, so the first time after entering the "consecutive game mode" If you hit the jackpot, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long variable time is set in the "consecutive game mode", the period until a jackpot is reached becomes longer, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) that a "probable variable jackpot J" will be determined is extremely low at 0.1%. (See Figure 108). In addition, in the "consecutive game mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "consecutive winning mode" and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the "consecutive winning mode" is looped), the "probable variable jackpot C" or "probable variable jackpot F" does not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "continuous game mode" becomes long.

Next, the time-saving miss table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. As described above, the time-saving miss table 202d4 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (i.e., "preparation mode" or "consecutive mode")). There are four types of fluctuation patterns when a miss occurs during the time-saving state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), medium fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 113, in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are selected according to the previous jackpot type and the number of times (number of fluctuations) that the special symbols have been drawn since the end of the previous jackpot. This is to ensure a sufficient presentation period (90 seconds) to execute the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" (see FIG. 93 to FIG. 95) in the "preparation mode", similar to the time-saving jackpot table 202d3.

As shown in Figure 113, if the previous jackpot type was any of the "probable variable jackpots A, D, G, H, K", the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) after the jackpot ended. ), the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the table for successive hits (when missed) shown at the bottom of FIG. 113. This table for successive hits (when losing) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the "consecutive hits mode". In addition, regardless of the number of fluctuations (number of drawings of special symbols), the fluctuation time is determined as "continuous winning mode" after "probable variable jackpot A, D, G, H, K", and then the transition to "preparation mode" This is because there is no such thing. In other words, if the normal symbol time shortens after the end of each of the jackpots mentioned above, it will always be in the "continuous winning mode", so there is no need to secure the production period (90 seconds) for the "consecutive winning mode suggestion performance". It is.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the consecutive hits table (when missed), short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the range of fluctuation type counter CS1 from "0 to 160" as the fluctuation type. There is. On the other hand, the range of the variation type counter CS1 from "161 to 198" is associated with a middle variation of 3 seconds as the variation type. In this way, in the "continuous game mode", the variable time is determined to be shorter than the variable time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so it is difficult to play during the "continuous game mode". can be executed quickly. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "continuous game mode" from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in the "consecutive winning mode", when the special symbol lottery is a miss, it is configured such that the middle variation (0.2 seconds) is less likely to be selected compared to when the lottery is a win. As a result, a relatively long (3 seconds) variation time is determined in the "continuous winning mode", thereby increasing expectations for the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the variable time, it is possible to prevent the game in the "continuous game mode" from becoming monotonous and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 113, if the previous jackpot type was any of the "probable jackpots B, E, and I," a different fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined according to the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol is drawn) after the jackpot. More specifically, if the first to sixth special symbol drawings are unsuccessful after the "probable jackpots B, E, and I," a middle fluctuation (3 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, if the seventh special symbol drawing is unsuccessful after the "probable jackpots B, E, and I," a long fluctuation G (72 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, after the end of the "probable jackpots B, E, and I," the game moves to the "preparation mode" (short period of seven times), and if all seven special symbol drawings are unsuccessful, the total fluctuation time can be set to 90 seconds (3 seconds x 6 + 72 seconds). In other words, the total time it takes for the "preparation mode" to end and for the mode to transition to "normal mode" can be made to match the duration of the "consecutive mode suggestion effect."

In addition, if the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) after the end of "Probable Variable Jackpot B, E, I" has exceeded 7, the consecutive winning table shown at the bottom of Figure 112 (Jackpot A variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the time). If you move to "preparation mode" after the end of "Probable strange jackpot B, E, I", the short time period of 7 times is always set, so after the end of "Probable strange jackpot B, E, I", 7 times This is because if the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it means that the game is in "continuous winning mode".

Here, even when transitioning to the "consecutive winnings mode" after the end of "probable strange jackpot B, E, I", the time-saving mid-loss table 202d4 is referred to, so 7 times after entering the "consecutive winnings mode" If there are consecutive misses, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. If a long variable time is set in the "consecutive game mode", the period until a jackpot is reached becomes longer, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) of "probable variable jackpot I" being determined is extremely low at 0.1%. (See Figure 108). Furthermore, in the "consecutive game mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "continuous winning mode" and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the "consecutive winning mode" is looped), "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot E" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "continuous game mode" becomes long.

As shown in FIG. 113, if the first special symbol lottery results in a miss after the "C, F, J jackpot," then long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This allows the fluctuation time of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to be matched with the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance," so that the timing when the "preparation mode" with a short time period ends and transitions to the "normal mode" can be matched with the timing when the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" ends.

In addition, if the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol is drawn) after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot" is two or more times, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected by referring to the consecutive wins table (when not drawn) shown at the bottom of Figure 113. When moving to "preparation mode" after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot", the time-saving period is always set only once, so if the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues for more than two times after the end of the "C, F, J special jackpot", it means that the player is in "consecutive wins mode".

Here, even if the game moves to the "consecutive mode" after the "consecutive mode" ends, the time-saving miss table 202d4 is referenced, so if the first special symbol lottery after the "consecutive mode" ends in a miss, a long variable time (90 seconds) is set. If a long variable time is set in the "consecutive mode", the period until the big win is long, and there is a risk that the game will be prolonged. In this respect, in this control example, when a big win is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) of the "consecutive mode" being determined is extremely low at 0.1% (see FIG. 108). In addition, in the "consecutive mode", the ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640a, so it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1. In other words, while the "consecutive mode" and the big win of the special symbol are repeated (the "consecutive mode" is looping), the "consecutive mode" will not be a "consecutive mode C" or a "consecutive mode F". This can prevent the problem of the display time being increased during actual play in the "casual win mode."

As shown in Figure 113, if the previous jackpot type was "Normal Jackpot A, B" and then you lost in the first special symbol lottery, if the previous jackpot type was "Regular Jackpot C, F, J '', long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, the variation time of Long Variation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "Succession Mode Suggestion Production", so the timing when "Preparation Mode" ends and shifts to "Normal Mode" It is possible to match the timing at which the "consecutive game mode suggestion performance" ends.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) is two or more times, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the transition to "continuous winning mode" occurs after the end of "normal jackpots A and B" (see Figures 107 and 108), and the time saving state is set after the end of "normal jackpots A and B". This is because the "preparation mode" is always one time period.

In this way, the time-saving miss table 202d4 is configured so that the total time of fluctuation until the end of the preparation mode matches the presentation time of the "consecutive win mode suggestion presentation", which is 90 seconds, regardless of the number of times the time is saved in the "preparation mode". This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient presentation period for the "consecutive win mode suggestion presentation" executed in the "preparation mode". In addition, since the presentation time of the "consecutive win mode suggestion presentation" can be unified, there is no need to prepare multiple presentation patterns with different presentation times. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and memory capacity.

Moreover, the time-saving mid-run table 202d4 is configured so that the fluctuation time in the "consecutive game mode" is shorter than that in the "normal mode". Thereby, the game can be executed speedily during the "consecutive game mode". Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "continuous game mode" from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, a description will be given of the correspondence between variable time and performance mode when the time saving number of seven normal symbols is set in the "preparation mode". FIG. 114(a) is a diagram showing a case where the time saving number of normal symbols is set 7 times and all the special symbols are out of the lottery. That is, it is a diagram showing a case where a loss is reported in a roulette chance effect.

As shown in FIG. 114(a), when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the failure is executed seven times in the "preparation mode", the fluctuation display from the first time (time saver 1) to the sixth time (time saver 6) is a 3 second change. The time is set. On the other hand, for the seventh (time saving 7) variable display, a variable time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the seventh special symbol lottery ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends because the number of time saving times has elapsed, and the mode shifts to the "normal mode". During this total of 90 seconds, the "successive game mode suggestion performance" is executed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(a), when the jackpot ends and the game transitions to "preparation mode", the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93(a) and (b)) is executed first. As described above, this lucky number increase effect is an effect in which a lottery is executed every time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a, and if the lottery is won, the lucky number (winning pocket) is increased. This lucky number increase effect has a fixed duration of 20 seconds.

When the lucky number increase effect ends, the roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 94 and 95) starts. As described above, this roulette chance performance is a performance that notifies you of whether or not to shift to the "consecutive winning mode" depending on the type of pocket into which the ball B falls. This roulette chance performance is a performance with a fixed performance time of 65 seconds. After the roulette chance performance ends, a 5-second ending performance is set to notify the end of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance". The performance time of this ending performance may be extended depending on the gaming situation in the "preparation mode".

In this way, the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" of this control example is basically a 20-second lucky number increase effect, a 65-second roulette chance effect, and a 5-second ending effect, which are executed in that order for a total of 90 seconds. The change time of each variable display (variable effect) executed in the "preparation mode" is set to match this 90-second performance time, and the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" is configured to end just when seven variable displays are executed without intervals and all variable displays have ended. This prevents (suppresses) the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" from ending even though the "preparation mode" has not ended, or, conversely, the "consecutive mode suggestion" effect from continuing to be executed endlessly even though the "preparation mode" has ended, and links the game state to the executed effects. Therefore, the executed effects can make the player aware of whether or not the current state is the "preparation mode".

By setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect can be executed taking into account the results of the lottery for all special symbols executed in the "preparation mode". In other words, if the lottery for special symbols is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after a maximum of 18 seconds, so it is possible to determine whether the lottery result for the special symbol executed the seventh time is a win or not, and to determine whether to transition to the "consecutive mode" or not depending on the result of the determination, and then to start the roulette chance effect. Therefore, there is no need to execute a process such as determining whether to transition to the "consecutive mode" during the roulette chance effect or rewriting the result during the effect, and the result can be set at the start of the roulette chance effect, thereby reducing the processing load while the roulette chance effect is being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 114(b), we will explain the presentation mode when the number of times to shorten the time for normal symbols is set to seven, and all the special symbols are drawn as misses, and the drawing of the special symbols is interrupted in the middle of the seven variable displays corresponding to the misses. That is, we will explain the case where a period occurs during the "preparation mode" in which the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640a. Note that FIG. 114(b) shows a case in which a five-second fluctuation stop state occurs between the second and third variable displays because the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640a for five seconds after the second variable display ends.

As shown in FIG. 114(b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the "preparation mode", the performance times of the lucky number increase performance and the roulette chance performance are not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, a lucky number increase performance is performed for 20 seconds, and then a roulette chance performance is performed for 65 seconds. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending performance is extended by 5 seconds to match the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the ending effect is executed for 10 seconds. In this way, in this control example, if a fluctuation stop state occurs in the "preparation mode" and the period in the "preparation mode" deviates from 90 seconds, the production time of the ending production can be varied. The structure is configured so that the deviation can be absorbed. As a result, even if a fluctuation stop state occurs, the period in which the game is in the "preparation mode" can be made to coincide with the performance period in the "successive game mode suggestion performance."

In addition, in this control example, the variable stop period is absorbed by varying the performance period of the ending performance, and the period of "preparation mode" is made to match the performance period of the "continuous play mode suggestion performance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the performance time of the lucky number increase performance may be varied, or the performance period of the roulette chance performance may be varied. Furthermore, the "consecutive game mode suggestion performance" may be configured to be interrupted when the stop of fluctuation is detected, and the performance may be restarted when the start of fluctuation is detected thereafter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(a), a description will be given of the relationship between the performance mode and the variable time when a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol in the "preparation mode". FIG. 115(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a jackpot is achieved in the fourth special symbol lottery out of the seven times the time saving number of normal symbols is set. As shown in Fig. 115(a), in the special symbol lottery executed in the "preparation mode", the first (time saver 1) to third (time saver 3) are wins, and the fourth (time saver 4) is a jackpot. Then, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time for the first (time saving 1) to third (time saving 3) fluctuation display, and 81 seconds (long fluctuation D) is set as the fluctuation time for the fourth (time saving 4) fluctuation display. be done. As a result, the total variable time can be matched to 90 seconds, which is the performance period of the "successive game mode suggestion performance". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115(a), the 20-second lucky number increase effect, the 65-second roulette chance effect, and the 5-second ending effect, a total of 90 seconds of the ``continuous winning mode suggestion effect'' is completed. You can end "preparation mode" at the right time. Therefore, since it is possible to link the gaming state and the performance to be executed, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current state is the "preparation mode" based on the performance to be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(b), we will explain the presentation mode when the number of time-saving times for normal symbols is set to 7, and the fourth special symbol drawing results in a jackpot, and the drawing of the special symbol is interrupted in the middle of the fourth variable display. That is, we will explain the case where a period occurs during the "preparation mode" in which the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640a. Note that FIG. 115(b) shows a 40-second fluctuation stop state occurring between the third and fourth variable displays, because the ball did not enter the second ball entrance 640a for 40 seconds after the third variable display (time-saving 3) ended.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the "preparation mode", the performance times of the lucky number increase performance and the roulette chance performance are not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, a lucky number increase performance is performed for 20 seconds, and then a roulette chance performance is performed for 65 seconds. Furthermore, at the start of execution of this roulette chance performance, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the "consecutive winnings mode", so in this roulette chance performance, a loss is announced (ball B falls into the lost pocket). ). In the example shown in FIG. 115(b), the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a during the roulette chance presentation to notify the player of a loss, and a special symbol is drawn to win the jackpot. For this reason, in this control example, in order to notify the transition to "continuous winning mode", a loss is reported in the roulette chance performance that is currently being executed, and after setting a 5-second ending performance as usual, It is configured to execute the roulette chance performance again (execute the revival roulette chance performance). This resurrection roulette chance performance is executed for 30 seconds, and the ball finally falls into the winning pocket to notify the player of the transition to the "continuous winnings mode". After the resurrection roulette chance effect ends, a 10-second ending effect is set. This ending performance is set in order to absorb the difference between the performance period and the "preparation mode" period due to the occurrence of the variable stop period, and the performance period can be varied according to the difference.

In this way, when the shift to the "continuous winning mode" is confirmed during the roulette chance performance that notifies the player of a loss, the player can be pleased by executing the resurrection roulette chance. In addition, even if a variable stop period occurs, it is possible to execute a performance with a length corresponding to the variable stop period, thereby preventing (suppressing) the difference between the performance period and the "preparation mode" period. can do. Note that if the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the revival roulette chance cannot be performed, a short display effect that does not involve the rotation of the rotating member 640 and ends in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) is performed. be done. If the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, this short display effect will notify you whether or not to shift to "Continuous Game Mode", so you can check whether you have transitioned to "Continue Game Mode" or not. It is possible to make sure that the person understands the information clearly.

Returning to FIG. 106(a), the explanation will continue. The game result setting table 202e is a data table that specifies information (state setting information) for determining the game state after the jackpot ends by drawing a special pattern. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is used to determine various setting values (probability bonus flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h) related to the game state after the jackpot ends based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e.

In this pachinko machine 10, based on winning a jackpot, the state setting information corresponding to the type of jackpot won is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 117) provided in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116(a)). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is held during the jackpot, and is used to read and set various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h) related to the game state after the jackpot ends from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116(b)) at the end timing of the jackpot. More specifically, it is used to select and set a combination of various setting values from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116(b)) that specifies various setting values related to the game state (probability change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h) for each value of the state setting information. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the random number value (counter value) obtained when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a (initial winning entry) is not retained until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is not determined based on that random number value (counter value). Instead, only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e based on the random number value (counter value) obtained when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a (initial winning entry) is retained during the jackpot.

Here, if the random number value for the jackpot is held during the variation pattern presentation at the time of winning the jackpot or during the jackpot state afterwards, the jackpot random number may be read by a fraudulent player, and the random number value for the jackpot may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears may be analyzed, and the player may be more likely to fraudulently win the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. In contrast, in this control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is set based on the state setting information value, so that the period during which the random number value for the special pattern jackpot is held can be limited to a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value for the special pattern jackpot to be fraudulently obtained from the outside, and therefore it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as analyzing the timing at which the random number value for the jackpot appears and winning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, and a random number is obtained when a random number value that indicates a jackpot appears, preventing fraudulent behavior that involves control to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) regarding the game state after the end of the jackpot are changed during the display of fluctuations in symbols to notify the jackpot. , instead of holding it during the subsequent jackpot (bonus game state), only the state setting information is held. Instead of providing a storage area in the RAM 203 to temporarily store all of the various setting values, it is sufficient to provide an area to hold the status setting information values, so the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

The game result setting table 202e and the status setting table 202f will be described with reference to Figs. 116(a) and (b), respectively. As shown in Fig. 116(a), the game result setting table 202e specifies the game status at the time the special symbol lottery is executed, and the value of status setting information, which is information for setting the game status after the jackpot ends, for each type of jackpot won by the special symbol lottery. Also, as shown in Fig. 116(b), the status setting table 202f specifies the setting value for the game status after the jackpot ends for each value of the status setting information.

More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, the "high probability jackpot A-K" in the time-saving state of the normal pattern is associated with "00H" as the state setting information value, and the "normal jackpot A, B" in the time-saving state of the normal pattern is associated with "05H" as the state setting information value. Similarly, the "high probability jackpot A, H" in the normal state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern is associated with "00H" as the state setting information value, and the "high probability jackpot B, E, H" in the normal state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern is associated with "01H" as the state setting information value. Furthermore, for the "high probability jackpot C, F, J" in the normal state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern, the value of the status setting information is associated with "02H", for the "high probability jackpot D, G, K" in the normal state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern, the value of the status setting information is associated with "03H", and for the "normal jackpot A, B" in the normal state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern, the value of the status setting information is associated with "04H".

116(b), in the state setting table 202f, the value "00H" of the state setting information is associated with "ON", "ON", and "0" as the probability change flag 203f, the time-saving flag 203g, and the time-saving counter 203h. Details will be described later, but the probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a probability change state, the time-saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol is in a time-saving state (i.e., "consecutive win mode") that continues until the next jackpot, and the time-saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time-saving times for the normal symbol (i.e., the number of time-saving times remaining in the "preparation mode"). Therefore, if the probability variable flag 203f is "on", the time-saving flag 203g is "on", and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "0", after the big win ends, the game will transition to a probability variable state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols that continues until the next big win (i.e., "consecutive mode"). As described above, if a probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot A to K) occurs in the time-saving state for normal symbols, or if a "probability variable jackpot A, H" occurs in the normal state for normal symbols, the game will transition directly to "consecutive mode" (see Figures 107 and 108), so the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f can be referenced to set the correct game state after the big win ends.

In addition, in the status setting table 202f, the status setting information value "01H" is associated with "on", "off", and "7" as the probability bonus flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h, respectively. Therefore, when a "probability bonus jackpot B, E, or I" occurs in the normal state of the normal pattern (i.e., "normal mode") and "01H" is stored in the status setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 116(a)), the player can transition to a "preparation mode" in which the time-saving count is 7 after the jackpot.

In the status setting table 202f, the status setting information value "02H" is associated with the probability variable flag 203f, the time-saving flag 203g, and the time-saving counter 203h, which are respectively set to "on", "off", and "1". Therefore, when a "probability variable jackpot C, F, or J" occurs in the normal state of the normal pattern (i.e., "normal mode") and "02H" is stored in the status setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 116(a)), the player can transition to a "preparation mode" in which the time-saving count is 1 after the jackpot.

In the status setting table 202f, the status setting information value "03H" is associated with the probability variable flag 203f, the time-saving flag 203g, and the time-saving counter 203h, which are respectively set to "on", "off", and "0". Therefore, when a "probability variable jackpot D, G, or K" occurs in the normal state of the normal pattern (i.e., "normal mode") and "03H" is stored in the status setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 116(a)), the mode can be switched to "normal mode" after the jackpot.

In the status setting table 202f, the status setting information value "04H" is associated with "off", "off", and "1" as the probability bonus flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h, respectively. Therefore, when a "normal jackpot A, B" occurs in the normal state of the normal pattern (i.e., "normal mode") and "04H" is stored in the status setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 116(a)), the game can transition to a low probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot, and can also transition to a "preparation mode" in which the time-saving count for the normal pattern is 1.

In the state setting table 202f, the value "05H" of the state setting information is associated with "off", "off", and "0" as the probability bonus flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h, respectively. Therefore, when a "normal jackpot A, B" occurs in a time-saving state of a normal symbol (i.e., "preparation mode" or "consecutive mode") and "05H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. 116(a)), after the jackpot, the game can transition to a low probability state of a special symbol and also to a normal state of a normal symbol (i.e., "normal mode").

In this way, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the status setting information according to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the status setting information storage area 203j, and the jackpot is stored in the status setting information storage area 203j. At the end of the process, by reading out and setting various setting values corresponding to the state setting information from the state setting table 202f, the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized. That is, it is possible to realize a gameplay that moves back and forth between three types of states: "normal mode", "preparation mode", and "consecutive game mode".

In addition, in this control example, the acquired random value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the jackpot ends, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set based on the state setting information value. Therefore, the period during which the random number value itself that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for outsiders to illegally obtain random numbers that result in a jackpot for special symbols, so it is possible to analyze the timing at which random numbers that result in a jackpot appear, and to prevent fraudulent activities in which the jackpot is drawn based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, and a random number is obtained at the timing when a random value that becomes a jackpot appears, and control is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot. Can be done.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to retain only the state setting information, rather than retaining the various setting values (probability bonus flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and time-saving counter 203h) related to the game state after the end of the jackpot while the changing patterns are displayed to notify of the jackpot, or during the subsequent jackpot (bonus game state). Rather than providing a storage area in RAM 203 for temporarily storing all of the various setting values, it is sufficient to provide an area for storing the state setting information values, and therefore the storage area of RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. , winning information storage area 203e, probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, winning number counter 203i, state setting information storage area 203j, state storage area 203k, and look-ahead probability changing flag 203m. , a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing winnings in the first winning slot 64, and has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the common execution area, and a decision such as the drawing of the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this control example, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is started. Separately, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is held, various information that would be obtained when the original lottery was held is calculated based on the data corresponding to the starting winnings (values of each counter C1 to C3). Hereinafter, prediction will be described as pre-reading the lottery results of special symbols. Note that the various information includes validity, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/fail, variation pattern, etc.) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223 as winning information. 223a.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning occurs in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by drawing a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is predicted. This prediction (pre-reading) is configured to refer to the jackpot judgment value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or variable probability gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize starts. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see S205 in FIG. 131).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N in the variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

When the ball passes through the normal entrance ball entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second winning random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal entrance ball entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 136: No).

The probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of this probability change flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (low probability state of a special symbol). The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to off, and each time a jackpot ends, a state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f and set to the probability change flag 203f. That is, if "on" is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to "on", and if "off" is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to "off". It is then referenced during the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) to determine whether the game state is in a high probability state (see S302 in FIG. 132 and S505 in FIG. 134), and is set to OFF when the next big win game starts (see S213 in FIG. 131).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (see Figure 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (Figure 134), the value of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to, and if the value is on, the first winning random number table for high probability times is 202a, a special symbol is drawn, and if the value of the variable probability flag 203f is off, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

The time saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols that continues until the next jackpot (that is, in the "consecutive game mode"). If the value of this time-saving flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols that continues until the next jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "continuous game mode". show. As described above, in this control example, in addition to the "continuous winning mode", the "preparation mode" is also in the time saving state of normal symbols. The remaining number of time reductions in the "preparation mode" is counted by the time reduction counter 203h. That is, in this control example, only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (ie, "normal mode") is entered.

The initial value of the time saving flag 203g is set to OFF, and each time a jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , is set in the time saving flag 203g. That is, when "ON" is read from the status setting table 202f, the time saving flag 203g is set to "ON", and when "OFF" is read, the time saving flag 203g is set to "OFF". Ru. Then, it is referred to in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135) to determine whether the gaming state is a time saving state (see S608, S614, and 619 in FIG. 135), and when the next jackpot game is started. (See S213 in FIG. 131).

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time saving times of normal symbols (that is, the remaining number of time saving times in the "preparation mode"). If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, this indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has the number of time saving times for normal symbols remaining (that is, is in "preparation mode"), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0. If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in "preparation mode". As described above, even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, if the time saving flag 203g is on, it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol is in effect. That is, in this control example, only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (ie, "normal mode") is entered.

The initial value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0, and each time a jackpot ends, a value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. and is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h. That is, when "0" is read from the status setting table 202f, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is set to "0", and when "1" is read, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is set to "0". If it is set to "1" and "7" is read out, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "7". Then, it is referred to in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135) to determine whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (see S608, S614, and 619 in FIG. 135), and when the next jackpot game is started. The value is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the cumulative number of balls that have won into the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each round of the jackpot. In each round of the jackpot, it is determined whether the end condition of each round has been met or not depending on the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by one each time a winning into the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 is detected in the jackpot (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i has reached 10 or more in the jackpot, the currently running round is ended (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The winning number counter 203i is initially set to 0, and when each round is ended, the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The status setting information storage area 203j stores (retains) the status setting information read from the game result setting table 202e according to the jackpot type until the jackpot ends when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. This is a storage area for storing data. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot are read from the state setting table 202f and set (see FIG. 140). (See S1115).

The status storage area 203k is a storage area in which information indicating which period of the jackpot is currently being held is stored. Here, the jackpot is composed of at least an opening period for notifying the start of the jackpot, a round period during which the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning port 65a is opened and closed, and an ending period for notifying the end of the jackpot. The status storage area 203k stores information for distinguishing which of these multiple types of periods is currently being held. More specifically, when the jackpot starts, "01H" is stored in the status storage area 203k during the opening period, "02H" is stored in the status storage area 203k during the first round, "03H" is stored in the status storage area 203k during the second round, and "04H" is stored in the status storage area 203k during the ending period. On the other hand, "00H" is stored in the status storage area 203k during states other than the jackpot.

The status storage area 203k has an initial value set to "00H", and the stored value is backed up even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The value stored in this status storage area 203k is referenced when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and a status command is set to notify the voice and lamp control device 113 of the current game status based on the value stored in this status storage area 203k. As a result, even if the power is cut off during play, the game status recognized by the main control device 110 and the game status recognized by the voice and lamp control device 113 can be made to match when the power is restored. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) discrepancies between the actual game status and the presentation.

The pre-read probability changing flag 203m indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability-changing state (special symbol high A flag indicating whether the winning data should be analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). It is.

When the pre-reading probability of winning flag 203m is on, the pachinko machine 10 is assumed to be in a probability of winning state for a special symbol, and the winning data is analyzed, and the lottery result for the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability of winning flag 203m is off, the pachinko machine 10 is assumed to be in a normal state for a special symbol, and the winning data is analyzed, and the lottery result for the special symbol is pre-read. This pre-reading probability of winning flag 203m is initialized to off during the initial setting of the RAM (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to on every time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be a probability of winning (S410 in FIG. 133, S514 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, it is set to off every time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be a normal big win (see S412 in FIG. 133, S515 in FIG. 134).

The counter buffer 203y is a memory area for storing the values of each of the counters mentioned above (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second winning random number counter C4, and second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter values stored in this counter buffer 203y are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data. The stack area stores the contents of the internal registers and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area stores the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 139) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 138) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 137) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figures 118 (a) and (b). The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 defines at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotation position discrimination table 222c, and an add-on discrimination table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is already publicly known, so it will only be explained briefly. Based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 determines more detailed variation content from the rough variation content (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command using the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined by lottery from among multiple types for the rough variation content instructed by the main control unit 110.

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table that specifies the operation content (operation scenario) of each reel (upper lifting unit 300, LCD lifting unit 400, left swinging unit 500, rotation unit 600, etc.) when performing a moving performance in which at least one of the reels moves. More specifically, it is a data table that specifies the setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction, etc.) to be set for the various drive motors corresponding to each reel. Details of this operation scenario table 222b will be explained with reference to Figures 119 and 120.

Figure 119 (a) is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222b. In this operation scenario table 222b, data is stored for each type of drivable (variable) role. More specifically, as shown in Figure 119 (a), the upper lifting unit table 222b1, which is referred to when a performance for driving the upper lifting unit 300 is set, the liquid crystal lifting unit table 222b2, which is referred to when a performance for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is set, the left swing unit table 222b3, which is referred to when a performance for driving the left swing unit 500 is set, and the rotation unit table 222b4, which is referred to when a performance for driving the rotation unit 600 is set, are specified. In addition, when a jackpot type (specific jackpot type) occurs in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 are connected, a specific opening table 222b5 is provided that specifies the operation of each part during the opening period of that jackpot, a specific ending table 222b6 is provided that specifies the operation of each part during the ending period of the specific jackpot type, and an initial operation table 222b7 is provided that specifies, for each part, the initial operation of each part that is executed when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10.

Each of these tables will be explained in more detail with reference to FIGS. 119(b) to 120. FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned upper elevating unit table 222b1. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the upper elevating unit table 222b1 includes settings to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g that indicates the progress of settings based on the operation scenario. Values (movement speed, number of motion steps, and motion direction) are defined.

Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting one step of operation to the corresponding drive motor (upper lift motor 341), and is expressed by the number of signals (pulses) output per second (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operating speed is 333 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) to the upper lift motor 341 333 times per second. In other words, it means that the upper lift motor 341 is driven at a speed of 333 steps per second. The number of operating steps indicates the number of operations performed by the upper lift motor 341, in other words, the number of times that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting one step of operation to the upper lift motor 341. For example, the number of operating steps of 127 means that one step of operation is set for the upper lift motor 341 127 times. Furthermore, the operating direction refers to the drive direction (motor rotation direction) of the upper lifting motor 341, and two directions can be set: positive and negative. In the upper lifting motor 341, the direction from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position is the positive direction, and the direction from the lowered position to the upper position (origin position) is the negative direction. By setting these settings in the motor driver that drives the upper lifting motor 341, the corresponding operations can be performed accurately.

As shown in FIG. 119(b), the value "01H" of the motion pointer 223g corresponds to the motion (outward motion) for lowering the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position. Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the motion speed, 127 is specified as the number of motion steps, and the positive direction is specified as the motion direction. This setting is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the upper lifting unit 300 in the performance arrives. Note that 127 steps refers to the number of steps to the lowered position.

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (resting) the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at the lowered position. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operating speed, 1000 is defined as the operating step, and "stop" is defined as the operating direction. That is, it is specified that the stop command must be issued 1000 times in a row at an operating speed of 333 pps. Thereby, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can be stopped at the lowered position for about 3 seconds (1000 times/333 pps).

The value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operating speed, 127 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction. Furthermore, the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Similarly, for the liquid crystal lifting unit table 222b2, the left swinging unit table 222b3, and the rotation unit table 222b4, the settings to be set in the motor driver corresponding to the drive motor that drives each part are specified for each value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to each part.

Figure 119 (c) shows the contents of the specific opening table 222b5 described above. As described above, this specific opening table 222b5 is a data table that specifies the operation of each gimmick during the opening period of a jackpot when the jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 are connected occurs. Specifically, the specific jackpot type is a jackpot type in which opening pattern A (an opening pattern that repeats 20 times between opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds) is set for the first variable winning device 82a in each round of the jackpot.

As described above, when a jackpot type for which opening pattern A is set in "normal mode" is won, the drive side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 are arranged in the connecting position, so that all balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are caused to flow down to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Then, each time a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (each time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422), a time-saving suggestion effect is executed that suggests whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern will be set.

In order to execute this time-saving suggestion effect, in this control example, during the opening period of the jackpot in which opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are driven, and these devices are moved to the connected position before the first round of the jackpot begins (i.e., before the ball is able to enter the first variable winning device 82a). The operation of each device during this opening period is specified in the specific opening table 222b5.

As shown in FIG. 119(c), in the specific opening table 222b5, the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 from the lowered position to the connected position (see FIG. 9). Specifically, 500 pps is specified as the action speed, 250 is specified as the action step, and the positive direction is specified as the action direction. By setting this action content, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 can be positioned at the connected position.

For the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g, the operation content for swinging the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is specified. Specifically, the operation speed is specified as 200 pps, the number of operation steps is specified as 200, and the operation direction is specified as the forward direction. By setting this operation content, the first passage forming member 520 can be placed at the connection position. Therefore, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, which has been placed at the connection position before, can be connected to the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a can be guided (flowed down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520.

The value "03H" of the action pointer 223g is associated with END data indicating the end of the action. When this END data is read, it is determined that all actions defined in the action scenario have been executed.

As with the specific opening table 222b5, the specific ending table 222b6 also specifies the operation of the left swing unit 500 and the operation of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Specifically, the settings for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connected position to the released position, and the settings for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 from the connected position to the lowered position are specified. This specific ending table 222b6 is omitted from the illustration because the direction of operation and the order of operation of the gimmicks are the opposite of those of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119(c)).

Next, details of the above-mentioned initial operation table 222b7 will be explained with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, this initial motion table 222b7 includes the type of accessory for which the motion is set and the setting value to be set in the motor driver corresponding to the accessory, in association with the value of the motion pointer 223g. is stipulated.

This initial operation table 222b7 differs from the other tables defined in the operation scenario table 222b in that the number of operation steps is not defined, but the operation end condition and the number of steps to be determined as abnormal are defined. That is, in the initial motion in this control example, one step motion is performed at the motion speed and motion direction specified in the initial motion table 222b7 until the arrival at various sensors provided corresponding to each accessory is detected. Configured to run repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the lifting position. That is, the output is H (high) when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is placed in the lowered position (origin position), and the output is H (high) when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is placed in the connected position. At least a liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 is provided. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detects that it has reached the connection position (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H). The motor is driven one step at a time in the positive direction (increasing direction) at an operating speed of 500 pps.

In addition, if the liquid crystal lifting motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is broken and the operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver cannot be executed, or the gear and the motor are misaligned, causing the liquid crystal lifting motor 441 to run idly, etc., during the initial operation, if the abnormality determination step value (1050 steps) is reached before the operation end condition of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is satisfied during the initial operation, an error is notified. This error notification allows the hall staff to immediately recognize the occurrence of the malfunction, and allows them to take appropriate measures such as repairs.

The explanation has been given using the operation in the case of the operation pointer "01H" as an example, but as shown in FIG. 120, the operation speed of each accessory, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality judgment steps, and The direction of movement is similarly defined. By executing the initial operation according to this initial operation table 222b7, it is possible to check whether all the accessories are operating normally each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, by having the player play the game after the initial operation is completed, it is possible to have the player play the game with each accessory always operating normally.

Returning to FIG. 118(a), the explanation will be continued. The rotational position determination table 222c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 from the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is defined. The details of this rotational position determination table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 121.

Figure 121 shows the contents of the rotational position discrimination table 222c. As shown in Figure 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684 are set to have pockets (divided members DV) with detectable parts 641c and pockets (divided members DV) without detectable parts 641c, so that they differ depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotating member 640. The rotational position discrimination table 222c in this control example is a data table that specifies the combination of outputs from detection sensors A to F, identified from the presence or absence of detectable parts 641c, for each pocket located at the drop position. Since pockets P1 to P30 are arranged counterclockwise in this order, if the pocket at the drop position can be identified, the arrangement of all the pockets can be identified.

As shown in FIG. 121, for the combination "L, L, H, H, L, H" of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, a pocket P1 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combinations of outputs of detection sensors A to F are L, L, H, H, L, H, respectively, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the current It is determined that the rotating member 640 is at the rotating position where the pocket P1 is placed at the falling position.

Similarly, for the combination "L, L, L, H, H, L" of the outputs of detection sensors A to F, P2 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, when it is detected that the output combinations of the detection sensors A to F are L, L, L, H, H, and L, respectively, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the current It is determined that the rotating member 640 is at the rotating position where the pocket P2 is placed at the falling position.

Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, combinations of the outputs of the corresponding detection sensors A to F are defined for the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). In this way, since different combinations of detection sensor outputs are associated with the pockets P1 to P30, the phase (positioning) of the rotating member 640 is adjusted every time one of the pockets is placed in the falling position. can be accurately identified.

Returning to FIG. 118(a), the explanation will be continued. The addition determination table 222d is used when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640a is detected during the execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93(a) and 93(b)), and in the "normal mode". This is a data table used to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the drawing of symbol 1 is newly suspended. Although not shown in the figure, the addition determination table 222d includes an addition high probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%), and an addition high probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with a relatively low probability (5%). An additional low probability table in which an increase in the number is determined is provided, and an additional medium probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with a probability (10%) intermediate between the two. When the judgment conditions for determining whether or not to increase the lucky number are met, the three types of tables mentioned above are used depending on the situation (for example, whether the transition to "continuous winning mode" is confirmed or not). One of them is selected and used to determine whether or not to increase the lucky number. Here, the random value (counter) used for determining (determining) whether or not to increase the lucky number (winning pocket) is provided, for example, in the RAM 223, and is used in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). The value is updated every time the is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. This RAM 223 stores a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, an operation pointer 223g, a return to origin flag 223i, an initial operation flag 223j, a winning position storage area 223k, a lighting position storage area 223m, a sure-win state flag 223n, a time-saving state flag 223o, a time-saving state counter 223p, a winning state storage area 223q, and an operable type storage area 223c. At least a memory area 223r, a correction position counter 223s, an initial setting flag 223t, a rotation position storage area 223u, a swing undetected flag 223v, a swing timer 223w, a designated pocket storage area 223x, an add-on counter 223av, a performance timer 223bv, an increase performance in progress flag 223cv, a roulette flag 223dv, a swing performance flag 223ev, a ball drop possible flag 223fv, a winning counter 223gv, a discharge counter 223hv, a power cut flag 223y, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas for special symbol 1), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning occurs in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, fluctuation pattern, etc.) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in response to the start winning, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, various information notified by the winning information command (win/lose, variation pattern, etc.) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the free areas of the four special pattern areas (area 1 to area 4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (area 1 to area 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings is stored, and area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest winnings.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control unit 110, is a variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance of special pattern 1 reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b (see S2107 in FIG. 150). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of held pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in the fluctuation pattern receiving process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set (see S3302 in FIG. 162). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, and the effect section 331) are displayed in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. ), the display control of the variable effect is started so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. In addition, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable performance is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each reel driven by the drive motor. The counting reference (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each reel. This step counter 223e is configured to be able to count the number of operation steps for each type of reel separately. In other words, the step counter 223e is provided with separate counters for the number of drive motors for driving the reels, such as a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting body 330 in the upper lifting unit 300, a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left swinging member 500, etc.

Each time the step counter 223e receives an execution signal indicating that one step of operation has been executed from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10, the step counter 223e controls the drive motor that outputs the execution signal (execution command). The counter value corresponding to the motor type is updated by 1 (see S2601 in FIG. 155). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a return-to-origin operation is executed to return the various accessories to their origin positions, but when the various accessories return to their origin due to the return-to-origin operation, the step counter 223e is 0 is set for the value. This return-to-origin operation makes it possible to reliably set the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 as the origin position of each accessory, making it possible to accurately grasp the operating status (drive position) of each accessory. can.

The motion scenario flag 223f is a flag indicating which motion scenario is set among the motion scenarios corresponding to the performance motion of each role object defined in the motion scenario table 222b. The operation scenario flag 223f is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and each bit is associated with the type of operation scenario. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper lifting unit table 222b1, and if this 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the upper lifting unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly, for other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is set to 0. (off).

When an operation scenario is set based on a variation pattern command during the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) (see S2204 in FIG. 151), the bit corresponding to that scenario is set to 1 (on) in this operation scenario flag 223f. Also, each time a variation performance for which an operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). This operation scenario flag 223f makes it easy to determine the type of operation scenario that is currently set.

The action pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress of the action scenario that has been set. As described above, each data table that makes up the action scenario table 222b is specified by associating the value of this action pointer 223g with the action content to be set (action speed, number of action steps, action direction). In this control example, an action with one setting content is set for the drive motor, and when the action according to the setting content is completed, the value of the action pointer 223g is updated.

The action pointer 223g can update the pointer value separately for each action scenario that is set. In other words, the action pointer 223g is a collective term for the different pointers provided for each action scenario. Each pointer that makes up the action pointer 223g is set to a value of "01H" when a corresponding action scenario is newly set. Thereafter, the pointer value is updated each time the action content corresponding to the pointer value is completed (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the action content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. Furthermore, when the variable performance for which the corresponding action scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to "00H". By using this action pointer 223g, the action scenario that is set can be accurately grasped.

The return-to-origin flag 223i indicates that a return-to-origin operation (an operation for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position), which is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, is being executed. This is a flag indicating whether or not. If the origin return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the origin return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the origin return operation is not in progress. The origin return flag 223i is set to ON when the origin return operation is set during the origin return process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, if it is determined that all the accessory objects have returned to the origin position, it is set to OFF (see S2605 in FIG. 155). By using the origin return flag 223i, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the origin return operation is in progress.

The initial operation flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not an initial operation is being executed to determine whether each accessory operates normally after the return-to-origin operation is completed. . If the initial operation flag 223j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. This initial operation flag 223j is set when it is determined that all accessories are placed at the origin position when the power is turned on (S1507 in FIG. 144), or after the origin return operation that is executed after the power is turned on is completed. It is set to ON (see S2605 in FIG. 155), and is set to OFF when all operations specified in the initial operation table 222b7 are completed (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using this initial operation flag 223j, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

The winning position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a winning pocket or a missing pocket) in the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance". In this control example, the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the back LED 625 is set with reference to this winning position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area placed on the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the lighting area placed on the back side of the missing pocket is set to an off state. In addition, when the ball B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any pocket, the type of each pocket stored in the hit position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket placed at the falling position, and the ball B is It is determined whether or not the object can be dropped into the next pocket of the pocket placed at the drop position.

Details of the winning pocket storage area 223k will be explained with reference to FIG. 122. As shown in FIG. 122, the winning pocket storage area 223k is provided with a storage area corresponding to each pocket, and each storage area has information corresponding to success or failure (whether it is a winning pocket or a missed pocket). can be stored. One bit is allocated to the storage area corresponding to each pocket, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a winning pocket, and when it is L (0), it means that the corresponding pocket is a winning pocket. , means that the corresponding pocket is a detached pocket.

Here, as described above, if the transition to the "consecutive mode" is confirmed at the start of the roulette chance performance (if a special symbol is drawn in the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" during the "preparation mode" and a special symbol is drawn to produce a guaranteed jackpot), the ball B is allowed to fall into any winning pocket and ball B is restricted from falling into any losing pocket. On the other hand, if the transition to the "consecutive mode" is not confirmed at the start of the roulette chance performance (if all the special symbol drawings performed up to the start of the performance have been losses), the ball B is allowed to fall into any losing pocket and ball B is restricted from falling into any winning pocket. In this control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is met (when the period of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined by referring to the winning position storage area 223k, and it is determined whether or not the pocket to be placed next to the pocket currently placed in the dropping position is a pocket in which the ball B is allowed to fall in the current roulette chance performance. Then, if the next pocket is one in which ball B is permitted to fall, the system controls the ball to fall into that pocket. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) ball B from falling into a pocket other than the targeted pocket type, and therefore makes it possible to accurately notify the player of whether or not the game has transitioned to "consecutive win mode" based on the type of pocket into which ball B has fallen.

FIG. 122 shows the results stored in the winning position storage area 223k when pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as winning pockets and the remaining pockets are set as missing pockets. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H(1) indicating a winning pocket is stored in the storage areas corresponding to pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, P28 to P30, and the other pockets are L(0) indicating a missing pocket is stored in the storage area corresponding to .

The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% or a non-lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%). The lighting of each LED of the back surface LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in this lighting position storage area 223m.

Details of this lighting position storage area 223m will be explained with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 123(a), this lighting position storage area 223m includes three of the first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3, which indicate the lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c constituting the rear LED 625. It consists of two storage areas.

The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123(b), H(1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area with a lighting rate of 100% among the lighting areas A1 to A6, and L(0) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area in the off state. In the example of FIG. 123(b), H(1), which indicates a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, is set in the storage area corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, L(0), which indicates a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0% is set in the storage area corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2, and A6.

The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123(c) and 123(d), the second storage area 223m2 contains data for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting states of the lighting areas A7 to A12. A storage area is provided, and the third storage area 223m3 is provided with a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting states of the lighting areas A13 to A18.

By sequentially updating these three storage areas according to the placement of the winning pocket and controlling the state of each lighting area A1 to A18 according to the information stored in each storage area, only the winning pocket can be made to look shiny. can do. As mentioned above, while the rear LED 625 rotates once, the rotating member 640 can rotate only 18/30 times, so the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket depend on the rotational movement. It will shift depending on the progress of the process. Therefore, in this control example, the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is corrected every 1/3 rotation of the back LED (in other words, in units of one LED bar), so that the winning pocket is always It is controlled to give a shiny appearance. That is, every time the rear LED rotates 1/3, the information in the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the deviation caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction area NA can always be maintained in an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance of a winning pocket is shiny and a missing pocket is dark). Since the player can see only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misunderstanding a winning pocket and a missing pocket.

Returning to FIG. 118(b), the explanation will continue. The probability change state flag 223n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. If this probability change state flag 223n is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a probability change state, and if it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is not in a probability change state. This probability change state flag 223n is updated according to a state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. In other words, if the special symbol is notified of a probability change state by a state command, this probability change state flag 223n is set to on (updated), and if the special symbol is notified of a low probability state, this probability change state flag 223n is set to off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The time saving state flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of normal symbols continues until the next jackpot (namely, "consecutive winning mode"). If this time-saving state flag 223o is on, it indicates that the mode is “continuous game mode”, and if it is off, it means that it is not “continuous game mode” (that is, it is “normal mode” or “preparation mode”). shows. This time saving state flag 223o is updated in accordance with the state command output to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main control device 110, similarly to the probability change state flag 223n. In other words, when "Continue playing mode" is notified by the status command, this time saving status flag 223o is set (updated) to ON, and when "Normal mode" or "Preparation mode" is notified, this time saving status flag 223o is set (updated) to ON. The time saving state flag 223o is set (updated) to OFF (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The time saving state counter 223p is a counter for counting the remaining number of time saving times in the "preparation mode". If the value of this time-saving number counter is 1 or more, it indicates that the "preparation mode" (that is, the time-saving state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a number of times according to the counter value. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the mode is not "preparation mode". This time-saving state counter 223p, like the variable probability state flag 223n and the time-saving state flag 223o, responds to a state command output to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main control device 110. Updated. That is, when the status command notifies the number of times of time saving in "preparation mode" (1 time or 7 times), the value of the time saving state counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 depending on the number of times notified. . On the other hand, when "normal mode" or "continuous play mode" is notified by the status command, the value of this time saving status counter 223p is set (updated) to 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The winning status storage area 223q is a memory area that stores information indicating which period during the jackpot we are currently in, and has the same configuration as the status storage area 203k of the main control unit 110. That is, in the opening period of the jackpot, "01H" is stored in the winning status storage area 223q, in the first round "02H" is stored, in the second round "03H" is stored, and in the ending period "04H" is stored. On the other hand, in states other than the jackpot, "00H" is stored in this winning status storage area 223q. This time-saving status counter 223p is updated according to the status command output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The operable type storage area 223r contains information indicating whether or not it is permissible to perform a return-to-origin operation for each accessory when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and to operate each accessory in the initial operation. This is the storage area where is stored. This operable type storage area 223r is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit of one byte is associated with each accessory of the pachinko machine 10 (upper elevating unit 300, left swing unit 500, etc.). There is. When 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), it is a state in which the operation of the accessory corresponding to that bit is restricted (return-to-origin operation or initialization for that accessory). When 1 is stored (set to L), it means that it is permissible to operate the accessory corresponding to that bit.

In addition, the state in which the operation of the accessory (return-to-origin operation and initial operation) is restricted is, for example, a case where the power is cut off during a jackpot in which opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a. It is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The winning ball can be discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 via the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the return-to-origin operation and the initial operation are executed for all accessories regardless of the state at the time of power cut, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and left swing unit 500 will not be connected when the power is cut off. Even in this case, the connection will be canceled by the return-to-origin operation or the initial operation. Therefore, for example, if the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is momentarily cut off while the ball enters the first passage forming member 520 and the power is immediately restored, the ball will pass through the first passage forming member 520. There is a possibility that a return-to-origin operation or an initialization operation will be started during the process, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 will be disconnected. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side of the Pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422. This may cause problems such as short circuits in wiring or circuits.

In contrast, in this control example, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on can be accurately grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 side by the state command output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on. If the game state grasped from the state command is in the middle of a jackpot set in the opening pattern A, a 1 meaning that the operation is restricted is stored (set to L) in the bits corresponding to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223r. Therefore, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in a state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released when the power supply is restored. Therefore, even if the power supply is restored while a ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the ball can be reliably made to flow down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. This prevents (suppresses) problems such as balls getting into the base or wiring on the back of the pachinko machine 10, causing short circuits in the wiring or circuits.

The correction position counter 223s is a counter that indicates which storage area (first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten when rewriting the data in the lighting position storage area 223m to correct the mismatch between the state of the lighting area provided in the back LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with 30 pockets P1 to P30. In contrast, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided as lighting areas for turning on or off each pocket. In addition, the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625 are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed in order to make the lighting area located on the back side follow the pocket located in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) (i.e., the pocket visible to the player). For this reason, while the rear LED 625 rotates once, the rotating member 640 rotates only 18/30 times, so that the correspondence between the pockets and the lighting areas shifts every time the second section S2 is entered. Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c are placed in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) that is invisible (difficult) to the player, the state of each lighting area constituting the LED bar is switched to correct the shift in the correspondence between the pockets and the lighting areas. When performing the correction, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. This makes it possible to fix the correspondence between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area placed on the rear side of each pocket, no matter how many times the rear LED 625 rotates. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the position of the winning pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

This correction position counter 223s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by 1 in the range of "0" to "2" and returns to "0" when the value is updated to "2". If the value of the correction position counter 223s is "0", it indicates that each lighting area A1 to A6 forming the LED bar 625a is corrected, and if the value is "1", it indicates that the correction is performed for each lighting area A1 to A6 forming the LED bar 625b. A value of "2" indicates that correction is to be performed for each of the lighting areas A13 to A18 forming the LED bar 625c. This correction position counter 223s is updated one by one during the lighting setting process for setting and correcting the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

The initial setting flag 223t is a flag indicating whether the initial setting of the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 has been executed since the rotating member 640 (and the back LED 625) configured to imitate a roulette started rotating in the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance". If the initial setting flag 223t is on, it means that the initial setting of the lighting state has been executed after the start of the rotation operation, and if it is off, it means that the initial setting of the lighting state has not been executed. During the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625, the initial setting flag 223t is referenced, and if the initial setting flag 223t is off, the lighting state of all the lighting areas A1 to A18 is set when the back LED 625 reaches the origin position of the rotation. On the other hand, if the initial setting flag 223t is on, it means that the initial setting of the lighting state has already been executed, so that the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected each time the back LED 625 makes a third revolution and the arrangement of any LED bar matches the correction section RA. This initial setting flag 223t is set to ON when it is detected that the rear LED 625 has reached the origin position (the output of the origin sensor becomes H) for the first time after the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" and the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is set (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" ends.

The rotational position storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the current position of the rotating member 640. This rotational position storage area 223u stores information corresponding to the pocket placed at the drop position each time it is detected that a pocket has been placed at the drop position based on each of the detection sensors A to F that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684 while the rotating member 640 is rotating (S2803 in FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in this rotational position storage area 223u, the current position of the rotating member 640 can be identified while the rotating member 640 is rotating.

The rocking undetected flag 223v is a flag indicating whether the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 after the rocking effect starts. If the swing undetected flag 223v is on, it means that the ball B has not been detected by the ball detection sensor 679 even once. On the other hand, if the swing undetected flag 223v is off, it means that the ball B has been detected by the ball detection sensor 679 at least once during the execution of the swing effect.

As described above, in this control example, the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of ball B is determined based on the time interval at which ball detection sensor 679 detects ball B during the rocking performance, and ball B is allowed to fall when the period becomes sufficiently short (period becomes 1 second or less). However, when ball detection sensor 679 detects ball B for the first time, there is no previous detection result, and the time interval cannot be calculated. Therefore, in this control example, this rocking undetected flag 223v is provided to determine whether ball detection sensor 679 has already detected ball B passing at least once (whether the period can be determined from the previous detection result), and the period of rocking motion of ball B is determined only when ball detection sensor 679 is off. This allows the period of rocking motion of ball B to be determined more accurately.

The swing undetected flag 223v is set to ON when the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" is being executed, based on the fact that ball B has been thrown by the throwing motion of the throwing device 650 (see S3507 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, when the swing undetected flag 223v is ON, it is set to OFF when the ball detection sensor 679 detects the passage of ball B (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

The swing timer 223w is used to measure the time interval at which the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677. The initial value of this swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is counted up by 1 each time the swing performance process is executed to execute various settings during the swing performance (see S1707 in FIG. 146). . This swing effect processing (see FIG. 146) is a process executed every millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, so the swing timer 223w Updates are also performed in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset each time the ball B passes by the ball detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). This swing timer 223w determines the period (amplitude) of the swing motion, and by dropping the ball B after the cycle becomes sufficiently small (after the cycle is 1 second or less), the ball B will naturally move. It can make you feel like you are falling. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suspect that the swinging motion of the ball B is being controlled, it is possible to make the swinging motion of the ball B more enjoyable for the player.

The designated pocket storage area 223x stores winning symbols in "normal mode" (see FIG. 91(a)), "preparation mode" notification symbols in jackpot (see FIG. 92(b)), and winning pocket positions in roulette chance performance (see FIG. 91(a)). This is a storage area in which information corresponding to a lucky number (winning pocket) used as a lucky number (see 95(b)) is stored. Depending on the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used to display the lucky number in the "normal mode" (see Ds2 in FIG. 90(a)), control the lighting of the winning pocket, and the like. Note that the player can select five types of lucky numbers.

Here, the player can select the lucky number from the game menu screen that is displayed by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when the fluctuation stops. Specifically, one of the items on the game menu screen is the selection of lucky number. The lucky number selection screen is configured so that five numbers can be selected from the 30 types of numbers shown on each pocket (dividing member DV). The designated pocket storage area 223x stores information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on this lucky number selection screen.

When displaying special symbol lottery results in the "normal mode" on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the production section 331 based on the memory contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x, the special symbol lottery results stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are displayed. The display contents are determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, four types of lucky numbers out of five types are selected and controlled so that one type is displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d (see FIG. 163). (See S3408). On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, control is performed so that a loss number other than the lucky number is displayed on at least one of the display sections 331a to 331d (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

In addition, if the jackpot type shifts to "preparation mode" after a jackpot, the one type of lucky number that was not displayed on each display section 331a to 331d at the time of notification of the jackpot will not be displayed in the "preparation mode" notification. It is set as a number and is controlled to be displayed on the performance section a during a jackpot. Furthermore, in the "Succession Mode Suggestion Performance" that is executed when transitioning to the "Preparation Mode", the player first hits the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player based on the memory contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x. (S3102 in FIG. 160).

In this way, the lucky number designated (selected) by the player is used in common for three types of notifications that are advantageous to the player: notifications of a jackpot in "normal mode," notifications of "preparation mode" during a jackpot, and notifications of "consecutive wins mode" during the "consecutive wins mode suggestion presentation." This allows the player to enjoy selecting a lucky number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The add-on counter 223av is a counter for counting the total number of added winning pockets in the "add-on effect" (see FIG. 96(a)) executed in the normal mode. This additional counter 223av is incremented by 1 when the "additional effect" is set (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the "continuous game mode suggestion performance", a winning pocket is added by the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the adding counter 223av.

The production timer 223bv is a timer that measures the elapsed time after the "continuous game mode suggestion production" is started. The initial value of the production timer 223bv is set to 0, and is counted up by 1 each time the production setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed during the execution of the "continuous game mode suggestion production". (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Note that since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every 1 millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in 1 millisecond units. For example, if the value of the production timer 223bv is 1000, it means that 1 second (1000 milliseconds) has passed since the "consecutive game mode suggestion production" was started. It is determined whether the performance time has ended according to the value of the performance timer 223bv, and the performance mode is switched. That is, switching from the lucky number increase performance to the roulette chance performance and from the roulette chance performance to the ending performance in the "continuous game mode suggestion performance" is performed (S2004, S2008 in FIG. 149: Yes). In order to simplify the explanation, the lucky number increase effect will be simply referred to as "increase effect" in the following explanation.

The increasing performance flag 223cv is a flag indicating whether the increasing performance is being executed. If the increasing performance flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increasing performance is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the increasing performance is not being executed. This increase performance flag 223cv is notified of the transition to "preparation mode" in the state command output from the main controller 110 after the end of the jackpot (1 or 7 is set to the value of the time saving state counter by the state command). (see S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the performance timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the increase performance (start of the roulette chance performance) (i.e., a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance"). is set to off when

The roulette flag 223dv is a flag indicating whether a roulette chance effect is being executed. If this roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is not being executed. This roulette flag 223dv is the value of the performance timer 223bv indicating the start timing of the roulette chance performance (end of the increase performance) (i.e., the counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance") If it is determined that this is the case, it is set to on (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the performance timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the roulette chance performance (start of the ending performance) (i.e., a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the "consecutive game mode suggestion performance"). is set to off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

The swing performance flag 223ev is a flag indicating whether a swing performance is being executed. When the swing performance flag 223ev is on, it indicates that a swing performance is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that a swing performance is not being executed. When the roulette chance performance is being executed, the swing performance flag 223ev is set to on when the ball B is thrown, which is the timing for driving the ball throwing device 650 (see s3505 in FIG. 164). In this control example, the driving timing for the ball throwing device 650 is set to 50 seconds after the start of the "roulette chance performance". On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the performance timer 223bv is a value indicating the timing of the end of the roulette chance performance (the start of the ending performance) (i.e., the counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance"), it is set to off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

The ball drop possible flag 223fv is a flag that indicates whether or not ball B can be dropped into any pocket when ball B is performing a swinging motion on the upper part of the holding piece 677. When this ball drop possible flag 223fv is on, it means that ball B can be dropped, and when it is off, it means that dropping ball B is restricted. In this control example, when the momentum of ball B performing a swinging motion weakens and the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion becomes a predetermined period (1 second) or less, it is determined that ball B can be dropped, and this ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to on (see S1711 in FIG. 146). Also, when ball B is set to be dropped, it is set to off (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

The winning counter 223gv is a counter that counts the number of winning balls for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a in a jackpot. In a jackpot where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 are connected (variable jackpot B to D, normal jackpot A), the value of this winning counter 223gv Based on this, the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a is counted, and it is determined whether the number matches the number of balls that have been ejected through the second passage forming member 422. Then, when the number of prizes won and the number of discharged prizes match, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are configured to be disconnected from each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being disconnected during passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a is reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. It can be flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of problems such as the balls getting into the base part or wiring part on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, causing short circuits in the wiring or circuits. The initial value of this winning counter 223gv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time a large open mouth winning command notifying a winning ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of winning pieces and the number of ejected pieces match, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set to be released, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

The discharge counter 223hv is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the second passage forming member 422 in a jackpot (high probability jackpot B-D, normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 are connected. The value of this discharge counter 223hv is compared with the value of the above-mentioned winning counter 223gv during the ending period of the jackpot. If the values match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set to be released. The initial value of this discharge counter 223hv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time a discharge of a ball is detected (the passage of the sensor member 422c is detected) (see S1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of winning balls matches the number of balls dispensed, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set to be released, it is initialized to 0 (see S2505 in FIG. 154).

The power outage flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power outage. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). Note that since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 142), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 142), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then remains constant. This is the case when the audio lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (for example, 100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power outage. In this case, all of the information in the RAM 223 has not been deleted, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only a portion of the information has been deleted) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). This prevents processes from being executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each process of the audio lamp control device 113 can operate normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third pattern display device 81, the performance section 331 of the upper lifting unit 300, and the performance section 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331 and the display contents of the presentation section 422a). The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Furthermore, when the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of storing data in the character ROM 234, which is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a). ing.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will be difficult to read out the instructions constituting the control program. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a), It is possible to easily perform a performance.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a). , are connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 or the normal Transfer to video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage section in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231, the third symbol display device 81, etc. A second program storage area 234a1 that stores fixed value data for driving the production section 331 and production section 422a), and a second program storage area 234a1 that stores fixed value data for driving the production section 331 and production section 422a); 422a) and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, it is possible to diversify and complicate the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the presentation section 331, and the presentation section 422a). can.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program memory area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character memory area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which can reduce manufacturing costs and suppress an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a) can be executed. Yes, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after canceling the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to perform various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, the reason why not all of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory 234a in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 is long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and control of the production section 422a) can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) that is executed after the boot process (see S3601 in FIG. 165) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read the control program from the work RAM 233, which is constituted by a DRAM with a high read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 129) transmitted from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of this one frame's worth of image and the display process of this one frame's worth of image within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third pattern display device 81, etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 167(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for the next one frame of images, and also displays the image developed by the drawing to the third symbol display device 81, etc. 331 and the processing to be displayed on the production section 422a).

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing an image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

In accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing to the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a), thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a. This variable display (variable presentation) based on the power-on variable image is executed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the game state (whether it is "normal mode", "preparation mode", or "casual mode") at the time of power-on. By configuring both the power-on main image and the power-on variable image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it is no longer necessary to determine the location (either the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, or the performance unit 422a) to be displayed depending on the type of image, which can speed up processing. Therefore, the period from when the power is turned on until the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are displayed can be further shortened.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

Now, referring to Figure 125, the image that changes when the power is turned on will be described. Figure 125 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 125(a) on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 125(b). As shown in FIG. 125(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 125(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Fig. 125(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 125(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 125 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 124, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 126(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 126, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, each of which is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "town stage" or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection, as if they flow to the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the town stage, which is frequently displayed, is stored in the back image area. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126(b), on the back side B corresponding to the empty stage, only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back side, that is, the image between position a and position b, is stored in the resident video RAM 235. is stored in the rear image area 235c.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but in this case, the resident video RAM 235 is extremely A RAM with a large capacity must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' (or the range of Fig. 125 (a) to (b)), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between Fig. 125 (a) to (b)) including the initial position is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the player's operation of the frame button 22, the initial position of the back B can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be scrolled or the color tone can be changed over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 during this time. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably. Furthermore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap in image data corresponding to images between position b' and position b. is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 124, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the performance unit 331. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 30 types of numbers (main patterns) numbered "1" to "30" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance in the performance unit 331, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly in the performance unit 331. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the performance unit 331 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a, even though the variable performance has been started in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "1" to "30" and are made up of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns that are made up of a rear pattern and additional patterns that resemble characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for demo performances that are displayed on the performance unit 331 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the performance unit 331, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually checking the display image of the performance unit 331 that is not numbered.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). The image storage area 236a is divided into a number of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a), thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , reads out one frame of the image developed earlier from the other frame buffer, and displays the read one frame on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a). You can display as many images as you like.

Then, a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and a one frame's worth of image for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a). The frame buffer from which information is read is designated by the MPU 231 alternately switching between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. be done.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a), while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that one frame's worth of image can be continuously displayed in 20 millisecond units while one frame's worth of image is being drawn.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a), transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table, and This is an area where a transfer data table that defines transfer timing is stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program memory area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As mentioned above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, so that the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81, etc. (third pattern display device 81, presentation unit 331, and presentation unit 422a).

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, the display data table shows the performance mode of each performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the performance section 331, and the performance section 422a) based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable effects, opening effects, round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round performance is a performance to inform the player of the number of rounds that will start from now. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, in the demonstration production, if the next variation production accompanying the starting prize winning does not start even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variation production stopped, the production section 331 receives "0". '' to ``9'' are stopped and displayed, and the back image on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a demonstration back image. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the performance section 331 and the third symbol display device 81, the players and the people involved in the hall can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to FIG. 127, the display data table will be described in detail. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a) as one unit.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81, etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a) to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a) that should display the sprite. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which is specified for each address: one background image, four third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Note that one or more pieces of information about effects and characters are specified according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This type of back surface is determined by whether to display either the back surface A or B that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage" or "sky stage"), or to display a back surface that is different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81, etc.) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81, etc.) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81, etc.) was started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 The display may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display (e.g. display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81, etc.) was started. information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 127) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233f, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, the presentation section 331, and the presentation section 422a).

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331 , and the effect image to be displayed on the effect section 422a).

Here, like a conventional pachinko machine, the process is executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a) is changed. If the configuration is configured to start a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes complex and huge as the variety of performance images increases. Therefore, there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a).

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each production mode in this way, and the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the production mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is read frame by frame according to the set data table. In the pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 331, This is because the effect to be displayed in section 422a) is determined. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created is such that the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the presentation section 331, and the presentation section 422a) to display in advance the result of a lottery conducted based on the starting winnings. This can only be realized based on a configuration that determines the presentation mode.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 128). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 128).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 128) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created, and transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should be started, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is transmitted to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specific sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 125 (a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 165) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (see S3605 in Figure 165). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S5205 in Figure 176 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3908 in FIG. 167(b), S3909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 176(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 176(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 177) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the presentation unit 331, and the presentation unit 422a) in response to commands, etc. transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands, etc. from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the presentation unit 331, and the presentation unit 422a) based on commands, etc. transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 129) that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) display a performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 129) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) display a performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, a corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a). Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S3903 in FIG. 167(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S4805 in FIG. 167(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 129), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a). Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, you can easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a). Can be changed. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, a corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a). Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 129, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 127, for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of that sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h controls the performance of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (the third symbol display device 81, the performance section 331, and the performance section 422a) based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is a counter that counts time. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data indicates the production time, which is the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81, production section 331, and production section 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example). It is the value divided by

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 167(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and together with the drive signal, the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display By transferring the image information to the device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a), the image information is transferred to the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a). Execute display processing to display the image.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S3906 in FIG. 167(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and sent to the third symbol display device 81, etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a), while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that one frame's worth of image can be continuously displayed in 20 millisecond units while one frame's worth of image is being drawn.

The back image change flag 233w is used to determine whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a). It's a flag. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S4601 in FIG. 172(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S4602 in FIG. 172(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. This rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S4821 in FIG. 173), and is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S4106 in FIG. 169(a), S4305 in FIG. 170(a), S4405 in FIG. 170(b), 171, S4506). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) (determined display) after the fluctuating pattern. If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S4106 in FIG. 169(a), S4305 in FIG. 170(a), S4405 in FIG. 170(b), 171, S4506). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<Regarding control process of main control device in first control example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 130 to 141, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, main process that is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process that is started periodically (every 2 milliseconds in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the start-up process and main process will be explained.

Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, When they reach 999, 999, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and also sets the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. Details of this special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to Figures 131 and 132.

After executing the special symbol variation process (S104), a starting winning process (S105) is executed as the ball passes through the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a. The details of this starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol change process (S106) is executed to perform processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83. Details of the normal symbol change process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

After the normal symbol variation process is executed, a through gate passing process (S107) is executed to perform processing associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. Details of the through gate passing process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136. After the through gate passing process (S107) is executed, a launch control process (S108) is executed, and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of symbols performed in the performance display sections 331a to 331d.

In this special symbol variation process (Fig. 131, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently being played (S201). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the performance display unit 331a to 331d are displaying a first special symbol jackpot (including the time when the special symbol jackpot is being played) and the time during a predetermined period of time after the first special symbol jackpot has ended. If it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is currently being played (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is not currently being played (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed (S202).

If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (number of reserved balls N of special symbol 1) is acquired ( S203), it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c ( S205), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by subtraction is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special pattern 1 change start process is executed to start the change display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B (S208). The special pattern 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is updated (S210), and this process ends.

In the process of S209, if it is determined that the time for changing the display of the change in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol 1 change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 132. When this special symbol 1 change start process is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big win is determined according to the value of the first win random number counter C1, and if it is a big win of a special symbol, the big win type (see FIG. 107, FIG. 108) is determined according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed is started on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is displayed. ) is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a jackpot of the first special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203f and the time saving flag 203g are set to OFF, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S214), and the process moves to S218. When the start of the jackpot for the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is executed. is set. As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the result of the current lottery is a miss for the special pattern (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S216), a status command is set to notify the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a status command, it updates the values of the guaranteed bonus status flag 223n, time-saving status flag 223o, time-saving status counter 223p, and winning status storage area 223q according to the game status notified by the status command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S215 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the processes of S216 and S217 are skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 132, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and is performed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of This is a process for determining a production pattern (variation pattern) of a variation production performed on the display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (S301).

Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability of special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is changing the probability of special symbols (that is, the probability change flag 203f is on) (S302: Yes), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of , and the first random number table 202a for high probability winning, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 41 random numbers stored in the first winning random number table 202a for high probability times. As mentioned above, 41 random numbers from 500 to 540 are set as special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state (i.e., the high probability flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the first special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random number values stored in the first jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random number values from "0 to 39" are set as the random number value that results in a jackpot for the first special symbol, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After obtaining the lottery result for the special symbol 1, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the type of the current jackpot is determined based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the eight types of special symbol jackpots (probable jackpot A to probable jackpot G, normal jackpot A). As described above, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a special jackpot A (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "5 to 84", it is determined to be a special jackpot B (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "85 to 274", it is determined to be a special jackpot C (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "275 to 774", it is determined to be a special jackpot D (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "775 to 804", it is determined to be a special jackpot E (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "805 to 874", it is determined to be a special jackpot F (2R special jackpot), if it is in the range of "875 to 974", it is determined to be a special jackpot G (2R special jackpot), and if it is in the range of "975 to 999", it is determined to be a regular jackpot A (2R regular jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

In the process of S306, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (either special jackpot A to special jackpot G, or normal jackpot A). In addition, the jackpot type (special jackpot A to special jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the state setting information corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). After that, the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set (S309), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S310). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S310, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110(b)), and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the lottery for special pattern 1 is a miss (S305: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (S311). In the process of S311, the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the stop type to be displayed in the performance unit 331 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the loss pattern in the performance unit 331 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S310, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined.

When the processing of S310 or S312 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S310 or S312 (S313). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S309 or S311 (S314). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). The voice lamp control device 113 sends the stop type command as is to the display control device 114 (S315). When the processing of S315 is completed, the process returns to the special pattern 1 variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a. This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the suspended various random number counters when there is a starting prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display in the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No) or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process moves to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the pitch number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (S406). Note that in the process of S406, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203c is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

After the process of S406, the values of the look-ahead probability changing flag 203m, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 are Based on this, predict (read ahead) the success or failure of the special symbol lottery, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern (S407), and set a prize information command including the predicted success or failure of the special symbol lottery, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern (S407). S408). Next, it is determined whether the lottery of the special symbol predicted (read ahead) in the process of S408 is a variable jackpot (S409), and if the lottery of the special symbol predicted (read ahead) is a probability variable jackpot (S409) :Yes), the pre-read probability changing flag 203m is set on (S410), and the process moves to S413.

On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the lottery result of the predicted special symbol is not a guaranteed jackpot (S409: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the predicted special symbol is a regular jackpot (S411). If the lottery result of the predicted special symbol is a regular jackpot (S411: Yes), the pre-reading guaranteed jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Also, in the process of S411, if the lottery result of the predicted special symbol is not a regular jackpot (S411: No), the process skips S412 and proceeds to S413.

In the process of S413, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640a (initial entry) (S413). If there is no entry into the second ball entrance 640a (S413: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is an entry into the second ball entrance 640a (S413: Yes), a special drawing 2 entry command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that an entry (entry) into the second ball entrance 640a has been detected (S414). The special drawing 2 entry command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special drawing 2 entry command during the execution of the increase performance (lucky number increase performance), it determines whether to increase the lucky number (winning pocket).

When the process of S414 is completed, next is a special symbol 2 winning process for executing a special symbol 2 lottery based on various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winning into the second ball entrance 640a. is executed (S415), this process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The details of this special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be explained with reference to FIG. 134.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (S415 in FIG. 134) is based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area when the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640a is detected. A process for performing a lottery (judgment of success or failure) of "big hit" or "missing special symbol" and determining a production pattern (fluctuation pattern) of a variation production performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and production section 331. It is.

In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether the current display mode is changing (S501), and if it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), this process is continued as is. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not changing (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503). ). If it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), the values of each counter (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3) are stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, referring to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change of the special symbol (S505), and if it is determined that the special symbol is in a probability change (i.e., the probability change flag 203f is on) (S505: Yes), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S504 and the first winning random number table 202a for high probability (S506). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 41 random number values stored in the first winning random number table 202a for high probability. As mentioned above, there are 41 random numbers between 500 and 540 set as the jackpot for the second special symbol, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that the jackpot is the second special symbol. Once the lottery result for the second special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S508.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change state (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbols. Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S504 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S507). Specifically, the values of the first random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the 40 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability times. As mentioned above, 40 random numbers from 0 to 39 are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches these random numbers for the jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S508.

In the process of S508, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern 2 obtained by the process of S506 or S507 is a jackpot with a special pattern (S508). If it is determined that it is a jackpot with a special pattern (S508: Yes), the type of jackpot this time (see FIG. 108) is identified based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of S504, and the status setting information corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S509).

Then, the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). After that, the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S511), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S512). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S512, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110(b)), and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot determined in the process of S512 is a probability variable jackpot (S513), and if the determined jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S513: Yes), the look-ahead probability variable flag 203m is set to ON. (S514), and the process moves to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (S513: No), the pre-read probability variable flag 203m is set to OFF (S515), and the process proceeds to S518.

In the process of S508, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S508: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the off-symbol symbol, and the effect section is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area. In step 331, the stop type to be displayed is set.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S517). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the presentation section 331 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S512, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (variation time).

When the process of S517 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S512 or the process of S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S511 or S516 (S519). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 139). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S519 is finished, the process returns to the starting prize winning process.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the normal symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and is a process for controlling the change display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) and the opening time of the electric device 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning symbol, and the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is controlled to open and close. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S602), and the normal symbol If it is determined that is not in the fluctuating display (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times M of suspension of the fluctuating display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). In addition, in the process of S608, if the time saving flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on or the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state is normal symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S608 that the time-saving state for normal symbols is in effect (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in effect (S609). The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in effect includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the performance unit 331 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during play in which a special symbol jackpot is in effect) and the period during which a specified time has elapsed since play in which a special symbol jackpot has ended. If it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is in effect (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is within the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239". , it is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 110(a)).

In the process of S608, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is not in effect (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special pattern or is in a normal state with a normal pattern, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal pattern is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the second win random number table 202c for low probability (S611). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the normal pattern is a win, and if it is within the range of "0 to 4, 6 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a miss (see FIG. 110(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S612: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state for the normal symbol is in effect (S614), and if it is determined that the time-saving state for the normal symbol is in effect (the time-saving flag 203g is on, or the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or greater) (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S616), and the process moves to S619.

In the process of S614, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S614: No), the process moves to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S617), and the process moves to S619.

If it is determined in the process of S612 that the normal pattern is a miss (S612: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S618). In this process of S618, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S619), and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (the time saving flag 203g is on or the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is determined that (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S619: No), the fluctuation display of the second symbol display device 83 is set for 30 seconds. (S621), and the process ends. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the release period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is extremely long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a. It becomes easy to do.

If it is determined in the process of S602 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is being displayed in a changing manner (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the normal pattern changing time being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S622). Note that the changing time here is the time that is preset by the process of S620 or S621, which will be described later, before the changing display is started in the second pattern display device 83 (not shown).

In the process of S622, if the change time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if it is determined that the change time of the normal pattern being displayed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second pattern display device 83 (not shown) is set to display a "○" pattern as a normal pattern (second pattern) in a stopped state (illuminated display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode for the loss is set by the process of S618, the second pattern display device 83 (not shown) is set to display a "X" pattern as a normal pattern (second pattern) in a stopped state (illuminated display). When the stop display is set by processing S623, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S613 and S618.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result for the normal symbol is a win (S624). If it is determined that the current lottery result for the normal symbol is a win (S624: Yes), the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a is set (S625). When the start of opening and closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S625, when the electric role opening and closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is next executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a loss for the normal symbol in the process of S624 (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and determines whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703 :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Add 1 to the value (M) (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process is set to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is the first one among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power outage information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 138), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), it is possible that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S914.

In the process of S905, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907 : No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process also moves to S914 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 139, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. . After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S915, S916).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S915, S916) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the values of the probability change flag 203f, the time-saving flag 203g, the time-saving counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read (S910), and a state command is set based on the read values of the probability change flag 203f, the time-saving flag 203g, the time-saving counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k (S911). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. By receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on (whether it is in a probability change state of a special pattern, whether it is in a jackpot, etc.). This allows it to identify the type of role that can be operated in the origin return operation or initial operation, and to execute a performance corresponding to the state.

When the processing of S911 is completed, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances (S912), an interrupt is permitted (S913), and the process proceeds to the main processing described below.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, round number command, ending command, etc. set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the payout abnormality signal is read. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the round ends. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Next, the electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640a (S1005). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S625 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 135), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). is set, a variable display according to the variable pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) are performed. When the fluctuation time corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern ends, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is ended, and the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 132) is performed. Or the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the process of S311 and the process of S511 or the process of S516 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135). The current variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135). (lit display).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1008). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1008: No), this means that the power outage signal SG1 has not been output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 and the power has not been cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-mentioned processes from S1001 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of this main process (S1009: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the next main process is executed (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 255 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 137 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1012 is executed. In this power-off process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 140, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and the first variable prize winning state. This is a process for executing opening/closing control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a.

In this jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1101, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1101: Yes), "01H" indicating that it is an opening period is stored in the status storage area 203k (S1102), and an opening command is set. (S1103), this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if a special jackpot has not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (S1104). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during a special jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if a special jackpot is not in progress (S1104: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if a special symbol jackpot is being won (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1105). If it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), the opening pattern of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning port (second large opening) 65a according to the jackpot type is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is any of the guaranteed jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A, the opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which 0.6 seconds of opening and 0.9 seconds of closing are repeated 20 times) is set as the opening pattern of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a, and if the jackpot type is any of the guaranteed jackpots E to G, the opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which 0.052 seconds of opening is performed only once) is set as the opening pattern of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is either a special jackpot A, a special jackpot H-K, or a normal jackpot B, an opening pattern is set in which the second specific winning port (second large opening port) 65a is open for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won).

When the process of S1106 is completed, next, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

After processing S1107, the status storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and this processing ends. Specifically, as described above, if the current round is the first big win round, "02H" is stored in the status storage area 203k, and if it is the second round, "03H" is stored. Note that the reason this updated value is not notified to the voice lamp control device 113 is that the number of rounds that have started can be determined by the round number command set in the processing of S1107. Since the number of times the command is output can be reduced, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start an ending performance (S1109). Specifically, when a special game state (all two rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start an ending performance.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and this process is executed. finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending (S1109: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the current jackpot (special gaming state) (S1112). In the process of S1112, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is read out (S1113), and the current jackpot is notified. At the start of the variable display, the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read out (S1114).

Next, from the read state setting table 202f, a combination of setting values (probability variable flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read (S1115), and the read setting values are set as the probability variable flag 203f, The time saving flag 203g and the time saving counter 203h are set (S1116). In this way, in this control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the jackpot, and the gaming state is set based on the held state setting information when the jackpot ends. are doing. With this configuration, there is no need to set the gaming state after a jackpot from the various counter values (random values) acquired at the time of starting winning, so the state setting information can be used to set the state in which the various counter values are held. The time required to store the information in the status setting information storage area 202j can be limited to a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for outsiders to illegally acquire random numbers that result in jackpots for special symbols, so it is possible to analyze the timing at which random numbers that result in jackpots appear, and to prevent fraudulent activities in which jackpots are drawn based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities in which the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, and the random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that becomes a jackpot appears, and the control is made to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Can be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) related to the game state after the end of the jackpot are set during the display of changing symbols to notify the jackpot. , instead of holding it during the subsequent jackpot (bonus game state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area in the RAM 203 to temporarily store all of the various setting values, it is sufficient to provide an area to hold the status setting information values, so the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

After the processing in S1116, "00H" meaning that there is no jackpot is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1117), and the gaming state after the jackpot (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, status A status command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the storage area 203k, etc.) is set (S1118), and this processing ends. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the values of the variable probability status flag 223n, the time saving status flag 223o, the time saving status counter 223p, and the winning status storage area 223q according to the gaming status notified by the status command. do.

In the process of S1112, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special gaming state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second A winning process is executed to execute control corresponding to the case where a ball enters the large open opening) 65a (S1119), and this process ends. The details of this winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

Figure 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning process (Figure 141, S1119), it is first determined whether it is within the valid round period (S1201). The valid round period is a collective term for the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period during which an opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning port (large opening) 65a, and the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. If it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is outside the valid round period (S1201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 65a is entered. It is determined whether a winning has been detected (S1202), and if it is determined that a winning has been detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1203), and the winning during the jackpot is controlled by the audio lamp. A large open mouth winning command is set to notify the device 113 (S1204), and the process moves to S1205. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 can determine the number of winning balls based on the received wide open mouth winning command.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot (variable jackpot B-D, normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 are connected, the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the number of winning balls (the value of the winning counter 223gv) grasped based on this large opening winning command, and a match with the number of balls discharged through the second passage forming member 422 is determined. Then, when the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably allowed to flow down to the second passage forming member 422. This prevents (suppresses) problems such as balls getting into the base or wiring on the back of the pachinko machine 10, causing short circuits in the wiring or circuits.

In the process of S1202, if it is determined that winnings to the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a are not detected (S1202: No), the processes of S1203 and S1204 are skipped, and the process moves to S1205. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205), and if the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process moves to S1207. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the end time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specific winning hole 65a.

In the process of S1206, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), this means that the round termination condition is not satisfied, and thus the process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1206, if it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process moves to S1207. The process of S1207 is executed when the upper limit number of balls enters the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes), or when the round time has elapsed ( S1206: Yes). That is, this is a case where the round end condition is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the round being executed is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and this processing is ended.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 164. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 142, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off process in S1620 (see Figure 145). ) is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1617 in FIG. 145: Yes), it executes the power-off process in S1620. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1620 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1302: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1620 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1303).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process moves to S1304 and starts initialization of RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process moves to S1308.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process moves to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1620 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process moves to S1308. .

In the processing of S1302, if the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1620. This is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set ( S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

After the processing of S1306, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed, so the processing of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y on when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309), the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310), and the processing proceeds to S1311. The working area of RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1308 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the process has reached the above process, or when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and the process is started. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and S1310, which is a process of setting the power-off flag 223y to OFF, are skipped, and the process moves to S1311.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the process proceeds from S1304 to S1306 and then to S1308, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

In the process of S1311, the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then interrupt permission is set (S1312). After that, a power-on state setting process is executed to identify the game state at the time of power-on based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1313), a return to origin process is executed to return the role that has been displaced from the origin position to the origin position (S1314), and the process proceeds to main processing. Details of the power-on state setting process (S1313) and the return to origin process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 143 and FIG. 144, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the turning-on state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this input state setting process (S1313). This power-on state setting process (S1313) is executed during the start-up process (see FIG. 142), and is a process for identifying the gaming state when the power is turned on, as described above.

In the input state setting process (S1313), first, the probability change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the winning state are set according to the state command output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. The value of the status storage area 223q is updated (S1401).

As described above, the status command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, and status storage area 203k at the time of power-on during the start-up process of the main controller 110. (See S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this status command, in the process of S1401, the probability variable state flag 223n is updated to match the state of the probability variable flag 203f, the time saving state flag 223o is updated to match the state of the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving state flag 223o is updated to match the state of the time saving flag 203g. The time saving state counter 223p is updated to match the value of the counter 203h, and the winning state storage area 223q is updated to match the value stored in the state storage area 203k. Thereby, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state ascertained by the audio lamp control device 113 can be matched during the start-up process.

Next, it is determined whether the updated value stored in the winning status storage area 223q is a value indicating that a jackpot is in progress (S1402). Here, as described above, if "01H" is stored in the winning status storage area 223q, it indicates that it is in the opening period of a jackpot, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is in the round period of one round, if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is in the round period of two rounds, and if "04H" is stored, it indicates that it is in the ending period. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that it is not currently in a jackpot.

In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the value in the winning state storage area 223q is not a value indicating a big win (that is, "00H" is stored) (S1402: No), the process moves to S1403. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the winning state storage area 223q is a value indicating a jackpot (that is, one of "01H" to "04H") (S1402: Yes), then It is determined whether "04H" indicating the ending period is stored in the status storage area 223q (S1404).

If it is determined in the process of S1404 that the current time is the ending period (S1404: Yes), a wait period of 1.5 seconds is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1403. The wait period set here is set to delay the execution of the origin return process (see FIG. 144). By setting this wait period, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being executed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, which would result in the connection with the second passage forming member 422 being released. This makes it possible to prevent a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 from entering the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422.

To be more specific, in the jackpots where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected (probable jackpots B to D and normal jackpot A), the connection is canceled during the ending period, and each accessory is configured to drive the motor to the origin position. This drive to the origin position is executed after confirming that the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the ejection counter 223hv match and that no balls remain in the first passage forming member 520 during the ending period. Ru. However, if the power is cut off during the ending period and then turned on again, the RAM 223 will be initialized during the startup process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv will be Since the value is also cleared, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not a ball remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this control example, when it is determined that the power is turned off and turned on during the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are in a connected state, and Even if the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 520, the period of 1.5 seconds is sufficient for the ball inside the first passage forming member 520 to reach the second passage forming member 422. The configuration is such that the return-to-origin operation is on standby. This can prevent the ball from performing a return-to-origin operation while passing through the first passage forming member 520 and from being disconnected from the second passage forming member 422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the balls do not enter the second passage forming member 422 but are ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enter the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being reached (S1402: No), and in the process of S1403 which is executed after the process of S1405, the bits corresponding to all the reels in the operable type storage area 223r are set to 1 indicating that they are operable (S1403), this process ends, and the process returns to the start-up process. By setting the value (1) indicating that all the reels are operable by the process of S1403, it is possible to execute the origin return operation and initial operation for all the reels, and therefore it is possible to check whether all the reels are in a state where they can operate normally.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the current period is not the ending period (a value other than "04H" is stored in the winning status storage area 223q) (S1404: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the opening period (whether "01H" is stored in the winning status storage area 223q) (S1406). If it is determined in the process of S1406 that the current period is the opening period ("01H" is stored in the winning status storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are set to their respective connection positions (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, if the current period is not the opening period in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is executed during the opening period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are set to the connection position because the step counter 223e is initialized by the initialization of the RAM 223 during the start-up process (see S1311 in FIG. 142). Therefore, if the power is cut off during the opening period of the special jackpot B to D and the normal jackpot A while the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are being connected, the position of each member becomes unclear when the power is turned back on. Therefore, in this control example, the drive to the connection position is set again regardless of the position of each member. This allows the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 to be reliably connected during the opening period.

In the process of S1408, in the operable type storage area 223r, the bit corresponding to the accessory set at the connection position (liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and left swing unit 500) is set to 0, and the other bits are set to 1. settings (S1408), and ends this process. As a result, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded from the origin return operation and the initial operation, so when the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be kept connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ink is ejected from the opening of the one-path forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this origin return processing (S1314). This return-to-origin process (S1314) is executed during the start-up process (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and returns the accessories that have changed from the original position when the power is turned on to the original position. This is a process to return it to its original position.

In the origin return process, first, it is determined whether the current time is the wait period (S1501), and if it is the wait period (S1501: Yes), the process ends. As described above, this wait period is set when the insertion state setting process is executed during the ending period of the jackpot (see S1405 in FIG. 143), and is set to prevent the origin return operation from being executed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the current wait period is not in progress (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and the bit with a value of 1 is It is determined whether the origin sensors of the corresponding accessories are all in the H output state (S1503). If it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the accessories corresponding to the bit with a value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), the output corresponds to the origin sensor in the L state. A motion toward the origin (return-to-origin motion) is set for the accessory to be played (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the origin return operation is being executed, the origin return flag 223i is set to ON (S1505), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the outputs of the origin sensors of the reels corresponding to the bits whose values are 1 in the operable type storage area 223r are all in the H state (S1503: Yes), there is no need to execute the origin return operation, so the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and the initial operation in progress flag 223j is set to ON to indicate that the initial operation is being executed (S1507), and this processing ends.

By executing this return-to-origin process (S1314), each accessory can be returned to the origin position, so subsequent initial operations can be started from the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or the previous processing of S1601 was executed (S1601), and 1 millisecond If the above period has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1614 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1613. In the process of S1601, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is because S1602 to S1613 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, this is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S1614 and the variable display setting process in S1615 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S1614 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1615 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1603 to S1616 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608, which will be described later (S1603), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1605 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process for changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command is set for the display control device 114. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 will display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect will display the expectation of a jackpot. It is also possible to change the effect to one that can be held, or use the frame button 22 as a decision button for selecting one of the ready-to-reach effects from a plurality of ready-to-reach effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After the process of S1609, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the presentation section 331 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal presentation execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the production section 331.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, a swing performance process is executed (S1611) to control the swing performance during which ball B swings on the top of the holding piece 677. Next, a discharge detection process is executed (S1612) to detect the ball that has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) and perform corresponding control. Next, a performance setting process is executed (S1613) to control various performances executed during the execution of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance", and the process moves to S1614. Details of the swing performance process (S1611), discharge detection process (S1612), and performance setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to Figures 146 to 149.

In the process of S1614, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1614). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1615). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance (variable display) in the performance unit 331. As a result, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162 and FIG. 163. After the variable display setting process (S1615) is completed, a role operation setting process is executed to set the operation of each role (S1616). Details of this role operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 164.

When the processing of S1616 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). Information on the occurrence of a power failure is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control device 110. In the processing of S1617, if it is determined that information on the occurrence of a power failure is stored (S1617: Yes), the power failure flag 223y and the power failure processing in progress flag are both set to ON (S1619), and the power failure processing is executed (S1620). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned OFF (S1621), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, the occurrence of an interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned OFF, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned OFF. The stored information on the occurrence of a power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1617 (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S1618: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1618: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display contents of the performance unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 do not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 146, the rocking performance process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing this rocking performance process (S1611). This rocking performance process (S1611) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, various controls are performed during the execution of the rocking performance.

In the swing effect processing, first, it is determined whether the swing effect flag 223ev provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is on (S1701), and if the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S1701: No). ), since the swinging effect is not in progress, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the rocking effect flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), then it is determined whether the rocking undetected flag 223v is on (S1702), and the rocking effect flag 223ev is determined to be on. If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether the ball B has passed in front of the ball detection sensor 679 provided at the upper center portion of the holding piece 677.

In the process of S1703, if it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the ball passes in front of the ball detection sensor 679. This means that the process has not been completed, so this process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S1703, if it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), after the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650, the ball B is first detected by the ball detection sensor 679. This means that the swing undetected flag 223v is set to OFF, and the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704), and this process ends. Thereby, from now on, each time the ball B passes through the ball detection sensor 679, the period of the rocking operation can be determined from the measured value of the rocking timer 223w.

If it is determined in the process of S1702 that the swing undetected flag 223v is off (S1702: No), then it is determined whether the ball drop possible flag 223fv is on (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), this means that the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of ball B is sufficiently small and the conditions for dropping ball B are met, so a drop control process (S1706) is executed to determine the position of the rotating member 640 and control the drop of ball B, and this process is terminated. Details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1705 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the oscillation timer 223w (S1707), and then it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is in the H state (S1708). If it is determined in the processing of S1708 that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not H (i.e., the output is in the L state) (S1708: No), this indicates that the ball B has not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677, and the period cannot be determined, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1708, if it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709 ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from when the ball B was detected to pass by the ball detection sensor 679 last time until it is detected to pass again this time is determined. This means 500 milliseconds or less. In other words, this means that the period of the oscillation has become smaller than 1 second (500 milliseconds x 2), so the ball fall possible flag 223fv is set to ON (S1711), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1709, if the value of the rocking timer 223w is greater than 500 (S1709: Yes), this means that the period of the rocking motion performed by ball B is relatively long (the amplitude of the rocking motion is large), and dropping ball B in this state may look unnatural. Therefore, the condition for dropping is not met (ball drop possible flag 223fv is kept off), the value of the rocking timer 223w is reset (S1710), and then processing returns to the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, the fall control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this fall control process (S1706). This fall control process (S1706) is executed within the swing performance process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801). If it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801: Yes), the positions of the detected parts 641c and the detection sensors A to F are misaligned, and the position of the rotating member 640 cannot be identified, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is not L (i.e., at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the pocket located at the drop position (directly below the holding piece 677) is identified based on the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the rotation position discrimination table 222c (see FIG. 121) (S1802). Next, the pocket type (whether it is a winning pocket or a losing pocket) of the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket located at the current drop position is identified from the winning position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122) (S1803). Then, the identified pocket type is compared with the win or loss of this roulette chance (whether or not the transition to the "consecutive win mode" has been confirmed) (S1804), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S1805).

In the process of S1805, if the comparison result is not a match (S1805: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the comparison result is a match (S1805: Yes), the process is set so that ball B will fall after 100 steps (i.e., the holding piece 677 is driven to the retracted position) (S1806), and the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and this process ends. Note that 100 steps is the number of steps that the holding piece 677 is driven to the retracted position 0.2 seconds before it reaches the next pocket. This 0.2 seconds is set to be approximately the same as the fall time of ball B that falls from the holding piece 677. This allows ball B to enter the next pocket just as the next pocket is positioned at the drop position.

In this way, in the fall control process (see FIG. 147) in this control example, the determination of the type of pocket to be placed next at the falling position and the fall control of ball B based on the determination result are performed when the pocket is at the falling position. is configured to run before it is deployed. That is, when dropping the ball B, the holding piece 677 is moved to the retracted position at a timing that allows the ball B to fall sufficiently into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the dropping position). It can be driven (immersed). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably drop the ball B into the pocket of the targeted type. Therefore, ball B may hit and fall into the pocket even though it does not shift to "success mode", or conversely, even though the transition to "success mode" is confirmed, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

In this control example, when it is determined that ball B is to be dropped into the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is sunk into the recessed position after 100 steps of rotation by the rotating member 640 regardless of the arrangement of ball B, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the holding piece 677 may be sunk into the recessed position by timing the time when ball B reaches the center of the holding piece 677 during the swinging motion. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion is determined each time ball B reaches the center of the holding piece 677, and the determined period of the swinging motion can be stored (updated) in RAM 223. Then, when the 100th step is reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the time elapsed since the ball detection sensor 679 detected the passage of the ball B last time) is referred to, and if it is determined that the value is close to the period of the most recent swing operation stored in the RAM 223 (for example, a value equal to or greater than 90% of the period of the most recent swing operation), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the most recent swing operation) with respect to the period of the most recent swing operation, the holding piece 677 may be controlled to wait until the predetermined ratio is reached and then immerse into the immersion position. By configuring in this way, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside of the holding piece 677 (toward the left end or right end) or when it is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing into the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is retracted, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without moving in any other direction. This shortens the time from when the holding piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position until the ball B starts to drop, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the targeted pocket.

In this control example, when it is determined that ball B can be dropped into the pocket to be located next to the pocket currently located in the drop position, the holding piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position after performing a rotational operation for 100 steps, but this is not limited to this. Ball B may be dropped randomly each time within a range (for example, within a range of 100 steps to 120 steps) that allows ball B to be reliably dropped into the pocket at the drop position without falling into the pocket at the drop position or the pocket two steps away from the drop position. By configuring in this way, the timing at which ball B falls can be varied, so ball B can be dropped in a more natural appearance (as if ball B was falling only due to the action of gravity) compared to when ball B is dropped at the same timing every time.

Next, the discharge detection process (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. This discharge detection process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for detecting balls that have passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) and performing the corresponding control.

In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected entering the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 (S1901). If a ball has not been detected (S1901: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that a ball has been detected entering the second passage forming member 422 (S1901: Yes), this means that the ball that entered the first variable winning device 82a has successfully reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520, so first, 1 is added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

When the process of S1902 is completed, it is then determined whether a discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. This discharge standby flag is a flag indicating whether the period (discharge standby period) is set after all rounds of the jackpot are completed in order to discharge all winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. be. In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the discharge standby flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge standby period, and it means that the jackpot round period is in progress, so the time saving state of the normal symbol The execution of the time-saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b)) indicating whether or not is set is set (S1904), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1903, if it is determined that the discharge standby flag is on (S1903: Yes), the value of the winning prize counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the read value of the winning prize counter 223gv is set as the discharge counter. It is determined whether the value matches the value of 223hv (S1906). In the process of S1906, if the read value of the winning prize counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: No), this process is directly ended in order to continue the discharge standby period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1906 that the value of the winning counter 223gv matches the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), it means that all the balls that entered the first variable winning device 82a have been normally discharged from the second passage forming member 422. Therefore, a process is executed to release the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Specifically, the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the table 222b6 for the specific ending is set to "01H" (S1907), and an action command is set to notify the action content according to the value of the action pointer 223g (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this process is terminated.

By executing this discharge detection process, all the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are discharged via the second passage forming member 422, and then the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage are formed. The connection (connection) with member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of problems such as the balls getting into the base part or wiring part on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, causing short circuits in the wiring or circuits.

Next, the effect setting process (S1613) in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 149. This effect setting process (S1613) is one process in the main process (see FIG. 145), and as described above, is a process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the "consecutive mode suggestion effect."

In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223cv during increasing effect is on (S2001), and if the flag 223cv during increasing effect is on (S2001: Yes), 1 is set in the effect timer 223bv. is added (S2002), and it is determined whether the value of the performance timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase performance (lucky number increase performance) (S2003).

In the process of S2003, if it is determined that the performance timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase performance (S2003: Yes), a roulette chance performance is set (S2004), and the flag 223cv during increase performance is turned off. At the same time, the roulette flag 223dv is set to on (S2005), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase production (S2003: No), the processes of S2004 and S2005 are skipped, and this process is continued. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the flag 223cv during increasing performance is not on (S2001: No), then it is determined whether the roulette flag 223dv is on or not (S2006), and it is determined that it is off. If so (S2006: No), this means that the "successive game mode suggestion performance" is not being executed, and thus the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if it is determined that the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006: Yes), it is determined that the roulette chance performance (see FIGS. 95(a) and (b)) is currently being executed. Therefore, next, 1 is added to the effect timer 223bv (S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008). ).

If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the timer value of the performance timer 223bv is not a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance performance (S2008: No), this process is terminated in order to continue the roulette chance performance. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2008 that the timer value of the performance timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance performance (S2008: Yes), the roulette flag 223dv and the swing performance flag 223ev are first set to OFF (S2009) in order to end the roulette chance performance and set the ending performance of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance".

When the processing in S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a shift to the "continuous winnings mode" has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the winning pocket) in the current roulette chance performance (S2010). If the transition to "Continuous winning mode" (falling into the winning pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image is changed so that the ending image continues to be displayed until the jackpot fluctuation that is being executed ends. is set (S2011), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2010, if it is determined that the current roulette chance performance has not notified the transition to the "consecutive win mode" (S2010), then it is determined whether the current roulette chance performance has not notified a loss (ball B has not been dropped into the loss pocket) (S2012). If it is determined that the loss has not been notified (ball B has not been dropped into the loss pocket) (S2010: No), this means that even though the end timing of the roulette chance performance has been reached, ball B has not been dropped (the result of the roulette chance performance has not been notified), so there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a malfunction of the holding piece 677 has occurred. Therefore, in this case, an error display is set by setting a display error command (S2013), and this process is terminated. By executing the error display by the display error command, the hall staff can easily recognize that a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repairs can be taken promptly.

On the other hand, in the process of S2012, if it is determined that a miss has been notified (the ball B has fallen into the miss pocket) (S2012: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed. It is determined (S2014), and if it is not changing (S2014: No), the display of the ending image is set for 5 seconds (S2015), and this process ends. In addition, at the end of the roulette chance performance (85 seconds from the start of the "Continuous winning mode suggestion performance"), the variation will be stopped, and the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode" will be stopped. This is the case when the fluctuation stops before the is executed. Therefore, if a variable probability jackpot occurs within the remaining number of time reductions thereafter, the game shifts to the "continuous winning mode" after the probability variable jackpot ends. In this case, a revival roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115(b)) is executed, and control is performed so that the ball B falls into the winning pocket.

In the process of S2014, if it is determined that the special symbol is currently being displayed as a variation (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the variation type is a losing variation (S2016), and if a missing variation is being executed. (S2016: Yes), the remaining time until the end of the currently executed deviation variation is set as the display time of the ending image (S2018), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2016, if it is determined that there is no losing variation (that is, a jackpot variation is being executed) (S2016: No), a revival roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115(b)) is set (S2017) , this process ends. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), an appropriate effect can be executed in the "continuous game mode suggestion effect".

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1614). This command determination process (S1614) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is a process for

In this command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that a variable pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main process. Note that details of this variable pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2103). If a stop type command has been received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2104), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2106). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2106: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. The value (N number of pending times of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2107). In addition, in the process of S2107, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After completing the process in S2107, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, each time an initial winning is detected or a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2107. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 when the initial winning is detected or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. When the process of S2107 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S2106, if it is determined that the reserved pitch count command has not been received (S2106: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if the winning information command is received (S2108: Yes), winning information command processing is executed to set a performance according to the winning information (S2109), and this process ends. The details of this winning information command processing (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2108: No), then commands related to jackpots (i.e., opening command, number of rounds command, large opening winning command, ending command) It is determined whether any) has been received (S2110). In the process of S2110, if it is determined that a command related to a jackpot has been received (S2110: Yes), a win-related command process is executed to execute processing according to various commands related to a jackpot (S2111), and the main process is executed. end. Note that details of this hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

On the other hand, in the process of S2110, if a command related to a jackpot has not been received (S2110: No), then it is determined whether an execution command has been received from any motor driver (S2112). In the process of S2112, if an execution command is received (S2112: Yes), the progress of the movement of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined according to the execution command output from the various motor drivers, and the progress is determined. Execution command processing is executed to perform control according to (S2113), and this processing ends. Note that details of the execution command processing (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if an execution command has not been received (S2112: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2114), and if a status command has been received (S2114: Yes), The game state notified by the state command is determined, and state command processing for performing corresponding control is executed (S2115), and the present processing ends. Note that details of this status command processing (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

On the other hand, in the process of S2114, if the status command has not been received (S2114: No), then it is determined whether the special drawing 2 winning command has been received (S2116). In the process of S2116, if the special figure 2 winning command is received (S2116: Yes), the special figure 2 winning command process is executed to set a corresponding effect according to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640a. It is executed (S2117), and this process ends. The details of this special drawing 2 winning command process (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG. 161.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2116 that the special chart 2 winning command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S2118), and the process returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set to send that command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the variation pattern command processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this variable pattern command processing (S2102). This variation pattern command processing (S2102) is executed during the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and is a process for specifying a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command and setting the behavior of the accessory. be.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), first, the variation start flag 223c is set on (S2201), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory motion scenario (S2203), and if there is no accessory motion scenario (S2203: No), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2203 that a reel operation scenario exists (S2203: Yes), the corresponding reel operation scenario is set (S2204), and then this processing ends.

Next, the details of the winning information command process (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 152. This winning information command process (S2109) is executed when a winning information command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for setting the presentation according to the winning information.

When this winning information command process (see FIG. 152) is started, first, the winning information command is extracted from the received winning information command, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are stored as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. Store (S2301). Next, each process of S2302 to S2313 for setting an additional effect (see FIG. 96(a)) is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. As mentioned above, this additional performance is executed when the winning of the first ball into the first ball entrance 64 is suspended in the "normal mode", and the game is changed to the "preparation mode" or "succession mode" in the reserved ball. This is an effect to make the player expect the transition.

The process of S2302 to S2313 for setting the additional effects will now be described in more detail. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether the time-saving state flag 223o is on or not (S2302). If it is determined that it is on (S2302: Yes), this means that the current state is the "consecutive win mode" (not the "normal mode"), and since the additional effects will not be executed regardless of whether the winning information is correct or not, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the time-saving state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303).

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the current state is "preparation mode" (not "normal mode"), and the validity of the winning information is determined. Irrespective of this, the additional effect will not be executed, so the process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the addition counter 223av (number of additions) is 3, which is the upper limit. (S2304), and if it is the upper limit value, no additional effects are set and the process ends. Note that in this control example, the upper limit of the number of additions is uniformly set to three, but it is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number may be increased as more lottery results that are advantageous to the player are pending. Thereby, the more a lottery result advantageous to the player is held, the more likely the number of executions of the additional performance increases, so that the more the additional performance is executed, the higher the player's expectations can be.

If it is determined in the process of S2304 that the value of the add-on counter 223av is less than the upper limit (less than 3) (S2304: No), then the winning information corresponding to each reserved ball currently reserved is read from each area of the winning information storage area 223a (S2305), and it is determined whether any of the special jackpot B, C, E, F, and normal jackpot A is included (reserved) in the winning information read out (S2306). In other words, it is determined whether a jackpot type that transitions to "preparation mode" is reserved.

In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the jackpot that moves to the "preparation mode" is not pending (S2306: No), it will be removed from the pending state and the jackpot type for which "preparation mode" is not given (after the jackpot is " Since this is a case in which only the "normal mode") is included, it is a case in which a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is withheld compared to other cases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not to perform an additional performance based on the low probability table for an additional performance with the lowest rate (i.e., 5%) of the additional performance determination table 222d. S2310), the process moves to S2311.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2306 that the jackpot type that transitions to the "preparation mode" is reserved (S2306: Yes), then it is determined whether a special jackpot is reserved in the "preparation mode" (time-saving state for normal symbols) that is set after the end of the jackpot type that transitions to the "preparation mode" (S2307), and if it is determined that a special jackpot is reserved in the "preparation mode" (S2307: Yes), this means that a transition to the most advantageous "consecutive mode" is confirmed, so it is determined whether or not to execute an added effect based on the added effect low probability table (i.e., 25%) of the added effect determination table 222d, and the processing transitions to S2311.

In contrast, in the processing of S2307, if a guaranteed jackpot is not pending in the "preparation mode" (time-saving state for normal symbols) (S2307), only the "preparation mode" which is relatively advantageous to the player is confirmed, so a determination is made as to whether or not to execute an added effect based on the added effect probability table of the added effect discrimination table 222d, which has a rate at which an added effect is determined that is intermediate between the low probability table and the high probability table (i.e., 10%), and processing proceeds to S2311.

In the process of S2311, which is executed after any of S2308 to S2310 has been executed, it is determined whether the execution of an added performance has been decided in the processes of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and if the execution of an added performance has been decided (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the added performance counter 223av (S2312), the execution of the added performance is set (S2313), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2311 that the execution of an added performance has not been decided (S2311: No), the processes of S2312 and S2313 are skipped and this process ends as is.

This winning information command process (see FIG. 152) makes it possible to vary the rate at which an additional effect is determined depending on the contents of the reserved balls. This allows the player to have hope of transitioning to various advantageous states simply by executing an additional effect. For example, the rate at which an additional effect is executed increases when a jackpot type that sets "preparation mode" after a jackpot is on hold, so players can play with a stronger expectation of hitting a jackpot than usual (when an additional effect is not executed). This is because the expectation of transitioning to "preparation mode" also increases if a jackpot is hit.

In addition, if the player wins the jackpot as expected, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation level for moving to the "preparation mode" is higher than normal (if no additional effect is executed). , it is possible to make the player more strongly expect that the lucky number will be displayed on the production section 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, it is better to hold the lottery results corresponding to the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" compared to when the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" has not been confirmed. Since the execution rate of additional effects is configured to be high, when the "preparation mode" is announced as expected by the player, the player has a higher expectation of shifting to the "consecutive game mode" than usual. It can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the transition to the "consecutive game mode". Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to gradually create a sense of expectation in the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153. This hit-related command processing (S2111) is one process within the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for carrying out corresponding control when a command related to a big hit is received.

When this winning-related command processing (see FIG. 153) starts, first it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2401), and if an opening command has been received (S2401: Yes), it is determined whether the opening indicates the start of either a guaranteed jackpot B-D or a normal jackpot A (S2402). In other words, it is determined whether the jackpot is one for which opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the command is an opening command for either the guaranteed jackpot B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2402: Yes), in order to drive the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 to the connecting position, "01H" is set to the action pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119(c)) (S2403). Then, the action content corresponding to the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is read from the specific opening table 222b5, and an action command for setting the read action content in the motor driver is set (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2402 that an opening command corresponding to a jackpot other than any of the guaranteed jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A has been received (S2402: No), since there is no need to connect the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422, the processes of S2403 and S2404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2405.

In the process of S2405, a display opening command is set in order to start the jackpot opening performance (S2405), and this process is ended and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1602) of the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. By receiving this display opening command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the opening performance so that the opening performance of the jackpot is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include an opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S2406). If a round number command has been received (S2406: Yes), first, the number of rounds of the jackpot is extracted from the received round number command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether or not the specified round number is the first round (S2408). If it is the first round (S2408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specified opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119(c)) is "00H" (S2409). That is, it is determined whether or not the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 are in operation. If it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g is a value other than "00H" (S2409: No), it means that the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 are in operation even though the opening period has ended. Since the opening period is set to a time long enough to arrange each of the above-mentioned roles to the connection position, if the operation content specified in the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) has not been completed at the start of one round, it is possible that the drive motor has stopped or is spinning due to some abnormality, or that an abnormality has occurred in the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set (S2410) to display an error image to notify the error, and this process is terminated.

By displaying an error image using an error command, the clerk at the hall can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as repair to the pachinko machine 10 in which an abnormality has occurred.

In the process of S2408, if it is determined that the round number extracted from the round number command is not the first round (that is, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the process of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119 If it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (see (c)) is "00H" (S2409: Yes), execute the display round number command to display the number of rounds extracted in the process of S2408. After setting (S2411), this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S2406, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not a large opening prize winning command has been received (S2412), If the large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223gv (S2413), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2412 that the large opening winning command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2414), and if an ending command has been received (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the ending is one of the guaranteed jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the ending is one of the jackpot types in which the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are driven to the connecting position (S2415: Yes), then a connection release determination process is executed to release the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 (S2416), and the process proceeds to S2417. Details of this connection release determination process (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S2415 that the ending is not one of the special jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: No), the process skips the process of S2416 and proceeds to S2417. In the process of S2417, the ending command for display is set (S2417), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned disconnection determination process (S2416) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. This connection release determination process (S2416) is a process for releasing the connection (coupling) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

In this connection release process (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are read out (S2501), and it is determined whether these counter values match (S2502). In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls that have won into the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second path forming member 422 (first path This means that there is no ball passing through the forming member 520), so the processes of S2503 to S2505 are executed to disconnect the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. .

Specifically, the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 is set to "01H" (S2503), the action content corresponding to the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6, and an action command for notifying the motor driver of the read action content is set (S2504). Then, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are both reset to 0 (S2505), and this process ends. In this way, by determining that the ball that won the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422 and then releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422, it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball is shot from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if the value of the prize winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv do not match (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the winning prize counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506 ), if the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that some of the balls that entered the first variable winning device 82a have not yet reached the second passage forming member 422. In order to wait until the unreached balls reach the second passage forming member 422, the ejection standby flag is set to ON (S2507), and this process ends. By setting this discharge standby flag to ON, each time the above-described discharge detection process (see FIG. 148) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv match, and these are If they match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that the value of the winning counter 223gv is equal to or less than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506: No), this means that more balls than the number of balls that won the first variable winning device 82a have been discharged through the second passage forming member 422, so some kind of abnormality may have occurred. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set (S2508) to display an error image notifying of the error, and this process ends. By displaying the error image using the error command, it is possible for the parlor staff to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repairs can be taken for the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred.

Next, the execution command process (S2113) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 155. This execution command process (S2113) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the progress of the operation set for each reel.

When execution command processing (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the origin return flag 223i is on (S2602), and if it is on (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation is in progress, so the origin sensor whose output is L is It is determined whether or not it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether all the accessories have returned to the origin position by the origin return operation. In the process of S2603, if it is determined that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (S2603: Yes), this means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to that origin sensor has not been completed, so continue In order to execute the return-to-origin operation, this process is ended immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2603 that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the reels have returned to their origin positions) (S2603: No), this means that the origin return operation is completed, so the start of the initial operation is then set (S2604). This initial operation is performed to determine whether each reel is in a state in which it can operate normally by setting a predetermined operation for each reel. As described above, the operation content in this initial operation is specified in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation table 222b7 is set to "01H", and the operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read from the initial operation table 222b7 to set the operation command. When the process of S2604 is completed, the origin return flag 223i is set to OFF, and the initial operation flag 223j is set to ON (S2605), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2602, if it is determined that the origin return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), then it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, it is determined whether the initial operation is being executed, and if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606: Yes), the initial operation processing is performed to execute control according to the progress of the initial operation. is executed (S2607), and this processing ends. Details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

If it is determined in the process of S2606 that the initial operation flag 223j is off (S2606: No), then it is determined whether the execution command received this time is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 (S2608). That is, it is determined whether the execution command is for notifying that one step of the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 has been performed. If it is determined in the process of S2608 that the execution command is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 (S2608: Yes), a rotation setting process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the back LED 625) is executed (S2609), and a lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the back LED 625 is executed (S2610), and this process is terminated. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 157 and FIG. 158, respectively.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the currently received execution command is not a command corresponding to the rotation unit 600 (S2608: No), it is then determined whether the currently received execution command has reached the number of operation steps set for the role corresponding to that execution command (S2611). For example, if an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of the upper lifting unit 300 has been received, the number of operation steps is read from the set operation scenario (upper lifting unit table 222b1) and the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario. Then, if the value of the step counter 223e is equal to or greater than the operation steps specified in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

If it is determined in the process of S2611 that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the action pointer 223g of the role (action scenario) corresponding to the currently received execution command (S2612), and the action content corresponding to the pointer value after the increment is read from the action scenario table 222b (S2613). Then, an action command is set to instruct the corresponding motor driver on the action content that has been read out (S2614), and this process ends.

Next, details of the initial operation process (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 156. This initial operation process (S2606) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation, as described above.

When this initial motion processing (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the motion pointer 223g corresponding to the motion scenario of the initial motion is read out (S2701), and it is determined whether the termination condition of the motion corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the value of the current operation pointer 223g is "02H", it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the upper elevating unit 300 reaches the lowered position and the left swing unit 500 reaches the connected position. (See Figure 120).

In the process of S2702, if it is determined that the end condition of the currently set operation is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is determined from the value of the current operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether the number of abnormality determination steps specified in the table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an operation for one additional step is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has been reached (S2703: Yes), it is determined that the termination condition is not satisfied even though a sufficient number of steps have been set to satisfy the termination condition. means. Therefore, there is a possibility of a problem such as the drive motor not operating normally or an abnormality occurring in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, the error display is set by setting a display error command (S2705), and the present process ends.

Further, in the process of S2702, if it is determined that the end condition of the currently set operation is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706), The value of each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data in the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after the addition is END data (initial operation is completed) (S2708), and the END data is read out (initial operation is completed). If so (S2708: Yes), the initial operation flag 223j is set to OFF, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2708, if it is determined that the initial motion is not completed (S2708: No), then it is determined whether the initial motion of the accessory corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223g is executable. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether this is the initial motion of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the movable type storage area 223r. In the process of S2710, if it is determined that the initial movement of the accessory corresponding to the value of the movement pointer 223g is executable (S2710: Yes), the value of the movement pointer 223g after being incremented by 1 in the process of S2706 The operation content corresponding to is read from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2710, if it is determined that the initial motion of the accessory corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223g is not executable (the corresponding bit of the movable type storage area 223r is 0) (S2710: No ), the process moves to S2706, and the processes of S2706 to S2710 are repeated until the value of the action pointer 223g corresponds to the accessory that can perform the initial action.

Next, the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 157. This rotation setting process (S2609) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and as described above, is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

When this rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F making up the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L (S2801), and all detection sensors If the outputs of A to F are in the L state (S2801: Yes), the arrangement of the rotating member 640 cannot be specified (all non-detecting parts 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotational position detection sensor 684). This means that the current state is 1), so this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the output of any one of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is determined. , and the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121) to identify the arrangement of the rotational member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) that matches the current combination of outputs (S2802). Then, the rotational position storage area 223u is updated from the specified arrangement (S2803).

When the process of S2803 is completed, it is then determined whether the ball falling possible flag 223fv is on (S2804), and if it is off (S2804: No), it means that the conditions for dropping the ball B are not satisfied. Therefore, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S2804, if it is determined that the ball falling flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), based on the arrangement stored in the rotation position storage area 223u and the content stored in the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the types of five pockets (hit pockets or missed pockets) are read out from the pockets at the drop position (S2805). Then, the five pocket types read out are compared with the pocket type in which the ball B is to fall in the current roulette chance performance (S2806).

After the processing of S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether all the comparison results in the processing of S2806 are a mismatch (S2807). If it is determined that all are a mismatch (S2807: Yes), the pocket into which ball B can be dropped will not be positioned at the drop position for at least five pockets due to the rotational motion, so the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (e.g., 300 pps) (S2808). This shortens the time until the targeted pocket type is positioned at the drop position, and prevents ball B from continuing to swing for a long time without dropping after the period of the swinging motion becomes short (one second or less). This allows ball B to drop in a natural-looking manner.

On the other hand, in the process of S2807, this means that the pocket of the targeted type will be placed in the drop position before the rotational motion passes through five pockets. Therefore, in this case, ball B can be made to drop in a natural-looking manner without changing the rotation speed, so the process of S2808 is skipped and the process ends as is.

Next, details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 158. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the back LED 625, as described above.

When this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, first it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223t is on (whether the lighting state of lighting areas A1 to A18 has been set) (S2901). If it is off (S2901: No), it is then determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the rear LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether the LED bar 625a is arranged to match the correction section RA (see FIG. 100(a)) (S2902). If it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is off (L) (S2902: No), it is not the timing to set the lighting state, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is on (H) (S2902: Yes), processing is performed to set the lighting state for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18. . More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotational movement of the rotating member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotational position determination table 222c is read (S2903). Next, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the read rotational position determination table 222c and the combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F forming the rotational position detection sensor 684 (S2905).

When the process of S2905 is completed, next, the types of all the pockets arranged in the range from the pocket 5 pockets before to the pocket 12 pockets ahead from the pocket at the current drop position are read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2906 ). That is, the type of pocket placed on the front side of each lighting area A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read out in the process of S2906. As mentioned above, H is stored as data in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area placed on the back side of the hit pocket, and data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area placed on the back side of the missing pocket. L is stored as . Based on the data stored here (lighting data), the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area where H is stored is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (i.e., lighting corresponding to a lighting rate of 100%). A control command is output), and the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which L is stored is set to an off state with a lighting rate of 0%. When the process of S2907 is completed, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, and the initial setting flag 223t is set to ON (S2908), and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the initial setting completion flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), a process is executed to switch (correct) the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 in accordance with the progress of the rotation of the rotating member 640. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is 864 (i.e., the number of steps for 1/3 of a revolution from the origin position) or 1728 (i.e., the number of steps for 2/3 of a revolution from the origin position) (S2909). In the process of S2909, if it is determined that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), this means that the LED bars 625b and 625c are not in a state that matches the correction section RA, so it is next determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910).

In the process of S2910, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is off (S2910: No), the LED bar 625a also does not match the correction interval RA (none of the LED bars 625a to 625c corresponds to the correction interval RA). Therefore, in this case, since the arrangement is such that correction (switching) of the lighting state cannot be performed, the present process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910: Yes), the rotation operation step counter 223e is reset to 0, and the process moves to S2912. Further, if it is determined in the process of S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), each process of S2910 and S2911 is skipped, and the process moves to S2912.

In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar whose lighting state is to be corrected (switched) this time is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotational position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and the current rotational member 640 is specified (S2914). Then, the type of each pocket placed in the correction section RA (whether it is a hit pocket or a missed pocket) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. Of the area 223m, the storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s is updated (S2916), and this processing is ended.

By executing this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 can be corrected every time the rear LED makes a third of a revolution (that is, in units of one LED bar). In other words, every time the rear LED makes a third of a revolution, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) can be corrected to match the deviation in the correspondence between each pocket of the rotating member 640 and the lighting areas A1 to A18 caused by the rotational action. This makes it possible to keep the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA always looking like the type of pocket (a winning pocket is illuminated and a losing pocket is dark). Because the player can only see a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from mistaking a winning pocket for a losing pocket.

Next, details of the status command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 159. This status command process (S2115) is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls according to the status command received from the main controller 110.

In this state command processing (see FIG. 159), first, based on the received state command, the variable probability state flag 223n, time saving state flag 223o, time saving state counter 223p, and winning state storage area 223q are updated (S3001). . Next, it is determined whether the current status command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002), and if it is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: No), the process is immediately terminated. . It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot has been outputted at the end of the jackpot is determined by, for example, the value stored in the winning status storage area 223q. Specifically, if a new status command is received with "04H" indicating the ending period being stored in the winning status storage area 223q, the status command output at the end of the jackpot is It is determined that This is because the state does not change during the jackpot ending period.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the state command received this time is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 223p after being updated based on the state command is greater than 0 (S3003). In other words, it is determined whether the time-saving state counter 223p has transitioned to "preparation mode" with 1 or 7 time-saving times after the jackpot, and if it is determined that the time-saving state counter 223p has not transitioned to "preparation mode" (time-saving state counter 223p is 0) (S3003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), a winning pocket allocation process (S3004) is executed to determine the placement of the winning pocket. Details of this winning pocket allocation process (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 160.

After the winning pocket is set (determined) by the winning pocket allocation process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see Figures 93 (a) and (b)) is set (S3005), and the increase effect in progress flag 223cv is set to ON to indicate that the increase effect is in progress (S3006). Then, the effect timer 223bv is reset to start timing the effect period from the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" (S3007), and this process ends.

Next, details of the winning pocket distribution process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 160. As described above, this winning pocket distribution process (S3004) is a process for determining the arrangement of winning pockets.

When this winning pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) starts, first, the five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read (S3101), and the read pockets are set as winning pockets in the winning position storage area 22k (S3102). In other words, H is stored in the memory area corresponding to the read pocket.

When the processing of S3102 is completed, the value of the add-on counter 223av is then read (S3103), and it is determined whether the read value of the add-on counter 223av is greater than 0 (S3104). In the processing of S3104, if it is determined that the value of the add-on counter 223av is 0 (S3104: No), there is no need to increase the winning pocket, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3104, if it is determined that the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S3104: Yes), additional winning pockets are set for the value of the additional counter 223av ( (additional), the processes of S3105 to S3110 are executed. Specifically, first, the winning pockets (winning positions) are read out from the winning position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether there is a place where there are five or more consecutive winning pockets (winning positions). (S3106).

In the process of S3106, if it is determined that there is a location where there are 5 or more consecutive winning pockets (S3106: Yes), out of the missed pockets, other than 1 location before and after the location where 5 or more winning locations are consecutive. One additional position is selected from the detached pocket (S3108), and the process moves to S3109. The reason why adding more hit pockets before and after five or more successive pockets is restricted is that if the hits are made too many consecutive times, it may become difficult for the ball B to fall naturally. In other words, if it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of ball B has become shorter at the timing when the winning pockets reach a consecutive location during the execution of the roulette chance presentation that notifies the winning pockets, then the winning pockets are continuous. Ball B must be dropped after passing through the area. Therefore, since the period of the rocking motion is short (the rocking motion is weakened) for a long time, the player may feel uncomfortable that the ball B does not fall easily. Therefore, in this control example, a limit is placed on the number of consecutive hit positions to prevent the ball B from being unable to fall for a long time.

On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that there is no location with five or more consecutive hit pockets (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the missed pockets (S3107). ), the process moves to S3109. In the process of S3109 executed after the process of S3107 or S3108, the winning position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the winning position (S3109), and the value of the additional value counter 223av is subtracted by 1 (S3110). , the process moves to S3104 again. From then on, each process of S3104 to S3110 is repeatedly executed until the value of the add-on counter 223av becomes 0, and when the value of the add-on counter 223av becomes 0, this process ends.

Next, the special drawing 2 winning command process (S2117) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 161. This special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150), and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a during the increase presentation, the winning prize This is a process for determining whether or not to increase.

In this special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether the flag 223cv is on during the increasing presentation (S3201), and if it is off (S3201: No), since the increasing presentation is not in progress, This process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the flag 223cv during increasing performance is on (S3201: Yes), then data in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3202). Then, it is determined whether the number of winning pockets is 5, which is the upper limit (S3203), and if it is the upper limit (S3203: Yes), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the number of winning pockets is less than the upper limit value (S3203: No), then it is determined whether there is a winning pending ball in the winning information (S3204). If there is no hit pending ball (S3204: No), then it is determined whether a jackpot variation is being executed (S3205). Then, if there is no hit pending ball and the jackpot fluctuation is not in progress (S3204: No, S3205: No), the top-up is performed based on the low-top-up probability table where the rate of top-up selection is 5%. (S3206), and the process moves to S3208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that there is a reserved jackpot ball (S3204: Yes), and if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in the process of S3205 (S3205: Yes), the addition is It is determined whether or not to perform an add-on based on the add-on high probability table with a selection rate of 25% (S3207), and the process moves to S3208.

In the process of S3208, which is executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition has been determined (S3208), and if the addition has not been determined (S3208: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3208, if the addition is determined (S3208: Yes), the winning pockets (winning positions) are read from the winning position storage area 223k, and it is determined that there are 5 or more winning pockets (winning positions) in a row. It is determined whether the location exists (S3209).

In the process of S3209, if it is determined that there is a location where five or more winning pockets are in succession (S3209: Yes), one additional location is selected from the losing pockets other than the one before and after the location where five or more winning positions are in succession (S3211), and the process proceeds to S3212. The reason for restricting the addition of additional winning pockets before and after the location where five or more winning positions are in succession is that if there are too many consecutive winnings, it may be difficult to make the ball B fall naturally. In other words, during the execution of the roulette chance performance that notifies a loss, if it is detected that the period of the rocking motion of the ball B becomes shorter at the timing when the winning pockets approach the location where the winning pockets are in succession, the ball B must pass the location where the winning pockets are in succession before it is allowed to fall. Therefore, since the state where the period of the rocking motion is short (the rocking motion is weakened) continues for a long time, the player may feel uncomfortable that the ball B is not falling easily. Therefore, in this control example, a limit is set on the number of consecutive winning positions to prevent the state where the ball B cannot be dropped from continuing for a long time.

On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if it is determined that there is no location with five or more consecutive hit pockets (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the missed pockets (S3210). ), the process moves to S3212. In the process of S3212 executed after the process of S3210 or S3211, the winning position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional winning position becomes the winning position (S3212), and the added winning position is notified (FIG. 93(b) reference) and end this process.

By executing this special chart 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161), a lottery (determination) is performed as to whether or not to increase the winning pocket each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640a during the increase effect, and the winning pocket can be increased if the lottery is won. Therefore, since the ball can be actively aimed at the second ball entrance 640a and shot out during the increase effect, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

In the special chart 2 winning command processing of the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is configured to be different depending on whether the transition to the "consecutive mode" is confirmed, but the variation of the lottery probability may be increased further. For example, the probability (proportion) of determining the increase of the winning pocket may be different when the transition to the "consecutive mode" is confirmed, when it is undecided whether to transition to the "consecutive mode" (when the number of starting winnings during the time-saving state does not meet the set time-saving period), and when it is confirmed that the transition to the "consecutive mode" will not occur. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the "consecutive mode" is confirmed at the time of the lottery, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased with a relatively high probability (for example, a 25% rate when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a), and when it is confirmed that the transition to the "consecutive mode" will not occur, the winning pocket may be increased with a relatively high probability (for example, a 5% rate when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a). In addition, when it is not yet decided whether to move to the "consecutive mode", the winning pocket may be increased at a probability between the above two cases (for example, 10% when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a). By configuring in this way, the way in which the winning pocket increases can be varied, so that the interest in the lucky number increase performance is further improved. Furthermore, for example, when it is not yet decided whether to move to the "consecutive mode", the probability of increasing the winning pocket may be made different depending on the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode". That is, when the "preparation mode" with a time reduction of 1 time is set, the probability of increasing the winning pocket may be lowered compared to when the "preparation mode" with a time reduction of 7 times is set. More specifically, for example, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased at a rate of 8% when the time reduction is 1 time and 12% when the time reduction is 7 times. This allows the player to predict the time period from the increase in winning pockets (lucky numbers), so an increase in winning pockets not only makes it possible to anticipate a transition to "consecutive wins mode," but also makes it possible for the player to anticipate a seven-time period that is advantageous to the player (high chance of transitioning to "consecutive wins mode").

Next, referring to FIG. 162, the variable display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1615). This variable display setting process (S1615) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process that generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the performance unit 331.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S3301: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then, in the processing of S2202 of the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3303).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3304). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation effect so that the variation display of the symbol is performed in the production unit 331 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Control begins.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S3306.

In the process of S3306, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S3306). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S3306: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then, in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), the stop type in the variable presentation extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3308).

Next, a display number selection process for determining the display number to be displayed in the production section 331 is executed (S3309). Details of this display number selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

When the processing of S3309 is completed, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3310), and this processing is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the performance unit 331.

Next, the display number selection process (S3409) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 163. This display number selection process (S3409) is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162), and as described above, is a process for determining the display number to be displayed in the performance unit 331.

When this display number selection process (see FIG. 163) starts, first it is determined whether or not the current state is the time-saving state for normal symbols (S3401). That is, it is determined whether the time-saving state flag 223o is on or whether the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is 1 or greater. If it is determined that the current state is the time-saving state for normal symbols (S3401: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the current state is not the time-saving state for normal symbols (i.e., it is in "normal mode") (S3401: No), then it reads out information corresponding to the lucky number (jackpot symbol) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3402), and then it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot (S3403).

In the process of S3403, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss (S3403: No), three different numbers are selected at random from among the 30 types (numbers attached to each pocket P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether all of the three selected numbers are lucky numbers (jackpot symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the three types of numbers is determined to be a lucky number. If it is determined that these are different outlier numbers (S3405: No), one type is selected as a stop symbol from among the remaining 27 types of numbers excluding the three types selected in the process of S3404 (S3406), and the book is Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3405, if it is determined that all three types are lucky numbers (jackpot symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one type of number (symbol) is replaced with the unselected outlier number. A random selection is made from among them (S3407), and the present process ends. The four types of numbers (symbols) selected in the processing of S3404 to S3407 are set as the stop symbols of the miss displayed on the production section 331.

In addition, in S3403, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot (S3403: Yes), 4 types of lucky numbers (winning numbers) read out from the designated pocket storage area 223x are selected. Random selection is made (S3408). Then, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot in which "preparation mode" (time saving state of normal symbols) is given (S3409), and if "preparation mode" is not given (S3409: No), in the jackpot In the time-saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b)), one type of number (notification pattern) to be displayed on the effect part 422a is selected from among the out-of-order numbers (S3410), and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if it is determined that it is a jackpot that gives "preparation mode" (S3409: Yes), in the time-saving suggestion effect for the jackpot (see FIGS. 92(a) and (b)), One type of number (notification pattern) to be displayed on the production section 422a is selected from among the lucky numbers (winning numbers) (S3411), and this process is ended.

This display number selection process (see FIG. 163) allows the player to set five types of lucky numbers selected in advance as jackpot symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can also be set as the notification symbol for the "preparation mode".

Next, the details of the reel operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 164. This reel operation setting process (S1616) is one process within the main process (see FIG. 145), and as described above, is a process for setting the operation of each reel.

When the role setting process (see FIG. 164) starts, it is first determined whether it is time for the wait period to end (S3501). This wait period may be set when the power is turned on, and as described above, if it is determined that the game state at the time of powering on is the ending period of a jackpot, it is set to delay the start of the origin return operation to ensure that the balls in the first passage forming member 520 are discharged.

In the process of S3501, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501: Yes), then an origin return process is executed to return the accessory that has changed from the origin position to the origin position. (S3502), and this process ends. Note that this origin return process (S3502) is the same process as the origin return process (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the wait period (S3501: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the movement of one of the accessories (S3503), and the If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the action of the accessory (S3503: Yes), then "01H" is set to the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory to start the action (S3504). ), the action content corresponding to the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g is read from the action scenario table 222b corresponding to the accessory whose action is to be started this time (S3505).

When the process of S3505 is completed, it is next determined whether the operation of the pitching device 650 has been read (S3506), and if the operation of the pitching device 650 has been read (S3506: Yes), the swing undetected flag 223v and the swing By setting each production flag 223ev to ON, it is indicated that the ball B has been pitched (S3507), and the process moves to S3508. As described above, the operation of the pitching device 650 is set when 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the roulette chance effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that what was read was not the operation of the pitching device 650 (S3506: No), the process skips the process of S3507 and proceeds to S3508. In the process of S3508, a movement command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and this process ends.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 165 to 178. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing or the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 165, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

If all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, control of the third pattern display device 81 etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a) in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the presentation section 422a) can be executed.

Here, the boot process (S3601) will be explained with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S3601) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that can achieve large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs, etc. can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which can reduce manufacturing costs and suppress an increase in the rate of failure due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 234 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3701.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S3702, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3702, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S3703). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S3601), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S3701. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S3702. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further points the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S3703 to S3705 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3701 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S3701, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process including steps S3702 and S3702 multiple times, the steps S3703 to S3705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S3703 to S3705 without executing the processes of S3701 and S3702. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 165. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initially set, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during operational checks at the factory etc. during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 etc. (third pattern display device 81, presentation unit 331, and presentation unit 422a) immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S3603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the destination power-on main image area 235a, and image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

Then, when the transfer of all image data indicated by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of the transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data indicated by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3603, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3604). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3604, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S3605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 176(a)) (see S5102 in FIG. 176(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167(b)), the simple command Determination processing (see S3908 in FIG. 167(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S3909 in FIG. 167(b)) are executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so they can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance through audio lamp control. If received via the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 125(b) and 125(c) are immediately displayed during the variation effect period, You can perform simple variations. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process in S3605, interrupt permission is set (S3606), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 167(a). FIG. 167(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 167(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 167(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting to draw a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each processing will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 167(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 125, the normal effect is displayed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a), a command determination process (S3902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3903) is executed. Execute.

In the command determination process (S3902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines that a variable performance is to start, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172.

In the display setting process (S3903), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a) are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 173 to 175.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S3904). In this task process, the display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a) specified by the display setting process (S3903) or the simple display setting process (S3909). Based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the image is specified, and for each sprite, various information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine parameters.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 176 and 177.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3906). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 129 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S3904), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3905), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S3907). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S3907 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop pattern counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S3908) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S3909) is executed, and the steps in S3904 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 168, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4001: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S4002) to notify the display setting process (S3903) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S4003).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4005), and the process returns to S4001.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 169(a). FIG. 169(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made several seconds or more apart, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S4101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and in fact a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 etc. (the third pattern display device 81, presentation unit 331, and presentation unit 422a), and another change display will suddenly start, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a) is changed by the display setting process so that the demonstration production is displayed. Since the player is controlled, the player can continue to watch the fluctuation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a) without feeling any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S4103). After that, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S4104), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4105), the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S4106), and this processing ends.

When the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 169(a)) is executed, the display setting process updates the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S4102, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 168. If it is determined in the processing of S4004 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4006), and if there is a stop type command for display (S4006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4007), and processing returns to S4001.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S4007) will be described with reference to FIG. 169(b). FIG. 169(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167(b)) are executed. The variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the performance section 331, and the performance section 422a) by comparing the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the is executed. The next stop symbol is finally set (S4202).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S4202 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S4203), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S4202 is described as type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). In the above-mentioned task processing (S3904), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S4202 is specified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S4203, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this specified third pattern is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. In this case, it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S4202.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol The display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a) display a stop symbol corresponding to a "special symbol jackpot", causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "special symbol jackpot". This may cause the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 to deteriorate. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 etc. (the third symbol Even if a completely missed stop symbol is displayed on the display device 81, the presentation section 331, and the presentation section 422a), the pachinko machine 10 will receive a ``special symbol jackpot'', so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 168, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4008). If there is a display opening command (S4008: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S4009) and the process returns to S4001.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 170(a). FIG. 170(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4301). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S4303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4305), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 168, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S4008, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S4008: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4010), and if there is a round number command for display (S4010: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S4011) and the processing proceeds to S4001.

Here, the details of the number of rounds command processing (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. 170(b). FIG. 170(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S4401). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S4402).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S4401, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4405), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 168. In the processing of S4010, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S4010: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4012), and if there is an ending command for display (S4012: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S4013), and processing returns to S4001.

Now, with reference to FIG. 171, the details of the ending command processing (S4013) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4501). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4502).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set on (S4503). After that, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S4505). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4506), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, we return to the explanation of FIG. 168. If it is determined in the processing of S4012 that there is no display ending command (S4012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014), and if there is a background image change command (S4014: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S4015), and processing returns to S4001.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S4015) will be described with reference to FIG. 172(a). FIG. 172(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. (S4601). Then, among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other The back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S4602), this back image change command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S4601 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S4602. Identify. If the identified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing (S3904), if it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image discrimination flag set in S4602 is set. 233x, the type of back image to be displayed at that point in time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Specify the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. There should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 168, if it is determined in the processing of S4014 that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4016), and if there is an error command (S4016: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4017), and the processing returns to S4001.

Here, details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4701). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4702). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S4701, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S4702, and a processing is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a).

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S4702 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 168. In the process of S4016, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4016: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4018), and the process returns to S4001.

In the process of S4001, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes). ), the processes from S4002 to S4018 are executed again. Then, the processes of S4001 to S4018 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S3908) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as fluctuation pattern command processing (see Figure 169(a)) and stop type command processing (see Figure 169(b)), is executed, and other For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4101, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S4102, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and its contents are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4801), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4801: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S4802 to S4804 and moves to the process S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4802), S4803 to S4804 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4804).

Now, with reference to FIG. 174, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying error warning images corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) is expanded (S4901).

In task processing (S3904), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4902) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 173. After the warning image setting process (S4804), or in the process of S4803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S4803: No), then the process proceeds to S4805.

In S4805, pointer update processing is executed (S4805). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5001). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S5001, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S5002). As a result, if it is End information (S5002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5003), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5005), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a ) can display a demonstration effect repeatedly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S5006), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5002: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 173, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In task processing, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S4806, along with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position of each sprite is determined. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S4808). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S4808: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag 233z is on (S4809).

If the final display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4810), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4811). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S4812), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). Then, after setting the final display flag 233z, which indicates that the final display is being performed in the on state, to on (S4814), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S4815), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) in accordance with the end of the performance. In addition, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Note that the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a) in the next variable presentation. It is used to specify the third symbol to be used. That is, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is changed. Until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S3904), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4815, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4809, if the final display flag 233z is off (S4809: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S4816). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4817), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4818). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that the demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S4821), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or the opening command is not received, the third symbol display device 81 etc. The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the three symbol display device 81, the effect section 331, and the effect section 422a).

In the process of S4816, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect will be performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (the third symbol display device 81, the performance section 331, and the performance section 422a).

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S3909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images (either FIG. 125(b) or (c)) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 176(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is performed. is executed (S5102), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S5101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S5101: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 176(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S5201), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S5201: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S5202). In the process of S5202, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S5202 that the transfer process has not finished (S5202: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5202: Yes), the process moves to S5203. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S5201, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203.

In the processing of S5203, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S5203: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S5203, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81, etc. A normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a). Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the production section 331, and the production section 422a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the normal image transfer setting process (S5103), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S5103).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4805) of the previously executed display setting process (S3903) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S5301). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S5302), and if it is transfer data information (S5302: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5303), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305.

In addition, in the process of S5302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S5302: No), the processes of S5303 and S5304 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5305. In the process of S5305, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S5305), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S5305: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S5306).

In the process of S5306, after setting an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S5306 that the transfer process has not ended (S5306: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to S5307. Also, if the result of the process of S5305 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S5305: No), the process proceeds to S5307.

In the processing of S5307, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S5307). If the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), image data for which transfer should be started is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S5308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S5303 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off rather than on (S5307: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S5309).

If the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S5310), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S5311). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S5312), and the process moves to S5313.

In the process of S5309, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S5309: No), there is no image data to start transfer, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

If the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so it should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Image data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S5315, if the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is for the back side A, the normal image transfer process is immediately ended.

In the process of S5313, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). This determination in the process of S5313 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S5313, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S5313, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S5314). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After processing of S5314, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, the image data is transferred to the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S3905), a drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated (S5401). That is, in the process of S5401, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S3905), the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of that sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S5402). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a). This allows the third pattern display device 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a) to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, etc. (the third pattern display device 81, the performance unit 331, and the performance unit 422a), and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S5402, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S5403). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame's worth of image are completed. As a result, when, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the drawing process and display process of the image are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, etc. (third pattern display device 81, performance unit 331, and performance unit 422a), while at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c first is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc. (third symbol display device 81, presentation section 331, and presentation section 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to provide three types of modes: "normal mode", "preparation mode", and "consecutive game mode". In order to shift to the most advantageous "continuation mode", it is basically necessary to shift from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode". That is, it is necessary to shift to a time saving state in which the time period is one time or seven times. By hitting a jackpot during the "preparation mode", it is possible to shift to the "consecutive game mode", which is most advantageous for the player.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly expect to win a jackpot within the limited number of times (one or seven times) set as the "preparation mode". Therefore, the player's interest in playing the game in the "preparation mode" can be increased.

In addition, in this control example, multiple (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) are set to be used to notify the player of a state advantageous to the player. Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby granting the player an advantageous winning game. However, in this conventional gaming machine, only a predetermined combination of symbols is used to notify a winning game, and when other notifications (for example, notifications of a probability change state, etc.) are made, the notification is generally made in a different notification mode (for example, a display performance of fighting an enemy, etc.). In other words, there was a problem that the content of the notification was difficult to understand because there was no uniformity in the notification mode. In addition, the notification mode when notifying a result advantageous to the player is generally executed in a predetermined mode, and there was little room for the player to intervene.

In contrast, in this control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying an advantageous state serves the following roles: notifying a special jackpot in the "normal mode" (see FIG. 91(a)); notifying whether or not to switch to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 92(b)); and notifying whether or not to switch from the "preparation mode" to the "casual mode". Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the player can easily understand the results of each presentation by simply knowing the lucky number. Therefore, a more understandable presentation can be provided. In addition, the notification of a special jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" executed in the jackpot, and the notification of the "casual mode" executed in the "preparation mode" all execute presentations aimed at obtaining the lucky number. Therefore, the player can feel that these three different types of notifications are one presentation. Therefore, a unified presentation can be executed. In addition, in this control example, the player can freely select (set) the identification information (lucky number) to notify the player of advantageous conditions. This allows the notification mode to be tailored to the preferences of each player, preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot occurs in "normal mode", an interesting effect (time-saving notification effect) is executed during the jackpot, notifying the player whether or not to switch to "preparation mode", which is more advantageous than "normal mode". This time-saving notification effect is executed every time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided downstream of the first variable winning device 82a. This makes it possible to have the player shoot the ball actively in an attempt to get it into the first variable winning device 82a. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the jackpot game.

The first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected during the opening period of the jackpot, and the connection is released when the jackpot ends. If the connection is immediately released at the end of the final round (second round) of the jackpot, there is a risk that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 will separate before the ball reaches the second passage forming member 422 if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the final round. In other words, a ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 520 may not enter the second passage forming member 422 and may be ejected in an unexpected direction from the opening of the first passage forming member 520. In this case, the ejected ball may enter the board or wiring, causing a malfunction such as a short circuit.

In contrast, in this control example, when the number of winning balls in the first variable winning device 82a and the number of balls discharged from the second passage forming member 422 match during the ending period of the jackpot, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This prevents (suppresses) the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably allowed to flow down to the second passage forming member 422. This prevents (suppresses) the balls from getting into the base part or wiring part on the back of the pachinko machine 10, causing problems such as shorting out the wiring or circuitry.

In addition, in this control example, when entering the "preparation mode", a "successive game mode suggestion" is provided as an entertainment effect to suggest whether or not to shift to the "consecutive game mode" which is most advantageous for the player. It is configured to perform "direction." In this "success mode suggestion performance", the transition to "success mode" occurs depending on which pocket the ball B falls into among the plurality of pockets provided in the rotating member 640, which is configured to imitate a roulette wheel. Let me know what you did. More specifically, when a plurality of pockets (30 types) are divided into winning pockets and missing pockets, and ball B falls into the winning pocket, it indicates that the mode has shifted to the "consecutive shot mode." Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the type of pocket into which the ball B falls, and thus the player's interest in the "successive game mode suggestion performance" can be increased.

A rear LED 625 is provided on the back side of the rotating member 640 to illuminate the hit pocket from the back side in order to make the hit pocket stand out (make it look shiny). This rear LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction as the rotating member 640 at the same rotational speed. This rear LED 625 has a plurality of lighting areas (lighting areas A1 to A18) arranged at equal intervals to illuminate an area corresponding to one pocket from the back. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided in the rotating member 640, and by providing a plurality of sections with different intervals between the pockets, the diameter of the rotating member 640 and the diameter of the back LED 625 are configured to be approximately the same. has been done. Therefore, while the back LED 625 rotates once, the rotating member 640 can rotate only 18/30 times, so depending on the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640, each pocket provided on the rotating member 640 and each lighting area A1 to A18 The correspondence relationship between the

Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting areas and each pocket, a method of matching the number of areas of each lighting area of the back LED with the number of each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 can be considered. If the number of regions is increased to match the number of pockets, the number of LEDs will increase, leading to problems such as increased cost and increased power consumption. Furthermore, since the size of the LED bar (LED board) increases, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Furthermore, in order to save space, if each lighting area of the rear LED 625 is configured such that the interval between the lighting areas is variable depending on the rotational position (a configuration similar to that of the rotating member 640), the first section of the rotating member 640 Corresponding to S1, it is necessary to provide a section in which the LED bar is folded (that is, the interval between the lighting areas is narrow). Therefore, each LED bar needs to be configured to be switchable between a normal state (see FIG. 97) and a folded state according to rotation. However, unlike a pocket, an LED bar is equipped with a circuit to light each LED, so when it is folded, the circuit pattern printed on the board or the wiring etc. may be disconnected, causing the LED bar to turn on. There is a possibility that the light may not turn on. On the other hand, if the number of pockets in the rotating member 640 is reduced to 18 and the interval between the pockets is always constant (the interval when placed in the second section in this control example) (the rear LED 625 In the case of a structure in which each provided lighting area A1 to A18 has a complete one-to-one correspondence with each pocket), there is a problem in that the variation in effects decreases due to the decrease in the number of pockets.

In contrast, in this control example, the operation (lighting state) of one of the members (rotating member 640 and rear LED 625) that rotate with each other (i.e., rear LED 625) is corrected (switched) to match the operation of the other member every time a predetermined condition is met (every time the rear LED 625 rotates 1/3 of a revolution). This correction controls the lighting area located on the rear side of the winning pocket among the pockets of the rotating member 640 so that it always appears lit. In other words, it is configured to correct the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar located in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) every time the rear LED rotates 1/3 of a revolution in accordance with the deviation caused by the rotation. This allows the pockets located in the non-correction section NA to always have an appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (winning pockets appear lit and losing pockets appear dark). Since the player can only see a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from mistaking a winning pocket for a losing pocket.

Further, in the present control example, in the "normal mode", an "additional effect" for making the player expect that the lottery result advantageous to the player is pending is configured to be executable. Here, conventionally, gaming machines have been known that execute a specific performance (so-called reservation notice performance) every time the number of reserved balls increases. This suspension notice performance is generally controlled so that it is more likely to be executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, a win, etc.) is suspended. However, in this conventional gaming machine, it merely indicates whether an advantageous lottery result has been reserved, and it does not indicate whether or not an advantageous lottery result has been reserved. He was unable to create a sense of anticipation for the ball (which was held before the ball).

On the other hand, in this control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and the state is gradually shifted (ranked up) to a more advantageous state according to the lottery result of the special symbol. The configuration is such that the more the reserved balls that move to a more advantageous state by pre-reading are reserved, the more likely it is that the additional performance will be executed. Thereby, the player can be made to expect that the game will move to various advantageous states just by executing the additional performance. For example, the percentage of bonus effects that are executed increases when a jackpot type in which "preparation mode" is set after a jackpot is suspended, so it is normal to expect a jackpot (if the bonus effect is not executed). It is possible to make the player play the game with stronger expectations. This is because if you hit the jackpot, the expectation level to shift to "preparation mode" increases. In addition, if the player wins the jackpot as expected, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation level for moving to the "preparation mode" is higher than normal (if no additional effect is executed). , it is possible to make the player strongly expect that the lucky number will be displayed on the production section 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional effect, it is better to hold the lottery results corresponding to the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" compared to when the transition to "Continuous Game Mode" has not been confirmed. Since the execution rate of additional effects is configured to be high, when the "preparation mode" is announced as expected by the player, the player has a higher expectation of shifting to the "consecutive game mode" than usual. It can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the transition to the "consecutive game mode". In this way, in this control example, by executing one additional effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will gradually transition to a plurality of advantageous states. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for all the lottery drawings corresponding to the reserved balls that have been suspended at the time when the additional performance is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this control example, when dropping the ball B into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the ball B is rocked on the holding piece 677 and then dropped into the target type of pocket (hit pocket or missed pocket). It is configured to fall.

Here, when ball B is oscillating on holding piece 677, if the configuration allows ball B to fall regardless of the state of the oscillation (period, amplitude, etc.), ball B may fall even when the period (amplitude) of the oscillation is large (a state in which ball B appears to be continuing to oscillate for a while), or ball B may continue to be held on holding piece 677 even when the period (amplitude) of the oscillation is extremely small (a state in which ball B appears to be about to fall). In other words, there is a risk that the movement of ball B may appear unnatural (ball B may fall in an operating condition in which it is unlikely to fall, or ball B may not fall in an operating condition in which it is likely to fall, etc.). Another possible method would be to measure the time that has elapsed since the swinging motion began, and drop ball B when the time has elapsed that would result in a cycle (amplitude) that would allow the ball to fall in a natural-looking manner; however, because the swinging motion of ball B can be affected by various conditions, such as the angle and initial velocity at the time of pitching, and the manner in which holding piece 677 is assembled, there is a risk that individual differences will occur in the time it takes to reach a cycle (amplitude) that would allow the ball to fall in a natural-looking manner.

On the other hand, in this control example, when dropping the ball B, the period of the rocking motion is determined from the time interval during which the ball B passes the center portion of the holding piece 677, and the period of the rocking motion is determined to be sufficiently small. The configuration is such that the ball B is dropped after determining that the ball B has fallen. As a result, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance, regardless of individual differences among the pachinko machines 10, conditions for pitching the ball B (angle and initial velocity), and the like. That is, when the ball B is performing a swinging motion on the holding piece 677, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the ball B, thereby increasing the player's interest in the roulette chance effect. can.

In addition, in this control example, the pocket placed at the drop position can be identified from the output of the detection sensors A to F each time a pocket is placed at the drop position. If a configuration were used in which it was determined whether ball B could be dropped into a pocket each time a pocket was placed at the drop position, ball B would start to fall after the pocket was placed at the drop position, so there are cases in which ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket at the drop position (it would fall into the next pocket). This is because there is a time lag in the movement of the holding piece 677 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and there is also a time lag in the ball B dropping from the top of the holding piece 677, so that under certain conditions, there is a risk that the pocket at the drop position will pass by due to the rotational movement before ball B reaches the pocket at the drop position.

In contrast, in this control example, when any pocket is placed at the drop position, the current location of the rotating member 640 is identified from the pocket at the drop position, and the type of pocket to be placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is identified, and it is determined whether it is possible to drop the ball B into that pocket. Then, when it is determined that it is possible to drop the ball B into the pocket to be placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (operation control of the holding piece 677 to the sinking position) is executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. In other words, when dropping the ball B, the holding piece 677 is configured to sink into the sinking position at a timing (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position) that allows the ball B to be dropped sufficiently into the next pocket. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably drop the ball B into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from falling into a winning pocket despite not transitioning to the "consecutive win mode", or, conversely, the ball B from falling into a missing pocket despite the transition to the "consecutive win mode" being confirmed.

In addition, in this control example, it is possible to execute a specific performance (i.e., "continuous play mode suggestion performance") over one or more (one or seven) time-saving times set as the "preparation mode". It is configured. Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines can perform the same type of performance across multiple variable displays (for example, variable displays for the number of balls held at the start of the performance) (so-called , ``Continuous Preview Performance''). In such conventional gaming machines, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player over a plurality of variations, depending on the number of times the same type of performance is executed, the content of the performance, etc. However, in such conventional gaming machines, the number of times the performance is executed, the performance time, etc. are affected by the number of balls on hold, so if there are no or few balls on hold, it is not possible to secure sufficient performance time, and the performance is effective. There was a problem in that the amount was reduced.

In contrast, in this control example, a fixed-time effect (i.e., a "consecutive mode suggestion effect") is configured to be executable regardless of whether the variable display is being executed and the number of reserved balls, etc. In order to prevent the "preparation mode" from ending during the fixed-time effect, the variable pattern selection table 202d is specified so that the total variable time of the variable display executed in the "preparation mode" is constant (longer than the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion effect") even if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving count or if all the special patterns for the time-saving count are lost. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure sufficient execution time for the "preparation mode suggestion effect", thereby enhancing the performance effect. In addition, the duration of the ending effect is made variable depending on the progress of the game at the time when the ending effect in the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" starts (the remaining variable time of the variable display being executed, the remaining number of time-saving counts, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the end timing of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" with the actual end timing of the "preparation mode", so that the player can more accurately grasp the game state. In addition, in this control example, the game is stopped during the "preparation mode suggestion effect", and after the "preparation mode suggestion effect" notifies of a miss, if the player resumes play and hits a guaranteed jackpot, confirming a transition to "consecutive mode", a special effect (revival roulette chance effect) can be executed. This configuration can prevent the ending effect from continuing endlessly for the duration of the game stop period, thereby preventing (suppressing) the player from getting bored. Also, the player can be properly notified of whether or not a transition to "consecutive mode" has occurred.

In this control example, the identification information (lucky number) is used to notify of a jackpot, a "preparation mode", and a transition to a "consecutive mode", but the advantageous states notified by the lucky number are not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may be used to notify only some of the three advantageous states, or may be used to notify other advantageous states in addition to the three states. It may also be used to notify advantageous states other than the three states. For example, the lucky number may be used to notify whether a jackpot type that is easy to win many prize balls will be generated during the opening period of the jackpot. For example, the lucky number may be used to notify whether a special pattern probability state will be generated as an advantageous state.

In this control example, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625, which require different times for one cycle of operation (one rotation of the rotational movement), are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed, and in a portion of the rotational movement (a portion visible to the player), the lighting state of each lighting area is corrected every time a predetermined amount of rotation is reached (every time the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 revolution) so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting area arranged on the rear side of each pocket is fixed. However, this is not limited to this, and any configuration can be applied as long as there are multiple movable objects that operate with different operating cycles. For example, instead of the rear LED 625, a rotating body that can rotate with the same cycle as the rear LED 625 may be provided on the rear side of the rotating member 640, and a movable object may be provided at equal intervals with the pockets of the rotating member 640 relative to the rotating body. As the movable object of the rotating body, for example, a movable object that can be changed between a recessed position on the back side when viewed from the front and a protruding position on the front side when viewed from the front may be provided. A pass hole through which the movable object can pass when it is changed to the protruding position may be provided for each pocket, and the pocket in which the movable object is in a state of protruding to the front side through the pass hole may be indicated as the winning pocket. In this case, the correspondence between the movable object changed to the protruding position and the winning pocket in the section visible to the player (for example, the first section S1, see FIG. 54) may be controlled to be fixed, and the movable object arranged in a position that is difficult (impossible) for the player to see may be corrected according to the pocket type of the pocket that is moved to the visible section by the subsequent rotational movement. This allows the correspondence between the rotating member 640 and the rotating body to be constant in the section visible to the player regardless of the amount of rotational movement, etc.

In this control example, among the accessory objects (rotating member 640 and back LED 625) that rotate relative to each other, the operation (lighting state) of one (that is, the back LED 625) is changed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (rotation amount of the back LED 625). Although the configuration is such that the correction is performed (switched) in accordance with the other movement every time the rotation becomes 1/3 of a revolution, the present invention is not limited to rotational movement. For multiple role objects that move in sections that are visible to the player and sections that are difficult to see (difficult) for the player, some of the role objects move in sections that are invisible (difficult) to the player. The present idea is applicable as long as the correction is made in accordance with the motion of an object. For example, with two types of accessories that move back and forth horizontally between an area that is visible to the player and an area that is difficult to see, the movement of the accessory placed in the area that is difficult to see can be adjusted to match the movement of the other accessories. By performing the correction, control may be performed so that the correspondence relationship between the two types of accessory objects in the section that is visible to the player matches.

In this control example, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625 are configured to change the lighting area for lighting the winning pocket of 1 according to the timing (the amount of rotation of the rear LED 625), so that the winning pocket always appears to be illuminated, but this is not necessarily limited to rotating parts. This idea may be applied to a display device that can change the display content and a backlight that illuminates part or all of the display device from the rear side. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be used in which an image of a rotating roulette is displayed on the display device, and a backlight arranged on the rear side of the display area in which the image of the winning pocket is displayed is set to a brighter lighting state than the display area in which the losing pocket is displayed. Then, a configuration may be used in which the lighting position of the backlight is dynamically switched in accordance with the movement of the image of the winning pocket. By configuring in this way, the winning pocket can always appear bright, making it easier to recognize whether it is a winning pocket or not.

In this control example, when five types of identification information (lucky numbers) are displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d of the performance unit 331, a jackpot is notified, and when the remaining lucky numbers are displayed on the performance unit 422a during the jackpot, a "preparation mode" is notified. However, the notification is not limited to the lucky numbers. For example, the player may be notified of a number of conditions (so-called missions) for transitioning to an advantageous state, and a jackpot is notified when some of the notified conditions are achieved. In addition, the "preparation mode" may be transitioned to by achieving some or all of the remaining unachieved conditions during a jackpot. Furthermore, in the "preparation mode", a transition to the "consecutive mode" may be notified by achieving some or all of the unachieved conditions. Examples of conditions for transitioning to an advantageous state include "generating a performance in which a specific character appears," "generating a performance that prompts the player to press the frame button 22," and "accumulating one or more reserved balls." These conditions may be displayed, for example, on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the lucky number. When each condition is displayed, it may be displayed in a manner that allows easy recognition of whether or not each condition has been achieved (for example, by drawing a double line through a condition that has already been achieved). In this way, by configuring the game to step up to a more advantageous state by achieving multiple conditions, the player can play the game while paying more attention to whether or not each condition has been achieved. This can improve the player's motivation to participate in the game. Note that some or all of the conditions that have been achieved may be returned to an unachieved state under a specific condition. The specific condition may be, for example, when a special symbol has been drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) since the previous condition was achieved, or when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the previous condition was achieved. The conditions may be configured to be selectable by the player, or may be configured to be selected automatically (for example, randomly when the power is turned on).

In this control example, when a ball passes through the sensor member 422c provided on the second passage forming member 422, it is determined that the ball that entered the first variable winning device 82a has been discharged (passed through the first passage forming member 520). Then, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are configured to maintain a connected state until the number of winning balls in the first variable winning device 82a and the number of balls discharged from the second passage forming member 422 match, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, and for example, a configuration may be used that simply limits the release of the connection for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after the entry of the ball is detected. The 1.5 seconds is a value that includes a margin in addition to the time required for a ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and is the time that allows a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a to flow down to the second passage forming member 422 with plenty of time to spare. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in which a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

In this control example, the lighting area on the back side of the winning pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the back side of the missing pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, but this is limited. The lighting rate can be set arbitrarily. For example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket may be set to 10%. This makes it possible to make the number attached to the pocket easier to see while giving it a darker appearance than the hit pocket. Further, for example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket may be set to 80%. By reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced.

In this control example, only two types of pockets, a winning pocket and a losing pocket, are provided, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a pocket type that can be either a winning pocket or a losing pocket (e.g., a pocket type with a 50% chance of winning) may be provided. This allows the player's sense of expectation to be sustained for a longer period of time, since even if ball B falls due to a roulette chance presentation, if it falls into a pocket with a 50% chance of winning, it is not certain whether or not the game will transition to the "consecutive win mode."

In this control example, only two types of lighting states, a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, are set as the lighting state, but this is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of some winning pockets may be set to a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting frequency of 320 Hz, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of a winning pocket different from the some winning pockets may be lit at a lighting rate of 80%. As a way of selecting different lighting rates, for example, the back side of a winning pocket with both adjacent losing pockets may be lit at a lighting rate of 100%, and the area where the winning pockets are consecutive may be set to a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. When the winning pockets are consecutive, the appearance is brighter than when both adjacent losing pockets (lighting rate 0%), so it is possible to make the appearance sufficiently bright even if the lighting rate is reduced to 80%. This makes it possible to reduce the power consumption of the LED without significantly changing the appearance. Also, for example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of each winning pocket may be lit at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the on-periods of the nearest winning pockets may be inverted. By lowering the frequency to 12Hz, the on and off periods can be perceived by the player, and by inverting the on period (lighting phase), each winning pocket can be made more noticeable.

In addition, when the lighting state of the lighting area on the back side of the winning pocket is to be varied, the lighting control command may be output at different timings for each lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by a serial transfer method. Therefore, it takes more time from the start to the end of outputting data (lighting control command) compared to the parallel transfer method. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of a command to notify one lighting state, it is necessary to output multiple data such as lighting area data and lighting rate data in sequence (see FIG. 234). In addition, in order to check whether each output data is normally received by the LED driver, the configuration is such that each time 8 bits of data are output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data have been received is received from the LED driver. Therefore, if a lighting control command to notify the setting of some lighting areas is output, followed by a lighting control command to notify the setting of other lighting areas, it will take a longer time to finish outputting all lighting control commands for multiple lighting states to the LED driver. For this reason, there is a risk that it will be impossible to move to other processing for a relatively long time. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting control command is output at different timings for each lighting state (for example, one lighting state for each loop of the main process (see FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process of setting the lighting control command can be distributed among multiple loops of the main process (see FIG. 145). Therefore, the processing time for one time of outputting the lighting control command can be shortened, and other processes can be executed normally. In addition, the lighting control command generated per loop of the main process can be reduced, and the processing load when generating the lighting control command can be reduced. Note that, as a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command among multiple loops of the main process, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is updated, and in the process of setting the corresponding lighting control command (see S2907, S2916 in FIG. 158), only the lighting control command corresponding to one lighting state is output, and a flag indicating that there are other lighting states that have not been set (lighting non-setting flag) is set to on. Then, in the next loop of the main process (see FIG. 145), or when the next execution command is received and the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, if the lighting unset flag is on, a lighting control command corresponding to the unset lighting state of 1 is output.

In this control example, in the "continuous shot mode suggestion effect", every time the rear LED 625 rotates 1/3, the lighting state of the LED bar placed in the correction area RA is corrected to match the arrangement of the winning pocket. However, it is not necessarily necessary to perform correction for each LED bar. The correction interval RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is invisible (difficult) to the player. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting areas placed at symmetrical positions of the falling position are corrected one by one, or the lighting states of the nine lighting areas placed in the upper half may be corrected every time the rear LED 625 makes a half-circle. It may also be a configuration.

In this control example, in the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance", each time any LED bar is placed in the correction section RA, the position of the winning pocket is read from the winning position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state, but this is not limited to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) that specifies the combination of winning pockets and the time-based change in the lighting state of each lighting area for each combination may be predefined in the ROM 222. That is, the time-based change in the lighting state may be predefined in the ROM 222 so that the correspondence between the lighting state of the lighting area that is located in the lower half of the rear LED 625 that is visible to the player and the pockets that are located in front of each lighting area remains unchanged regardless of the progress of the rotation operation, depending on the combination of winning pockets. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the lighting control the same as the arrangement of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18, the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625 may be rotated until a predetermined specific arrangement (for example, an arrangement in which the pocket P1 is the drop position and the back LED 625 is the origin position) is reached during the ending of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" or during a big win game before moving to the "preparation mode". The lighting control scenario may prescribe the time-counted change in the lighting state starting from the predetermined specific arrangement. By configuring in this way, during the execution of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance", it is sufficient to simply set the lighting state of each lighting area according to the lighting control scenario, and it is possible to omit the process of determining whether any LED bar has been placed in the correction section RA and the process of determining the lighting state of each lighting area included in the LED bar placed in the correction section RA, and the like, thereby reducing the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Also, instead of predefining the lighting control scenario, a lighting control scenario may be generated from the arrangement of the rotating members 640 and the rear LEDs 625 at the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance" and stored in the RAM 223. By configuring in this way, the lighting control scenario can be set regardless of the arrangement of the rotating members 640 and the rear LEDs 625.

In this control example, it is determined whether the transition to the "consecutive mode" is confirmed from the result of the lottery for the special pattern executed in the "preparation mode", and the pocket type (winning pocket or losing pocket) into which the ball B is to be dropped is specified. Then, when the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less and the pocket type into which the ball B can be dropped is placed at the drop position for the first time, the ball B is dropped into that pocket, but the pocket into which the ball B is to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, when the ball B is dropped into a losing pocket (the transition to the "consecutive mode" has not been confirmed), the ball B may be controlled to be dropped into a losing pocket adjacent to the winning pocket. This allows the player to expect that the ball B will fall into the winning pocket until just before it falls, even in the case of a loss. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the roulette chance performance. Similarly, when the ball B is dropped into a winning pocket, it may be controlled to be dropped into a winning pocket adjacent to the losing pocket. This makes it difficult to determine which type of pocket the ball B will land in, even if it falls into a winning pocket, so you can enjoy the roulette chance performance until the very end.

In this control example, when the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance", which has a fixed performance time, differs from the time until the "preparation mode" ends due to a game stop state in the "preparation mode", the performance time of the ending performance of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is variable to absorb the difference, but the configuration for eliminating the difference between the end timing of the "preparation mode" and the performance period is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the game has entered a game stop state in which the player is not playing, the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" may be suspended until the game is resumed. In other words, the execution period of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" may be configured to match the variable time of the special pattern. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined, for example, by whether the handle 51 is operated, or by whether or not a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) or more has passed since the ball entered the second ball entrance 640a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a difference between the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" and the time until the "preparation mode" ends. Also, in order to match (reduce the discrepancy between) the time until the "preparation mode" ends and the presentation time of the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation", the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" may be configured to wait until the first special symbol variation is executed after transition to the "preparation mode". By configuring in this way, even if the "preparation mode" is transitioned to with 0 reserved balls, the start timing of the "preparation mode suggestion presentation" can be matched with the execution timing of the first special symbol lottery in the "preparation mode", so that the time until the "preparation mode" ends and the presentation time of the "consecutive mode suggestion presentation" can be matched (reduce the discrepancy).

In this control example, when increasing the number of winning pockets in the increasing performance, the number of consecutive winning pockets is limited to a predetermined number (5 consecutive) or less, but the number of consecutive winning pockets is limited to the number of winning pockets. It's not something you can do. The number of consecutive missing pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (5 consecutive) or less. That is, in the increasing performance, a configuration may be adopted in which winning pockets are preferentially arranged in sections where there are 6 or more consecutive missed pockets. With this configuration, when the ball B is dropped into the winning pocket in the "roulette chance performance", when the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B is less than or equal to the predetermined period (1 second), the ball B is dropped. This can prevent pockets from passing out of position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unnatural appearance, such as the swinging motion of the ball B stopping before the winning pocket is placed in the falling position, which creates a sense of distrust for the player. It is possible to more reliably prevent this from occurring.

In this control example, the value of the add-on counter 223av is incremented by one each time an add-on performance is executed. In other words, the addition of one winning pocket is determined for each add-on performance, but the number of winning pockets added in each add-on performance is not limited to one and may be set to any number. Also, the number that is convenient for allowing the ball B to fall naturally may be set by taking into account the pending lottery results and the five types of winning pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x. Specifically, for example, when the additional performance is executed based on the reserved lottery result corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot in the "preparation mode" (when the ball B is dropped into the winning pocket), or when the additional performance is executed based on the reserved lottery result of the jackpot that gives the preparation mode with a time period of 7 times (when the ball B may be dropped into the winning pocket depending on the subsequent lottery result), the winning pocket (lucky number) selected in advance by the player is read from the designated pocket storage area 223x, and the initial arrangement of the winning pocket and the losing pocket are determined. Then, the number of sections in which the losing pockets are six or more consecutive is determined, and a value at least equal to or greater than the number of sections is added to the additional counter 223av (the winning pockets are added in a number equal to or greater than the number of sections determined). Then, when the position of the winning pocket added in the "preparation mode" is determined, the winning pocket may be preferentially arranged in the section in which the losing pockets are six or more consecutive. By configuring in this way, when the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), and the ball B is dropped into a winning pocket, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped because the losing pockets are successively arranged at the drop position. That is, the swinging motion of the ball B is prevented (suppressed) from stopping between the establishment of the condition for dropping the ball B and the placement of the pocket (winning pocket) of the type corresponding to the performance result of the current roulette chance performance at the drop position, and the ball B can be surely dropped into the pocket of the target type (winning pocket) while the ball B is swinging. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. In addition, for example, the number of added balls selected may be different depending on whether it is certain that the ball B will be dropped into the winning pocket, whether there is a possibility that the ball B will be dropped into the winning pocket, or whether it is certain that the ball B will be dropped into the losing pocket. In other words, if it is certain that ball B will land in a winning pocket, a larger number of added balls may be selected more easily, and if it is certain that ball B will land in a losing pocket, a smaller number of added balls may be selected more easily. By configuring it in this way, the notified number of added balls can suggest to the player the expectation of whether or not to move to the "consecutive wins mode."

In this control example, when the ball B is swinging on the top of the holding piece 677, the amplitude of the swinging motion is determined from the time interval at which the ball detection sensor 679 detects the passage of the ball B, and when the amplitude is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the ball is allowed to fall (the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON). However, different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, the configuration may be such that the manner of the music is changed according to the interval at which the ball detection sensor 679 detects the passage of the ball B. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650, the sound of a drum roll (music) is set to play, and the music may be controlled so that the tempo of the drum roll becomes faster as the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes smaller. This makes it possible to feel that the timing of the ball B's fall is approaching as the tempo of the music becomes faster, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation in accordance with the tempo of the music.

In this control example, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the arrangement of the LED bars matches the correction interval RA, regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not it is arranged in a position visible to the player). Although the configuration has been described so far in which the lighting state is not changed (switched), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting area placed in a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, in the correction area RA) is set to a non-lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%. If the arrangement of any LED bar matches the correction interval RA, a new (correction) lighting state is set for each lighting area that makes up that LED bar (without immediately reflecting it). ), and then sequentially reflect the memorized new lighting state on the lighting area that has passed through the correction interval RA (moved to a position where it is likely to be visible to the player). Good too. With this configuration, the correction can be made while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (hit pocket or missed pocket) placed in a position visible to the player and the lighting area placed on the back side. All the lighting areas arranged in section RA (positions that are difficult for the player to see) can be set to a non-lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%. Therefore, the power consumed by the back LED 625 while the rotating member 640 is rotating can be reduced.

In this control example, when it is determined in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) that the ball B is to be dropped into the pocket next to the pocket currently positioned at the drop position, the holding piece 677 is sunk into the recessed position after 100 steps of rotation by the rotating member 640 (approximately 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is positioned at the drop position), regardless of the position of the ball B, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the holding piece 677 may be sunk into the recessed position by timing the ball B to reach the center of the holding piece 677 in the swinging motion. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion is determined each time the ball B reaches the center of the holding piece 677, and the determined period of the swinging motion is stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the 100th step is reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the time elapsed since the ball detection sensor 679 detected the passage of the ball B last time) is referred to, and if it is determined that the timer value is close to the period of the most recent swing operation stored in the RAM 223 (for example, a value equal to or greater than 90% of the period of the most recent swing operation), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as is. On the other hand, if the timer value is a value less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the most recent swing operation) of the period of the most recent swing operation, the holding piece 677 may be controlled to wait until the predetermined ratio is reached and then immerse to the immersion position. By configuring in this way, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677 or when it is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing to the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is retracted, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without moving in any other direction. This shortens the time from when the holding piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position until the ball B starts to drop, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the targeted pocket.

In this control example, when ball B is performing a swinging motion, it is determined that ball B can be dropped into the pocket that is placed at the next drop position after the pocket currently placed at the drop position. In this case, the holding piece 677 is retracted to the retracted position after performing the rotation operation for 100 steps, but the present invention is not limited to this. Randomly every time within the range (for example, within the range after 100 steps to 120 steps) that allows ball B to fall reliably into the pocket that is placed next to the pocket that is currently placed at the drop position (for example, within the range after 100 steps to 120 steps). It may also be configured to be dropped. More specifically, in the process of S1806 of the fall control process (see FIG. 147), instead of setting the fall after 100 steps, a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 to 120 steps, and After the selected number of steps has elapsed, a process for setting the holding piece 677 to be retracted to the retracted position may be executed. By configuring it like this, it is possible to vary the timing at which ball B falls. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (it looks as if the ball B is falling by the action of gravity only).

In this control example, the type of the pocket to be placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and if it is determined that the pocket is of a type that allows ball B to fall, then Although the configuration is such that the ball B is controlled to fall into the pocket placed at the next position, it is not necessarily necessary to drop the ball B into the pocket placed at the next falling position. For example, each time a new pocket is placed in the drop position, in addition to determining the type of the pocket that will be placed in the drop position next after that pocket, it is also determined the type of the pocket currently placed in the drop position. Even better as a configuration. If it is determined that both the pocket currently placed at the drop position and the next pocket placed at the drop position are pocket types that allow ball B to fall, the ball B is placed in the drop position. Fall control (retraction operation of the holding piece 677) may be set at a timing when there is a possibility that the holding piece 677 may fall into the placed pocket. More specifically, for example, the timing of the drop control may be randomly determined in the range from 5 steps to 120 steps later. Note that the range after 5 steps to 99 steps is the timing when ball B may fall into the pocket currently placed at the falling position, and after 100 steps to 120 steps is the timing at which the ball B may fall to the next falling position. This is the timing when ball B falls into the pocket located at. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, thereby making it difficult for the player to suspect that the ball B is intentionally falling into a predetermined pocket. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the roulette chance effect. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pocket type of the pocket to be placed next at the falling position and the pocket type of the pocket to be placed next to the falling position are determined. If both of the identified two types of pockets are determined to be pockets into which the ball B can fall, then the ball B is randomly controlled to fall within the range that the ball B can fall into either of the two types of pockets (the holding piece 677 is You may also set the timing (to immerse yourself). Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of pocket at the drop position, the type of the pocket to be placed next at the fall position, and the type of the pocket to be placed at the next fall position are determined. The next pocket to be placed at the drop position is of a type that allows ball B to fall, and any pocket adjacent to the next pocket to be placed at the fall position is also of a type that allows ball B to fall. In this case, the timing for controlling the fall of the ball B (recessing the holding piece 677) may be randomly set within the range in which the ball B can be dropped into any of a plurality of adjacent pockets in which the ball B can be dropped. good. With this configuration as well, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance in the same manner as described above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the roulette chance effect.

In this control example, the type of pocket to be placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and it is determined whether ball B can be dropped. It is not necessary to determine the type of the next pocket each time the pocket is placed at the drop position. Any configuration is sufficient as long as the fall control of the ball B can be set before the pocket of the type that allows the ball B to fall is placed at the drop position. It may be configured such that it is possible to identify whether the pocket is located on the front side or not. That is, for each of the pockets P1 to P30, a flag may be provided in the RAM 223 to indicate whether the pocket is one pocket before the one into which the ball B is to be dropped. Then, at the stage where the type of ball B is to be dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined, the flag corresponding to the pocket placed one place before the pocket of the type in which the ball B can fall is set to ON, and the flag corresponding to the pocket placed one place before the pocket of the type in which the ball B can fall is set to ON, and Set the corresponding flag to OFF. Thereafter, after the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion of ball B becomes less than the predetermined period (1 second), each time a new pocket is placed at the falling position, the flag corresponding to the pocket at that falling position is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is set to on, and if it is on, set the fall control after 100 steps, for example. With this configuration, there is no need to determine the pocket type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and determine whether or not it is possible to drop ball B; instead, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the flag is on. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the ball B should be dropped by simply doing so, the processing load required to determine whether or not the ball B is allowed to fall can be reduced.

In this control example, in the rotational position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113, a combination of the outputs of each detection sensor A to F and a pocket placed at the falling position when the combination of the outputs are obtained are determined. It stipulated the correspondence relationship between Furthermore, the order in which the pockets provided in the rotating member 640 are arranged was also defined. Then, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is identified from the pocket at the falling position identified from the combination of outputs of each detection sensor A to F and the order in which the pockets are arranged. The method for specifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position in the combination may be defined in the rotational position determination table 222c. A storage area may be provided in the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position. Then, each time a new pocket is placed at the falling position (that is, the outputs of all the detection sensors A to F shift from the state of L to the state of the output of any detection sensor to the state of H), the detection sensor The current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position corresponding to the combination of outputs may be read from the ROM 222 and stored in the RAM 223. In this way, by configuring the RAM 223 to memorize the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped. In the control process (see FIG. 147), when specifying the pocket to be placed at the falling position next to the pocket placed at the falling position, it is sufficient to simply read out the pocket from a fixed storage area of the RAM 223 (i.e., the pocket placed at the falling position). There is no need to perform a two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and specifying the next pocket after the falling position), and the process can be simplified. The same goes for changing the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the back LED 625. The process is simple, as it is sufficient to simply read pockets from a fixed storage area of the RAM 223 and determine the type of each read pocket. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 194. In the first control example described above, in the roulette chance performance, when the ball B is performing a swinging motion on the holding piece 677, the ball B passes through the center of the holding piece 677 (on the near side of the ball detection sensor 679). The structure was such that the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B was determined from the interval between the swings. Then, if the determined period is less than or equal to a predetermined period (ie, 1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. Thereby, the ball B can be dropped into any pocket after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion becomes sufficiently narrow. This allows the ball B to appear as if it has fallen naturally, compared to dropping the ball B in a state where the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the falling position of the ball B and having doubts about the result of the roulette chance performance, thereby making the roulette chance performance more enjoyable.

On the other hand, in the second control example, in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven to tilt in the left-right direction is provided. The inclination of the holding piece 6770 can be varied depending on the arrangement of the ball B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. This inclination is configured such that the further the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging movement, the greater the inclination downward toward the center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. As a result, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the swinging motion is always in a direction that causes the ball B to flow down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the momentum of the swinging motion performed by the ball B being too strong. It can be held securely at the top and dropped into any pocket.

In the first control example described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket placed at the falling position) is determined by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of each of the detection sensors A to F of the rotational position detection sensor 684. was configured to identify. As a result, when controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, only the lighting area located on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket can be accurately set to the lighting state according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640. , the player could easily recognize the winning pocket from its appearance. Also, when dropping the ball B, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the result of the lottery of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (i.e., whether or not to shift to the "consecutive winning mode") is determined. It was configured so that it could be dropped into the appropriate type of pocket.

In addition, in the second control example, after it is detected that the outputs of the detection sensors A-F have shifted (the output of at least one detection sensor has become H), the outputs of the detection sensors A-F are monitored over multiple operation steps, and the current position of the rotating member 640 (the pocket positioned at the drop position) is determined based on the detection results over the multiple operation steps. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately identify the position of the rotating member 640 even if the output of any of the detection sensors is shifted due to noise, etc., or the timing at which the detectable portion 641c provided in each pocket is positioned at the detectable position is shifted due to rattling of the rotating member 640, etc.

The pachinko machine 10 in this second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677, that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and that some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been changed from that in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The other configurations, various processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and is used to temporarily swing the ball B before dropping the ball B into any pocket. used for.

FIG. 179(a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projecting/retracting mechanism 6700. As shown in FIG. 179(a), the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a shaft support 6740 connected to the back side of the holding piece 6770, and a tilted support provided on the shaft support. a driving gear 6730a, a driving gear 6730c that meshes with the tilting gear 6730a, a tilting motor 6750a that provides driving force to the driving gear 6730c, and a driving gear 6730c that meshes with the driving gear 6730b. The motor 6750b is configured to include a driving gear 6730d and a retracting motor 6750b for applying a driving force to the driving gear 6730d. Note that the components provided on the back side of the holding piece 6770 (the shaft support 6740, the tilting gear 6730, etc.) are provided on the back side of the front case 672 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. It is configured to be.

The holding piece 6770 is configured to be able to hold the ball B thrown from the ball throwing device 650 on its upper part, similar to the holding piece 677 in the first control example. When the retraction motor 6750b is driven in the positive direction (clockwise direction), a driving force is applied to the retraction gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d in a direction pushing the retraction gear 6730b toward the back side as viewed from the front, so that the holding piece 6770 can be changed from the holding position to the separated position. On the other hand, when the retraction motor 6750b is driven in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force is applied to the retraction gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d in a direction pulling the retraction gear 6730b toward the front side as viewed from the front, so that the holding piece 6770 can be changed from the separated position to the holding position.

Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be tilted by driving the tilting motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilting motor 6750a in the forward direction (clockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the forward direction, and the tilting gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is rotated counterclockwise. Driven. As a result, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 tilts downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in front view.

On the other hand, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. This transmits the rotational force of the tilt gear 6730a to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, causing the holding piece 6770 to rotate clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 tilts downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front.

Next, referring to FIG. 179(b), the state in which the holding piece 6770 is tilted will be described. FIG. 179(b) is a front view of the holding piece 6770 tilted left and right. As shown in FIG. 179(b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) left and right around the pivot part 6740. When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the right, the tilting motor 6750a rotates the holding piece 6770 counterclockwise to form a downward tilt from the upper right direction to the lower left direction as seen from the front (see the solid line part in FIG. 179(b)). As a result, the momentum of the ball B moving to the right direction as seen from the front due to the swinging action is offset by the tilt formed by the holding piece 6770. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the ball B from being ejected (flying out) outside the range of the holding piece 6770. In addition, in this control example, the tilt angle when tilting the holding piece 6770 can be set in increments of 1 degree. Additionally, the maximum tilt angle is 6 degrees in both the left and right directions. This 6 degrees angle is such that even if the holding piece 6770 is tilted, the player cannot (will have difficulty) perceiving the tilt. By setting the tilt angle to an angle that the player cannot perceive, it is possible to make the player feel as if ball B is naturally swinging.

Furthermore, when it is detected that ball B has swung to the left, the tilt motor 6750a rotates the holding piece 6770 clockwise, forming a downward tilt from the upper left to the lower right as viewed from the front (see the dotted line in FIG. 179(b)). As a result, the momentum of ball B moving to the left as viewed from the front due to the swinging motion is offset by the tilt formed by the holding piece 6770, so that ball B can be reliably prevented from being ejected (flying out) outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this way, the holding piece extension/retraction mechanism 670 in this control example is provided with two types of drive motors (tilt motor 6750a, extension/retraction motor 6750b), and is configured to be capable of tilting in the left and right directions in addition to protruding and retracting between the holding position and the separated position. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) ball B from being ejected outside the range of holding piece 6770 due to the momentum of the swinging motion being too strong when ball B performs a swinging motion above holding piece 6770. Therefore, ball B can be reliably dropped into one of the pockets during the swinging performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the ball B that performs a swinging motion on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. As shown in FIG. 180, on the back side of the ball B that swings on the holding piece 6770, instead of the ball detection sensor 679 provided on the front case 672 in the first control example, ball detection sensors 6790a- 6790i is provided. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i each have the same function as the ball detection sensor 679 in the first control example, and when it is detected that the ball B is placed (passed) on the front side in front view, , the output becomes H, and when the front side is not blocked by the ball B, the output becomes L. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged inside an opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

Regarding the arrangement of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, specifically, a ball detection sensor (swing center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. In addition, when the holding piece 6770 is equally divided into eight sections (first section to eighth section) in the horizontal direction, a ball detection sensor (sensor for the first section) 6790a to ball detection sensor 6790a is placed above the center position of each section. A sensor (fourth section sensor) 6790d, a ball detection sensor (fifth section sensor) 6790f to a ball detection sensor (eighth section sensor) 6790i are provided, respectively. That is, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged in this order at equal intervals from the left direction to the right direction in front view. In this control example, when the ball B is performing a swinging motion, the arrangement of the ball B above the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the ball detection sensor 6790g is on, this indicates that the ball B is placed in the sixth section (passing through). Further, for example, if the ball detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the ball B is placed in the second section (passing through).

In this control example, the detection results of each ball detection sensor 6790a to 6790i are used to determine in which section ball B is located (passing through), and the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is changed according to the section. That is, as ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the tilt angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is increased, and the maximum tilt angle (i.e., 6 degrees) is reached when ball B reaches the first and eighth sections. This prevents ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770, because the force (gravity) that returns ball B to the center becomes stronger as ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, ball B can be reliably dropped into one of the pockets during the swinging performance.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 183. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. FIG. 181(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222.

The ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an amplitude discrimination table 222e and a swing angle discrimination table 222f are provided. The rest of the configuration is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The amplitude discrimination table 222e determines whether the ball B This is a data table used to specify the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the robot. This amplitude determination table 222e is referred to when the output of any sensor changes from L to H during the swinging motion of the ball B, and the amplitude of the swinging motion of the ball B is determined. In this control example, it is determined whether the amplitude (period) of the swinging motion of the ball B has become sufficiently short based on the amplitude specified using the amplitude determination table 222e, and the falling condition is satisfied (i.e. , the ball fall possible flag 223fv is set to on). Note that the amplitude referred to here is in units of the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, it is a value indicating how many sections the ball B is performing the swinging motion over. For example, when the amplitude is "4", it indicates that the ball B is performing a rocking motion with an amplitude corresponding to four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770 to the left and right, respectively. In this control example, the ball fall possible flag 223fv is set to ON when this amplitude becomes "1" (that is, one section on the left and right) (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

Details of the amplitude discrimination table 222e will be explained with reference to FIG. 181(b). As shown in FIG. 181(b), the amplitude discrimination table 222e shows the type of ball detection sensor whose output was detected to be H last time, and the ball detection sensor whose output was detected to be H this time. The amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B is defined in association with the combination with the type. More specifically, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the first section sensor 6790a, and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the second section sensor 6790b, the amplitude is "4". ” is stipulated. In this combination of sensor types, ball B reaches the first section by rolling to the left during the swinging motion, and reaches the second section by changing direction and rolling to the left. It means what you did. Therefore, since the ball B is performing a rocking motion with an amplitude corresponding to four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, "4" is set as the amplitude.

In addition, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the previous H output was detected is the second section sensor 6790b, and the sensor type in which the current H output was detected is the third section sensor 6790c, the amplitude is set to "3". This combination of sensor types is read out when the ball B reaches the second section by rolling leftward during the swinging motion, and then reaches the third section by changing direction and rolling leftward. Therefore, the amplitude is set to "3" because the ball B swings with an amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770. Note that when the ball B changes direction in the first section and passes through the second and third sections (when the amplitude is determined to be "4"), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in this control example, once the amplitude of the swinging motion is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the ball B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e. This allows the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B to be determined more accurately.

Similarly, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the third section sensor 6790c, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the fourth section sensor 6790d, "2" is set as the amplitude. specified, the sensor type where the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the fourth section 6790d, the sensor type where the H output was detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, and the sensor type where the H output was detected last time is the sensor type for the swing center. For the combination of the fifth section sensor 6790f and the sensor type for which the current H output was detected as the swing center sensor 6790e, "1" is defined as the amplitude. Furthermore, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the 6th section sensor 6790g, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the 5th section sensor 6790f, "2" is specified as the amplitude. , for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the seventh section sensor 6790h, and the sensor type in which the current H output is detected is the sixth section sensor 6790g, "3" is defined as the amplitude, "4" is defined as the amplitude for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the 8th section sensor 6790i, and the sensor type in which the H output is detected this time is the 7th section sensor 6790h. .

In this way, in this control example, the amplitude can be determined according to the order in which each ball detection sensor 6790a to 6790i becomes in the H output state. This allows the amplitude of ball B to be accurately determined, so that ball B can be dropped into one of the pockets at a more natural timing (after the amplitude of the swinging motion becomes "1").

Returning to FIG. 181(a), the explanation will continue. The oscillation angle discrimination table 222f is a data table used to set the inclination angle to be set for the holding piece 6770 based on the arrangement of the ball B on the holding piece 6770. Details of this oscillation angle discrimination table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 182.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the swing angle determination table 222f is referenced when the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i becomes H, and detects the amplitude of the swing motion and the current H. An inclination angle (swing angle) to be set for the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the sensor type (current type).

More specifically, for a combination of an amplitude of "4" and a current type of the first section sensor 6790a, an inclination angle (swing angle) of 6 degrees is set for the holding piece 6770. Therefore, when ball B is performing a swinging motion with an amplitude of four sections and is detected by the first section sensor 6790a, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to the upper limit of 6 degrees. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined 6 degrees downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, which offsets the momentum of the swinging motion of ball B and allows it to change direction in the first section and roll toward the center of the holding piece 6770.

Similarly, for the combination of the amplitude "4" and the current type of the second section sensor 6790b, a tilt angle (swing angle) of 4 degrees is specified, for the combination of the amplitude "4" and the current type of the third section sensor 6790c, a tilt angle (swing angle) of 2 degrees is specified, and for the combination of the amplitude "4" and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790g, a tilt angle (swing angle) of -2 degrees is specified. Also, for the combination of the amplitude "4" and the current type of the seventh section sensor 6790h, a tilt angle (swing angle) of -4 degrees is specified, and for the combination of the amplitude "4" and the current type of the eighth section sensor 6790i, a tilt angle (swing angle) of -6 degrees is specified. Note that a negative angle means an angle at which the holding piece 6770 is tilted from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, for the combination of the amplitude being "3" and the current type being the sensor for the second section 6790b, 5 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle), and the amplitude is "3" and the current type is the sensor for the third section. For the combination 6790c, 3 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "3", and the current type is 6790g, the sensor for the 6th section, the tilt angle (swing angle) is -3. -5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle) for the combination of the amplitude being "4" and the current type being the seventh section sensor 6790h.

Furthermore, for the combination where the amplitude is "2" and the current type is the 3rd section sensor 6790c, 4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "2", and the current type is the 6th section sensor For a combination of 6790g, -4 degrees is specified as the tilt angle (swing angle).

In this way, by varying the inclination angle (swing angle) according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swinging motion of the ball B, it is possible to prevent the ball B from being ejected (flying out) outside the range of the holding piece 6770. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the swinging motion becomes smaller is to prevent (suppress) the ball B from stopping immediately when the amplitude becomes smaller. If the period from when the amplitude becomes smaller and it is determined that the condition for dropping the ball B is met to when the swinging motion of the ball B stops is short, the swinging motion of the ball B will stop before the pocket in which the ball B can be dropped is located at the drop position, which may cause the player to feel distrustful. In contrast, in this control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) is increased as the amplitude becomes smaller, so the swinging motion can be continued for a longer period of time. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging motion is being performed (before the swinging motion stops).

In this control example, the type of sensor that detected ball B and the swing angle were specified for each amplitude, but regardless of the amplitude of the swing motion, only the sensor type and the inclination angle (swing angle) are specified. may be specified. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of amplitude "4" in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the rocking motion. With this configuration, the amount of data in the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this control example, the upper limit of the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but this may be set arbitrarily within a range in which it is difficult for the player to perceive that the tilt of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. In addition, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle may be set arbitrarily within a range in which the ball B is not ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 183. As shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, the RAM 223 in this control example includes an amplitude counter 223iv, a previous type storage area 223jv, a current type storage area 223kv, and A flag 223mv, a placement specified flag 223nv, a detected value storage area 223ov, and an amplitude confirmation flag 223pv are provided.

The amplitude counter 223iv is a counter that indicates the amplitude of the swing motion, and stores the amplitude (any value from 1 to 4) read from the amplitude discrimination table 222e. This amplitude counter 223iv is overwritten with the read amplitude each time a different amplitude is read in the amplitude discrimination process (see FIG. 187) (S5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the rocking motion has become 1, the ball fall possible flag 223fv is set on and then its value is initialized to 0 (see S5512 in FIG. 187). This amplitude counter 223iv determines whether the falling conditions for the ball B are satisfied and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770.

The previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv are both storage areas for storing information indicating the type of sensor (one of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i). The previous type storage area 223jv stores the type of sensor that detected the passage of ball B last time (previous type), and the current type storage area 223kv stores the type of sensor that detected the passage of ball B this time (current type). The amplitude of the swinging motion of ball B is determined based on the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv. When it is detected that any sensor has become in the H output state during the swing performance process 2 (see FIG. 185), the current type storage area 223kv stores the type of the sensor that has become in the H output state (see S1722, S1727 in FIG. 185). Additionally, the previous type storage area 223jv will transfer the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv until a new sensor whose output has become H is detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

The position determination flag 223mv is a flag that indicates whether the position of the rotating member 640 is being determined. When this position determination flag 223mv is on, it means that the position of the rotating member 640 is being determined, and when it is off, it means that the position of the rotating member 640 is not being determined. This position determination flag 223mv is set to on when the output of any of the rotational position detection sensors 684 changes from a state in which all outputs are L to an H (see S5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, it is set to off when the determination of the rotational position of the rotating member 640 has been completed based on the detection results over multiple steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

The position determination flag 223nv is a flag that indicates whether the determination of the position of the rotating member 640 has been completed. When this position determination flag 223nv is on, it indicates that the determination of the current position of the rotating member 640 has been completed, and when it is off, it means that the determination of the rotating member 640 is incomplete. This position determination flag 223nv is set to on when the determination of the rotational position of the rotating member 640 has been completed based on the detection results of the rotational position detection sensor 684 over multiple steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). On the other hand, after the determination of the position of the rotating member 640 has been completed, it is set to off when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684 have switched to L (see S5906 in FIG. 193).

The detection value storage area 223ov is a memory area capable of storing multiple steps (15 steps) of detection values from each of the detection sensors A to F that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684. When the above-mentioned position determination in progress flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values from each of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov each time the rotational member 640 rotates one step. Then, when the detection values for 15 steps have been stored, if the stored values are normal, the rotational position member 640 is identified based on each stored value (see S5807 in FIG. 192 and S6007 in FIG. 194).

The amplitude determination flag 223pv is a flag that indicates whether the amplitude has been determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e when ball B is performing a swinging motion on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. If this amplitude determination flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been determined (ball B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, it means that the amplitude has not been determined (ball B is rolling away from the center of the movable piece 6770). This amplitude determination flag 223pv is set on when the amplitude has been determined from the detection result of the ball detection sensor when ball B is performing a swinging motion (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, it is set off every time the swing center sensor 6790e detects the passage of ball B.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 184 to Fig. 194. First, main process 2 (see Fig. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 184. This main process 2 (see Fig. 184) is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

Of the main processing 2 in this second control example (see FIG. 184), the processing in S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621 is similar to the processing in S1601 to S1610 and S1612 in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 145), respectively. The same processes as those from S1621 to S1621 are executed. Furthermore, in the main process 2 in the second control example (see FIG. 184), when the process in S1610 is finished, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed in place of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example. be done. This rocking effect process 2 (S1631) is similar to the rocking effect process in the first control example (see FIG. 146), when the "successive shot mode suggestion effect" is executed, the ball B is This process is for executing various controls from the time the ball B is pitched until the ball B falls into any pocket (during the swing effect). Details of this swing effect processing 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In addition, in main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) in this control example, after the performance setting processing (S1613) is completed, rotation setting processing 2 (S1632) and lighting setting processing 2 (S1633) are executed, and processing proceeds to S1614. Rotation setting processing 2 (S1632) is a process for varying the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under specified conditions while the rotating member 640 is rotating, similar to the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 155) executed in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. Furthermore, lighting setting processing 2 (S1633) is a process for controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, similar to the lighting setting processing (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

Next, the above-mentioned swing effect processing 2 (S1631) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185. Of the swing effect processing 2 (S1631) in this second control example, the processes S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705 are the same as those in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as S1704 and S1705 are executed.

In addition, in the rocking effect processing 2 in the second control example (see FIG. 185), if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the rocking non-detection flag 223v is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i (see FIG. 180) are all in the L state (S1721), and if it is determined that they are all L (S1721: Yes), this means that ball B has been thrown but has not yet reached the holding piece 6770, and so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1721, if it is determined that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), then the type of the detection sensor whose output is in the H state is determined. The corresponding information is stored in the current type storage area 223kv (S1722). Next, the maximum value 4 is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set on (S1723). This is because immediately after ball B is pitched, the momentum of ball B is the strongest, so the amplitude should be at its maximum. After the process of S1723, the process moves to S1704.

In addition, in the swing effect processing 2 in this control example (see FIG. 185), if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball falling flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the falling control in the first control example Instead of the process (see FIG. 147), fall control process 2 is executed (S1724), and this process ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, this fall control process 2 (S1724) is similar to the fall control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147), in which the ball B is placed in one of the pockets. This is a process to make it fall.

In addition, in the rocking effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) in this control example, if it is determined in the processing of S1705 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), it is determined whether the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i (see FIG. 180) are all in the L state (S1725), and if all outputs are L (S1725: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1725 that the output of any of the sensors is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv (S1726), and information corresponding to the type of the sensor that detected the output in the H state in the current processing of S1725 is overwritten in the current type storage area 223kv (S1727). This allows the type of the sensor that detected the current H output to be stored in the current type storage area 223kv, and the type of the sensor that detected the H output in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 to be stored in the previous type storage area 223jv.

After the process of S1727, an amplitude discrimination process is performed to determine the amplitude of the swinging motion of ball B based on the contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in the processes of S1726 and S1727 (S1728). Details of this amplitude discrimination process (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG. 187.

When the amplitude determination process (S1728) is completed, a swing angle control process is executed to set the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B (S1729), and this process ends. . This swing angle control process (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. As described above, this drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process that is executed in place of the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) in order to drop ball B into one of the pockets.

In the fall control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in this second control example, each process in S1803 to S1806 is the same as each process in S1803 to S1806 in the fall control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147). Processing is executed. Furthermore, when the fall control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in this control example is started, it is first determined whether the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811). As described above, the placement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the placement of the rotating member 640 has been specified. If it is determined that this placement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, off) (S1811: No), the current placement of the rotating member 640 is unknown, and is it possible to drop the ball B? This means that it is not possible to determine whether or not this is the case, so the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1811, if it is determined that the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), then the pocket of the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u, and the current placement of the rotation member 640 is determined. is specified (S1812), and the process moves to S1803.

By this fall control process 2 (see FIG. 186), similarly to the first control example, the ball B is caused to fall into an appropriate type of pocket depending on whether or not the transition to the "continuous shot mode" is confirmed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the "consecutive game mode".

Next, details of the amplitude determination process (S1728) will be described with reference to FIG. 187. This amplitude determination process (S1728) is one of the rocking effect processes (see FIG. 185), and is a process for determining the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B, as described above. In this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), it is first determined whether the output of the swing center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is in the H state (S5501), and if the output is in the H state ( S5501: Yes), which means that the ball B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging operation, the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this process ends. Thereby, when the ball B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, the amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the ball B rolls (swings) to the right or left side of the upper part of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the swinging motion can be determined, so the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the output of the swing center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is not H (i.e., the output is L) (S5501: No), then it is determined whether the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on (S5503). If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), this means that the amplitude of the swing motion has already been determined and that the ball is in the middle of rolling toward the center of the holding piece 6770, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5503 that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude discrimination table 222e (see FIG. 181(b)) is read out to determine the amplitude (S5504).

Then, the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv are compared with the specified contents of the read amplitude discrimination table 222e, and the combination of sensor types specified in the amplitude discrimination table 222e is determined. (S5505). In the process of S5505, if it is determined that a combination not specified in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the ball B has not reached the left end or right end of the swing motion. This means that the amplitude cannot be determined from the current combination of sensor types (the combination of sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv), so this process is immediately terminated and the oscillation is started. Returning to production processing 2 (see FIG. 185).

On the other hand, in the process of S5505, if it is determined that the combination of sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is specified in the amplitude discrimination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is determined. The flag 223pv is set on (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the amplitude counter 223iv matches the amplitude corresponding to the sensor combination defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508).

If it is determined in the process of S5508 that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), this means that the amplitude of the rocking motion has not changed, so the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors specified in the amplitude discrimination table 222e (S5508: No), the amplitude counter 223iv is updated by overwriting the amplitude value read from the amplitude discrimination table 222e (S5509), and it is determined whether the value of the amplitude counter 223iv after the update is 1 (S5510). If the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), this means that the amplitude of the rocking motion of ball B has become sufficiently small (the conditions for dropping ball B into one of the pockets have been met), so the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to OFF (S5512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5510 that the updated value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the rocking motion of ball B is relatively large, and dropping ball B may result in an unnatural appearance, so this process ends.

By performing this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), it is possible to accurately determine the amplitude of the swing motion based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided on the front case 661. Therefore, since the ball B can be dropped after the amplitude of the rocking motion performed by the ball B becomes sufficiently small, the ball B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 with a natural appearance.

Next, the swing angle control process (S1729) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. This swing angle control process (S1729) is one process in the swing performance process (see FIG. 185), and as described above, is a process for setting the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B.

When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv are read out (S5601), and then the swing angle discrimination table is read out. 222f (see FIG. 182) is read out (S5602). Next, it is determined whether the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is specified in the swing angle discrimination table 222f ( S5603), if it is determined that the combination is not specified in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), this means that there is no need to change the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. , this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the combination read in the process of S5601 is defined in the swing angle discrimination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is The tilt angle (swing angle) specified in the determination table 222f is set as the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and this process ends.

By executing this swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the inclination angle (swing angle) can be varied according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing motion of the ball B (ball B (The further away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the greater the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770) This can be suppressed more reliably. Furthermore, as described above, the swing angle discrimination table 222f is configured such that the tilt angle increases as the amplitude of the swing motion becomes smaller, so that when the amplitude becomes smaller, the swing motion is immediately stopped. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the vehicle from stopping. Therefore, since the rocking motion can be continued for a longer period of time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the rocking motion is being performed (before the rocking motion stops). .

Next, rotation setting processing 2 (S1632) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. This rotation setting process 2 is one of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184), and as described above, is used to vary the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under predetermined conditions while the rotating member 640 is rotating. It is processing. Of the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in this second control example, S2801 and each process of S2805 to S2808 correspond to S2801 and S2805 to S2808 of the rotation setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 157), respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed.

In addition, in the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in this control example, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball falling flag 223fv is on (S2801: Yes), the placement specified flag 223nv is on. It is determined whether or not (S2811). If it is determined that this placement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, off) (S2811: No), the current placement is unknown and the pocket into which ball B can be dropped is located near the drop position. Since it cannot be determined whether or not it has been placed, this process is ended and the process returns to main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

On the other hand, in the process of S2811, if it is determined that the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), information corresponding to the pocket placed at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u ( S2812), the process moves to S2805.

By executing this rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current drop position and the nearest pocket into which ball B can be dropped can be grasped, and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 can be varied according to the positional relationship. This makes it possible to prevent the swinging motion of ball B from continuing for a long period of time after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of ball B becomes small, so that ball B can be dropped into one of the pockets in a more natural appearance.

Next, referring to FIG. 190, execution command processing 2 (S2121) that is executed in place of the execution command processing (S2113, see FIG. 155) in the first control example in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150) will be described. This execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190), like the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, is a process for determining the progress of the operation of the reels driven by various motor drivers in accordance with the execution commands output from those motor drivers, and for performing control in accordance with the progress.

Of the execution command processing 2 in this second control example (see FIG. 190), each of S2601 to S2608 and S2611 to S2614 corresponds to S2601 to S2608 of the execution command processing in the first control example (see FIG. 155), respectively. The same processes as those in S2611 to S2614 are executed. In addition, in the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in this control example, when the processing in S2608 is completed, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F forming the rotational position detection sensor 684 are monitored over multiple steps (15 steps). (sampling), executes a placement specifying process for specifying the pocket placed at the drop position (S2621), and ends this process. The details of this placement specifying process (S2621) will be explained with reference to FIG. 191.

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned arrangement identification process (S2621). When this arrangement identification process is executed, first, it is determined whether the swing performance flag 223ev is on or not (S5701). If it is determined that it is off (S5701: No), a rotation identification process is executed to identify the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the stage before the ball B performs the swinging motion (S5702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the swing performance flag 223ev is on (S5701: Yes), a swing identification process is executed to identify the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the swing performance (S5703), and this process is terminated. Details of the rotation identification process (S5702) and the swing identification process (S5703) will be described later with reference to Figures 192 to 194.

First, details of the rotating process (S5702) will be described with reference to FIG. 192. When this rotation specifying process (see FIG. 192) is started, it is first determined whether or not the placement specifying flag 223mv is on (S5801), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). If (S5801: No), whether the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 has been displaced (the output of any sensor has switched from the state where all the outputs of detection sensors A to F are L to the state where the output of any sensor is H) is determined, and when the output is displaced, a non-specification process is executed to start specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (S5802), and this process ends. Details of this non-specific time processing (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the position determination in progress flag 223mv is on (S5801: Yes), the combinations of the detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F are stored in free areas of the storage areas of the detection value storage area 223ov where no data is stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether the upper limit of 15 combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F have been stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5804), and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S5804: No), this means that the number of detections required to determine the position of the rotating member 640 has not been reached, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5804, if it is determined that the upper limit number (15) of combinations of detected values are stored in the detected value storage area 223ov (S5804: Yes), the combinations of detected values are stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether the combinations of all detected values are the same (S5805). If it is determined that a combination of detection values that are different from each other is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806). , this process ends. By resetting all the data, combinations of detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5805 that all the combinations of detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S5805: Yes), the rotational position determination table 222c is read out to identify the pocket that is defined in association with the combination of detection values from the detection sensors A to F (S5807), and information corresponding to the identified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the location determination flag 223mv is set to OFF, and the location determination flag 223nv is set to ON (S5809), and this process ends.

By executing this rotation specifying process (see Figure 192), the combination of outputs (detection values) of detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and the detection results change. After determining whether there is a pocket, the pocket corresponding to the detection result can be specified. Therefore, if the output of one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or if the rotating member 640 rattles, the timing at which the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is placed at the detected position may be affected. Even if the rotating member 640 is misaligned, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

In this control example, if at least one combination of the detection values for 15 steps is different, the detection value storage area 223ov is reset regardless of the timing at which the combination was stored or the number of times that different combinations were stored, but this is not limited to this. For example, only the memory area in which the different combinations are stored among the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov may be cleared, and additional detection values may be obtained and stored in the cleared area for the number of times that different combinations were stored, and it may be determined whether all combinations match. This eliminates the need to obtain an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time a different detection value combination is included, thereby shortening the time required to identify the pocket where the item fell.

Next, the non-specific time processing (S5802) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this non-specific time processing (S5802). As described above, this non-specific time processing (S5802) is a process for determining whether the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 has changed (whether the output of any of the detection sensors A to F has switched from an L state to an H state), and for starting to identify the position of the rotating member 640 if the output has changed.

When this non-specific time processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901), and if it is off (S5901: No), the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are It is determined whether all are L (S5902). In the process of S5902, if it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S5902: Yes), it means that no pocket is placed at the falling position, and the placement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since this is not possible, this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S5902, if it is determined that the output of any one of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), this is caused by the placement of any pocket at the falling position. This means that the output of the sensor has changed. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the placement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON (S5903), and the rotation position storage The information stored in the area 223u and corresponding to the pocket placed at the previous drop position is cleared and reset (S5904), and this process ends. By turning on the placement specifying flag 223mv, in the subsequent rotation specifying process (see FIG. 192), the combination of outputs of each detection sensor A to F is monitored over multiple steps in the process of S5801. Each process of S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

In the process of S5901, if it is determined that the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901: Yes), then it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L. If it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the placement specified flag 223nv is set to OFF (S5906), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), the process is immediately terminated. By executing the processes of S5905 and S5906, it is possible to limit the period during which the placement specified flag 223nv is on to only the period when the detected part 641c passes through the positions of each detection sensor A to F. can. That is, the period during which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 stored in the rotational position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited to the period when the detected portion 641c is passing through the positions of each of the detection sensors AF. Therefore, the detected part 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F, and, for example, problems such as the ball B being set to fall in a state where two pockets straddle the falling position are suppressed. be able to.

Next, details of the rocking identifying process (S5704) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 194. This swinging specifying process (S5704) is one of the placement specifying processes (see FIG. 191), and as described above, is a process for specifying the placement of the rotating member 640 while the swinging effect is being executed. be.

When this swing specific process (see FIG. 194) is started, it is first determined whether the placement specific flag 223mv is on (S6001). If it is determined that it is not on (i.e., it is off) (S6001: No), the non-specific time process described above is executed (S6002), and this process ends. This non-specific time process (S6002) executes the same process as the non-specific time process (S5802, see FIG. 193), which is one of the processes in the rotation specific process (see FIG. 192), so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if it is determined that the placement specifying flag 223mv is on (S6001: Yes), the combination of detection values (outputs) of detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Among them, the data is stored (stored) in an empty area where no data is stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of 15 combinations of outputs from the detection sensors A to F has been stored (stored) in the detected value storage area 223ov (S6004), and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. (S6004: No) means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not reached, so the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6004, if it is determined that the upper limit number (15) of combinations of detected values are stored in the detected value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), the combinations of detected values are stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether 80% (2) or more of the combinations of the 15 detected values have the same detection result (S6005). If it is determined that the combination of the same detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S6006), and this process ends. do. By resetting all the data, combinations of detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

On the other hand, in the process of S6005, if it is determined that 80% or more of the combinations of detection values among the 15 combinations of detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S6005: Yes), the rotation position The determination table 222c is read out, pockets defined in association with the combinations of detection values of detection sensors A to F are identified (S6007), and information corresponding to the identified pockets is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u ( storage) (S6008). Then, the placement specifying flag 223mv is set to OFF, and the placement specified flag 223nv is set to ON (S6009), and this process ends.

By executing this swinging identification process (see FIG. 194), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and the pocket corresponding to the detection results that match at a rate of 80% or more can be identified. That is, compared to the rotation identification process (see FIG. 192), the conditions for identifying the pocket are looser, so the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket where it will fall) can be identified more quickly. Note that this swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is executed only while the swinging performance is being executed. As described above, the swinging performance is a performance in which the ball B is ultimately dropped into one of the pockets. Therefore, if it takes time to identify the arrangement of the rotating member 640, the timing of dropping the ball B will also be delayed, and there is a risk that the ball B will not be able to drop into the targeted pocket. In contrast, in this control example, a swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) with looser judgment conditions (i.e., the time until the arrangement is identified is relatively short) is executed during the swinging performance. This allows the position of the rotating member 640 to be identified more quickly, so that ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the desired type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured to have a holding piece 6770 with a variable inclination angle, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is variable depending on the position of the ball B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. If the position of the holding piece 6770 is fixed when the ball B is caused to swing, there is a risk that the ball B will pass through the upper surface of the holding piece 6770 and enter an unexpected position, such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10, if the momentum of the ball B when thrown is too strong (the initial speed is too fast). In addition, as a method for causing the swinging movement at the upper part of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the momentum of the ball B, it is possible to widen the width of the holding piece 6770 or to make the inclination from both sides of the holding piece 6770 to the center steeper, but if the width of the holding piece 6770 is widened, it becomes necessary to secure space by that amount, which reduces the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, if the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is made steeper, the amplitude (period) of the swinging motion tends to become smaller, shortening the time during which ball B swings, and there is a risk that ball B will stop before it falls. In other words, there is a risk that ball B will appear extremely unnatural, as it will not fall into the pocket even though it is stationary.

On the other hand, in this second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is configured to be variable. The inclination angle is controlled so that the farther the ball B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging operation, the greater the downward inclination toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. Thereby, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the swinging motion can be set in such a direction that the ball B always flows downward toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the momentum of the swinging motion performed by the ball B being too strong. It can be held securely at the top and dropped into any pocket. Furthermore, by holding the ball B above the holding piece 6770 by varying the inclination angle (swing angle), it is possible to suppress the holding piece 6770 from increasing in size, thereby saving space. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Furthermore, in this second control example, the tilt angle (swing angle) is configured to become smaller as the ball B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770, so that the momentum of the swing motion is reduced. It can be made difficult to Therefore, since the swinging motion can be continued for a longer period of time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket before the swinging motion of the ball B stops.

In the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one detection sensor becomes H), a plurality of operation steps are performed. The outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over a plurality of operation steps, and the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket placed at the falling position) is determined based on the detection results over a plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With this configuration, if the output of one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or if the rotating member 640 rattles, the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket may move to the detected position. Even if the timing at which the rotating member 640 is placed is shifted, the placement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

In this control example, two types of identification methods are provided for identifying the rotational position of the rotating member 640. As the first method, a combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined number of operation steps (15 steps), and if all the combinations of detection values for the predetermined number of steps (15 steps) are the same, a method is set to identify the pocket corresponding to the detection result. In this method, if at least one combination of detection results is different from the other combinations of detection results, the combination of detection results for the predetermined number of steps is acquired again, and the type of pocket is identified only if all the combinations of detection results match. According to this first method, even if the output of any of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the timing at which the detection target portion 641c provided in each pocket is positioned at the detection target position is shifted due to rattling of the rotating member 640, the position of the rotating member 640 can be accurately identified.

On the other hand, the second method is set in such a way that the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined number of operation steps (15 steps), and when 80% or more (i.e., 12 steps) of the combinations of detection values for the predetermined number of steps (15 steps) are the same, the pocket corresponding to the combination of detection results that accounts for 80% of the combinations is identified. This second method is less accurate than the first method because it is configured to allow a maximum of 20% displacement of the detection results, but it is possible to shorten the time required to identify the pocket because there is less need to redo the detection. This second method is adopted when the ball B is dropped into the pocket. When the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is identified in order to determine whether the ball B is dropped or not, if it takes time to identify the arrangement, the timing of dropping the ball B is also delayed, and there is a risk that the ball B cannot be dropped into the target pocket. In contrast, in this control example, a swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is executed during the swinging performance, with looser judgment conditions (i.e., the time it takes to identify the placement is relatively short). This allows the placement of the rotating member 640 to be identified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the desired type.

In addition, in this second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection results of the rotational position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps are monitored (sampled), and based on the detection results for the 15 steps, However, the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15 steps. The detected portion 641c may be arbitrarily determined depending on the number of detectable steps and the like.

In the second control example, it is determined which section out of eight sections (first section to eighth section) the ball B is passing through in the swing effect, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is adjusted. Although it was made variable, it is not limited to this. The number of ball detection sensors may be increased while increasing the section, or the number of ball detection sensors may be decreased while the section is decreased. When the section is increased, the arrangement of the ball B can be specified more accurately, so the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more precisely. On the other hand, when the sections are reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Furthermore, the failure rate can be reduced.

In this control example, the type of sensor that detected the ball B and the swing angle are defined for each amplitude of the swing motion of the ball B in the swing angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182). Regardless of the amplitude of the motion, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) may be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of amplitude "4" in this control example (see amplitude "4" in FIG. 182) may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the rocking motion. With this configuration, the amount of data in the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this control example, the upper limit of the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but this may be set arbitrarily within a range in which it is difficult for the player to perceive that the tilt of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. In addition, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle may be set arbitrarily within a range in which the ball B is not ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this second control example, when the rotating member 640 is rotating and any pocket is placed in the drop position before the ball B is pitched, the detection sensors A to 1 are activated over 15 steps. The output of F is monitored, and if at least one of the combinations of outputs for 15 steps is different, the detected value storage area is 223ov (that is, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F were additionally monitored for 15 steps), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the combinations stored in the detected value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which different combinations are stored is cleared, and the detected values are acquired as many times as the number of times the different combinations are stored, and then the cleared area is It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. This eliminates the need to acquire an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time when different detection value combinations are included, reducing the time required to identify the pocket at the drop location. can.

In this second control example, when any pocket of the rotating member 640 is placed in the falling position, the combinations of outputs of each detection sensor A to F are monitored for 15 steps, and all combinations match. (first method above) or when it is determined that 80% of the 15 steps match (second method above), the pocket at the fall position is identified. The number of steps for specifying (the arrangement of the rotating member 640) is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. By employing a smaller number of steps (for example, 10 steps) than 15 steps, the pocket (arrangement of the rotating member 640) of the falling position can be specified more quickly. Furthermore, by employing a number of steps greater than 15 steps (for example, 18 steps), it is possible to more accurately specify the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640). Further, in the first method and the second method, the number of steps for identifying the pocket of the falling position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) does not necessarily have to be the same, and different numbers of steps may be adopted. Good too.

In the second control example, when any pocket of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and when at least one combination of different detection values is included in the detection results for the 15 steps (the first method described above), or when it is determined that the combination of detection values in the 15 steps matches less than 80% (the second method described above), the detection values for an additional 15 steps are monitored. However, it is not necessary to monitor 15 steps. For example, in the first method described above, if the detection value changes in the middle of the 15 steps, it may be configured to start monitoring the additional 15 steps at that point. Also, for example, in the second method described above, even if the number of steps is less than 15, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% (12 steps) of the 15 steps, it may be configured to start monitoring the additional 15 steps at that point. By configuring in this way, the pocket can be identified more quickly.

In this control example, when it is determined that the output of any of the detection sensors A to F has changed during the rotation of the rotating member 640 (the output of the sensor has changed from the state where the output of all the detection sensors is L), the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored during the rotation of 15 steps from that point on, regardless of the type of sensor whose output has changed, but this is not limited to this. For example, taking into account the rattling of the rotating member 640, the detection value of the sensor that is most likely to detect the detection target portion 641c last among the detection sensors (for example, the detection sensor A located at the position where the shortest distance has been rotated after reaching the first section S1) may be changed, and monitoring of the detection values for 15 steps may be started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a combination of detection values that do not match exists among the detection values for 15 steps, making it difficult to redo monitoring. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotating member 640 can be identified more quickly.

In this control example, the configuration for determining the placement from the combination of the outputs of six detection sensors is configured to apply the above-mentioned first method (a method for performing control corresponding to the output determined to be the same when the outputs for a predetermined number of steps are all the same), but the first method is not limited to being configured with six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). The first method can also be applied to applications other than identifying the placement. For example, when it is detected that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has switched from the L state to the H state, the output of the detection sensor may be monitored a predetermined number of times (for example, over five main processes), and if the output is all H during the predetermined number of monitoring periods, it may be determined that ball B has passed through that detection sensor. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the misidentification that ball B has passed through the corresponding sensor from the H output when the output of the detection sensor becomes H instantaneously due to the influence of noise or the like, regardless of the passage of ball B. Therefore, when ball B is performing a swinging motion, the position of ball B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figs. 195 to 206. In the above-mentioned first control example, it was configured to determine whether or not to increase (add) the winning pocket (lucky number) during a predetermined period after the start of the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode". Then, when the addition is determined, it was configured to randomly determine the winning pocket to be increased (added) from among the losing pockets in the increase performance executed in the "preparation mode". This makes it possible to make the player feel as if the ball B is more likely to fall into the winning pocket in the "roulette chance performance" executed thereafter, so that the more the addition is performed, the higher the player's expectations for the "consecutive mode".

On the other hand, in the third control example, when an add-on is determined and winning pockets are determined in the increased performance, a section with a high percentage of winning pockets is intentionally provided. This allows the player to more carefully observe the correspondence between the arrangement of the sections with a high percentage of winning pockets and the momentum (period) of the rocking motion that the ball B performs on the upper part of the holding piece 677. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in playing the "roulette chance effect".

In addition, in the first control example described above, the control and presentation modes in the "normal mode" and "preparation mode" were mainly explained.

In contrast to this, in this third control example, we will also explain the chance eye consecutive display, which is one of the exciting displays executed during the "consecutive win mode" in the third symbol display device 81. The chance eye consecutive display is a type of exciting display that suggests whether or not a jackpot has been hit in the "consecutive win mode," and details will be described later.

The pachinko machine 10 in this third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that a "chance eye consecutive performance" that is a performance mode executed during the "consecutive win mode" has been added, the method of allocating winning pockets that are allocated during the "preparation mode" has been changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been changed from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. The other configurations, various processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196, a description will be given of the "chance consecutive effect" executed during the "consecutive game mode" of the third control example. This "chance number continuous performance" is a performance that informs that the result of the lottery is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the chance number multiple times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.2 second intervals).

Here, similar to the first control example described above, the "consecutive winning mode" in this third control example has a short hit fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and a hit medium fluctuation (3 seconds) as fluctuation patterns at the time of a jackpot. are selected at a ratio of approximately 1:1. Furthermore, the configuration is such that a short deviation variation (0.2 seconds) and a medium deviation variation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4:1 as variation patterns when the signal is missed.

As a result, in the "continuous game mode", a shorter variable time is determined compared to the variable time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so you cannot play the game during the "continuous game mode". It can be executed quickly. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "continuous game mode" from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the time-saving "continuous shot mode", by allowing the ball to pass through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the second ball entry port 640a is Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640a so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67. At the same time, the electric accessory 640b is opened, and a game (so-called "right-handed game") is executed in which the player aims to win a jackpot by hitting the second ball entrance 640a.

The pachinko machine 10 of this third control example, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, is configured so that the drawing of the special pattern 2, which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640a, is not withheld.

In conventional gaming machines, in a predetermined gaming state where the variable time is determined to be shorter than in the normal gaming state (time saving, etc.), the player is notified whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Since it is difficult to perform this effect in one variable time period, the effect is performed using a plurality of variable time periods based on the winning information that is held and stored (so-called "pre-reading effect").

However, in the present third control example, as described above, the drawing of the special symbol 2 is configured not to be suspended, and the above-mentioned "pre-read effect" cannot be executed. Therefore, in the third control example, in a predetermined gaming state ("consecutive game mode") in which the variable time is determined to be shorter than the normal gaming state, a special It is configured to be able to execute a ``chance successive effect'' as an effect indicating whether or not the result of the drawing of symbols is a jackpot.

Figure 195 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode corresponding to a winning middle fluctuation, among the "continuous chance eye presentations" executed during the "consecutive win mode". This winning middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when a jackpot is won, and is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds. The presentation mode corresponding to the winning middle fluctuation is selected by referring to the consecutive win jackpot table 222a3 (see Figure 198) in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in Figure 206).

More specific details will be explained with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a timing chart showing a state in which a "third consecutive chance performance" is executed as an example of a performance mode that corresponds to fluctuations in the winning middle among the "chance successive performances". When this "3rd consecutive chance presentation" is executed, the chances are stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals within one variable time.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(a), when the winning middle variation is started (executed) with the "3rd consecutive chance effect" set, the pseudo variation is first started (executed) (the pseudo variation period is 0.2 seconds). This pseudo fluctuation is a pseudo fluctuation display until the third symbol is pseudo stopped (temporary stop) on the chance roll, and is 0.2 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time when a short fluctuation is executed. A variable time is set.

Furthermore, during the period in which the pseudo fluctuation is being performed, it is sufficient that a display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the third symbol is not recognized by the player as stopping at a specific symbol is executed; It may be a display mode that changes so that the symbols change, or a display mode that only rotates a specific symbol. Further, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the symbols that are displayed in a stopped state, the symbols themselves may be moved at high speed or may be made small enough to be difficult to see.

After that, when the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) has passed, the chance symbol (first chance symbol) is displayed as stopped (the chance symbol stop period is 0.5 seconds). This chance symbol stop display is a display mode (provisional stop display mode) that makes the player recognize that the third symbol is stopped as a specific symbol, and is set for the same time as the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) when a short fluctuation is executed.

These temporary stop display modes include a display mode in which the third symbol stops completely, as well as a display mode in which a specific symbol fluctuates slightly. By executing a stop display of a chance eye in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that one fluctuation has ended before the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (3 seconds in the case of a winning middle fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player recognize that multiple fluctuations are occurring while one fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed.

As mentioned above, when the middle fluctuation is executed, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) are the fluctuation time (period) of the short fluctuation (0.2 seconds). Since it is set to be executed in the same period as the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds), it is possible to display the chance roll stop display in the middle variation without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Then, when the chance eye stopping period has elapsed, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (pseudo-stop period is 0.7 seconds). This pseudo-stop is a pseudo display of the period until the next variation is executed. In this third control example, since right-hand play is executed during the "consecutive win mode" as described above, a non-play period may occur between when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a (initial winning) after the variation of the special symbol has stopped and when the variation of the special symbol is executed again.

Specifically, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the "continuous shot mode" which is time saving, the normal symbol (second symbol) changes for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135), and then the current normal symbol changes. If the lottery result of the symbol is a hit (S615 in FIG. 135: Yes), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is movably controlled so as to open twice for one second (S615 in FIG. 135). (See S616). Therefore, a time lag may occur after the special symbol stops changing until the next time the electric accessory 640b opens and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640a. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured so that the lottery of the special symbol 2, which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640a, is not suspended. Therefore, a non-gaming period may occur in which new special symbol variations are not executed.

Returning to FIG. 195(a), the explanation continues. The period during which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped is a period for pseudo-displaying a period corresponding to the non-play period described above, and by providing this pseudo-stop period, it is possible to execute a fluctuation pattern similar to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when short fluctuations are executed multiple times with a single middle fluctuation.

Here, the display mode when performing a pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize that it is a non-gaming period, for example, the third symbol during the chance stop period. It may be a display mode in which the amplitude of fluctuation is smaller than the display mode, or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from a background image corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol to a background image corresponding to the non-gaming period.

In addition, in this third control example, in order to avoid giving a sense of incongruity to the player as a pseudo-fluctuation presentation that presents the appearance of multiple fluctuations while one middle fluctuation is being executed, a pseudo-fluctuation period is set to be the same length as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation, a chance eye stop period is set to be the same length as the pattern determination period of the short fluctuation, and a pseudo stop period is further provided to pseudo-display a non-play period, but it is not necessary to provide all of these configurations.

For example, the structure of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance stop period by a period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to perform the pseudo-variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The "three consecutive chance effects" shown in FIG. 195(a) is based on the above-mentioned pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance stop period (0.5 seconds), and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The constructed pseudo effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and after the second pseudo effect is completed, the third pseudo variation (0.2 seconds) is executed. The period up to the end of this third pseudo fluctuation is executed within the special symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds), and the third chance stop display (0.5 seconds) is executed within the special symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds). .5 seconds). Then, the jackpot is started (executed) after the third chance stop display period (special symbol confirmation time) has elapsed.

In this way, the "three consecutive chance eyes effect" shown in FIG. 195(a) is configured to display the chance eyes stopped three times at 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, i.e., at 1.4 second intervals, so that during the "consecutive wins mode", it is possible to execute an effect in which the chance eyes are stopped multiple times at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time. This allows the player to recognize that an effect is being executed across multiple fluctuations without using a "pre-reading effect".

In addition, in the "3rd consecutive chance production" explained with reference to FIG. 195(a), the stop display of the 3rd chance is executed using the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol. For example, the period until the third chance stop display is executed is executed within the range of the special symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds), and the special symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds) is the period when the special symbol hits. It may be configured to stop displaying a combination of third symbols corresponding to (for example, a combination of the same number symbols). This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the current change is a win.

On the other hand, FIG. 195(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode corresponding to a miss middle variation in the "chance consecutive presentation" executed during the "consecutive win mode". This miss middle variation is a variation pattern selected when a jackpot is not won (when the special symbol lottery results in a miss), and is composed of a 3 second variation time and a 0.5 second confirmation time. The presentation mode corresponding to the miss middle variation is selected by referring to the consecutive win jackpot table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) in the variation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

A more specific description will be given with reference to Fig. 195(b). Fig. 195(b) is a timing chart showing a state in which a "2 consecutive chance eyes for miss" has been executed as an example of a performance mode corresponding to a miss middle fluctuation, among the "consecutive chance eyes" performances. When this "2 consecutive chance eyes for miss" is executed, chance eyes are displayed stopped twice at a predetermined interval within one fluctuation time, and finally the third symbol is displayed stopped as a complete miss.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when a miss middle variation in which the "miss 2 consecutive chance eye effect" is set is started (executed), a pseudo variation is executed twice, similar to the "3 consecutive chance eye effect" described above with reference to FIG. 195(a). After that, a third pseudo variation is executed (0.2 seconds), and a complete miss stop display (0.5 seconds) is executed using the confirmation time for the special symbol (0.5 seconds).

As explained above, in the "two consecutive chances production for losing" shown in FIG. 195(b), the chances are stopped and displayed at the timing of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts. Therefore, during the "consecutive game mode", it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped multiple times at predetermined intervals within one variable time period. This has the effect that it is possible to make the player perceive that the performance is being executed across a plurality of fluctuations without using the "pre-read performance".

In addition, the first and second chance symbols are displayed at the same timing as the "three consecutive chance symbols" described above (0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts), so the player can have hope of a big win until the current fluctuation ends (until the complete miss symbol stops).

Next, referring to FIG. 196(a), the presentation mode when a miss short variation and a win short variation are performed among the "chance eye consecutive performances" performed during the "consecutive win mode". FIG. 196(a) is a diagram showing a timing chart when the "chance eye performance" is performed twice in succession as a presentation mode corresponding to a miss short variation among the "chance eye consecutive performances" performed during the "consecutive win mode", and then the "chance eye performance" is performed as a presentation mode corresponding to a win short variation. This miss short variation is a variation pattern selected when a big win is not won (a miss is won), and is composed of a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The presentation mode corresponding to the miss short variation is selected by referring to the table 222a4 for misses during consecutive wins (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206). Also, the hit short variation is a variation pattern selected when a big win is won, and the process of selecting the variation time, fixed time, and presentation mode is the same as the miss short variation described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The details will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 196(a). First, as shown in FIG. 196(a), when a miss short variation with the "chance eye effect" set is started (executed), the variation starts (executes) (variation period is 0.2 seconds). Then, when the variation period has elapsed, a chance eye is displayed in a stopped state, indicating that this variation is not a win (a miss), and the pattern is confirmed (confirmation period 0.5 seconds).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, the variation time (0.2 seconds) and finalization time (0.5 seconds) in the short variation are the pseudo variation period (0.2 seconds) executed during the middle variation. and the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to have the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to execute the pseudo performance executed during the middle variation and the variation performance during the short variation at the same timing, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the pseudo performance executed during the middle variation. The effect is that it can be eliminated.

Returning to FIG. 196(a), we will continue with the explanation. After the chance eye stop display (first time) is executed, the pattern change stops (change stop period) until the next change starts (until a new ball enters the second ball entrance 640a (initial winning)). During this change stop period, the third pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern, and the background screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81 switches from the changing background screen to the change stopped background screen to allow the player to recognize that the special pattern is not changing.

When a new starting winning occurs, a miss short variation with a "chance eye effect" set as the next variation is started (executed), and the second chance eye is stopped and displayed. For this miss short variation, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance eye display described above is displayed.

Next, a short variation for winning the jackpot is executed, the third chance symbol is displayed, and the jackpot starts (is executed) after the chance symbol stop period has elapsed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198, but this third control example has a presentation that notifies the user that a jackpot has been won by stopping and displaying three chance eyes at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval), so when a losing short variation with the "chance eye presentation" set has been executed twice in succession, if the next short variation is a winning short variation, the "chance eye presentation" can be set, but if the next variation is a losing short variation, the "chance eye presentation" is not set.

By doing this, when short fluctuations occur multiple times in a row, multiple chances will be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals across multiple fluctuations, even though the lottery result is a loss. This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate performance can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196(b), a description will be given of the production mode when a missed short variation is executed three times in a row among the "chance successive production" executed during "consecutive game mode". . FIG. 196(b) shows that among the "chance successive effects" executed during the "continuous shot mode", the "chance effect" is executed in two consecutive fluctuations as a performance mode corresponding to the short fluctuation that results in a loss, and then It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a "normal performance" is executed as a performance mode corresponding to a short fluctuation. This missed short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (the winning is missed), and is composed of a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The production mode corresponding to the miss-short variation is selected in the variation pattern selection process with reference to the consecutive hit-miss table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

First, as shown in FIG. 196(b), if a miss short variation occurs again after two consecutive miss short variations with the "chance eye effect" set are executed, the "chance eye effect" is not selected as the effect mode corresponding to that miss short variation (see FIG. 199), and the "normal effect" is executed as shown in FIG. 196(b).

The "normal performance" corresponding to this missed short variation is a performance mode in which the chance eye is not stopped and displayed, and after the fluctuating display is executed for 0.2 seconds, the third symbol is stopped and displayed when the chance is completely missed.

In addition, in this third control example, an effect suggesting the lottery result (so-called "chance continuous effect") is executed by stopping and displaying the chance pieces multiple times at a predetermined interval. A mode other than the stop display of the chance may be used as the mode executed. For example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. This makes it possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and has the effect of being able to provide the player with a more interesting performance.

In addition, in this third control example, a 1.4 second interval is set as the predetermined interval, but the interval may be shifted within a range that is difficult for the player to recognize, for example, the predetermined interval may include an error range of about 0.2 on either side. This makes it possible to execute the "continuous chance performance" in a game state where the winning information of special symbol 2 is not reserved and stored, even if the special symbol does not immediately start changing.

Furthermore, instead of stopping the chance symbols at a predetermined interval, the result of the lottery may be suggested by the number of times the chance symbols are stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or number of variations).

Next, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199. FIG. 197(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the third control example differs from each of the control examples described above in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that an additional area selection table 222g is added.

Now, referring to FIG. 197(b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a of this third control example will be described. FIG. 197(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a of this third control example. The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in this third control example, like the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, is a data table used to determine more detailed fluctuation content from the rough fluctuation content (fluctuation time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, based on the fluctuation pattern command.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is composed of a table 222a1 for normal medium-long jackpots, a table 222a2 for normal medium-range hits, a table 222a3 for consecutive medium-range jackpots, and a table 222a4 for consecutive hits.

In the normal medium jackpot table 222a1, detailed performance modes corresponding to the variation types of variation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (not shown). figure). Here, the performance mode specified in the normal medium jackpot table 222a1 will be explained. First, in the normal medium jackpot table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns for the symbols that are variably displayed on each display section 331a to 331d of the presentation section 331.

The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which each symbol that is variably displayed on each display section 331a to 331d is stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10 second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the last symbol is displayed on each display section 331a to 331d. It takes a long time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, "2", "7", "13") is stopped and displayed on the display section other than the display section 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display section 331d. This is the stop pattern to be set.

In addition, like the normal win table 222a1, the normal miss table 222a2 also has detailed presentation patterns that correspond to the fluctuation types with fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this third control example, the ratio of the variation patterns selected in the event of a normal big win between a variation pattern with a 7-second variation time and a variation pattern with a 10-second variation time is approximately 1:1 (see FIG. 111(a)), and the ratio of the variation patterns selected in the event of a normal miss between a variation pattern with a 7-second variation time and a variation pattern with a 10-second variation time is approximately 3:1 (FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of a big win.

The consecutive winning jackpot table 222a3 is a table in which detailed presentation modes are specified for the variable pattern commands output from the main control device 110 during the "consecutive winning mode." A detailed explanation of this consecutive winning jackpot table 222a3 will be provided with reference to FIG. 198.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the table 222a3 for jackpot during consecutive games. This table 222a3 for jackpots during consecutive games includes "short hit fluctuation (0.2 seconds)" and "middle hit fluctuation (3 seconds)," which are the fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. Corresponding to the value of the chance number counter 223qv and the value of the performance counter 223rv, the production modes are "normal jackpot production", "single chance production for winning", "two consecutive chance production for winning", and "three consecutive chances production". Four types of presentation modes are defined: ``eye presentation''.

More specifically, if the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "winning short fluctuation," the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0, 1," and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 99," then the "normal big win performance" is selected as the performance mode.

The "normal jackpot effect" is an effect that notifies the player within a variable time of 0.2 seconds that the result of this lottery is a jackpot. For example, an effect is executed in which a character displayed on the third pattern display device 81 acquires various symbols that appear around it (for example, a symbol with the letter "V" indicating a guaranteed jackpot, or a symbol with a skull mark indicating a regular jackpot (a fall to "normal mode")). Also, for example, an effect is executed in which a feature indicating a guaranteed jackpot (for example, the letter "V") is simultaneously displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the effect section 331, or an effect indicating a regular jackpot (a fall to "normal mode") (for example, a skull mark) is simultaneously displayed.

Here, after the execution of the "normal jackpot effect" is decided, characters and various symbol designs (symbol designs with the letter "V", symbol designs with a skull mark, etc.) are made to appear, and the characters and various symbols are made to appear. If the configuration is such that a performance is executed in which the player acquires a symbol, it becomes necessary to execute a series of performances within 0.2 seconds, and the performance time is too short for the player to fully understand the content of the performance. There is a risk that it will disappear. On the other hand, if the performance time is secured by increasing the ratio of long variable times being selected (determined), one special symbol lottery will be performed, and then the next special symbol lottery will be performed. There is a problem in that it takes a long time to complete the game and the game is delayed. Furthermore, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entry port 640a during the fluctuation, but since the ball entering the second ball entry port 640a is not suspended, in the "continuous shot mode" The more the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a, the more the player may feel that the ball is wasted. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied.

Therefore, in the "consecutive wins mode" in this control example, the character is always displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of whether the special pattern is changing or not. In other words, the character that determines whether or not a symbol will be acquired in the change performance is displayed as part of the back image. Then, in the change performance, a change performance in which a symbol is acquired is executed using the character that was previously displayed as the back image. By configuring it in this way, the back image before the change performance starts can be made to look like it is part of the change performance, so the performance effect can be enhanced even when a change pattern with an extremely short change time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is determined.

Furthermore, in the same way as characters, images of various symbol designs (symbol designs with the letter "V", symbol designs with a skull mark, etc.) are also randomly displayed as part of the back image, and The display position is also randomly switched. That is, for example, a symbol pattern with the letter "V" comes into the frame from outside the screen of the third pattern display device 81 and approaches the character, stays near the character for a predetermined period of time, and then moves away from the character. , a pattern of the back image that moves out of the frame out of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a pattern of the symbol pattern with a skull mark that similarly approaches the character and then moves away from it. We prepared a pattern for the back image, and a pattern for the back image in which both the symbol with the letter "V" and the symbol with the skull mark approach the character and then move away from it. The camera is configured to randomly switch between these rear images. Then, when any symbol is close to the character (at a distance where the character can naturally acquire the symbol in a 0.2 second fluctuation time), the fluctuating performance of the lottery result corresponding to that symbol will begin. In this case, the symbol design displayed as the back image is configured to set a variation pattern in the manner in which the character acquires it. With this configuration, it appears as if the effect had started before the variable effect started (at the time when the corresponding symbol pattern was displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as part of the back image). It can make you think. Therefore, even when a variable effect with a short variable time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Moreover, compared to the case where the performance is executed within a short variable time, it is possible to perform the performance with a natural flow. In addition, in this control example, when a game stop state is detected, a demo screen is displayed in which various symbols are close to the character (distance at which the character can naturally acquire the symbols in a 0.2 second fluctuation time). A rear image that stands still is set. With this configuration, if a winning short variation with a variation time of 0.2 seconds is determined in the first special symbol lottery after restarting the game, the player who approaches the character while the game is stopped It is possible to perform an effect to obtain a symbol corresponding to the current winning type from among the symbols that have been kept stationary in this state. Therefore, even when a variable effect with a short variable time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed through the variable stop state, the effect can be executed in a manner that makes it less uncomfortable.

When the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "winning short fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 49", the "normal big win performance" is selected as the performance mode. This "normal big win performance" is the same as the content described above, so its explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "win short variation", the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the production counter 223rv is "50 to 99". In this case, "single chance performance for winning" is selected as the performance mode.

This "single chance eye effect for winning" is executed when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", that is, when the chance eye is displayed stopped twice at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 second interval), and the chance eye is displayed stopped 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts. This notifies the player that a total of three chance eyes have been displayed stopped: the two chance eyes displayed stopped before the "single chance eye effect for winning" was executed, and the one chance eye displayed stopped in this "single chance eye effect for winning".

If the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit middle variation", the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "0", and the value of the production counter 223rv is "0 to 29", , "Normal jackpot performance" is selected as the performance mode. In the "normal jackpot effect" in the middle winning variation where the variation time is 3 seconds, a third symbol is displayed as a production to inform the player that the result of this lottery is a jackpot within the 3 second variation time. The device 81 executes an effect in which the character acquires an aspect indicating a jackpot (for example, a V mark), and an effect in which modes indicating a jackpot are sequentially stopped and displayed on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the effect section 331.

On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "win middle variation", the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "0", and the value of the production counter 223rv is "30 to 99". In this case, "3rd consecutive chance performance" is selected as the performance mode. This "3rd consecutive chance presentation" is the presentation mode explained in FIG. 195(a), and is a presentation mode in which the chance placement is stopped and displayed three times within one variable time.

When the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "win middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 49", the "normal jackpot performance" is selected as the performance mode. This "normal jackpot performance" is the same performance mode as the "normal jackpot performance" during the win middle fluctuation described above, so its explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "win middle variation", the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", and the value of the production counter 223rv is "50 to 99". In this case, "second consecutive chance performance for winning" is selected as the performance mode. This "second consecutive chance effect for winning" is a performance that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", that is, when the chance image is stopped and displayed once, and the variation starts. This is a production mode in which the chance number is stopped and displayed twice at 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the game is played. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the chance number has been stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval, together with the performance mode executed in the previous variation.

As a result, it is possible to display three chance symbols at a predetermined interval across multiple variations, so that it is possible to execute an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot across multiple variations, without using a "pre-reading effect" based on stored winning information.

If the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit middle variation", the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the production counter 223rv is "0 to 9", , "Normal jackpot performance" is selected as the performance mode. This "normal jackpot performance" is the same performance form as the "normal jackpot performance" at the time of the above-mentioned hit middle fluctuation, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "win middle fluctuation," the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2," and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "10 to 99," then the "single chance eye performance for win" is selected as the performance mode.

This "single chance effect for winning" is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance effect counter 223qv is "2", that is, when the chance image is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval, and is This is a performance mode in which the chance number is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after it starts. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance number has been stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 second intervals), along with the performance mode executed in the previous variation. .

In addition, when the "single-shot chance production for winning" is executed as a production mode corresponding to the middle hit variation, the chance production (the third chance at a predetermined interval from the previous variation) will be performed 0.2 seconds after the variation starts. During the period (2.8 seconds) from when the chance number) is stopped and until the fluctuation ends (2.8 seconds), an image notifying the player that he has won the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted by the audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, and an effect is executed to light up the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227.

In this way, in this third control example, in order to realize the "chance consecutive effect" that notifies you that the result of the lottery is a jackpot when multiple chances are stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval, The performance mode to be executed is selected by the consecutive game jackpot table 222a3. Furthermore, the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the current change can be selected based on the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv, so the chance eye can be stopped multiple times at predetermined intervals across multiple changes. It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the time of one variation is short, it is possible to use a plurality of variations to perform a performance that suggests the lottery result in a performance mode that is easily recognizable to the player.

Returning to FIG. 197(b), the explanation will be continued. The table 222a4 for losing in consecutive games is a table in which detailed production modes are defined for the variable pattern commands output from the main controller 110 during the “consecutive games mode”. This table 222a4 for losing consecutive games will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 199.

Figure 199 shows the contents of the table 222a4 for losses during consecutive wins. In the table 222a4 for losses during consecutive wins, three types of presentation modes, "normal presentation", "single chance eye presentation for losses" and "two consecutive chance eye presentation for losses", are specified in correspondence with the types of presentation indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, namely "miss short variation (0.2 seconds)" and "miss middle variation (3 seconds)", the value of the chance eye counter 223qv, and the value of the presentation counter 223rv.

More specifically, if the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is a "miss short fluctuation," the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0, 1," and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 79," then the "normal performance" is selected as the performance mode.

In the "normal performance", a performance is performed to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is a loss within a variable time of 0.2 seconds. Specifically, a presentation (failure presentation) in which the character cannot obtain a jackpot (for example, a V mark) on the third symbol display device 81, or a presentation showing a loss on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the presentation section 331. An effect is executed in which are displayed simultaneously.

Incidentally, because this "normal effect" is a short fluctuation of 0.2 seconds, it is possible to use an effect in which the next fluctuation is executed without emphasizing to the player that the lottery result is a loss. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player's motivation to play decreases when "missing short fluctuations" are executed consecutively.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "missing short variation", the chance number counter 223qv is "0, 1", and the production counter 223rv When the value of is "80 to 99", "single chance performance for missing" is selected as the performance mode.

This "single chance performance for missing" is a performance that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "0, 1", that is, when the chance number stopped once or less due to the previous fluctuation. This is an effect in which the chance number is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts. Specifically, when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", when the "single chance production for missing" is executed, the chance will be produced twice due to the previous variation and the current variation. It will be stopped and displayed, and the value of the chance number counter 223qv will be added to "2". Therefore, for example, if "win short variation" is selected as the next variation and "win single chance production" is executed as the production mode, the chance display will be stopped and displayed three times across three variations. After doing so, it becomes possible to execute a jackpot.

Next, if the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is a "miss short fluctuation," the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2," and the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 99," then a "normal performance" is selected as the performance mode. This "normal performance" is the same performance mode as the "normal performance" during the miss short fluctuation described above, so its explanation is omitted.

As described above, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "missing short variation" and the chance number counter 223qv is "2", that is, the chance number is twice at a predetermined interval. When selecting the performance mode of "missing short fluctuation" in a state where the chance is displayed in a stopped state, it is stipulated that the performance mode in which the chance number is stopped and displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance from being displayed three times at a predetermined interval across a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the performance mode in which the chance number is stopped and displayed is executed multiple times in a row, and even though the lottery result is a loss, the chance number is displayed multiple times at a predetermined interval across multiple fluctuations. This makes it possible to eliminate the situation where the screen is stopped and displayed twice. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly reliable performance mode can be provided to the players.

On the other hand, if the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "missing short variation" and the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "2", the above-mentioned A "normal performance" which is the same performance mode as the "normal performance" is selected.

Next, if the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "missing middle variation" and the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "0", the value of the production counter 223rv is "0~ 59", "normal effect" is selected, "60-89", "single chance effect for missing", and "90-99", "two consecutive chance effects for missing” are selected. Ru.

This "single chance effect for a miss" is a mode of effect that stops the chance move 0.2 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the "two consecutive chance effects for a miss" is shown in FIG. 195(b). As shown, the effect is such that the chance rolls are stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. As a result, the performance mode corresponding to the miss-middle fluctuation can be made the same as the performance mode corresponding to the hit-middle fluctuation up to the middle, making it possible to keep the player interested in the performance mode until the end of the fluctuation. This has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the pachinko machine 10.

If the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "missing middle variation" and the value of the chance number counter 223qv is "1", the value of the production counter 223rv is "0 to 59". If the number is 60 to 99, the "normal effect" is selected, and if the number is 60 to 99, the "single chance effect for losing" is selected.

Finally, if the type of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is a "miss middle fluctuation" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", then a "normal effect" is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv.

Returning to FIG. 197(a), the explanation will be continued. The additional area selection table 222g is referred to when determining the winning pockets to be increased in the "increase effect" that increases the winning pockets of the rotating member executed during the "preparation mode" (S6001 in FIG. 203). As mentioned above, this "increase effect" is an effect that adds to (adds) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect, and by adding the winning pockets (lucky numbers), the roulette chance increases. It is possible to make it seem as if it will become easier to win (easier to shift to "succession mode") through the production. Therefore, this is a performance that can increase the player's expectations for the roulette chance performance.

This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that, when determining the winning pocket (lucky number) to be added to in the "increase effect", an area where it is easy to be added to (easy selection area) and an area where it is difficult to be added to (difficult selection area) are set, and a configuration is added whereby the winning pocket (lucky number) to be added to by the "addition effect" is intentionally biased (not made equal).

In this way, by providing a configuration that intentionally biases (does not equalize) the winning pockets (lucky numbers) that are added (added) by the "increase effect", the 30 pockets ( For the pockets P1 to P30), areas (locations) where many winning pockets are set and areas (locations) where fewer winning pockets are set can be intentionally provided. Therefore, in the roulette chance effect, the area where it is easy to win (area with many winning pocket settings) and the area where it is difficult to win (area with few winning pocket settings) will pass through, so the player has to decide when ball B will fall. will be interesting to watch, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, details of the additional area selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 199(b). FIG. 199(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the additional area selection table 222g. In this additional area selection table 222g, an "easy selection area" and a "difficult selection area" are defined in association with the possible values of the performance counter 223rv.

More specifically, the range in which the value of the performance counter 223rv is "0 to 74" is associated with an "easy selection area." As described above in the first control example, the performance counter 223rv is composed of a loop counter that can take 100 values from "0 to 99". Among these, there are 75 values from 0 to 74 for which the "easy selection area" is selected, so the probability (proportion) that the "easy selection area" is selected by the additional area selection table 222g is 75% (75/100 ).

A "difficult selection area" is associated with a range in which the value of the performance counter 223rv is "75 to 99". Among the 100 values that the production counter 223rv can take, there are 25 values from 75 to 99 that select the "difficult selection area", so there is a probability that the "difficult selection area" will be selected by the additional area selection table 222g. is 25% (25/100).

In other words, for example, if four winning pockets (lucky numbers) are added (increased) by the "add-on effect," an average of three winning pockets (lucky numbers) will be selected from the "easy selection area," and an average of one winning pocket (lucky number) will be selected from the "difficult selection area." This makes it possible to bias winning pockets toward areas where easy selection areas are set. The configuration for dividing the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 into "easy selection areas" and "difficult selection areas" will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Fig. 200 and Fig. 201. Fig. 200 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Fig. 200, this third control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the contents of the winning position storage area 223k have been partially changed, and a chance eye count counter 223qv and a performance counter 223rv have been added. As the other contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned control examples, the same elements are given the same symbols, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, we will explain the winning position storage area 223k, the contents of which have been partially changed in this third control example. As described above, the winning position storage area 223k is a memory area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a winning pocket or a losing pocket) in the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance". In this winning position storage area 223k, the winning position is set based on the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the winning pocket allocation process 3 (S3102 in Figure 202). Next, we will refer to Figure 201 and explain in detail the differences from the first control example described above.

FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning position storage area 223k. In this third control example, the validity type corresponding to each pocket P1 to P30 is stored, and each pocket P1 to P30 is configured to be divided into a "first area" and a "second area". . As shown in FIG. 201, the "first region" is a region that includes pockets P1 to P15, and the "second region" is a region that includes pockets P16 to P30. By reading the memory information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured in this way, in addition to the types set in each pocket P1 to P30, the types set in each area (first area, second area) can be determined. It becomes possible to grasp the number of winning pockets. In this control example, at the start of the increase performance (in a state in which only the winning pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are reflected as winning positions), the number of winning pockets included in the first area and the second area is calculated. It is configured to determine the area and set the area with a large number of winning pockets as the above-mentioned easy selection area, and the area with a small number of winning pockets as the difficult selection area. As a result, it is possible to perform an increase performance in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, so that the arrangement of winning pockets can be biased toward the easy selection area.

Returning to FIG. 200, the explanation will be continued. The chance eye count counter 223qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed across multiple variations in the above-mentioned "chance eye continuous performance". The value of this chance eye count counter 223qv is referenced in the variation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when the "chance eye performance" is determined, a value corresponding to the determined "chance eye performance", that is, a value corresponding to the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the determined variation pattern, is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). Then, when the "chance eye performance" is not determined, that is, when the normal performance is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Although not shown, the value of the counter is also initialized when a jackpot is executed in a state where the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv has not been initialized.

In this control example, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is initialized when the chance effect is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance number counter 223qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last chance number was stopped and displayed. As a result, when the chances are interrupted, it is possible to set a period of at least 5 seconds in which the chances do not appear, so it is possible to more clearly recognize whether or not the chances are consecutive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misperceiving the number of successive chances, so it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand performance.

The effect counter 223rv is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (such as "continuous chance eye effects" and "additional effects") and for various lotteries, and although not shown in the figure, is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). By using this effect counter 223rv, randomness can be ensured when selecting various effects.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. First, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing winning pocket distribution processing 3 (S3011) executed in place of the winning pocket distribution processing (see FIG. 160) in the first control example in the state command processing (see FIG. 159). In the winning pocket distribution process 3, the processes in S3101 and S3102 are the same as the processes in S3101 and S3102 in the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above. Ru.

In addition, in the winning pocket allocation process 3 (see FIG. 202) in this control example, the read pocket is set as the winning position in the winning position storage area 223k by the process of S3102 (S3102), and then the number of winning pockets included in the first and second areas of the winning position storage area 223k is calculated (S3121). For example, if the winning pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are pockets P9, P10, P11, P20, and P28, it is calculated that the first area (pockets P1 to P15) contains three pockets, and the second area (pockets P16 to P30) contains two pockets.

When the process of S3121 is completed, it is next determined whether the number of winning pockets included in the first area is greater than that of the second area based on the number of winning pockets in each area calculated in the process of S3121 (S3122 ). In the process of S3122, if it is determined that the first area has more winning pockets (S3122: Yes), the first area is set as an easy selection area and the second area is set as a difficult selection area. (S3123), the process moves to S3103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3122 that the number of winning pockets is greater in the second area than in the first area (S3122: No), the second area is set as an easy-to-select area and the first area is set as a difficult-to-select area (S3124), and the processing proceeds to S3103.

That is, in the processing of S3122 to S3124, a process is executed to set an area with a large number of winning pockets as an "easy selection area" where it is easy to add (add) winning pockets in the "addition effect". As a result, it is possible to further bias the areas where hit pockets are set with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, if the number of winning pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, the "easy selection area" and the "difficult selection area" may be set randomly, or a predetermined area may be set. may be set to be an "easy selection area". In addition, the number of types corresponding to the winning positions stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number, and the number of winning pockets set in the first area and the second area is set to be different. may be configured.

Further, in this third control example, a configuration is used in which an "easy selection area" and a "difficult selection area" are set based on the number of winning pockets set in a first area and a second area defined in advance. However, when a winning pocket is added (added) by "additional effect", it is sufficient if the area where the winning pocket is located is biased, for example, the area where the winning pocket is set consecutively is centered. The configuration may be such that the "first area" is set in the first area.

This allows the "first area" and "second area" to be set based on the winning pocket position, making it possible to bias the areas in which the winning pockets are set among the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 202, the explanation will be continued. In each process of S3103 and S3104, the same process as each process of S3103 and S3104 in the first control example described above is executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3104 that the value of the add-on counter is greater than 0 (S3104: Yes), an add-on position determination process is executed to determine the winning pocket to be increased (added) (S3125). Details of this add-on position determination process (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. 203. When the process of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the add-on counter 233av (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3104. Then, the processes of S3104, S3110, and S3125 are repeatedly executed until the value of the add-on counter 223av becomes 0.

Next, details of the above-mentioned additional position determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional position determination process (S3125). This additional position determination process (S3125) is a process for determining the position of the winning pocket to be added (added) in the "increase effect".

In the additional position determination process (S3125), first, the additional area selection table 222g is read (S6001), and the additional area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the acquired performance counter 223rv is "0 to 74", the area set as the "easy selection area" is determined as the additional area, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223rv is "75". 99'', the area set as the ``difficult selection area'' is determined as the additional area (see FIG. 199(b)). As described above, the easy selection area and the difficult selection area are set according to the arrangement of the winning pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the time of starting the increase effect.

After completing the process of S6002, next, the winning position storage area 223k is read and it is determined whether there is a place where the number of consecutive wins is 5 or more, that is, a place where there are 5 or more consecutive winning pockets (S6003 ). In the process of S6003, if it is determined that there is no location where the number of consecutive wins is 5 or more (S6003: No), one additional location is selected from among the pockets in which the type of miss is set (S6004). .

On the other hand, in the process of S6002, if it is determined that there are 5 or more consecutive winning locations (S6003: Yes), there are 5 consecutive winning locations among the pockets for which the type of loss is set. One additional position is selected from the dislodged pockets other than the one before and after the position (S6005).

Here, the processing executed in S6005 will be explained. In this third control example, when performing a roulette chance effect, winning pockets are set consecutively in order to cause ball B to fall into a designated pocket (winning pocket or missing pocket) without giving the player a sense of discomfort. The upper limit of the number of messages is set to 5. If there are too many successive winning pockets, when the roulette chance effect results in a loss, it will take time for the winning pockets to pass through the successive positions, and the swinging motion of ball B will stop while the winning pockets are passing. , or there is a risk that the swinging motion will have an extremely small amplitude. In this case, if the ball B remains on the upper part of the holding piece 677 without falling, it will look extremely unnatural, and there is a possibility that the player will feel distrustful. Therefore, during the execution of the "increase effect", it is necessary to control so that six or more winning pockets do not occur in a row due to the addition. Therefore, we grasp the situation in which pockets that have already been set as winning pockets are consecutive, and set the position of the winning pocket to be added (added) by "increase effect". Thereby, the roulette chance effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

After completing the processing of S6004 or S6005, the winning position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the winning position (S6006), and this processing ends. Note that this added position determination processing is also executed in the special chart 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) shown in FIG. 204.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, we will explain the special chart 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) that is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In the processing of S3201 to S3208 of this special chart 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), the same processing as the processing of S3201 to S3208 of the special chart 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S3208 that the item should be added (S3208: Yes), the process of determining the add-on position is executed (S3221), and then the process is terminated. Note that the process of determining the add-on position executed in S3221 is the same as the process of determining the add-on position executed in S3125 described above, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As mentioned above, in this third control example, since the additional position determination process is executed also in the special drawing 2 winning command process 3 (S2121), the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P1) provided on the rotating member 640 are P30), it is possible to further bias the areas where the winning pockets are set, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special drawing 2 winning command processing 3 (see FIG. 204), when it is determined in the process of S3208 that an additional prize is to be added, the additional position determination process is executed. , the "easy selection area" and the "difficult selection area" may be set again. As a result, it is possible to further bias the areas where hit pockets are set with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. This variable display setting process 3 differs from the variable display setting process of the first control example described above in that a variable pattern selection process (S3321) is added. In this variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process for selecting a variation pattern for executing the above-mentioned "chance consecutive effect" is executed.

First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing variable display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In this variable display setting process 3, each of steps S3301 to S3303 executes the same process as each of steps S3301 to S3303 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S3303 is completed, next, a variation pattern selection process (S3E21) is executed to select the presentation mode corresponding to the current variation pattern command. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. 206. When this variation pattern selection process (S3321) is completed, next, the processes of S3E05 to S3E10 are executed, and this process ends. Each of the processes of S3305 to S3310 is the same as each of the processes of S3305 to S3310 in the first control example described above.

Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process. As shown in FIG. 206, when the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, it is first determined whether the time-saving status flag 223o is set to ON, i.e., whether the "consecutive win mode" is in effect (S6101).

When it is determined that the time-saving status flag 223o is set to on (S6101: Yes), the table for consecutive wins corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "win middle fluctuation", the table for consecutive wins during big wins 222a3 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

Next, the value of the effect counter 223rv and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the read values of each counter (effect counter 223rv and chance eye count counter 223qv) is determined (S6107). Specifically, for example, when the table 223a3 for consecutive big wins is read, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223rv is "60" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", the "2 consecutive chance eye effect for winning" is selected (see FIG. 198).

After the above-mentioned processing of S6107 is completed, it is then determined whether the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) as the current performance mode (S6108). If it is determined in the processing of S6108 that the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance eye count counter 223qv (S6109), and the processing proceeds to S6111.

On the other hand, in the process of S6108, if it is determined that the chance effect has not been determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance effect counter 223qv is initialized (S6110), and the process moves to S6111.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, if the time saving state flag 223o is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6101: No), the normal table corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern. Read from the table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 indicates a variation type (variation pattern) corresponding to "missing middle variation", the variation pattern command for normal middle missing from the variation pattern selection table 222a is selected. Read table 222a2.

After completing the process of S6102, the value of the performance counter 223rv is then read out (S6103), the performance mode corresponding to the read value of the performance counter 223rv is determined (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6111.

After the processing of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is executed, the processing of S6111 is executed to set a display variation pattern command to notify the performance mode determined in each processing (S6111), and then this processing ends.

As explained above, in the present third control example, when an add-on is determined and a winning pocket is determined in an increased performance, a section with a high proportion of winning pockets is intentionally provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hit pockets were determined completely randomly, there is a possibility that the hit pockets would be evenly distributed throughout the rotating member 640. In this case, no matter when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation that the ball B will fall into the winning pocket. In other words, even if the ball B is made to perform a rocking motion and the player is asked to predict the section (pocket) in which the ball B will fall based on the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion, there will be no difference in the level of expectation. There is a possibility. Therefore, there is a problem that the presentation effect of the rocking presentation becomes low.

In contrast, in this control example, sections with a high proportion of hit pockets are intentionally provided. It is possible to make the player pay more careful attention to the correspondence relationship with the momentum (period) of the game. That is, the position (section) where ball B falls is expected to be a section with a high proportion of hit pockets, and the position (section) where ball B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game while the rocking effect is being executed.

In addition, in this third control example, in the "continuous winning mode" in which the special symbol 2 lottery is mainly executed, a chance consecutive performance in which the chance is stopped and displayed one or more times is configured to be possible. . Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines can perform the same type of performance across multiple variable displays (for example, variable displays for the number of balls held at the start of the performance) (so-called , ``Continuous Preview Performance''). In such conventional gaming machines, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player over a plurality of variations, depending on the number of times the same type of performance is executed, the content of the performance, etc. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of times the performance is performed, the duration of the performance, etc. are affected by the number of reserved balls, so it is difficult to apply the continuous notice performance to gaming machines that do not have the function of suspending lottery results in the first place. I couldn't do it. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to perform a mode in which a pseudo variable display is executed multiple times in one variable display, and There is also a system that executes the above-mentioned continuous preview effect in one variable display by executing the same system of effects in the variable display. With this conventional gaming machine, continuous preview effects can be executed regardless of the number of balls on hold, but since the effects must be executed within the variable time range set for the variable display, a sufficient effect period must be ensured. The problem was that it was sometimes difficult to do so.

In contrast, in this control example, a specific effect (an effect in which a chance eye is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. When a variable display is executed, whether or not to set a specific effect for that variable display, and the number of times the specific effect is executed when it is executed, are determined based on the history of the specific effect executed before that variable display. Based on the result of the lottery for the special symbol that triggers the variable display, the maximum number of consecutive times of the specific effect is set to be different in the case of a miss and in the case of a jackpot. With this configuration, in a variable display based on the lottery for special symbol 2 in which the lottery result for the special symbol is not withheld, the specific effect is executed consecutively across multiple variable displays, giving the player a sense of anticipation for a jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, if it is decided to display a chance eye in a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the chance eye is displayed stationary for 0.5 seconds after the pattern fluctuation of 0.2 seconds is executed. Also, if a chance eye continuous performance is decided in a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, a pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and a chance eye temporary stop period (0.5 seconds) are set once or multiple times during the 3-second fluctuation period. In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period and the fixed time during the middle fluctuation are configured to be the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds) of the short fluctuation, respectively, so that the chance eye stop display during the middle fluctuation can be displayed without feeling strange to the player.

In addition to the pseudo-change period and temporary stop period, a pseudo-stop period is provided as a pseudo-effect that simulates a period during which no new pattern changes will begin, so that the changes that would occur if a configuration that does not store the selection of special patterns (a configuration that does not have a reserved memory function and in which the change display is executed discretely (non-continuously) even if balls are shot continuously) is used can be simulated without any sense of incongruity.

In this third control example, in a state in which a short variation for a miss with a "chance effect effect" set is executed twice in a row, if the next short variation is determined to be a winning short variation, a "chance effect effect" is executed. '' can be set, and if the next fluctuation is a short fluctuation, it is configured to restrict the "chance effect" from being set. In other words, only when the special symbol is a jackpot, the chances are allowed to be displayed three times in a row, and when the special symbol is a miss, the number of consecutive chances is limited to two. It is configured to do this.

With this configuration, the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of successive chances, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game. In addition, regardless of whether a continuous chance effect is set in the middle variation or a short variation in which the stop display of the chance eye is set is repeated multiple times, the chance eye will be displayed as a stop display multiple times (three times) at a predetermined interval. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance to the player.

In addition, in this third control example, as described above, the control to restrict the stopped display of the chance number is executed for the continuous fluctuating display, but other configurations may be used, for example. , After the chance number is displayed twice in a row, the production mode in which the chance number is stopped and displayed as a production mode corresponding to the variation in which the chance number is won is not selected until a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. It is better to do this. Thereby, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance to the player.

In this third control example, the interval at which the chance rolls stop is set to be a predetermined interval as the "chance roll continuous effect", but other configurations may be used. Within the variation time (3 seconds) during which the middle variation is executed, there are multiple timings at which the chance item is stopped, and at any of these timings, the chance item is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (3 times). It may be configured as follows. This makes it difficult to grasp at what timing the chance number will be displayed while the special symbols are changing, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, as a display mode of the chance eye when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, multiple patterns of the color of the third symbol to be stopped and the color of the background are prepared in advance, and the chance eye is displayed in a specific display manner. If the item is stopped and displayed three times, it may be given the same value as when the normal chance is displayed and stopped three times. As a result, even if it becomes difficult for the chance item to be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times, in other words, even if the chance item is not stopped and displayed even once for a certain period of time after the fluctuation starts, it is possible to win the jackpot. Since it becomes possible to perform an effect that informs the player of the situation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this third control example, a chance eye displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as an object that appears multiple times (3 times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). For example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. Thereby, it becomes possible to suggest the lottery result using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting performance.

Furthermore, when using a configuration in which a movable accessory attached to the pachinko machine 10, such as the upper elevating unit 300, is moved, in addition to a configuration in which the same action (swinging motion) is performed multiple times, for example, the movable accessory can be moved in stages. It may be configured such that the movable accessory is moved a predetermined number of times until it reaches the final stage. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that a jackpot is approaching, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Even if a configuration is used in which a predetermined display mode (such as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed multiple times on the third pattern display device 81 as in this third control example, a count display showing the number of times the predetermined display mode has been stopped and a target display showing the number of times the predetermined display mode needs to be stopped and displayed to notify that a jackpot has been won may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot is approaching each time the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this third control example, a process is performed to count the number of chance eyes for consecutively executed variations, so that when a variation in which a presentation mode in which a chance eye is displayed is selected occurs multiple times in succession, the chance eye can be displayed a predetermined number of times across multiple variations, and the presentation mode is controlled so that the chance eye is not displayed a predetermined number of times by the presentation mode corresponding to the variation that results in a loss, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this way, instead of changing the configuration to perform a chance stop display performance for fluctuations that are executed continuously, we can change the configuration to perform a chance stop display performance for fluctuations that are executed within a predetermined period. It's okay. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a short variation time can be selected as in the third control example, even if non-continuous variations are used, a predetermined number of chances can be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals. It is. When using such a configuration, a performance mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed multiple times within a predetermined period is determined in advance, and the chance eye is displayed in a fluctuating manner corresponding to the timing at which the chance eye is stopped and displayed in that performance mode. It may be configured to stop.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to optimally execute consecutive chance eye effects using non-consecutive variations. When using this configuration, it is advisable to provide a small tolerance for the timing at which the chance eye is displayed. This will increase the variations that allow consecutive chance eye effects to be executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in this third control example, when the "missing middle fluctuation" is determined in the "chance successive effect", the first or second chance (0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts) is determined. It is configured so that it can be displayed at the stop display timing (after 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts) or the second time (1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts). The chance number may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing (3 seconds after the start). With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of chances at predetermined intervals across the middle variation and the short variation.

In addition, in this third control example, when executing the "additional effect", a configuration is provided that intentionally biases (does not equalize) the winning pockets (lucky numbers) that are added (added) by the "additional effect". For the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, areas (locations) where many hit pockets are set and areas (locations) where there are few hit pockets are intentionally provided. Can be done. Therefore, in the roulette chance effect, the area where it is easy to win (area with many winning pocket settings) and the area where it is difficult to win (area with few winning pocket settings) will pass through, so the player has to decide when ball B will fall. will be interesting to watch, and the production effect can be enhanced.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 214. In the first control example described above, the control and presentation aspects in the "normal mode" and "preparation mode" were mainly explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertainment performance in the "continuous game mode", there is a method of improving the player's entertainment through the performance using an accessory (upper elevating unit 300). explain.

In addition, in the first control example described above, when it is decided to add a winning pocket in the increase performance executed in the first half (20 seconds from the start of the performance) of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance", the position of the winning pocket to be added is determined. was configured to be randomly determined within a range where there are no more than 6 winning pockets in a row. When the ball B is to be dropped in the roulette chance performance, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be determined and the ball B can be dropped after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B has become sufficiently small. The ball B was held on the holding piece 677 until a possible pocket was located in front of the falling position (0.2 seconds before reaching the falling position).

In contrast, in the fourth control example, the timing of the throwing motion of the ball throwing device 650 in the roulette chance performance is calculated backwards in advance during the execution of the increase performance, and the position of the winning pocket is determined. Here, the calculation method is described in detail. Since the timing of the throwing motion of the ball throwing device 650 is 70 seconds after the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance", the ball B can fall after the swinging motion is about 75 to 82 seconds after the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance". Therefore, when the winning pocket is added in a state where the transition to the "consecutive win mode" is confirmed, the pocket (or a pocket close to the falling position) that will be placed at the falling position when it is about 75 to 82 seconds after the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance" is predicted from the current elapsed time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and is determined as the adding position. On the other hand, when the transition to the "consecutive win mode" is not confirmed, the adding position is determined by avoiding the pocket predicted to be placed at the falling position about 75 to 82 seconds after the start of the "consecutive win mode". As mentioned above, the position of the rotating member 640 at the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion effect" is configured differently depending on the pocket into which ball B was dropped in the previous "consecutive win mode suggestion effect", but by configuring the position of the rotating member 640 and the elapsed time to be comprehensible, it is easy to predict the pocket into which ball B will be dropped in approximately 75 to 82 seconds. This makes it possible to accurately drop ball B into a winning or losing pocket depending on whether or not to transition to "consecutive win mode".

In the first control example described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket located at the drop position) was specified by combining the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. This allows only the lighting area located on the back side of the pocket set as the winning pocket to be accurately set to a lighting state according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 when controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, so that the player can easily recognize the winning pocket by appearance. Also, when dropping the ball B, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be determined, and the ball can be dropped into the appropriate type of pocket according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (i.e., whether or not to move to the "consecutive mode").

In addition, in this fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684 are obtained, the detection results are retained until the next pocket (the pocket that will be placed in the drop position after the pocket that is currently placed in the drop position) is placed in the drop position. The retained detection result is then compared with the new detection result obtained when the next pocket is placed in the drop position to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. In other words, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are the detection results of consecutive (adjacent) pockets. This makes it possible to detect damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c).

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. , a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 207, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 207(a) to FIG. 207(d), the ROM 222 in this control example has a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation pattern different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118(a)). The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b have been partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 207(a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 207(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example. Like the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in this fourth control example is a data table used to determine more detailed fluctuation content from the rough fluctuation content (fluctuation time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, based on the fluctuation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 207(a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in this control example is composed of a normal big win table 222a1, a normal miss table 222a2, and a consecutive win fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5.

In the normal medium jackpot table 222a1, detailed performance modes corresponding to the variation types of variation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (not shown). figure). Here, the performance mode specified in the normal medium jackpot table 222a1 will be explained. First, in the normal medium jackpot table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns for the symbols that are variably displayed on each display section 331a to 331d of the production section 331.

The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the symbols that are variably displayed on each display section 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10 second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the last symbol is displayed on each display section 331a to 331d. It takes a long time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, "2", "7", "13") is stopped and displayed on the display section other than the display section 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display section 331d. This is the stop pattern to be set.

In addition, like the normal win table 222a1, the normal miss table 222a2 also has detailed presentation patterns that correspond to the fluctuation types with fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (not shown).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds are selected as the variation patterns selected when a medium jackpot is won. The ratio is specified to be approximately 1:1 (see Figure 111(a)), and the fluctuation patterns that are usually selected in the case of a mid-range result are a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. It is specified that the ratio of selection of the variation pattern is approximately 3:1 (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, when the 10 second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207(b), details of the consecutive game fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5 will be described. This fluctuating pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive games is a fluctuating pattern selection table that is referred to during the "consecutive games mode" during time saving.

As shown in FIG. 207(b), when the variation type is a winning short variation (0.2 seconds), a normal jackpot effect is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is a winning middle variation (3 seconds), an upper swing effect is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is a short variation (0.2 seconds), a normal off performance is set for the value of the performance counter 223sw "0 to 79", and the value of the performance counter 223sw is "80 to 99". In contrast, an upper swinging effect is set, which is a presentation mode that involves the operation of the upper moving unit 300. If the variation type is off middle variation (3 seconds), the normal off effect is set for the value "0 to 89" of the effect counter 223sw, and the upper part is set for the value "90 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. A rocking effect is set.

Here, the upper rocking performance is a performance in which the upper rocking action in which the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 moves up and down is performed a predetermined number of times. Specifically, when a variation is being performed in which the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, an upper rocking performance in which the upper rocking action is performed three times (a total of three times, 0 seconds, 1.4 seconds, and 2.8 seconds after the start of the variation) is performed. In the upper rocking performance that is performed when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss, an upper rocking performance in which the upper rocking action is performed once or twice is performed is performed. In this way, the number of upper rocking actions when the upper rocking performance is set is different depending on whether or not it is a jackpot, so that the number of upper rocking actions can be focused on. In other words, the upper lifting unit 300 can be observed in the hope that the upper rocking action will be performed three times in a row. This can increase the player's interest in playing in the "consecutive win mode".

Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207(c). As shown in FIG. 207(c), the operation scenario table 222b in this fourth control example differs from the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the first control example described above (see FIG. 119(a)) in that an upper swing performance table 222b8 has been added. This upper swing performance table 222b8 is a table that is referenced when an upper swing performance to be executed in this control example is set.

Now, referring to FIG. 207(d), the contents of the upper swing performance table 222b8 will be described. Like other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing performance table 222b8 defines the setting values (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction) to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g, which indicates the progress of the settings based on the operation scenario.

As shown in FIG. 207(d), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g indicates the operation (outward movement) for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position. are associated. Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operating speed, 127 is specified as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operating direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the upper elevating unit 300 in the upper swing effect comes. Note that 127 steps means the number of steps up to the lowered position.

Here, an operating speed of 635 pps means that the motor driver outputs a signal instructing the upper lifting motor 341 to drive one step at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second, so the time required for the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 to move 127 steps (to move from the origin position to the lowered position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

The value "02H" of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action (return action) for raising the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the action speed, 127 is specified as the number of action steps, and the negative direction is specified as the action direction. Therefore, the lifting body 330 of the upper/lower lifting body unit 300 moves from the lowered position to the raised position in 0.2 seconds. In addition, END data is associated with the value "03H" of the action pointer 223g. By reading out this END data, it is determined that the execution of all actions specified in the action scenario has been completed.

In this manner, the upper swinging effect is such that the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 descends from the raised position to the lowered position over 0.2 seconds, and then from the lowered position to the raised position over 0.2 seconds. This is a performance in which a rocking motion that lasts a total of 0.4 seconds and rises is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in the case of a jackpot, once or twice in the case of a miss). As described above, this upper swing effect is executed as a effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot during the consecutive winnings mode.

This allows the player to be interested in whether or not the rocking action will be performed at a predetermined timing (0 seconds (immediately after the change starts), 1.4 seconds, 2.8 seconds) after the change of the special pattern is executed (started).

Next, referring to FIG. 208, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118(b)) in that an upper swing performance timer 223pw, an upper swing performance flag 223qw, a sensor information storage area 223rw, and a performance counter 223sw have been added, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same parts as in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The upper rocking performance timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (timing) the performance time of the upper rocking performance (the time elapsed from the start of the performance). This upper rocking performance timer is initialized to 0 (see S6135 in FIG. 213) when an upper rocking performance is determined in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213), and is incremented by 1 each time the upper rocking performance process (see FIG. 214) is executed while the upper rocking performance is being executed (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

The upper swing effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper swing effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the rocking effect is determined (see S6133 in Figure 213), and when it is determined that the upper rocking effect has ended in the upper rocking effect processing (see Figure 214) (the jackpot has started). (S6201: Yes), the third swing operation timing (S6207: Yes)) is set to OFF (S6202, S6208).

The sensor information storage area 223rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684, and is configured to be able to store (update) the output values of the detection sensors A to F at least once. This sensor information storage area 223rw stores (updates) the output values of the detection sensors A to F in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

Although details will be described later, in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), by comparing the previously stored output values of the detection sensors A to F with the current output values of the detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. 210). ), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the detected values of the detection sensors A to F. Specifically, it is determined whether the previous output values of detection sensors A to F match the current output values of detection sensors A to F, and if they match, there is no abnormality, and if they do not match, it is determined that there is no abnormality. is determined to be abnormal.

Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are calculated from a total of six pockets associated with a total of five pockets: the pocket where the ball B falls, two pockets to the right of that pocket, and two pockets to the left of that pocket. It changes depending on the presence or absence of the detected part 641c. As shown in the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the falling position changes by one pocket, the detected part 641c that was detected by the detection sensors A to E changes from the detection sensor B to It is moved to the position detected by F. The detected portion 641c that has been detected by the detection sensor F is moved out of the detection range of the detection sensors A to F, and is moved to a position where a new detected portion 641c is detected by the detection sensor A. Therefore, if the output values of detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of detection sensors B to F after the drop position has changed by one pocket, there is a problem such as damage to the detected part 641c. can be determined to have occurred.

The effect counter 223sw is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (such as "upper swing effect") and for various lotteries, and although not shown in the figure, it is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 99 in main processing 4 (see Figure 209) of the voice lamp control device 113.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 209 to 214. First, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 209. The main process 4 in this fourth control example is different from the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 145) in that an upper swing effect process (S1651) is added, and the command determination process (S1614) is The rotation setting process 4 (S2609, see FIG. 210) is executed instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), and the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the command determination process (S1614) is executed. The difference is that special drawing 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117, see FIG. 211) is executed, and variable display setting processing 4 (S1652, see FIG. 212) is executed instead of variable display setting processing (S1615). However, other parts are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

In main process 4 in this fourth control example, similar to the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 145), after executing the processes of S1601 to S1610, an upper swing effect process is executed (S1651) to set an effect using the upper lifting unit 300 in the "consecutive wins mode", and the process proceeds to S1611. Details of the upper swing effect process (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

In addition, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) in this control example, after executing the processes of S1611 to S1614, the variable display setting process 4 is performed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. It is executed (S1652), and the process moves to S1616. Note that details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Next, details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 210. The rotation setting process 4 (S2609) in this fourth control example is a process executed in place of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this is a process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and rear LED 625).

The rotation setting process 4 in this fourth control example (see FIG. 157) differs from the rotation setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 157) in that S2831 is executed instead of S2801, and that S2832 to S2836 are added, but otherwise it is the same. Hereinafter, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When this rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) forming the rotational position detection sensor 684 have all changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each detected part 641c provided in the pocket has been displaced from outside the detection range of detection sensors A to F to within the detection range, and the outputs of detection sensors A to F all remain in the L state. If it is determined that (each detected part 641c remains placed outside the detection range of detection sensors A to F) (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is placed at the position where ball B fell. (The rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 is less than or equal to the unit rotation amount (rotation amount to move one pocket) since the last time the output values of detection centers A to F were stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. ), so this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2831, if it is determined that the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) that make up the rotational position detection sensor 684 have all changed from a state of L to a state in which the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S2831: Yes), this means that a new (next) pocket has been placed at the drop position of ball B (the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 has become a unit amount of rotation since the output values of the detection centers A to F were last stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw), so in this case, the process proceeds to S2802. Note that even if the output values of the detection sensors A to F are not all L, as long as the output value of any of the detection sensors A to F has not changed from L to H (S2831: No), this means that the process from S2802 onwards has already been executed, and in this case, the process ends as it is.

In the process of S2802, the pocket where ball B will land is identified (S2802) as in the first control example, and the rotational position storage area 223u is updated based on the identified pocket (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors A to F since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. Note that when the power is turned on, the sensor information storage area 223rw has an initial value set to L (0) in all bits of its 2-byte storage area. In the process of S2832, if L (0) is stored in all bits assigned to the sensor information storage area 223rw, it is determined that this is the first detection.

In the process of S2832, if it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F was not performed for the first time after the power was turned on (that is, the previous output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored), the process of S2832 :No), the output values of the detection sensors A to F from the previous time (before the pocket position changed by one) stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw and the current position of one of the pockets at the falling position. The output values of the detection sensors A to F, which have been displaced due to the displacement, are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, five types of output values of detection sensors A to E out of the previous output values of detection sensors A to F, and detection sensor B of the current output values of detection sensors A to F - Compare the five types of output values of F. The presence or absence of an abnormality in the sensor detection results can be determined only by the detection results of detection sensors A to F for the pocket placed at the previous fall position and the detection result for the pocket placed at the current fall position. This is because when the number of pockets changes by one, the detected portion 641c that has been detected by the detection sensors A to E is moved to a position where it is detected by the detection sensors B to F. Therefore, if the output values of detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of detection sensors B to F before the drop position changes by one pocket, at least one of the detected parts 641c is damaged. It can be determined that a malfunction has occurred, such as when the detection sensor is no longer able to detect it.

When the processing of S2833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the comparison result executed by the processing of S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, if the previous output values of detection sensors A-E match the current output values of detection sensors B-F, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and if they do not match, it is determined that there is an abnormality. In the processing of S2834, if it is determined that the comparison result is abnormal (S2834: Yes), error information is output (a display error command is set) (S2835), and the processing proceeds to S2836.

On the other hand, in the process of S2832, if it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), the process of S2833 to S2835 is skipped because it is not possible to compare with the previous detection result. Then, the process moves to S2836. Further, in the process of S2834, if it is determined that the comparison result is normal (S2834: No), the process of S2835 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2836.

In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the process proceeds to S2804. In the processes of S2804 to S2808, the same processes as the processes of S2804 to S2808 in the first control example are executed, and then this process ends.

In this way, in the rotation setting process 4 in this fourth control example, the detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored multiple times in the sensor information storage area 223rw, and by comparing the detection information (the detection information of the detection sensors A to F stored previously and the detection information acquired this time) obtained at a specific timing (the timing when any pocket is placed in the drop position) within a specific range (a range that would normally be the same detection information), it is possible to detect a failure of the detection sensors A to F or damage to the detected part 641c.

Note that in this fourth control example, a configuration is used in which the previous detection information (pocket placed at the previous fall position) and the current detection information (pocket placed at the current fall position) are compared. Detection information obtained at three or more timings (for example, the timing when the pocket was placed at the falling position this time, the previous time, and the time before the previous time) may be compared. With this configuration, abnormalities can be detected with higher accuracy. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the detection information (output value) of the detection sensors A to F used to identify the pocket of the rotating member 640 is used to detect the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected part 641c. Since the configuration is configured to perform abnormality detection such as this, there is no need to separately acquire detection information for detecting an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F or the detected part 641c. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The configuration for detecting a malfunction of the detection sensors A-F or damage to the detectable portion 641c is not limited to a configuration in which the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing a combination of detection results obtained the previous time the pocket was placed in the drop position with a combination of detection results obtained the current time the pocket is placed in the drop position. For example, a configuration in which the arrangement pattern of the detectable portion 641c is stored in advance and it is determined whether or not the output value (detection information) output from at least any of the detection sensors A-F matches the arrangement pattern stored in advance may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the fourth control example can be achieved.

Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, predicted detection information is created that predicts at least a part of the detection information to be stored next time, and the predicted detection It may be configured to determine whether or not the information matches the detection information to be stored next time.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 211, the special drawing 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) in this fourth control example includes steps S3231 to S3234 instead of processing S3209 to S3211 with respect to the special drawing 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. They differ in that they execute processing, but are the same in other respects. Hereinafter, the same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special chart 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is started, first, the processing of S3201 to S3208 is executed as in the first control example. Then, in the processing of S3208, if it is determined that the bonus is to be added (S3208: Yes), a pocket that is within the range in which the ball can fall is identified from the timing of the throwing motion of the throwing device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing when the throwing device 650 performs the throwing motion (throwing ball B into the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the start of the roulette chance performance (70 seconds after the start of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance"). Then, the period from when the ball B is thrown to when it is dropped through the swinging motion on the holding piece 677 is about 7 to 10 seconds. Therefore, for example, if the processing of S3231 is executed 5 seconds after the start of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance", it can be determined that the throwing device 650 performs the throwing motion 65 seconds later and the ball B falls 72 to 75 seconds later. The rotating member 640 rotates at a speed that allows it to move one pocket per second. Therefore, in this specific example, it is determined that ball B will fall after rotating 72 to 75 pockets (i.e., into the pocket 12 to 15 pockets ahead of the pocket currently positioned for falling). In the process of S3231, seven pockets are determined as the possible range for ball B to fall, including a margin. For example, in the above specific example, it is determined that the possible range for ball B to fall is 8 to 17 pockets ahead. In other words, a margin of two pockets is provided before and after.

When the process of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball that will become a probability variable jackpot in the "preparation mode" (when the time saving state counter is greater than 0) (S3232). In the process of S3232, if it is determined that there is a reserved ball that will be a probability-variable jackpot in the "preparation mode" (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the additional position (S3234), and the process of S3212 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3232, if it is determined that there is no reserved ball that will be a probability-variable jackpot during the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the additional position (S3233). ), the process moves to S3212.

After the process of S3212, the process of S3212 and the process of S3213 are executed similarly to the first control example, and this process ends.

In this way, in the special chart 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) of this control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3232 that there is a reserved ball that will result in a guaranteed jackpot in "preparation mode" (i.e., when ball B is to be dropped into a winning pocket in a roulette chance performance), a pocket that is within the range where ball B can be dropped, as identified in the processing of S3231, is selected as the added position. This allows pockets within the range where ball B can be dropped to be added as winning positions, so that many winning pockets (lit pockets) are placed in the range where ball B can be dropped during the performance where ball B is dropped (roulette chance performance). As a result, it becomes easier to drop ball B into a winning pocket (lit pocket).

On the other hand, in the process of S3232, if it is determined that there are no reserved balls that will result in a guaranteed jackpot during preparation mode (i.e., in the case where ball B falls into a missing pocket in the roulette chance performance), a pocket other than the pocket within the possible drop range identified in the process of S3231 is selected as the added position. As a result, since a pocket within the possible drop range is not added as a winning position, many missing pockets (unlit pockets) are placed in the range within which ball B can fall during the performance in which ball B is dropped (roulette chance performance). As a result, it becomes easier to drop ball B into a missing pocket (unlit pocket).

As described above, in the special drawing 2 winning command processing 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can fall in the roulette chance production is calculated based on the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650. , the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into an area where the ball B can fall (first area) and an area where it is difficult for the ball B to fall (the second area). It is classified.

Then, based on the result of determining whether or not there is a pending jackpot that will result in a probability-variable jackpot during the preparation mode, that is, the result of determining whether the ball B should fall into the winning pocket or the missing pocket by the roulette chance performance, the winning pocket is determined. Since the area to be added is set to either the first area or the second area, even if the frequency of adding (adding) winning pockets is increased, the ball B will not be properly added to the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes possible to drop.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the first area in which ball B can fall is configured to be set to a range larger than the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers) that the player can specify, which is five (i.e., seven pockets). As a result, even if the player sets lucky numbers to five consecutive pockets and all five consecutive pockets are included in the possible falling area (first area), it is possible to set at least one losing pocket within the possible falling area (first area). Therefore, it is possible to drop ball B appropriately in accordance with the lottery results of the special pattern.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 212. Fluctuation display setting processing 4 (S1652) in this fourth control example executes fluctuation pattern selection processing 4 (S3331) in place of the processing in S3304 with respect to the fluctuation display setting processing in the first control example (see FIG. 162). They differ in that they do so, and are the same in other respects. Hereinafter, the same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the variation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the processes of S3302 to S3303 are executed. Then, the variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), and the process proceeds to S3305. Similarly to the first control example, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed, and this process ends. Note that the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Details of this variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG. 213.

The flowchart in FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331). This variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a partial modification of the variation pattern selection process in the third control example (see FIG. 206). Specifically, it differs in that instead of the processes related to the chance eye effect (S6106, S6108 to S6110), processes related to the upper shaking effect (S6131 to S6135) are executed, but the rest are the same. Hereinafter, the same parts as in the third control example are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101). In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is off (S6101: No), the normal performance mode is determined in the same way as the variation pattern process in the third control example (see FIG. 206). (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined presentation mode is set (S6111), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, if it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101: Yes), the table for consecutive games (variable pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive games) is read from the variable pattern selection table 222a. (S6105). Then, the value of the performance counter 223sw is read out (S6131), and the performance mode is determined based on the read fluctuating pattern selection table 222a5 and the value of the performance counter 223sw (S6107).

Next, it is determined whether the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and whether the effect mode determined in the processing of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). In the processing of S6132, if it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (i.e., the upper swing effect is already being executed) or the upper swing effect has not been determined in the processing of S6107 (S6132: No), a display variation pattern command for notifying the normal jackpot effect as the effect mode is set (S6111), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6132, if it is determined that the upper swing performance flag 223qw is off and an upper swing performance has been decided (S6132: Yes), the upper swing performance flag 223qw is set to on (S6133), and an upper swing operation is set (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the processing of S6134, the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is moved up and down based on the upper swing performance table 222b8 of the above-mentioned operation scenario table 222b.

Then, the upper shaking performance timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), a display variation pattern command is set to notify the determined performance mode (S6111), and this process ends.

In this way, in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in this control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is set to move up and down. At the same time, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0. Using this upper swing production timer 223pw, the elapsed time from the start of the upper swing production is measured, and when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) has elapsed, the upper lifting unit 300 An upper swinging operation can be performed to move the elevating body 330 up and down.

Next, the details of the upper swing performance process (S1651) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 214. The upper swing performance process (S1651) is a process for measuring the passage of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds in this control example) from the start of the upper swing performance when the upper swing performance is determined (started) in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), and for executing the upper swing operation when the predetermined time has elapsed.

In the upper swing effect processing (S1651), first, it is determined whether a jackpot game has started (S6201). In the process of S6201, if it is determined that the jackpot game has started (S6201: Yes), the upper swing effect has started, but after that, the jackpot game has started due to the occurrence of a jackpot due to the short hit fluctuation. Therefore, in order to end the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to OFF (S6202), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6201 that the jackpot game has not started (S6201: No), it is then determined whether the upper swing effect flag 223qw is ON (S6203).

In the process of S6203, if it is determined that the upper rocking effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), this means that the upper rocking effect has not been started, and thus this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203: Yes), the process moves to S6204 to execute the upper swing effect.

In the process of S6204, 1 is added to the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw (S6204). This upper swing effect processing (S1651) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the above-mentioned audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added every 1 ms by the process of S6204.

After completing the process of S6204, it is then determined whether the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether 1.4 seconds have passed since the upper swing effect was started.

In the process of S6205, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), in order to move the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 up and down, A swinging motion is set (S6206), and the process moves to S6207.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the process of S6206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the upper swing effect was started.

In the process of S6207, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), it is the end timing of the upper swing effect, so the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned off. The settings are made (S6208), and the process moves to S6209.

In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not a variation that results in a jackpot is being executed (S6209). If it is determined in the process of S6209 that a fluctuation that results in a jackpot is being executed (S6209: Yes), an upper swinging motion is set (S6210).

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if it is determined that the variation that results in a jackpot has not been executed (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped and the process ends.

The upper rocking effect in this control example is an effect in which the upper rocking action of the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 moving up and down is performed up to three times as described above. This upper rocking action is performed three times only if a jackpot is subsequently won, and by performing the upper rocking action three times, the player can be notified that he or she has won a jackpot.

The processing in S6209 is executed for the first upper swing motion (immediately after the start of the upper swing motion) and the second time (1.4 seconds after the start of the upper swing motion) among the upper swing motions. This is a case where the upper swinging operation is performed after 1 second). In this case, if a jackpot variation is in progress, set the upper swing motion to perform the third upper swing motion (2.8 seconds after the upper swing effect starts). (S6210).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation that results in a jackpot has not been executed (S6209: No), the upper swing effect is not set and the process ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem in which an upper rocking effect is performed in which the upper rocking motion is performed three times even though there is no jackpot.

In this way, the upper swing effect executed by the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing effect process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main controller 110. The first upper swing motion is executed based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the second upper swing motion is performed based on the elapse of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) after the upper swing effect was executed. executed. Then, when a predetermined period of time (1.4 seconds) has elapsed since the second upper swinging motion was performed, the third upper swinging motion is performed if the fluctuation of the special symbol that won the jackpot has been executed. is configured to run.

As a result, the upper swinging effect, which is composed of a movement mode (upper swinging action) that is executed multiple times (3 times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval), can be changed to a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). can be executed without being affected by

Therefore, as in the "hit middle variation (variation time 3 seconds)" selected by the continuous fluctuating pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking motions are completed during one fluctuating motion as the upper rocking effect. In other cases, an upper swing effect is started by a "missing short variation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" and a "hit short variation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" that is different from the variation that started the upper swing effect. )'' changes 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to perform the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times.

Therefore, a notification that informs that a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swinging motion) multiple times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) The performance (upper swing performance) can be performed over multiple fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, even if a configuration is used that does not store the lottery of special symbols (a configuration without a hold memory function) like the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, it is possible to create an effect that associates multiple variations of special symbols. can be executed.

Note that the configuration of the fourth control example may be used for a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration for storing special symbol lottery (winning information) (a configuration for storing it on hold), for example, when the third upper swinging motion is executed. At the timing when the winning information is held, it is determined whether there is winning information that has won a jackpot among the winning information that has been stored, and if there is winning information that has won a jackpot, the third upper swing operation is performed. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the upper swinging effect in which the upper swinging motion is performed three times is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the second upper swinging operation is always performed 1.4 seconds after the upper swinging effect is started, but for example, if the upper swinging effect is started, When 1.4 seconds have elapsed since then, it is determined whether the special symbol is changing, and when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the second upper swinging motion is executed. Good too. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the upper swinging effect in which the upper swinging motion is performed is related to the fluctuating display of special symbols, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. effective.

As described above, in this fourth control example, the timing of the throwing action of the throwing device 650 in the roulette chance performance is calculated backwards in advance during the increase performance to determine the position of the winning pocket. That is, the period (amplitude) of the swinging action performed at the top of the movable piece 677 becomes smaller when the ball B is thrown, and the timing (period) when the ball B is dropped to look natural is calculated backwards, and the position of the winning pocket is determined based on the calculated period and the result of the current roulette chance performance (whether or not to transition to the "consecutive mode"). Here, if the amplitude of the swinging action of the ball B is simply reduced and the pocket type corresponding to the result of the current "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is placed in the drop position, and the ball B is dropped at the timing when the corresponding pocket type is placed in the drop position, there is a risk that the ball B will stop before being dropped because the corresponding pocket type is not placed in the drop position for a long time. That is, there is a risk that the ball B will look extremely unnatural, not falling into the pocket even though it is stationary.

On the other hand, in this control example, the section in which ball B can be dropped (the section in which the ball B is placed at the falling position when the period of the swinging motion becomes less than or equal to a predetermined period) is defined as "successive shots". If the number of winning pockets is to be increased by increasing the number of winning pockets, the distribution of winning pockets and missing pockets in the section where ball B can fall In this case, whether or not to newly set a winning pocket in the relevant section is determined according to the result of the performance (whether the ball B falls into the winning pocket or into the missing pocket). With this configuration, pockets of the type corresponding to the performance result can be reliably arranged in the section where the ball B can be dropped. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second), and that the ball B is reliably dropped into the target pocket before the swinging motion of the ball B stops. can. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are transferred to the next pocket (located at the current drop position). The pocket placed next to the pocket placed in the drop position) is held until the pocket placed in the drop position is placed in the drop position. The retained detection result is then compared with a new detection result obtained when the next pocket is placed at the drop position to determine whether there is an abnormality. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are continuous (adjacent) pocket detection results. Thereby, damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c) can be detected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example, as one form of entertainment presentation in the "consecutive wins mode," the entertainment of the player is enhanced by a presentation using a special device (upper lifting unit 300). Specifically, the device is configured to be capable of performing an entertainment presentation in which the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 moves up and down once or multiple times at a predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval). The number of times the lifting body 330 moves varies depending on whether or not a jackpot is reached, with the number of movements being two or less in the case of a miss, and three lifting movements being permitted only in the case of a jackpot. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the number of lifting and lowering movements of the lifting body 330, which prevents the game in the "consecutive wins mode" from becoming monotonous.

The effect in which the elevating body 330 moves up and down (upper swing effect) is performed a predetermined number of times, regardless of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (even if the variation time has elapsed), unless a jackpot starts. The lifting and lowering operations are continued until they are performed at predetermined time intervals (1.4 second intervals). Therefore, as in the "hit middle variation (variation time 3 seconds)" selected by the continuous fluctuating pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking motions are completed during one fluctuating motion as the upper rocking effect. In other cases, an upper swing effect is started by a "missing short variation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" and a "hit short variation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" that is different from the variation that started the upper swing effect. )'' changes 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to perform the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times. Therefore, a notification that informs that a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swinging motion) multiple times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) The performance (upper swing performance) can be performed over multiple fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fourth control example, the section in which ball B can be dropped (the period of the swinging motion of ball B is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period) during the execution of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance" is predicted in advance from the performance time, and when a new winning pocket is set, the position of the new winning pocket is determined taking into account the section in which ball B will drop. In addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether there is any change in the section in which ball B will drop at a predetermined timing in the "consecutive win mode suggestion" performance (e.g., the start of the roulette chance performance or the timing of throwing ball B by the throwing device 650, etc.). If there is a discrepancy between the section in which ball B is predicted to fall at the time when the new winning pocket is set and the section in which ball B is predicted to fall at a predetermined timing (e.g., the start of the roulette chance performance or the timing of throwing ball B by the throwing device 650, etc.), the discrepancy may be corrected. As a method of correcting the deviation, for example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 may be varied to make the section in which the ball B can actually fall match the section predicted at the time the winning pocket is added, or the timing of the throwing by the throwing device 650 may be shifted from a predetermined timing (i.e., 70 seconds after the start of the "consecutive win mode suggestion performance") to make the section in which the ball B can actually fall match the section predicted at the time the winning pocket is added. By configuring in this way, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the targeted type with a natural appearance (the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period, and the appearance of a range in which the ball B is not stationary).

In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are obtained, the detection results are held until the next pocket (the pocket to be placed in the drop position next to the pocket currently placed in the drop position) is placed in the drop position, and the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing the detection results obtained when the next pocket is placed in the drop position, but the method of determining the abnormality is not limited to this. For example, each time the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are obtained, the combination of the detection results of the pocket to be placed in the next drop position may be predicted in advance from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection results. That is, the combination of the detection sensor outputs of the pocket to be placed in the next drop position may be read from the rotation position discrimination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. Then, when the next pocket is actually placed in the drop position, it may be determined whether the combination of the detection sensor outputs predicted in advance (stored in the RAM 223) matches the actual combination of the detection sensor outputs. By configuring in this way, like the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of an abnormality such as damage to each of the detection sensors A to F or damage to the detection target portion 641c. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which all combinations of outputs from the detection sensors A to F are stored in the order of the pockets, and each time a new pocket is placed in the drop position, whether the detection result corresponds to the order of the pockets is determined. With this configuration, the presence or absence of an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detected portion 641c can be easily determined. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the rotating member 640 makes one revolution, the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected is determined to determine whether at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged. As described above, the detected portion 641c is provided in 16 pockets out of the 30 pockets. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 makes one revolution, each of the detection sensors A to F should output H 16 times. Under this circumstance, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per revolution is less than 16 times, there is a high possibility that any of the detected portions 641c is in a state where it cannot be detected by the detection sensors A to F due to damage or the like. Therefore, in this case, by reporting the abnormality, it is possible to quickly deal with any malfunction such as damage to the detected part 641c. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of times each of the detection sensors A to F has reached the H output state at the time of one revolution is compared to determine whether the numbers match. Since the number of times the output reaches the H state during one revolution (the number of times each of the detected parts 641c is detected) should be the same for all of the detection sensors, if the detection numbers do not match, it can be determined that one of the detection sensors has a malfunction such as a breakdown. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether the detection sensors A to F are malfunctioning.

In the fourth control example, in the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" with a fixed performance time, the rotating member 640 is rotated at the start of the performance, and the rough section in which the ball B falls is predicted from the performance time, etc., but the performance time and the timing at which the rotational movement of the rotating member 640 is started do not have to be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can be applied even when the performance time of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is varied and one performance time is determined by lottery. That is, when the performance time is determined, the rough section in which the ball B falls may be predicted based on the performance time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. Similarly, even when multiple performance patterns are provided in which the timing at which the rotational movement of the rotating member 640 starts and one or both of the rotation speeds are different, the rough section in which the ball B falls may be predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 by calculating backwards from the performance time until the ball B is thrown at the timing at which the rotational movement starts. By configuring in this way, when adding a winning pocket, a new winning pocket can be arranged so that the pocket of the type into which the ball B is to be dropped is reliably included in the section predicted by taking into account the performance result. Therefore, in each "consecutive mode suggestion performance", the ball B can be dropped into the pocket of the type corresponding to the performance result. Furthermore, even if the timing at which the performance time in the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" is determined is later than the timing at which the rotating member 640 starts rotating, the control of this fourth control example can be applied. That is, when the performance time is determined, the section into which the ball B may fall can be roughly predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and the winning pocket can be added so that the pocket of the type corresponding to the current performance result is placed in the predicted section. This allows the ball B to be reliably dropped into the pocket corresponding to the performance result before the ball B completely stops swinging.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 225. In the first control example described above, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position when a partial jackpot (jackpot where opening pattern A is set) is reached, and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position. The prize-winning device 82a is configured to be used as a downstream passage for causing the winning balls to flow into the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 is configured to be moved as an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot. This can improve the player's interest.

In addition, in the first control example described above, when dropping the ball B in the "successive shot mode suggestion performance", the rotation member 640 is arranged after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes sufficiently small. The ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket in which the ball B can be dropped is located in front of the drop position (0.2 seconds before reaching the drop position). .

In contrast to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to predetermine the drop position (pocket) into which ball B is dropped during the roulette chance presentation. Then, depending on the results of the lottery for the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the predetermined drop position is set as a winning position (whether or not to light it up). This simplifies the control process, since it is sufficient to drop ball B into a predeterminable pocket.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 is fixed (70 seconds after the start of the "success mode suggestion performance"). In contrast, in this control example, in the roulette chance production, a period is provided for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance production), and the player operates the frame button 22. The configuration is such that the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B when the ball B is detected. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitch pressing effect (see FIG. 216) is executed to prompt the player to press the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by this pitch pressing effect, the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B. This allows the player to pitch the ball B to the rotating member 640 at any timing, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the roulette chance production.

The timing for starting the pitching press performance (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted) is determined based on the rotational position of the rotating member 640. This allows the pitching press performance to start at a timing that makes it easy to drop the ball into a predetermined drop position (pocket) in the pitching press performance. Also, if the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the above-mentioned pitching press performance starts, the timing at which ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is delayed. This makes it possible to limit the timing at which ball B is thrown in the pitching press performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a malfunction in which ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. One point is that some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the performance mode of the preview performance by the left swing unit 500 in this control example will be described. As described above in the first control example, in the "normal mode" of this pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the current special symbol is determined by the numbers displayed on the production section 331 of the upper elevating unit 300. We will notify you if this is the case. In addition to this, this control example is configured to be able to execute a performance in which the left swing unit 500 is moved up and down (left swing performance) as a performance that suggests the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot. has been done. In addition, as the left swing performance, there is a first left swing performance that has a relatively low expectation of becoming a jackpot, and a second left swing performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot compared to the first left swing performance. At least two types are provided.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), in the first left rocking performance and the second left rocking performance, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left rocking unit 500 is moved from the released position to the released position and the connected position. It is moved up to an intermediate position between the two. Thereafter, in the first left swing performance, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

On the other hand, in the second left rocking effect, as shown in FIG. 215(b), an upward movement is made from an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, the lowering operation is performed from the connection position to the release position.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a left swing performance (first left swing performance or second left swing performance) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 moves is executed according to the expectation that the lottery result for the special symbol will be a jackpot. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not the second left swing performance, which has a high expectation of being a jackpot, is executed (pay attention to whether or not the left swing unit 500 rises from the middle position), thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the pitch pressing effect in the fifth control example will be described. The roulette chance presentation in this control example is executed in the order of pitch press preparation presentation, pitch press press presentation, and swing presentation. As shown in FIG. 216(a), in the pitching press preparation production, the words "Pitching Chance!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying this pitch press preparation effect, the player can be made aware that the effect of pitching the ball B (pitch press effect) will be executed by pressing the frame button 22. Although details will be described later, the timing of transition from the pitch press preparation presentation to the pitch press presentation (that is, the timing at which the pitch press presentation is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information of the falling position storage area 223ex. Determined by As a result, it is possible to start the pitch pressing effect so that the pocket to be dropped is placed at the falling position during the execution (during presentation) of the pitch pressing effect for a total of 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 216(b), the pitching press effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to press the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is pressed while this pitching press effect is being executed (displayed), ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 and the performance transitions to a swinging performance (see FIG. 216(c)). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed while the pitching press effect is being executed (displayed), ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, and the performance transitions to a swinging performance (see FIG. 216(c)).

Note that if the frame button 22 is pressed before 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the pitch press presentation, ball B will be pitched after 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the pitch press presentation. (i.e., the pitch is delayed). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitch pressing effect, the ball B is pitched at the timing of the pressing. Thereby, the timing at which ball B is pitched can be limited to the last 1.5 seconds of the three seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem of the ball B falling into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The ROM 222 of this control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118) in that the contents of the left swing unit table 222b3 are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), the left swing unit table 222b3 in this control example is a first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing the first swing effect, and a first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing the second swing effect. A second left swing unit table 222b3b is provided for this purpose. The left swing unit table 222b3 includes setting values (operation speed (pps), operation (number of steps and direction of movement) are defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 217(b), the specified contents of the first left swing unit table 222b3a will be explained. As shown in FIG. 217(b), in the first left swing unit table 222b3a, the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g indicates the movement of the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the release position and the connected position. An operation (onward movement) for raising the position to a point midway between the two is associated with the movement. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operating speed, 100 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the left swing unit 500 in the first left swing performance comes. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

As mentioned above, the operating speed (pps) refers to the frequency (number of outputs per second) at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing one step of operation to the corresponding drive motor. Therefore, the time required to move the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position to the intermediate position by operating it 100 steps at an operating speed of 200 pps is 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds).

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at an intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operating speed, 1000 is defined as the operating step, and "stop" is defined as the operating direction. That is, it is specified that the stop command must be issued 1000 times in a row at an operating speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times/200pps).

The value "03H" of the motion pointer 223g corresponds to an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the motion speed, 100 is specified as the number of motion steps, and the negative direction is specified as the motion direction. In other words, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position over 0.5 seconds.

The value "04H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Next, the contents of the second left swing unit table 222b3b will be described with reference to FIG. 217(c). As shown in FIG. 217(c), the value "01H" of the action pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b corresponds to an action (forward action) for raising the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the intermediate position, as in the first left swing unit table 222b3a. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the action speed, 100 is specified as the number of action steps, and the positive direction is specified as the action direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position over 0.5 seconds (100 steps/200 pps).

The value "02H" of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (stationary) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the motion speed, 500 is specified as the motion step, and "stop" is specified as the motion direction. In other words, it is specified that the stop command is to be output 500 times in succession at a motion speed of 200 pps. This allows the left swing unit 500 to be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times/200 pps).

The value "03H" of the action pointer 223g corresponds to an action (outward action) for raising the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connected position. Specifically, the action speed is specified as 200 pps, the number of action steps is specified as 100, and the action direction is specified as the forward direction. In other words, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connected position over 0.5 seconds.

The value "04H" of the motion pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (stationary) the left swing unit 500 at the connecting position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the motion speed, 300 is specified as the motion step, and "stop" is specified as the motion direction. In other words, it is specified that the stop command is to be issued 300 times in succession at a motion speed of 200 pps. This allows the left swing unit 500 to be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times/200 pps).

The value "05H" of the motion pointer 223g corresponds to an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the connected position to the released position (origin position). Specifically, the motion speed is specified as 200 pps, the number of motion steps is specified as 200, and the motion direction is specified as the negative direction. In other words, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the connected position to the released position over one second.

The value "06H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example stores a production counter 223ax, a pitch press production setting flag 223bx, a pitch press production in progress flag 223cx, and a delayed pitch flag 223dx, with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118(b)). The difference is that a drop position storage area 223ex is added, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223ax is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (such as "left swing effect") and for various lotteries, and although not shown in the figure, it is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 99 in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 145).

The pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the setting of the pitching press effect. This pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON in effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) when the timing for starting the pitching press effect in the roulette effect arrives (see S2003: Yes in FIG. 222). The pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is referenced in effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and if it is determined to be ON (see S2023: Yes in FIG. 222), the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223) is executed. Then, in the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, the flag is set to OFF.

The pitching press performance flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a pitching press performance (see FIG. 216) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 to pitch the ball B is displayed. When it is determined in the pitching press performance setting process (see FIG. 223) that it is the timing to pitch the ball B (see S6404: Yes in FIG. 223), the pitching press performance display is set (see S6406 in FIG. 223) and the pitching press performance flag 223cx is set to ON (see S6407 in FIG. 223). The pitching press performance flag 223cx is referenced in the pitching press performance setting process (see FIG. 223), and when it is determined to be ON (S6408: Yes in FIG. 223), the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the swing performance is started. Even if the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6408: No), the pitching action of the pitching device 650 is set based on the passage of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the swing performance is started. Note that, as will be described in detail later, there is a certain period of time (1.5 seconds) after the start of the pitching press performance during which pitching is not permitted, and the pitching action of the pitching device 650 is set with a delay.

The delayed pitch flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of the pitching press performance (period during which pitching is not permitted). This delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of the pitching press performance (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitching press performance) in the pitching press performance setting process (see FIG. 223) (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching press performance setting process (see FIG. 223), when the pitching allowable period of the pitching press performance is reached, it is checked whether the delayed pitch flag 223dx is ON (see S6412 in FIG. 223), and if it is determined that the delayed pitch flag 223dx is ON, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is executed. That is, the pitching operation is delayed until the pitching allowable period. After that, the delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to off (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

The falling position storage area 223ex is an area for storing information on the falling position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance performance. This falling position storage area 223ex is used to store the next reserved ball (the lottery result of the special symbol to be executed first) in the winning pocket distribution process 5 (see FIG. 224) executed at the start of the "continuous shot mode suggestion performance". It is determined based on whether it is a guaranteed jackpot or not. Specifically, if the next reserved ball is a jackpot, one of the pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av (the pocket designated by the player) is set as the falling position (S3122 in FIG. 224). (see S3123 in FIG. 224), if the next hold is not a jackpot, a pocket other than the one stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is designated as the drop position (see S3123 in FIG. 224). The falling position (pocket) stored in the falling position storage area 223ex is used when determining the start timing of the above-mentioned pitch pressing effect (see S6404 in FIG. 223), and when increasing the number of winning pockets in the increasing effect (see S6404 in FIG. 224). S3124 and S3221 in FIG. 225).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 219 to 225. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 219, fall control processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described.

The drop control process 5 in this fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for controlling the drop of the ball B (the operation of the holding piece 677) in the same way as the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147). Note that the same parts as those in the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the drop control process 5 in this fifth control example, first, the processes of S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147). Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket identified in the process of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means the pocket to be placed in the drop position next to the pocket identified in the process of S1802. For example, if the pocket identified in the process of S1802 is pocket P1, pocket P2 is identified as the next pocket. This pocket is calculated by referring to pocket placement information (not shown) stored in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

After completing the process in S1831, the information on the pocket (the pocket into which the ball B is dropped) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S1832), and then the information stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S1832). It is determined whether the pocket matches the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the processing in S1831, that is, whether the next pocket placed at the drop position is the pocket into which the ball B is to be dropped (S1833 ).

In the process of S1833, if it is determined that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex matches the pocket calculated in the process of S1831 (S1833: Yes), the process moves to S1806. On the other hand, in the process of S1833, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated in the process of S1831 do not match (S1833: No), then the value of the swing timer 223w is set to 100. (equivalent to 0.1 seconds) or not is determined (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679, that is, the half of the period in which the ball B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 seconds. There is. This 0.1 second means that the ball B moves to the movable piece 677 until the next H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679 (until the timing at which the next falling motion of the ball B can be set arrives). This value is set as a value indicating a state where there is a risk of stopping at the top.

If it is determined in the process of S1834 that the value of the oscillation timer 223w is 100 or more (S1834: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the oscillation timer 223w is less than 100, that is, that there is a risk that the ball B will stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), all information in the lighting position storage area 223m is cleared (all bits are set to L) (S1835), and the process proceeds to S1806.

Here, the processing of S1835 described above will be explained in detail. As described above, the lighting position storage area 223m is a memory area for storing information corresponding to the state (lighting state or off state) of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the back LED 625 (see FIG. 97), and the lighting of each LED of the back LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in this lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, by clearing all information in the lighting position storage area 223m (setting all bits to L) in the processing of S1835, each lighting area A1 to A18 of the back LED 625 is controlled to be in an off state.

In the process of S1806, an operation setting is made in which the effect ball (ball B) is dropped after 100 steps, and then the ball fall possible flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and this process is ended.

In this way, in the drop control process 5 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 219), the pocket into which ball B is dropped during the roulette chance presentation is stored in advance in the drop position storage area 223ex, and ball B is dropped when it is determined that the pocket to be placed at the next drop position is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. This allows ball B to be appropriately dropped into a preset pocket, thereby suppressing (preventing) the problem of ball B dropping into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

In addition, in this fifth control example, after the swinging performance is executed, if the condition for dropping ball B is not met (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex does not match the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the processing of S1831) and the amplitude of ball B swinging on the movable piece 677 becomes smaller than a predetermined size (the amplitude size where half of the amplitude period is 0.1 seconds in this control example), all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set to an off state, and then a process for dropping ball B (abnormal processing) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) a situation where ball B stops on the movable piece 677 during the swinging performance due to a continuation of a situation where ball B cannot be dropped into the targeted pocket (pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex) during the swinging performance, and therefore it is possible to provide a performance that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the rocking effect that is executed based on winning the jackpot, if the above-mentioned S1835 process is executed (all of the lighted areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set to an off state), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect notifying the player that a jackpot has been won after the rocking effect has ended. This makes it possible to make the player feel as if this is one form of notification in the roulette chance effect, even if the ball B cannot be dropped. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) any discomfort felt by the player.

In this fifth control example, the dropping action of ball B is set when the pocket to be placed in the next drop position is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. However, for example, it is also possible to calculate how many pockets are separated between the identified pocket and the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex based on the values (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotation position discrimination table 222c, and set the timing for setting the dropping action of ball B based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this fifth control example, the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotation motor 631 is used to determine whether it is time to perform the dropping operation of ball B, but other configurations may be used. For example, the determination may be made by a counter that is updated each time the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 220. The variable display setting process 5 in this fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 162). Note that the same parts as in the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 162) are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the variable display setting process 5 in this fifth control example, first, after executing the processes in S3301 to S3305 similarly to the variable display setting process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 162), the left swing unit is A preview performance setting process for setting a performance for moving the 500 is executed (S3321), and the process moves to S3306. Note that details of this preview effect setting process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. 221. In the process of S3301, even if the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process moves to S3306. Thereafter, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed, and the variable display setting process 5 is ended.

Next, the preview effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 221. The preview effect setting process (S3321) in this fifth control example is one of the variable display setting processes 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. .

In this preview performance setting process (S3321), a process for setting a preview performance that moves the left swing unit 500 is executed based on the special symbol lottery result and the value of the performance counter 223ax. When this preview performance setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the current value of the performance counter 223ax is obtained, and it is determined whether the value of the performance counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the performance counter 223ax is not between 0 and 9 (S6301: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301: Yes), the process moves to the process of S6302 in order to set a preview effect that moves the left swing unit 500. As described above, since the performance counter 223ax is a loop counter from 0 to 198, a preview performance that moves the left swing unit 500 is set (executed) with a probability of 10/199 (approximately 5% rate).

In the process of S6302, it is determined whether the current special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S6302), and if the current special symbol lottery result is a loss (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a The value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (see FIG. 217(b)) is set to "01H" (S6303), and the process moves to S6307. Through the process of S6303, a first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to an intermediate position is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the performance counter 223ax obtained in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). In the process of S6304, if it is determined that the value of the performance counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the first left swing unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217(b)) is set to "01H" (S6306), and the process proceeds to S6307. On the other hand, in the process of S6304, if the value of the performance counter ax is not a multiple of 4 (S6304: No), the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the second left swing unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217(c)) is set to "01H" (S6305), and the process proceeds to S6307. In the process of S6307, which is performed after any of the processes of S6303, S6305, and S6306 is executed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read out, and an operation command is set to notify (instruct) the motor driver of the operation content (S6307), after which this process ends.

When the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6306, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed, and the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6305. Then, a second left swinging effect is executed in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connected position. As set in the process of S6304, the ratio at which each rocking effect is set is that the first left rocking effect is set with a probability of 3/4, and the second left rocking effect is set with a probability of 1/4. Set. In other words, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss and a preview effect is set, the first left swing effect will be set with a high probability (1/4), and the first left swing effect will be set with a low probability (1/4). 2 Left swing effect is set. On the other hand, if a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and a preview performance is set, only the second left swing performance is set. Therefore, the second left swing performance is a performance with high expectations of a jackpot, and the first left swing performance is a performance with low expectations of a jackpot). Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 moves to the intermediate position, a game can be played with the expectation that it will further move from the intermediate position to the connected position. That is, since it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the first passage forming member 520, it is possible to improve the player's interest during the preview presentation.

The selection ratio of the preview effects is not limited to the form of this control example, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the first left swing effect may be selected at a predetermined rate (e.g., 1/10) even if the lottery result for the special symbol is a win, and the second left swing effect may not be selected if the special symbol is a miss.

In addition, the types of preview performance involving the operation of the left swing unit 500 are not limited to two types, and may be more diverse. By diversifying the types of preview performance, a more diverse range of performances can be realized, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Examples of different types of preview performance include a mode in which the ball moves back and forth between the intermediate position (or the connection position) and the release position multiple times, a mode in which the ball stops at a different intermediate position (for example, a position 50 steps from the release position), a mode in which the ball stops for a different time at the intermediate position, and the like. Conversely, the types of preview performance may be reduced to one type. In this case, the amount of data in the left swing unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

In this way, in this fifth control example, the left swing unit 500, which has a flow path through which a ball that enters the first specific winning port 82 during a jackpot, is moved, making it possible to execute a presentation that suggests the likelihood that the special pattern lottery result will be a jackpot. This makes it possible to share the components that make up the flow path through which the ball passes and the components used for the presentation, allowing for effective use of the limited space inside the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the left swing unit 500, which is equipped with a flow path through which the winning ball passes through the first specific winning opening 82 that allows the ball to win during a jackpot, is operated at a timing other than during a jackpot (timing when the special symbol is changing). Therefore, even if the left swing unit 500 is moved, it will not affect the ball flow. In other words, the left swinging unit 500 can be used as a ball path for the ball to pass through during a bonus game (during a jackpot), and as a movable member for performance during a normal game (during special symbol variations).

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured so that a jackpot game is executed with the left swing unit 500 raised from the release position to the connected position. Therefore, for example, an operation scenario for the left swing unit 500 defined in the left swing unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. 217(a) may be set so that the left swing unit 500 continues to stop at the connected position only when a jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to use the left swing unit 500 not only as a performance that suggests the likelihood that the lottery result of the special pattern will be a jackpot, but also as a notification means that notifies the player that the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot. In addition, since the number of times the left swing unit 500 moves can be reduced, malfunctions of the movable parts can be reduced.

In addition, when the left oscillating unit 500 is moved as a performance effect, it is advisable to provide a determination means for determining whether the left oscillating unit 500 is moving normally. This makes it possible to determine whether there is an abnormality in the left oscillating unit 500 before the start of a jackpot game, and makes it possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the left oscillating unit 500 cannot rise to the connecting position during a jackpot game and becomes abnormal.

In addition, if it is determined that the left swing unit 500 is abnormal when the left swing unit 500 is moved as a performance, the determination result will be notified and the left swing unit 500 will be moved during the jackpot game. It is preferable to configure so that an effect that does not move is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance during the jackpot game. Here, the left swing unit 500 is provided with a downstream passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured to discharge the winning ball out of the gaming area while it is in the release position. In other words, even if the left swing unit 500 is not moved, if a ball enters the first variable winning device 82a, the winning ball will not be moved normally (such as when it enters an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10). can be discharged (without being stored away).

As an example of a performance that does not move the left swing unit 500, for example, a jackpot game is started with the left swing unit 500 positioned at the release position, and the ball that has won in the first specific prize opening 82 flows down the flow path 515. At the same time, the display may be configured so that the display section 422a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 executes the display without being connected to the left swing unit 500. In this case, since the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, the progress of the performance displayed on the performance unit 422a is Instead of executing based on the winning ball 82, for example, it may be configured to execute based on the operation of the frame button 22. That is, for example, each time the player presses the frame button 22, symbols (numbers) are displayed in a changing manner in the production section 422a, and when the lucky number is stopped and displayed, a production is executed to notify the transition to the "preparation mode". It may also be a configuration.

Furthermore, a prohibition process may be executed so that the preview performance using the left swing unit 500 is not selected until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game. A variable time period in which the period from the end of the preview performance of the left swing unit 500 (6 seconds (see FIG. 217(c)) to the start of the jackpot game is within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) In the set variation pattern, a prohibition process may be executed so that a preview performance using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. As a result, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the jackpot game and the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the normal game. be able to.

As this predetermined interval, it is preferable to set an interval that is longer than the retry period that is executed when a problem occurs in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500. As a result, even if a retry operation is executed in the movable motion of the left swing unit 500 during a jackpot game or a normal game, the movable motion of the left swing unit 500 that is executed when other conditions are met will be affected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a bad performance, and it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate performance.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 222, we will explain the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and is a process for setting the ball press preparation effect (see FIG. 216(a)) and ball press effect (see FIG. 216(b)) executed during the roulette chance effect. Note that the same parts as those in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after executing the processes of S2001 and S2002 similarly to the effect setting process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 149), the value of the effect timer 223bv is set. It is determined whether or not is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the production timer 223bv is the timer value indicating the end of the increase production (S2003: Yes), a pitch press preparation production is performed which is a production that notifies the player that the pitch press production will start. (see FIG. 216(a)) (S2021), then set the increasing performance flag 223cv to OFF, set the pitch pressing performance setting flag 223bx to ON (S2022), and end this process as it is. . In addition, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase production (S2003: No), this process is performed without executing the processes of S2021 and S2022 described above. finish.

In the process of S2001, if it is determined that the increase effect in progress flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023: Yes), in the process of S2023, a pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is executed to set a pitching press effect, which is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of pitching ball B, and the process proceeds to S2006. Details of this pitching press effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 223. On the other hand, in the process of S2023, if the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is off (S2023: No), the process of S2024 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2006. Next, steps S2006 to S2017 are executed in the same manner as the performance setting process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 149), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223, the pitch press effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The pitch press effect setting process (S2024) in this fifth control example is one process of effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This pitch press effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting a pitch press effect that allows the player to determine the timing to pitch ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. be.

When the pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is executed, first it is determined whether the pitching press effect in progress flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitching press effect in progress flag 223cx is off (S6401: No), information from the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S6402), and information from the rotation position storage area 223u is obtained (S6403). In other words, information from the predetermined pocket into which ball B will be dropped is obtained by the process of S6402, and information from the pocket currently positioned at the drop position is obtained by the process of S6403.

Next, it is determined whether the current timing is a timing when a ball can be thrown (S6404). Here, the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, when the "preparation mode" is entered, a "consecutive mode suggestion effect" with a total presentation period of 90 seconds is executed. This "consecutive mode suggestion effect" is composed of an increase effect (presentation time 20 seconds) that increases (adds) the winning pocket based on the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640a, a roulette chance effect (presentation period 65 seconds) that shows whether or not ball B will fall into the winning pocket, and an ending effect (presentation period 5 seconds) that indicates the end of the roulette chance effect.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned roulette chance performance (performance time 65 seconds) is composed of a first half (performance time 42 seconds) in which the performance progresses with a notification mode indicating that the roulette chance performance has been executed, a notification mode explaining the roulette chance performance, and a lively notification mode, a middle part (maximum performance time 8 seconds) in which a pitch press preparation performance (performance time 5 seconds) and a pitch press performance (maximum performance time 3 seconds) are executed, and a latter half (performance time 15 seconds) in which a swing performance is executed in which ball B thrown by the throwing device 650 performs a swinging motion at the top of the holding piece 677 and then falls into the pocket.

Here, the pitch pressing presentation (maximum presentation time 3 seconds) is a pitch non-permission period (1.5 seconds) in which pitching of the ball B by the pitching device 650 is not permitted even if the frame button 22 is operated by the player; It consists of a pitching permissible period (1.5 seconds) during which the pitching device 650 is allowed to pitch the ball B based on the operation of the frame button 22. In other words, the pitching device 650 will not pitch the ball B even if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds after the pitch pressing effect starts, and 1.5 seconds after the pitch pressing effect starts. The period from seconds to three seconds is a period in which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated by the player.

Therefore, the timing at which ball B can be thrown in the pitching press performance is at least 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching press performance and at most 3 seconds after the start of the pitching press performance (the performance time of the pitching press performance is 1.5 to 3 seconds). Note that if the performance time of the pitching press performance is less than 3 seconds, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated during the pitching press performance and ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the difference is absorbed in the latter half of the roulette chance performance. As a result, if the player operates the frame button 22 within a specified period (within a period of 1.5 to 3 seconds after the start of the pitching press performance), ball B is thrown immediately based on the timing of operating the frame button 22, so that it is possible to make it appear as if the player can determine the pocket into which ball B will fall by himself, which makes it possible to enhance the performance effect.

Although details will be described later, in this fifth control example, if the frame button 22 is operated within 1.5 seconds after the pitch pressing effect is executed, the pitch will be released at the timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The pitching operation of device 650 is configured to be performed. As a result, with respect to the period (3 seconds) of the pitch press effect during which the player can operate the frame button 22, the period (1 .5 seconds).

In addition, in this fifth control example, the swinging performance (performance period 15 seconds), which is the latter half of the roulette chance performance, is composed of a swinging ball drop prohibition period (7 seconds) during which the ball B thrown by the throwing device 650 swings on the movable piece 677 at an amplitude that makes it impossible for it to fall (the period when the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 (see S1709: Yes in FIG. 146)), followed by a swinging ball drop possible period (maximum 3 seconds) during which it swings at an amplitude that makes it possible for it to fall (the period when the value of the swing timer 223w is less than 500 (see S1709: No in FIG. 146)), and a ball drop period (5 seconds) during which the ball B's drop action is executed.

Of these, the period during which the ball can drop while swinging (maximum 3 seconds) is set to be longer than the period (1.5 seconds) during which the timing at which ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 differs in the above-mentioned pitching press performance, so ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket no matter when the player operates the frame button 22 during the pitching press performance. In addition, a period during which multiple (3) pockets move is set as the period during which the ball can drop while swinging, so the accuracy of dropping ball B into a predetermined pocket can be improved.

The ball falling period (5 seconds) is the period during which, after ball B is dropped into the pocket, an announcement is made depending on the type of pocket it fell into (hit pocket or missed pocket), and is the period during which pitching is allowed as described above. Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by the time lag (difference between the actual performance time and the set maximum time) that occurs during the period during which the ball can fall while swinging. Thereby, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B are different, the presentation period of the ``successive game mode suggestion presentation'' can be made to match 90 seconds.

The pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example is configured to be able to control the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 between two speeds: a high speed (an operating speed (500 pps) at which it takes 0.25 seconds to move one pocket) and a low speed (an operating speed (125 pps) at which it takes 1 second to move one pocket). This rotation speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor driver to set the operating speed (125 pps or 500 pps).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example, the rotating member 640 is rotated at high speed from the execution of the "continuous game mode suggestion presentation" until the execution of the pitch pressing presentation, and the pitching pressing presentation is executed. When this happens, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

Returning to FIG. 223, the explanation will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, the ball B is configured to be able to drop in the range of 10 to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press performance is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after the pitching press performance (maximum 3 seconds), the swinging ball drop prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball drop possible period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since the pitching press performance can be as short as 1.5 seconds, the sum of the pitching press performance (3 seconds) and the swinging ball drop prohibition period (7 seconds) is set as the shortest period during which the ball can drop after the pitching press performance is executed, and the sum of the pitching press performance (1.5 seconds), the swinging ball drop prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball drop possible period (3 seconds) is set as the longest period during which the ball can drop after the pitching press performance is executed, which is 11.5 seconds.

Then, during the pitching press performance when the rotating member 640 is moving at a slow speed, the pockets that fall within the range of 10 to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press performance is executed are the pockets 10 and 11 pockets ahead of the pocket in the current falling position, so by determining whether the pocket stored in the falling position storage area 223ex obtained in the processing of S6402 is 10 or 11 pockets ahead of the current pocket obtained in the processing of S6403, it is determined whether the current timing is right to pitch (S6404).

If it is not currently possible to pitch (S6404: No), this process ends. In order to shorten the time until it is determined in the process of S6404 that it is currently possible to pitch, in this fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to high (500 pps (the time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)) until the pitch press effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is currently possible to pitch (S6404: Yes), the rotation speed of the rotating member is set to low (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket is 1 second)) (S6405), the pitch press effect is displayed (S6406), the pitch press effect in progress flag 223cx is set to on (S6407), and this process ends.

Meanwhile, in the process of S6401, if the pitch press performance in progress flag 223cx is on (S6401: Yes), then it is determined whether a button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408). If the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is the pitching permitted period (the period from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the pitch press performance is executed) (S6409), and if it is not the pitching permitted period (S6409: No), the delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to on (S6410) and this process ends. If it is the pitching permitted period (S6409: Yes), a pitch performance command is set (S6411), and the process proceeds to S6414.

On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if the button is not pressed (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current pitching permissible period is set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to on (S6412). If the current pitching permissible period is set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the process of S6411 is executed and the process moves to S6414. On the other hand, if the current pitching permissible period is not or the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to OFF (S6412: No), it is determined whether the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413). If the pitch press effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), this process is ended, and if the pitch press effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

In the process of S6414, the pitching action of the pitching position is set (S6414), the pitch press performance in progress flag 223cx, the pitch press performance setting flag 223bx, and the delayed pitch flag 223dx are set to OFF (S6415), a swing performance is set (S6416), the swing undetected flag 223v and the swing performance flag 223ev are set to ON (S6417), and then this process ends.

In this way, in this fifth control example, the player is configured to be able to set the operation timing of the ball throwing device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if the player can determine the pocket into which ball B will fall by himself, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, in this control example, the period during which throwing of ball B is permitted (the latter 1.5 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the period during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid (3 seconds). If the frame button 22 is operated during the first 1.5 seconds during which throwing of ball B is permitted, the throwing of ball B is delayed until the start of the period during which throwing of ball B is permitted. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden of control to drop ball B into a predetermined pocket while making it appear as if the player can determine the pocket into which ball B will fall by himself.

In addition, the period during which the ball can fall while swinging is longer (3 seconds) than the difference period (1.5 seconds) in the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. Since the configuration is such that the ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket at any timing when the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the precision with which the ball B is dropped into a predetermined pocket.

In the fifth control example, the pitch pressing effect is executed when the timing for pitching is reached based on the information in the falling position storage area 223ex and the information in the rotation position storage area 223u, so the roulette It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of ball B in a chance performance.

Furthermore, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to high speed (500 pps (time required to move one pocket) is 0.25 seconds) and low speed (125 pps (time required to move one pocket is 1 second)). The rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that it is the pitching timing. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period until it is determined that it is a pitchable timing, and to smoothly perform the roulette chance effect.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a low speed during the period from when the throwing press effect, in which the player can operate the frame button 22, is executed until the swing effect in which the throwing device 650 throws the ball B ends. This allows the player to carefully watch the roulette chance effect, enhancing the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224, we will explain the winning pocket allocation process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example.

The win pocket distribution process 5 in this fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the win pocket distribution process in the first control example (see FIG. 160). Note that the same parts as in the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the winning pocket allocation process 5 in this fifth control example, a process for presetting a pocket into which the ball B falls in the roulette chance performance is executed. When the win pocket distribution process 5 is executed, first, after executing the process of S3101 in the same way as the win pocket distribution process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 160), it is determined whether the next hold is a jackpot or not. (S3121). If the next hold is a jackpot (S3121: Yes), one of the read pockets is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process moves to S3104.

On the other hand, in the process of S3121, if the next hold is not a jackpot (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the first control example described above is set. The processes of S3104 and S3105 are executed similarly to the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160). After that, the hit position is read from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), and a position that is not a hit position or a fall position is selected as an additional position (S3125), and then the win pocket distribution process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 160) ), the processes of S3109 and S3110 are executed. After executing the process in S3110, the process returns to S3104 and the subsequent processes are repeated.

In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is configured to predetermine the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined falling position as a winning position (whether to light it up or not) according to the lottery result of the special symbol. This simplifies the control process because the ball B only needs to be dropped into a predetermined pocket.

Note that in this fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, but it may be configured to store multiple consecutive pockets in the drop position storage area 223ex.

Next, special drawing 2 winning command processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 225. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in this fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the special figure 2 winning command process in the first control example (see FIG. 161). . In addition, the same parts as the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In this fifth control example, the special chart 2 winning command process 5 executes a process to change the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex to a winning pocket when a winning command that wins a jackpot is output during the increase effect executed during the "preparation mode."

When the special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed similarly to the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above. In the process of S3201, if the increasing performance flag 223cv is off (S3201: No), the process moves to S3213. If the increasing performance flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), the falling position is read from the falling position storage area 223ex (S3221), and then a jackpot occurs during time saving (while the time saving state counter is larger than 0). It is determined whether or not there is a winning prize (S3222). If the prize is a jackpot during the time saving (S3222: Yes), the falling position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process moves to S3212.

On the other hand, if the process of S3222 does not result in a win that would result in a jackpot during the time-saving period (S3222: No), the winning position is read from the winning position storage area 223k (S3224), a position different from the winning position and the drop position is selected as the added position (S3225), and the process proceeds to S3212. After that, the processes of S3212 and S3213 are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to move as an effect suggesting the likelihood that the lottery result for the special symbol will be a jackpot. Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Some such gaming machines are capable of executing a wide variety of performance actions by operating multiple variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased to improve the performance effect, various problems arise, such as increased power consumption, an increased failure rate due to an increased number of parts, an increase in the cost of the gaming machine, and complicated wiring.

In contrast, in this control example, the flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a during a jackpot game to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged in a position that is visible to the player (on the left side of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front). This flow path (first passage forming member 520) is configured to be able to swing between a position (connected position) for discharging the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a during a jackpot game and an origin position (disconnected position). And, as a type of entertainment effect (an effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot) that is executed during normal times (when not in a jackpot), a movable effect that swings the flow path is configured to be executable. In other words, the flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the prize balls is configured to be used for entertainment effects as well. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive increase in the number of parts (variable components), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10, reducing the failure rate and cost, and simplifying the routing of wiring, etc.

In addition, in this control example, as an interesting performance using the flow path (first passage forming member 520), a first left swing performance in which the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position and then returns to the release position, and a second left swing performance in which the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the connection position and then returns to the release position are provided. The second left swing performance is configured to be more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot compared to the first left swing performance, and less likely to be selected when the lottery result is a miss. In other words, the second left swing performance, in which the amount of movement of the first passage forming member 520 is greater, is configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot compared to the first left swing performance. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 starts to move, the player can observe the movement in the hope that it will move to the connection position. This can increase the player's interest in the "consecutive win mode".

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that the falling position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance production is determined in advance at one location. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined falling position as a winning position (whether to light it up or not) according to the lottery result of the special symbol. This simplifies the control process because the ball B only needs to be dropped into a predetermined pocket.

In addition, in this control example, the roulette chance performance is configured to provide a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted (for example, 3 seconds for one roulette chance performance), and the throwing device 650 is configured to throw ball B when it is detected that the player has operated the frame button 22. In addition, during the period during which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a throwing press performance (see FIG. 216) is executed to encourage the player to press the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by this throwing press performance, ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650. This allows the player to throw ball B into the rotating member 640 at any timing, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the roulette chance performance.

In the fifth control example, one pocket into which the ball B is dropped is predefined, but it is not necessarily limited to one. A section in which a plurality of pockets are consecutive may be defined as the position into which the ball B is dropped, and the ball B is dropped into any of the pockets that make up the section. This configuration increases the degree of freedom in dropping the ball B compared to limiting the position into only one pocket. That is, if it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion is relatively large (for example, exceeds 1 second) at the stage where the ball B enters the section into which the ball B is dropped, the ball B can be dropped after the period becomes small by dropping the ball B into a pocket located at the rear of the section. Conversely, if it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion is too small (for example, 0.5 seconds or less) at the stage where the ball B enters the section into which the ball B is dropped, the ball B can be dropped before the ball B comes to a complete standstill by dropping the ball B into a pocket located at the front of the section.

In this fifth control example, before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed at the drop position, the period of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes less than or equal to the predetermined period (0.2 seconds). Although the configuration is such that a special effect is performed when the target falls, the target pocket may be placed at the falling position before a predetermined cycle (0.2 seconds) elapses. More specifically, for example, at the start of the roulette chance performance, the pocket in which ball B can fall is predicted based on the time until the pitch pressing performance starts and the pocket currently placed at the falling position. However, it may be determined whether the pocket matches the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. If it is expected that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can be dropped and the drop position storage area 223ex are calculated. Based on the position of the stored pocket, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 may be changed so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed in the drop position at the timing when the pocket can be dropped. good. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to changing the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitch pressing effect may be changed. That is, by varying the timing at which the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, the timing is adjusted so that the ball B can be dropped at the timing when the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed at the drop position. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 233. In the above-described first control example, by displaying symbols (numbers) on each of the display sections 331a to 331d of the presentation section 331, notification as to whether or not it is a jackpot is executed. The third symbol display device 81 was basically used to display an interesting effect, the number of balls on hold, and a breakdown of the symbols (lucky numbers) that will result in a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be capable of dynamically displaying identification information (variable display of decorative symbols) indicating the lottery results of special symbols. This variable display of decorative symbols is executed regardless of the mode, and is executed in response to the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, so the lottery result of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode. .

The pachinko machine 10 in this sixth control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be able to display decorative symbols, and the sound lamp control The configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the device 113 have been partially changed, and some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 226 and Fig. 227, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described. Fig. 226(a) is a diagram showing the display contents when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in "normal mode" and a decorative pattern (third pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Fig. 226(a), when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in "normal mode", a variable display of the pattern is executed in the display units 331a to 331d, as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, a variable display of the decorative pattern (third pattern) is executed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 formed in a horizontally elongated approximately rectangular shape on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the third pattern display device 81.

More specifically, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed in this variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In each pattern row, decorative patterns (third patterns) with any number from 0 to 9 are displayed in a specified order (descending or ascending order of numbers). These three pattern rows are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern row, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the middle pattern row and the right pattern row. In this variable display of decorative patterns, a jackpot is indicated by the decorative patterns (third patterns) with the same number being stopped and displayed in each pattern row. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative patterns (third patterns) stopped and displayed in each pattern row is a decorative pattern (third pattern) with a different number, it indicates that the lottery for this special pattern is a miss. The variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 is configured to be smaller in area than each of the display units 331a to 331d. Therefore, the player can check the lottery results for the special symbols by the variable display executed on each of the display units 331a to 331d.

Further, FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the variable display corresponding to the removal of the special symbol ends in the "normal mode" and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226(b), when the variable time of the variable display executed in the "normal mode" has elapsed, the numbers (symbols) stop one by one on the display sections 331a to 331d, similarly to the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, decorative symbols (third symbols) are stopped and displayed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81 in combination with a miss. In the example of FIG. 226(b), the decorative pattern with the number "6" attached to the left symbol column is stopped and displayed, the symbol column with the number "4" attached to the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed, and the symbol column with the number "4" attached to the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed. The symbol row with the number "3" attached thereto is stopped and displayed. By displaying a decorative pattern (third pattern) with a different number, it can be shown that the lottery result of the special pattern was a loss.

Next, display contents in the "preparation mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 227(a) and 227(b). FIG. 227(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of decorative symbols (third symbols). As shown in FIG. 227(a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the "preparation mode", the decorative symbol (the third symbol ) is displayed. This indicates that it is changing.

Further, FIG. 227(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variable time has elapsed in the "preparation mode" and the decorative pattern (third pattern) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 227(b), the decorative pattern (third pattern) is stopped and displayed in a display area different from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. FIG. 227(b) is an example in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper left area Dq1 of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this example, in the upper left area Dq1, a decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the left symbol column is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol with the number "8" attached to the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed, A decorative pattern with the number "9" attached to the right pattern row is stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of decorative symbols is performed in a different display area from the variable display, so that it is difficult to recognize the number of time savings in the current "preparation mode" from the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. This is to do so. If a configuration is adopted in which variable display and stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the "preparation mode", the variable display time of the decorative symbols executed in the "preparation mode" can be easily determined by observing the variable display area Dd1. will be recognized. As described above, in the "preparation mode" where the time period is once, the long variation A with a variation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" where the time period is 7 times, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see Figure 112), and in the case of a miss, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. A middle variation of seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative pattern does not stop displaying after 3 seconds have passed after the start of the "continuous winning mode suggestion performance" (if long variation A is selected), it is likely that there is a jackpot or the time period is 1. This is set only once, and it is determined that this is the case when the special symbol is missed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be drawn out and the lottery will shift to the "normal mode" after the change, so there is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the subsequent "success mode suggestion performance". There is. Furthermore, if the 1st to 6th special symbol lottery in the "preparation mode" with a time period of 7 times is a loss, the middle variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the 2nd to 6th fluctuation display, it is a jackpot even without checking the performance result of "Succession mode suggestion performance" (with a probability of 97.5%) It can be recognized as ``transitioning to consecutive home mode''). For this reason, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to the "successive game mode", and the player may feel that there is no need to check the "successive game mode suggestion performance" thereafter.

In contrast to this, in this control example, the stopped display of the decorative patterns is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who checks the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not a stopped display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to predict whether or not there will be a transition to "consecutive wins mode" before checking the result of the "consecutive wins mode suggestion performance", so that the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the very end while the "consecutive wins mode suggestion performance" is being executed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to make the timing of stop display more difficult to understand, during the execution of long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds), a decorative symbol is displayed every time a fluctuation display is performed for 3 seconds. The display position is switched to a display area different from the variable display area Dd1 (for example, the upper left area Dq1). This state in which the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the display position is switched to the variable display area Dd1 again. That is, the variable display for 3 seconds in the variable display area Dd1 and the variable display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from the variable display area Dd1 (such as the upper left area Dq1) are repeated. Therefore, even if we focus on the break in the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is possible to determine whether the break is due to a stop display or whether it is set periodically in the long variations A to G. It can be difficult to do so. Therefore, it is made more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", thereby making it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the game will shift to the "consecutive game mode". Therefore, during the execution of the "successive game mode suggestion performance", the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the end.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the upper left area Dq1, a plurality of display areas for displaying the stop patterns are provided. Specifically, an upper right area Dq2 (see the upper right dotted area in FIG. 227(b)) formed on the upper right side of the third pattern display device 81 and a lower left area Dq3 (see the lower left dotted area in FIG. 227(b)) formed on the lower left side of the third pattern display device 81 are provided. When a stop display of a decorative pattern is performed in the "preparation mode" (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), and when the position for performing the fluctuation display during the execution of long fluctuation A to G is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1, one display area is selected by lottery from among these three types of display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the display content (whether it is stopped or fluctuating) when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 to another display area. This makes it more difficult to tell whether the decorative symbols are displayed in the "preparation mode", making it harder for the player to predict whether the game will move to the "consecutive mode". This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation until the very end while the "consecutive mode suggestion" is being played.

In addition, in this control example, although the variable display area Dd1 was provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, it is not limited to this and may be placed at any position. In addition, in this control example, when performing a stop display in the "preparation mode" and when switching the display position from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of long fluctuations A to G, the upper left area Dq1 and the upper right area are used as display areas. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, the number is not limited to three types. A configuration may be adopted in which more display areas are provided or fewer display areas may be provided. Furthermore, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

In this control example, when the display is switched to a stationary display or changing display in an area other than the changing display area Dd1, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the changing display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved), but this is not limited to the above. For example, even after the display position is switched, a pseudo changing display may be performed in the changing display area Dd1. This makes it appear as if the changing display is always continuing during the "preparation mode" when focusing on the changing display area Dd1, regardless of whether it is a stationary display or changing, making it more difficult to tell whether the decorative pattern is a stationary display in the "preparation mode".

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229. FIG. 228(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228(a), the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118(a)). This symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used to select the display area after switching when the stop display or variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the "preparation mode". The details of this symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 228(b).

FIG. 228(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the symbol position selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 228(b), in the symbol position selection table 222h, the display position of the decorative symbol (stopped display or variable display) is defined for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. Note that the display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated regularly or irregularly within the range of "0 to 99".

In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left area Dq1 is associated with the value of the display position selection counter 223ay in the range of "0 to 39". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the display position selection counter 223ay can take, 40 from "0 to 39" are associated with each other, so the decorative pattern can be moved from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. The probability (ratio) that the upper left area Dq1 will be selected when switching (moving) to another area is 40% (40/100).

The upper right area Dq2 is associated with the range of the value of the display position selection counter 223ay from "40 to 79." Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the display position selection counter 223ay, 40 of the values from "40 to 79" are associated with it, so when switching (moving) the decorative pattern from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, the probability (proportion) that the upper right area Dq2 will be selected is 40% (40/100).

Furthermore, the lower left area Dq3 is associated with the range of the value of the display position selection counter 223ay from "80 to 99". Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the display position selection counter 223ay can take, 20 of "80 to 99" are associated with it, so the probability (ratio) of the lower left area Dq3 being selected when switching (moving) the decorative pattern from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area is 20% (20/100). The reason why the probability (ratio) of only the lower left area Dq3 being selected is high is because only this area is at the same eye level as the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 for the player, so there is a possibility that it will be visible when the player is focusing on the variable display area Dd1. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left area Dq3, which is relatively easy to see, is lowered to make it difficult to see the display content when the display position of the decorative pattern is switched. On the other hand, the ratio is not set to 0 in order to make it difficult to predict the display position after the switch. In other words, the more display position candidates there are, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the display position after the switch, making it more difficult to visually recognize the state of the decorative pattern (static display or variable display) after the display position is switched.

In this way, by switching the display position of the decorative symbols using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is possible to predict whether or not to shift to the "long shot mode" before the result of the "long shot mode suggestion effect" is announced. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the ``repeat mode suggesting production'' until the end.

Next, referring to FIG. 229, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example in that a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage area 223cy are provided.

The display position selection counter 223ay is used to select the display area in which the decorative pattern is to be displayed from the above-mentioned pattern position selection table 222h. This display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of "0 to 99", and is updated by one between the processing of S1616 and the processing of S1617 of the main processing, for example. As described above, when switching (moving) the decorative pattern from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, if the value of this display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left area Dq1 is selected as the area in which the decorative pattern is to be displayed. Also, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "40 to 79", the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area in which the decorative pattern is to be displayed, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area in which the decorative pattern is to be displayed.

The display time timer 223by is a timer that measures the elapsed time from when the decorative pattern (third pattern) is displayed in one area (variable display area Dd1, upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, or lower left area Dq3) in the "preparation mode". The initial value of this display time timer 223by is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) during the variation of the decorative pattern in the "preparation mode" (see S6503 in FIG. 231). The display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), so the display time timer 223by counts up every 1 millisecond. In addition, this display time timer 223by is reset to 0 every time the area (display position) in which the decorative pattern is displayed is switched (see S6510, S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of this display time timer 223by, when 3 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern was displayed in the variable display area Dd1, the decorative pattern is switched to another display position (display area). Also, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern was displayed in the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3, the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern is switched to the variable display area Dd1.

The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the current display position (area) of the decorative pattern is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3. This display position storage area 223cy stores one of four values from "00H" to "03H". If "00H" is stored, it indicates the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. If "01H" is stored, it indicates the upper left area Dq1. If "02H" is stored, it indicates the upper right area Dq2. If "03H" is stored, it indicates the lower left area Dq3. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative pattern is determined based on the value (elapsed time) of the display time timer 223by described above and the value stored in this display position storage area 223cy. That is, if three seconds have passed with "00H" stored in this display position storage area 223cy, the decorative pattern is switched to another display position (display area). In addition, if 0.5 seconds have elapsed with any of "01H" to "03H" stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern will be switched to the variable display area Dd1.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, with reference to FIG. 230, main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. This main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

In the main processing 6 in the sixth control example (see FIG. 230), steps S1601 to S1614 and steps S1616 to S1621 are the same as steps S1601 to S1614 and steps S1616 to S1621 in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 145). In the main processing 6 in the second control example (see FIG. 230), when the processing of S1613 is completed, a display position selection process is executed (S1661) to select the display position of the decorative pattern depending on the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the "preparation mode", and the process proceeds to S1614. Details of this display position selection process (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Furthermore, in main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in this control example, when the processing in S1614 is completed, variable display setting processing 6 is executed in place of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). This variable display setting process 6 performs a display variation based on a variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute a variable display of identification information (symbols) in the production unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. This is the process of generating and setting pattern commands. Details of this variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the variable display setting process 6 ends, the process moves to S1616, and thereafter the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

Next, the above-mentioned display position selection process (S1661) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 231. As described above, this display position selection process (S1661) is a process for selecting the display position of the decorative pattern in accordance with the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the "preparation mode."

When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) starts, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6501). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S6501: No), this means that the current mode is not "preparation mode" (it is "normal mode" or "consecutive mode"), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6501: Yes), this means that the current mode is "preparation mode" and there is a possibility that the display position of the decorative pattern may be changed, so it is next determined whether the decorative pattern is currently being displayed in a variable manner (S6502). If it is determined in the process of S6502 that the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner (S6502: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6502 that the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503), and information indicating the current display position (display area) is read from the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

Next, based on the information read in the process of S6504, it is determined whether the current decorative pattern display position (display area) is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (whether the read value is "00H"). (S6505), and if the display position of the decorative pattern is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the display position of the decorative pattern became the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In the process of S6506, if it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by has reached 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read (S6507), and the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is selected. The display position of is specified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area where the decorative pattern is displayed, and the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "40 to 79". If it is within the range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area where the decorative pattern is displayed, and if it is within the range "80 to 99", the lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area where the decorative pattern is displayed (see figure 228(b)).

When the process of S6508 is completed, the display position of the decorative pattern is then switched to the display position specified in the process of S6508 (S6509). Further, in accordance with this switching, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated. That is, when switched to the upper left area Dq1, it is updated to "01H", when switched to the upper right area Dq2, it is updated to "02H", and when switched to the lower left area Dq3, it is updated to "03H". Ru. After the process of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this process ends. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative pattern is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative pattern is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed. be able to.

On the other hand, in the process of S6506, if it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), there is no need to switch the display position, so each process of S6507 to S6510 is skipped and the main text is displayed. Finish the process.

In addition, in the process of S6505, it is determined that the current display position of the decorative pattern is not in the variable display area Dd1 (one of "01H" to "03H" is stored in the display position storage area 223cy). If so (S6505: No), then it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the display position of the decorative pattern was switched to any one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3.

In the process of S6511, if it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative pattern is switched to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6512), and the display "00H" indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored in the position storage area 223cy. Then, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6513), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6511, if it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), there is no need to switch the display position of the decorative pattern to the variable display area Dd1, so the processes of S6512 and S6513 are skipped. Then, this process ends.

By executing this display position selection process (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the "preparation mode", the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display Fluctuation display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from area Dd1 (either upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, or lower left area Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if we focus on the break in the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is possible to determine whether the break is due to a stop display or whether it is set periodically in the long fluctuations A to G. It can be difficult to do so. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", thereby making it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the game will shift to the "consecutive game mode". Therefore, during the execution of the "successive game mode suggestion performance", the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the end.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 232. This variable display setting process 6 (S1662) is one of the main processes 6 (see FIG. 230), and as described above, the variation of the identification information (symbols) in the production section 331 and the third symbol display device 81. In order to generate and set a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the display, this is executed in place of the variation display process in the first control example (see FIG. 162). be done.

In this variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232), each of the processes S3301 to S3310 is the same as each of the processes S3301 to S3310 in the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 162). In addition, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in this control example, when the process of S3309 is completed, a stop position selection process is executed (S3331) to select the display position at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", and the process proceeds to S3310. Details of this stop position selection process (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG. 233.

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing details of this stop position selection process (S3331). When this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, it is first determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601), and if the value is 0 (S6601), the current means that it is not in the "preparation mode", and there is no need to change the position where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position, so the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6601: Yes), this means that the current mode is "preparation mode", so next, the pattern position selection table 222h is read (S6602) and the display position of the decorative pattern corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is specified (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, if it is in the range of "40 to 79", the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative pattern (see FIG. 228(b)). When the process of S6603 is completed, the display position of the decorative pattern is then switched to the display position specified in the process of S6603 (S6604), and this process is terminated.

By executing this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233), the decorative pattern can be displayed stopped at a different display position (display area) from the variable display, making it difficult for a player checking the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not a stop display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to predict whether or not a transition will occur to "consecutive wins mode" before checking the result of the "consecutive wins mode suggestion performance", so the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the very end during the execution of the "consecutive wins mode suggestion performance".

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to display the special symbol lottery results (variable display of decorative symbols) in the variable display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81. There is. Thereby, regardless of the mode, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stopped symbols.

In addition, in this control example, in the "preparation mode", the decorative pattern is displayed in a different display position from the variable display area Dd1. If the variable display and the stopped display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the "preparation mode", the variable display time of the decorative pattern executed in the "preparation mode" can be easily recognized by observing the variable display area Dd1. As described above, in the "preparation mode" with a one-time time period, regardless of the result of the lottery for the special pattern, the long variable A with a variable time of 90 seconds is selected (see Figures 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" with a seven-time time period, in the case of a big win of the special pattern, the long variable A with a variable time of 90 seconds is selected (see Figure 112), and in the case of a miss, the middle variable with a variable time of 3 seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative pattern is not displayed in a stopped state 3 seconds after the start of the "consecutive mode suggestion performance" (if the long variable A is selected), it is determined that it is a big win, or that the time period is set only once and the special pattern is a miss. In this case, the special symbol will not be drawn and the possibility of transitioning to "normal mode" after the change will increase, so there is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the "consecutive mode suggestion effect" that follows. Also, if the first to sixth special symbol drawings in the "preparation mode" with a seven-time period are not drawn, a middle change with a change time of three seconds will be selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the change continues for three seconds or more in the second to sixth change displays, it can be recognized as a big win (97.5% probability of transitioning to "consecutive mode") without checking the result of the "consecutive mode suggestion effect". For this reason, there is a high probability of transitioning to "consecutive mode", and the player may feel that there is no need to check the subsequent "consecutive mode suggestion effect".

On the other hand, in this control example, the static display of the decorative pattern is executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has checked the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to "Continued home mode" before checking the result of "Continued home mode suggestion performance", so while the "Continued home mode suggestion performance" is being executed, It is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in this control example, in order to make it more difficult to understand the timing of stop display, during the execution of long fluctuations A to G, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the area different from the fluctuation display area Dd1. The display is configured such that a 0.5 second fluctuating display in (upper left area Dq1, etc.) is repeated. Therefore, even if we focus on the break in the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is possible to determine whether the break is due to a stop display or whether it is set periodically in the long fluctuations A to G. It can be difficult to do so. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", thereby making it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the game will shift to the "consecutive game mode". Therefore, during the execution of the "successive game mode suggestion performance", the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the end.

In the sixth control example, when it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern variable display was executed in the variable display area Dd1 in the "preparation mode," a lottery (determination) is performed to determine which display position the decorative pattern will be switched to (either the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3), but this is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the decorative pattern variable display may be specified for each variable pattern (variable time), including the display position over time. Specifically, for example, when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is notified from the main control device 110, the display mode of the current fluctuation display may be selected from a mode in which the display position switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 is in the order of upper left area Dq1 → upper right area Dq2 → lower left area Dq3 → upper left area Dq1 → ..., and a mode in which the display area is in the order of lower left area Dq3 → upper right area Dq2 → upper left area Dq1 → lower left area Dq3 → .... That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, it is sufficient to specify a plurality of variations of display modes in which the display positions of the decorative patterns are different as the mode of the fluctuation display of the decorative patterns. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to execute a process for drawing (determining) the display position every time time passes, so the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the variable display area Dd1 is located at the bottom right of the third pattern display device 81, but it is not limited to this and can be located at any position. Also, in this control example, three types of display areas, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3, are provided as display areas when performing a stop display in the "preparation mode" and when switching the display position from the variable display area Dd1 during the execution of long variations A to G, but this is not limited to three types. A configuration with more or fewer display areas may be provided. The layout of each display area may also be determined arbitrarily.

In this control example, the display position of the decorative pattern is switched 3 seconds after the decorative pattern is displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (at the timing of stop display or during variable display). It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 is changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and the normal size display mode for 3 seconds and the reduced display mode for 0.5 seconds may be repeated. When performing a reduced display, the display may be reduced to a size that is difficult for the player to see (for example, 1 mm in height x 1 mm in width). By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to see whether the decorative pattern is displayed statically or in a variable manner while it is being displayed in a reduced size, so the display position of the decorative pattern can be changed. It is possible to achieve the same effect as when changing. Further, since the lottery (discrimination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after switching the display position, a pseudo variable display may be performed in the variable display area Dd1. As a result, when paying attention to the variable display area Dd1, regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or is changing, it looks as if the variable display is always continuing during the "preparation mode". To make it more difficult to tell whether a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode".

In this control example, the decorative pattern is configured to move to another display position (display area) when three seconds have passed since the decorative pattern changing display was displayed in the changing display area Dd1, but the display time of the decorative pattern in the changing display area Dq1 is not limited to three seconds and may be set arbitrarily.

In this control example, the decorative pattern is configured to be displayed for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds at any of the four display positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display position (fluctuating display or stationary display) of the decorative symbols in the "preparation mode" may always be moved at high speed. Further, the moving direction may also be configured to have a random appearance. With this configuration, it is possible to make the decorative patterns difficult to visually recognize, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from predicting the result of the "successive game mode suggestion performance". Therefore, it is possible to have the player confirm the ``successful game mode suggestion effect'' until the end with a sense of anticipation.

In each of the above control examples, after the ball B is rocked at the top of the holding piece 677 (or holding piece 6770) in the "successive shot mode suggestion performance", it is placed in the pocket of the type corresponding to the current performance result. However, the configuration for identifying the pocket indicating the performance result is not limited to the ball B made of a sphere. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a doll imitating a character that appears in some performances of the pachinko machine 10 is dropped into a pocket corresponding to the performance result. In this case, instead of performing a swinging motion on the upper part of the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll imitating a character is suspended with a string or the like above the falling position and a pendulum-like swinging action is performed. You can let them do it. Then, when the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion becomes less than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the doll may be dropped into a pocket of a type corresponding to the current performance result. With this configuration, even if a non-spherical doll is used, the performance result can be clearly notified in the same way as when the ball B is used. In addition, after the performance ends, the doll imitating the character is collected in the same way as ball B, and by returning it to the hanging state, it is possible to perform a performance in which the doll falls in each "repeat mode suggestion performance". may be configured.

In each of the control examples described above, plate-like members with numbers attached thereto are used as the pockets P1 to P30, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced with an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like. That is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be enlarged and a roulette image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby executing the “successive winning mode suggestion performance”. In this case, the ball B may also be replaced with an image. That is, in the "successive shot mode suggestion performance", the series of performances in which ball B is pitched, swings on the holding piece 677, and then falls into one of the pockets are all performed by the third symbol display device. The configuration may be such that the process is executed using a video (image) displayed on the screen 81. With this configuration, the rotating member 640, the holding piece 677, the ball B, the pitching device 650, etc. can be omitted. Therefore, by reducing the number of parts, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the upper end portion (radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 is open on the side where balls are supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and is open on the side where the balls are supplied. The opposite side may operate in a manner of closing the lid. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign objects other than balls from entering the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

In the above embodiments, the connecting member 424 abuts against the first passage forming member 520 and rotates, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the connecting member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the number of parts required to connect the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be reduced, thereby reducing product costs. Also, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be disposed instead of the connecting member 424. In this case, the first passage forming member 520 abuts against the rubber-like elastic body, causing deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body, thereby absorbing misalignment between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

In the above embodiments, the case where the driving side slide member 420 is driven by a single rack 452 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack that drives the driving side slide member 420 may be configured to be composed of two layers, front and rear, and the driving side slide member 420 may be moved up and down by the front rack, or the driving side slide member 420 may be moved up and down by the rear rack. In this case, by making only one of the two layers of racks abut the driven side slide member 430 at the top and bottom, it is possible to switch between the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 moving up and down in conjunction with each other, and the driving side slide member 420 passing through the driven side slide member 430 and moving up and down independently.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b extend outward from the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b may be recessed toward the center of the circle formed by the root of the other gear tooth, and the other may be extended by that amount.

In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that contacts the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape is formed and the portion contacts the contact portion 351b.

In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that makes surface contact with the abutting portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which no tooth shape is formed, but the portion is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially cutting gear teeth in a tooth-shaped portion.

In each of the above embodiments, the entire overlapping portion of the abutment portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b is in surface contact, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion recessed toward the rotation axis at the intermediate position of the abutment portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

In the above first embodiment, the left and right rise-regulating members 417 come into contact with the driving side slide member 420 at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the left and right rise-regulating members 417 may come into contact with the driving side slide member 420. In this case, an asymmetric load can be applied to the driving side slide member 420, and tilting of the driving side slide member 420 can be suppressed even if the center of gravity of the driving side slide member 420 is biased to either the left or right (either the left or right).

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which a blower device is disposed to send air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the proximal end side, or a mode in which a magnetic force generating device is disposed at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 to attract the ball with magnetic force. Alternatively, the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the second embodiment described above, in the released state, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the tip side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first passage forming member 2520 may have a middle portion that sinks between the base end and the tip end (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, if a ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be retained in the middle portion (a position closer to the tip end than the base end), so that when the state changes to the connected state, the time until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 can be shortened.

In the third embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the descending regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are disposed on one side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the descent regulation member 415 and the rise regulation member 417 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the base member 410, the elastic modulus of the torsion springs 415d and 417g that bias the descent regulation member 415 and the rise regulation member 417 are set to the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged and the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side in front view is higher than that of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left side in front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to make the coefficient small. In this case, the load that causes the driven side slide member 3430 to change its posture counterclockwise when viewed from the front (the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the deviation of the center of gravity) by the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 disposed on the right side is When the driven slide member 3430 changes its posture in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to a sudden vertical movement of the driven slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the driven slide member 430 falls after the drive slide member 420 is placed in the lowered position, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the driven slide member 430 may be dropped while the drive slide member 420 is placed at an intermediate position. In this state, control may be performed in such a manner that the drive-side slide member 420 is moved in the opposite direction to the operating direction of the driven-side slide member 430 (control that repeatedly switches between the raising operation and the lowering operation). In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in which the driving side sliding member 420 causes the driven side sliding member 430 to bounce (repeatedly rebounding, etc.).

In the above embodiments, the split member DV in a state in which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV in a state in which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 may be driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. In this case, the interval between the split member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent split member DV is widened, so that interference between the adjacent split member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 can be suppressed, and the diameters of these one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the driving torque applied to the split member DV (rotating member 640) from the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV overlaps with the period during which the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the driven portion 641 of the divided member DV (see FIG. 75). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and during a period during which either the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other may be disengaged, and during a period during which either the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, one may be disengaged.

In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 from simultaneously engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. In other words, it is possible to alternately engage the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the engaged portion 641. This makes it possible to stabilize the displacement of the rotating member 640.

That is, a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other-side rotational drive member 638 due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, drive tolerances of the drive motor 631, etc.; In the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotational driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotational driving member 638 simultaneously engage the respective divided members DV. If a phase shift occurs while the rotating member 640 is engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 will be in a compressed state and the other section will be in a tensile state, making the displacement of the rotating member 640 unstable. becomes.

In response to this, as described above, by configuring the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 to alternately engage with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, even if a phase shift occurs, the influence of this can be avoided on the rotating member 640. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting multiple divided members DV, its displacement can be stabilized.

In each of the above embodiments, the divided members DV are connected endlessly in the rotation unit 600, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and it is of course possible to connect the divided members DV with ends (connecting the divided members DV from one end to the other end and leaving the one end and the other end unconnected). In this case, for example, the divided members DV connected with ends may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above embodiments, or the divided members DV connected with ends may be displaced (moved) back and forth along the track with ends.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the installation location of gaming machines can be solved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure in which rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive means, and a displacement member that is displaced between a raised position and a lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear, and a second gear meshed with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member than the first gear in the transmission path of the driving force, The gear includes a contact portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is in the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A1 characterized in that rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by contacting the second gear.

Here, a gaming machine includes a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between a raised position and a lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the drive means is converted into linear movement of the rack, and the linear movement of the rack moves the displacement member up and down between the lowered position and the raised position. There are some (Patent Document 1: For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-80941). In this case, when the driving force of the driving means is released while the displacement member is placed in the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continue applying the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem in that energy consumption increases when holding the displacement member in the raised position. On the other hand, by interposing a crank mechanism in a part of the drive means and utilizing the dead center of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from the raised position by its own weight even when the driving force of the drive means is released. A structure is also known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there was a problem that the entire transmission member became larger due to the interposition of the crank mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the first gear is provided with an abutting portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the first gear is in contact with the abutting portion. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is regulated by the predetermined teeth of the second gear coming into contact with the It can prevent it from being lowered by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position can be suppressed. In addition, the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to provide a separate crank mechanism, so the transmission member can be made smaller. can.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A1, the second gear has a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the receiving portion of the second gear abuts against the abutment portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving part of the second gear comes into contact with the contacting part of the first gear, the second gear rotates in the direction in which the displacement member rises. In other words, when the displacement member is placed in the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both forward and reverse directions, causing rattling in the displacement member held in the raised position. can be restrained from doing so.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A1 or A2, when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the first gear is permitted to rotate in a direction that lowers the displacement member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction of lowering the displacement member. There is no need to perform a separate operation to release the contact between the contact part of the first gear and a predetermined tooth of the second gear, and by rotating the first gear with the driving force of the driving means, it can be moved to the raised position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is permitted. Therefore, when the displacement member attempts to descend under its own weight from the raised position, the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby regulating the rotation of the second gear and lowering the displacement member. can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed to be able to mesh with predetermined teeth of the second gear when the displacement member is rotated in a direction to raise the displacement member, and A game machine A4 characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear so that a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the tip surface of the tooth.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with the predetermined teeth of the second gear when the displacement member is rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member. In addition, the tooth height is lower than the teeth of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the tip surface of the tooth, so that the first gear moves in the direction of raising the displacement member. is rotated and the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member through the engagement of the contact portion and the predetermined teeth, and As a result, a state in which a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with a contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces a predetermined tooth of the second gear) is established. Can be formed reliably.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the contact portion of the first gear in gaming machine A4 has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact with each other. As much space as possible can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the tolerance can be made large). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

In addition, the abutment portion of the first gear is the portion that receives a specific tooth of the second gear and restricts the rotation of the second gear (i.e., supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is made large to ensure strength.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the contact portion of the first gear in the gaming machine A4 or A5 is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the first gear.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth tip surface curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear. can be achieved.

In addition, when the second gear rotates in a direction that lowers the displacement member and a specific tooth of the second gear abuts against the abutment portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear, the direction of the force acting from the specific tooth of the second gear to the abutment portion of the first gear is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, making it easier to prevent the first gear from rotating. As a result, it is easier to restrict the rotation of the second gear in the direction that lowers the displacement member, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, it is possible to reliably prevent the displacement member from descending under its own weight.

In gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the first gear is attached to the receiving portion of the second gear. A game machine A7 characterized in that rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member moves upward is restricted by contacting a contact portion of the gear.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the first gear Since the contact part of the gear comes into contact with the receiving part of the second gear, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted. It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after it is placed in the raised position.

In the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the receiving portion of the second gear is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the receiving portion of the second gear has a circular arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is curved into an arc shape with a diameter that is approximately the same as the shape.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A7, the receiving part of the second gear is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear on the side facing the contact part of the first gear, and the receiving part of the second gear is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear. Since it is curved into an arc shape with a diameter that is approximately the same as the arc shape of the abutting part of the gear, when the abutting part of the first gear comes into contact with the receiving part of the second gear, the two are brought into a plane. The abutting portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can reliably function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is placed in the raised position.

In addition, the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, so that the tooth height can be increased on both sides in the tooth thickness direction, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when it receives the abutting portion of the first gear.

In any of gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and A gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in the upward direction.

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed in the raised position, the engagement between the abutment portion of the first gear and a predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction. Therefore, after the displacement member is disposed in the raised position by rotating the first gear in a direction that raises the displacement member, the second gear can be stopped and only the first gear can be rotated in the direction that raises the displacement member. This reliably creates a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can abut against the abutment portion of the first gear (a state in which the abutment portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear).

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that connects the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A first passage member and a second passage member are formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and when at least the first passage member is displaced, one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communicating state in which the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are connected to each other. In the game machine, the first passage member or the second passage member is disposed displaceably at one end of one of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the first passage member or the second passage member A game machine B1 comprising a connecting member that communicates between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member when the two passage members are in contact with and are displaced.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first passage member and a second passage member that are formed to allow a ball to pass through, and that can form a connected state in which one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are connected to each other and a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member by displacing at least the first passage member, and a separated state in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member and the first passage member and the second passage member are not connected to each other (JP Patent Publication No. 2014-171636). In this case, due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of each part, it is inevitable that there will be variations in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member. Therefore, in the connected state, there is a positional deviation between the positions of one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, which makes it difficult to stably send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the state is arranged at one end of one of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is in a state where it is in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member and displaced. Since the connecting member is provided for communicating between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, even if the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are misaligned, one end of the first passage member and the second passage member can be connected to each other. Displacement can be absorbed by displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. This makes it possible to stabilize the ball being thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member comes into contact with the connecting member and displaces the connecting member, so the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force to cause the

In the gaming machine B1, the connection member has one side wall and the other side wall arranged opposite each other across an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall is located on the displacement trajectory of the first passage member, and when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member abuts against the one side wall of the connection member, the connection member is displaced and the other side wall of the connection member is brought into close proximity to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the gaming machine B2,

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member abuts against one side wall of the connecting member, the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, so that in the connected state, the one side wall and the other side wall of the connecting member can be brought closer to one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, making it easier to absorb positional deviations between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. As a result, the sending of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

In gaming machine B1 or B2, the first passage member is rotated with one end thereof as the rotation tip side to form the connected state, the connection member has a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member, and when the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member abuts against one side wall portion of the connection member, the connection member is rotated and the other side wall portion of the connection member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member. Gaming machine B3.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotating tip side, and the connecting member is connected to the first passage member. Since the rotation axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the member, the connection member can be smoothly displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member. Further, by utilizing the rotational movement of both, the other side wall portion of the connecting member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communicating state, one of the facing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is configured to allow the ball to pass from the first passage member to the second passage member. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the one opposing surface is used as a rolling surface when the ball is thrown, and in the communicating state is tilted downward from the first passage member to the second passage member.

Gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B2 and B3, can stabilize the throw of the ball at the communicating portion between one end of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, the communicating portion between one end of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation is large, making the throw of the ball unstable. However, one of the opposing surfaces forming the rolling surface of the ball at the communicating portion is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, so the ball can be rolled and the throw stabilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member. A game machine B5 characterized in that it includes a ball-throwing restricting means for restricting a ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are out of communication. When balls are supplied to the passage member, there is a risk that the balls that have passed through the first passage member may fall outside the gaming area. In addition, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the communication state, if the ball remains in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the released state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that has been stuck in the area may fall into the playing area. If the ball falls outside the gaming area, it may impede the movement of movable members such as gears and crank mechanisms, or the ball may become trapped, causing damage to the movable members.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communicating state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member. In addition, in the released state, there is provided a ball throwing restriction means that restricts the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first passage member, so that, for example, when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even if the ball remains in the first passage member and changes from the communicating state to the released state, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

A gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, which allows the passage of balls in the connected state and restricts the passage of balls in the released state, and the cover body forms the ball sending restriction means.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member as a ball-sending restriction means that allows the ball to pass in the connected state and restricts the ball from passing in the released state. Therefore, for example, even if a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or if the state transitions from the connected state to the released state while a ball remains in the first passage member, the ball can be prevented from falling out of the play area from one end of the first passage member.

A gaming machine B7 is characterized by having a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body to maintain the cover body in a position that restricts the passage of the ball in the gaming machine B5, and an acting member that acts on the cover body in response to the displacement of the first passage member to displace the cover body in a direction that allows the passage of the ball at least when the communication state is formed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, it is provided with a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body and maintains the cover body in a position that restricts the passage of the ball, so that the cover does not close in the released state. It is possible to prevent the body from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is established, the cover body is displaced in a direction that allows the ball to pass through, so that the ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In this case, the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the ball is accompanied by the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the acting member, so the drive means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the cover body, thereby enabling a reduction in product costs.

Examples of the acting member include a member that is located on the displacement trajectory of the cover body caused by the displacement of the first passage member, and that comes into contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory, thereby displacing the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through against the biasing force of the biasing member (for example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to the game board, etc.), and a member that transmits the driving force of the driving means that displaces the first passage member to the cover body, thereby displacing the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or rack and pinion that converts the driving means and driving force into rotational or linear motion and transmits it to the cover body).

Gaming machine B8 is characterized in that in gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restriction means places the first passage member in a position in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B5, the ball sending restriction means positions the first passage member in a position in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state, so that even if, for example, a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or the state transitions from the connected state to the released state while a ball remains in the first passage member, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the play area from one end of the first passage member.

In addition, when the first passage member is disposed in a position in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state, the entire first passage member does not need to be inclined upward, and a part of the first passage member may have an area that is horizontal or inclined downward.

In the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restriction means is arranged in the released state so that the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to the one end of the first passage member. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means is arranged in an attitude in which the first passage member is tilted upward from the other end of the first passage member toward one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even if a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even if the ball remains in the first passage member and changes from the communicating state to the released state, the ball will be supplied from one end of the first passage member. This makes it easier to prevent objects from falling outside the gaming area.

In addition, when forming a connected state, the entire first passage member can be made to slope downward from the other end to one end, making it easier to send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member and preventing the ball from getting stuck in the middle. Therefore, when transitioning to the released state, it is possible to prevent balls that have been stuck in the first passage member from falling into the play area.

A gaming machine B10 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B9, and is provided with a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that balls can pass through, and a distribution member that displaces between one side position that distributes balls flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage and another side position that distributes balls flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed with both sides open in the displacement direction of the distribution member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B9, gaming machine B10 has a case body that is open on both sides in the direction of displacement of the sorting member, so that even if a ball flows down between the sorting member that is displaced toward one side or the other and the case body, the ball that flows down can be prevented from being pinched between the sorting member and the case body.

In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position, and when the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the other side position. Gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is arranged at one side position and the other side position as the first passage member is displaced. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Here, in a structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, if a deviation occurs in the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member due to, for example, a control failure, the release state The balls are distributed to the first passage member located at the first passage member (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side), and there is a risk that the ball may fall from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the gaming area. On the other hand, in the game machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to avoid distributing the ball to the first passage member that is in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distributing member is always at the other side position). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the gaming area.

A gaming machine B12 is characterized in that in the gaming machine B11, the first passage member has a wall portion that divides a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is the distribution member.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that partitions a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as a distribution member. , it is possible to share parts and reduce parts costs. Further, by using the wall portion that partitions the passage through which the balls pass as a distribution member, the distributed balls can be reliably flowed down into the passage.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure for regulating the rebound of the driven side slide member 430>
a guide member extending in the vertical direction; a displacement member guided by the guide member and movable along the guide member between a raised position and a lowered position; and a displacement member supported in the lowered position. The displacement member includes a support member and an elevating member formed to be movable up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. In addition, in a game machine in which the displacement member is lowered by its own weight from the raised position to the lowered position as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the upward direction. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a rise regulating member that regulates displacement.

Here, a guide member that extends in the vertical direction, a displacement member that is guided by the guide member and can be displaced along the guide member between a raised position and a lowered position, and the displacement member that is supported in the lowered position and an elevating member formed to be movable up and down along the guide member, the displacement member being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises, the displacement member is raised from a lowered position to an elevated position, A game machine is known in which a displacement member is lowered by its own weight from a raised position to a lowered position as the lifting member lowers (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member that has been lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained at the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, it is easy to shake due to external disturbances, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position The problem was that it was unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the displacement member is provided with a rise regulating member that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the upward direction when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member is moved along the guide member in the lowered position. Displacement in the upward direction can be restricted, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position can be stabilized.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the rise-regulating member in a direction approaching the displacement member in the gaming machine C1, and the displacement member is provided with a separation action part that contacts the rise-regulating member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight to displace the rise-regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member, and an engagement part that allows the rise-regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member in the lowered position and engages with the rise-regulating member.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action portion that displaces the rise regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowering position. Since the displacement member is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the rise regulating member, the regulating state by the ascending regulating member can be formed by simply lowering the displacement member to the lowering position by its own weight, and the regulating state by the ascending regulating member can be formed. There is no need to separately provide a drive source for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement portion is performed while allowing the rise-regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member, so the force required to release the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement portion and the displacement of the rise-regulating member can be increased accordingly. As a result, even if an external disturbance is input, it is easier to maintain the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement portion.

In gaming machine C2, the lifting member is raised to release the engagement between the lifting restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member. Gaming machine C3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C2, gaming machine C3 releases the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member by raising the lifting member, so that even if an external disturbance is input to the displacement member and causes it to rattle, the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member can be prevented from being inadvertently released.

In addition, because the disengagement between the rise-regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is achieved by raising the lifting member, there is no need to provide a separate drive source for disengaging the engagement. The drive source for raising and lowering the lifting member can also be used as the drive source for disengaging the rise-regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, thereby reducing product costs.

Furthermore, if a separate drive source is provided to release the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member, there is a risk that, for example, due to a control failure, the lifting member will rise and push up the displacement member without the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member being released. However, according to gaming machine C3, the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member can be released in conjunction with the action of the lifting member pushing up the displacement member as the lifting member rises, so that when the displacement member is pushed up by the lifting member, a state in which the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is reliably released can be created.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the lifting member in C3 has a release action part that displaces the rise-regulating member by contacting the rise-regulating member when the lifting member is raised, thereby releasing the engagement between the rise-regulating member and the engagement part of the displacement member.

Here, the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engagement portion of the displacement member can be released by the pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the lifting member goes up and down, but in this case, the pushing up force It is necessary to make the engagement state such that it can be released by pressing the button, making it difficult to achieve a strong engagement. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated due to the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member displaces the ascending/lowering member by coming into contact with the ascending/descending member when the ascending/descending member is raised, thereby regulating the elevation. Since the release action part is provided to release the engagement between the member and the engagement part of the displacement member, even if the rise regulating member and the engagement part of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is ensured. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing vibrations caused by reaction when the engagement is released.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rise-restricting member is disengaged from the engagement portion of the displacement member, it abuts against the lifting member that raises and lowers the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the rise regulating member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the displacement member is disengaged from the engagement portion. Since it comes into contact with the elevating member that is being raised and lowered, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is raised and lowered. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down along with the up and down member can be stabilized.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that in gaming machine C5, the rise-restricting member that abuts against the lifting member is biased by the biasing means in a direction approaching the lifting member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the lifting member that comes into contact with the lifting member is urged by the urging means in a direction toward the lifting member, so that the lifting member is moved in a certain direction. It is possible to stabilize the posture by applying pressure to the body. In addition, rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the biasing means.

The gaming machine C6 includes a drive means, a pinion rotationally driven by the drive means, and a rack in which the pinion is meshed, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the elevating member A game machine C7 characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via a rise regulating member.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion driven in rotation by the drive means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is raised and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the lifting member is biased in a direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the rise restricting member, so that the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, if the lifting member rattles in a direction in which the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion narrows, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in a direction in which the spacing widens, while if the lifting member rattles in a direction in which the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion widens, the guide structure of the guide member can restrict the spacing from widening beyond a certain level. Therefore, the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be prevented from narrowing, and excessive meshing resistance can be prevented.

A game machine C8, which is any one of the game machines C1 to C7, and further includes a descent regulating member that restricts the displacement of the raising and lowering member in the downward direction when the raising and lowering member pushes the displacement member up to the raised position.

According to gaming machine C8, in any of gaming machines C1 to C7, a descent restricting member is provided that restricts the downward displacement of the lifting member when the lifting member pushes the displacement member up to the raised position, so that the displacement member and the lifting member arranged in the raised position can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, a driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position is not required, so that the energy consumption of the drive means for driving the lifting member can be reduced.

In addition, since the regulation by the descending regulating member is performed by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for forming regulation by the descending regulating member, and there is no need to provide a drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member. can also be used as a driving source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C8, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the restriction by the descending regulating member is released by lowering the elevating member.

In gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C8, the restriction imposed by the descent restricting member is released by lowering the lifting member, so there is no need to provide a separate drive source for releasing such restriction, and the drive source for raising and lowering the lifting member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the descent restricting member, thereby reducing product costs.

In addition, if a separate drive source is provided to release the restriction imposed by the descent restricting member, for example, if a control failure occurs and the restriction imposed by the descent restricting member is not released, there is a risk that the lifting member will descend, causing an overload on the drive source or damaging the descent restricting member. However, with gaming machine C9, the restriction imposed by the descent restricting member can be released in conjunction with the descent movement of the lifting member, so that when the lifting member is lowered, a state in which the restriction imposed by the descent restricting member is reliably released can be created.

In addition, if the descent restricting member is not a lifting member, but is structured to restrict the displacement of the displacement member in the downward direction, the structure for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member as the lifting member descends becomes complicated. However, according to gaming machines C8 and C9, the descent restricting member is structured to restrict the displacement of the lifting member in the downward direction, so the structure for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member as the lifting member descends can be simplified.

In the game machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the downward direction is regulated by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that a direction in which the rise regulating member abuts on the lifting member is different from a direction in which the rise regulating member abuts on the elevating member.

According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the descent regulating member is brought into contact with the lifting member is different from the direction in which the raising regulating member is brought into contact with the raising and lowering member. The regulating member and the rise regulating member can respectively suppress rattling of the elevating member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

The gaming machine C10 includes a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack in which the pinion is meshed, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering regulating member is A game machine C11 characterized in that the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

According to gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion driven to rotate by the drive means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is raised and lowered along the guide member by this linear motion. In this case, the rack (lifting member) is capable of displacement in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the pinion, and the descent restricting member abuts against the lifting member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack, so that it is possible to restrict the rack (lifting member) from being displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack relative to the pinion.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is placed in the lowered position, the rise regulating member and the support member can come into contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. A gaming machine C12 characterized in that each of the gaming machines C12 is disposed in a gaming machine C12.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is disposed in the lowered position, the rise regulating member and the support member are disposed on one side and the other side with the guide member sandwiched therebetween. Since they are arranged so that they can come into contact with the displacement member, the movement of the displacement member in either direction relative to the guide member on one side or the other can be regulated by the contact of the rise regulating member or the support member, respectively. can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member disposed at the lowered position from shaking due to disturbance.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is placed in the lowered position, the support member and the rise regulating member abut against the displacement member at different positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the supporting member is arranged above the rise regulating member.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is placed in the lowered position, the support member and the rise regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut against the displacement member while changing the displacement member, rattling of the displacement member in an oblique direction can be restricted by contact with the rise regulating member and the support member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member disposed at the lowered position from shaking due to disturbance.

In addition, because the support member is disposed above the rise-restricting member, the support member does not impede the rise and fall of the lifting member, and space for the lifting member to rise and fall can be secured. This ensures freedom of design.

<Concept of the invention using, as an example, a structure in which the detection target portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684>
Gaming machine D1 is equipped with a movable member that is formed to be movably and a detection means for detecting the moving position of the movable member, characterized in that the detection means comprises a plurality of detectable parts arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the movable member, and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on the movement trajectory of the detectable parts.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotatable moving member and a detection means for detecting the rotational position of the moving member (JP Patent Publication 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a number of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer circumference of the moving member, and a light emitting section and a light receiving section that are arranged opposite each other across the slits. The light receiving section accumulates and adds up the number of pulses of a pulse-like signal received by the light receiving section, and detects the amount of rotation (i.e., the rotational position) of the moving member from a reference position based on the accumulated number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light receiving failure of the light receiving section, etc., a discrepancy occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the accumulated number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be detected accurately. In other words, if a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection results, and the effect on the detection results accumulates each time a detection failure occurs.

In contrast, according to gaming machine D1, the detection means includes a plurality of detectable parts that are arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the moving member, and a plurality of detection sensors that are arranged on the movement trajectory of the detectable parts, so that the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. In other words, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and since past detection results of the detection sensors are not required to detect the movement position of the moving member, the movement position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

In the gaming machine D1, the moving member has a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, the detectable portion is disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals based on the intervals at which the divided members are disposed. In the gaming machine D2,

According to gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, the moving member has multiple divided members and is formed by connecting the multiple divided members along the moving direction, the detectable portion is disposed on some of the multiple divided members and not on the remaining divided members, and the multiple detection sensors are disposed based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, so that the combination of detection results of the multiple detection sensors can be made different each time the moving member is displaced by an amount equivalent to the arrangement interval of the divided members. In other words, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the amount of movement equivalent to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the smallest unit.

Note that a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position corresponding to one of the plurality of divided members. It means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position where it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member.

In the gaming machine D2, the moving member is formed with a first section in which the divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the divided members are connected at a second interval narrower than the first interval, and the multiple detection sensors are arranged on the movement trajectory of the detection part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members in the first section. Gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, the movable member has a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are connected at a distance shorter than the first interval. Since the second sections connected at narrow second intervals are formed, the length of the movable member can be shortened compared to the case where the entire moving member is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be reduced.

In this case, since the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the dividing members in the first section, The space required for installing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the dividing members in the second section, there is no need to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and therefore the second interval can be set even more. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, from this point of view as well, the space required for arranging the moving member can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D3, the divided member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are movably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member. , the distance between the dividing member and the adjacent dividing member is increased or decreased by the link member being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent dividing member, and in the first section, the link member is displaced. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that upon reaching the terminal end, the dividing member is restricted from displacing in the direction of increasing the distance between the adjacent dividing members.

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, the divided member includes a main body member in which the detectable member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the spacing between the divided member and the adjacent divided members, thereby simplifying the structure for forming the first section and the second section.

In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the end of the displacement, and the dividing member is restricted from displacing in the direction of widening the interval between adjacent dividing members, so that the detected object moves in the direction of widening the interval. It is possible to suppress variations in the position of the parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor.

The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the divided member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a main body guide portion that guides the link member. and a link guide section, the link guide section acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide section of the base member, and the link guide section acts on the link member to move the main body member and the adjacent A game machine D5 characterized in that the posture of the link member relative to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide section that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guide section that guides the link member. The guide section acts on the link member to change the attitude of the link member relative to the main body member and the adjacent divided member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide section of the base member. As the posture of the link member changes, the distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, while moving the movable member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted through the link guide portion of the base member. A game machine D6 characterized in that the link member is formed in a groove shape, and the width of the groove is set to a size corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, the link member has a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is formed in a groove shape into which the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the external shape of the link member, making it easier to maintain the link member at the displacement end in the first section. This reliably restricts the displacement of the divided member in a direction that widens the gap between adjacent divided members, and suppresses positional variation of the detected portion in the direction that widens the gap, thereby improving the detection accuracy of the detection sensor.

In any of gaming machines D4 to D6, the divided member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, the divided member abuts the main body member of the adjacent divided member. A gaming machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the dividing member is restricted from being displaced in a direction that narrows the distance between adjacent dividing members.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D4 to D6, the divided member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and in the first section, the divided member The displacement member is displaced to a position where it comes into contact with the main body member, and the divided member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval between adjacent divided members, so that the detected part is moved in the direction of narrowing the interval. positional variations can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor.

<Concept of the invention taking as an example a structure for adjusting the gap between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
Gaming machine E1 is equipped with a movable member that is formed to be movable, the movable member comprising a plurality of divided members which are connected along a moving direction, the movable member being characterized in that it has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval which is narrower than the first interval.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a movable member that is formed to be rotatable is known (JP Patent Publication 2010-115426). In this case, for example, multiple identification information can be displayed in a circumferential direction on the front of the movable member, and the identification information arranged in a predetermined position can be visually recognized by the player, to create an effect. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to be at least a certain size, so if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the diameter of the movable member will become larger, and the space required for arrangement will increase, while if the diameter of the movable member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed will decrease.

In contrast, according to gaming machine E1, the moving member is formed with a first section in which multiple divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which multiple divided members are connected at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval, so that the length of the moving member can be shortened compared to when the entire moving member is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving members can be reduced. In other words, the number of divided members can be secured while the space required for arranging the multiple divided members can be reduced. Therefore, for example, when identification information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be reduced while securing the number of identification information displayed.

In the gaming machine E1, the divided member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member. In the gaming machine E2, the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 has a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the spacing between the divided member and the adjacent divided members, thereby simplifying the structure for forming the first section and the second section.

The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the divided member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a main body guide portion that guides the link member. and a link guide section, the link guide section acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide section of the base member, and the link guide section acts on the link member to move the main body member and the adjacent A game machine E3 characterized in that the attitude of the link member relative to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide part that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guide part that guides the link member, The guide section acts on the link member to change the attitude of the link member relative to the main body member and the adjacent divided member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide section of the base member. As the posture of the link member changes, the distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, while moving the movable member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and the displacement member is inclined toward the adjacent dividing member in the first section, and is in a more upright position in the second section than in the first section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E2 and E3, gaming machine E4 has the advantage that in the first section, the displacement member is tilted toward the adjacent divided member, making it easier for the player to see the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Also, in the first section, the spacing between the divided members is widened, so that space can be secured for the displacement member to tilt, allowing the displacement member to be made larger accordingly. Therefore, from this point of view as well, the visibility of the displacement member, i.e., the visibility of the identification information, can be improved.

On the other hand, since the displacement member is in a more upright position in the second section than in the first section, the displacement member can be spaced apart from the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and the main body members can be brought closer to each other and the gap between them can be narrowed. In other words, the second gap in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be reduced.

A gaming machine E5, in which the displacement member in the gaming machine E4 is displaceably disposed on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed movably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, the displacement member is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member. Therefore, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought closer together until they come into contact with each other, and the distance between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the movable member can be shortened and the space required for disposing the movable member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E3, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the main body guide portion of the base member has a circular trajectory.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E3, since the trajectory of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, a structure in which the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member is provided. can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided members in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A game machine E7 characterized in that the radius is equal to the radius when arranged in a circle.

Here, in the case where the moving member is formed with a first section in which the multiple divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second section in which the multiple divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a second interval narrower than the first interval (hereinafter referred to as the "former case"), the circumferential length of the moving member can be shortened compared to the case where the entirety is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as the "latter case"), so the number of divided members can be secured while the space required for arranging the multiple divided members can be reduced. However, when the orbit of the multiple divided members is formed into a circle, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for a player who visually recognizes the divided members of the first section in the former case, the number and radius of the divided members in the first section give the impression that the total number of divided members forming the moving member is a number smaller than the actual number.

In contrast, according to gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided members in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is equal to the radius when all the divided members are connected circumferentially at the first interval and arranged in a circle, so that the number of divided members is secured and the space required for arranging the divided members is reduced, while the player can imagine a number equivalent to the actual number as the total number of divided members that form the moving member.

<About the concept of the invention using the drive mechanism 630 as an example>
A movable member formed by connecting a base member with an extending guide portion, a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force applied to the movable member. a driving means, the guide portion of the base member includes a first guide portion that sets the distance between the divided members to a first distance by acting on the divided member; a second guide section that sets the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, and the driving means includes a rotational drive member having an engaging section that can engage with the divided member; A gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a movable member that is formed to be rotatable is known (JP Patent Publication 2010-115426). In this case, for example, multiple identification information can be displayed in a circumferential direction on the front of the movable member, and the identification information arranged in a predetermined position can be visually recognized by the player, to create an effect. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to be at least a certain size, so if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the diameter of the movable member will become larger, and the space required for arrangement will increase, while if the diameter of the movable member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed will decrease.

Therefore, the applicant forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the moving member has a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a section narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval of the interval, the number of divided members is secured and the number of divided members is The space required for arranging the divided members can be suppressed. That is, when displaying identification information on each divided member, the space required for arranging the movable member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of identification information to be displayed. I came up with this idea.

However, in a moving member to which a plurality of divided members are connected, there is a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval narrower than the first interval. There has been a problem in that it is difficult to displace such a moving member relative to the base member while forming a section in which the moving member is moved.

In contrast, in gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member includes a first guide portion that acts on the divided members to set the spacing between the divided members to a first spacing, and a second guide portion that sets the spacing between the divided members to a second spacing narrower than the first spacing, and the drive means includes a rotational drive member having an engagement portion that can engage with the divided members, and the rotational drive member is rotated while engaging the engagement portion with the divided members, thereby displacing the multiple divided members along the guide portion of the base member, so that the movable member can be displaced relative to the base member while forming sections in which the spacing between the divided members is wide and narrow (sections of the first spacing and sections of the second spacing) on the movable member.

A gaming machine F2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1, the rotation drive member is formed with a plurality of the engagement portions.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, since a plurality of engaging portions are formed in the rotary drive member, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotary drive member to the moving member. Can be done.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided body members in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two of the rotational driving members, and the driving means is configured to rotate the two rotational driving members. A game machine F3 characterized in that drive members are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 has two rotational drive members disposed at different positions along the circumference of the moving member, so that the driving force applied from the rotational drive members to the moving member can be distributed to different positions along the circumference of the moving member. This prevents the driving force from being biased toward some of the multiple divided members, stabilizing the displacement of the moving member.

In the game machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary drive members have phases different by 180 degrees in the circular orbit. A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is disposed at a position where:

In gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F3, the trajectory of the multiple divided members that are displaced along the guide portion of the base member is circular, and the two rotation drive members are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other on the circular trajectory, so that the driving force from the rotation drive members can be applied to the two most distant points of the moving members (multiple divided members), and as a result, the displacement of the moving members can be stabilized.

A gaming machine F5, which is characterized in that the two rotation drive members in the gaming machine F3 or F4 are arranged with the phases of the engagement parts different from each other so that while the engagement part of one rotation drive member is disengaged from the divided member, the engagement part of the other rotation drive member is engaged with the divided member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are capable of disengaging the other rotary drive member while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is disengaged from the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotary driving member are arranged with different phases so that the engaging portion of the rotary driving member is engaged with the divided member, the engaging portion of one rotary driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotary driving member are It is possible to prevent the engaging portions from being disengaged with the divided members at the same time, and it is possible to suppress the transmission of the driving force from the rotational drive member to the moving member from becoming intermittent. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In other words, in a configuration in which multiple divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, if the transmission of the driving force from the rotation drive member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the distance between the divided members increases and decreases as the driving force is transmitted and released, making the posture of the moving member as a whole unstable.

In contrast, with gaming machine F5, either the engagement portion of one rotation drive member or the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the divided member, creating a state in which the driving force is always transmitted to the moving member, making it easier to maintain a constant distance between the divided members. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting multiple divided members endlessly, its posture can be stabilized. In other words, its displacement can be stabilized.

In any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotational drive means is engaged, and the engaged portion is arranged on the trajectory of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the gaming machine F6.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the multiple divided members have engaged portions that engage with the engaging portions of the rotation drive means, and the engaged portions are disposed on the outer periphery of the orbit of the multiple divided members, so that the amount of rotation of the moving member (multiple divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. In other words, the reduction ratio can be reduced, and the drive torque applied from the rotation drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

A gaming machine F7 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, characterized in that the rotation drive member is disposed in a position where the engagement portion can engage with the split member guided along a first guide portion of the guide portions.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F3 to F6, the rotational drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide part of the guide parts, that is, a division member that is guided along the first guide part of the guide parts. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where it can engage with the divided members that are guided with a wide interval, interference between the adjacent divided members and the rotational drive member can be suppressed, and the rotational drive member diameter can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

In any of gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member includes a third guide portion that acts on the divided members displaced along the guide portion to transition the spacing between the divided members from the first spacing or the second spacing to the second spacing or the first spacing, and the rotation drive member is disposed in a position where the engagement portion can engage with the divided members guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. Gaming machine F8 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine described in any one of gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is arranged in a position where the engagement portion can engage with a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, i.e., a divided member in which the spacing between adjacent divided members has transitioned from the first spacing or the second spacing to the second spacing or the first spacing, so that the divided member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the guide portion (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, the moving member formed by connecting multiple divided members is prevented from bending midway, and the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, one end of which is rotatably connected to the main body member, and another main body member of the adjacent divided member. a link member whose ends are slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid relative to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, so that the split member and The interval between adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is located at a portion of the main body member of the divided member that is slidably connected to the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member. The gaming machine F9 is characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a rotatably connected portion.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and a link member rotatably connected at one end to the main body member and slidably connected at the other end to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by rotating and sliding one end and the other end of the link member relative to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively, and the engagement portion of the rotation drive member is engaged at a position on the main body member of the divided member closer to the portion where one end of the link member is rotatably connected than the portion where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected, so that when the main body member of the divided member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion, the displacement of the main body member can be easily transmitted to the main body member of the adjacent divided member via the link member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

A game machine F10, which is the game machine F4 or F5, and includes a drive gear that is disposed concentrically with a circle that is the orbit of the plurality of divided members and meshed with the two rotational drive members, respectively.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F4 or F5, it is equipped with drive gears meshed with the two rotation drive members, so by rotating the drive gear, the two rotation drive members can be synchronized. It can be rotated in a fixed state. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the driving gear is arranged concentrically with the circular orbit of the plurality of divided members, when the driving gear and the second rotary driving member are viewed from the front of the base member, the moving member (the plurality of divided members) can be placed inward from the outer periphery of the movement locus. That is, since the driving gear and the second rotary driving member do not protrude outward beyond the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Characteristics Group G> (Bunny foot control)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down and which is different from the first flow path, and determining that a game ball has entered the first flow path. The first discriminating means is capable of communicating with the first flow path and the second flow path, and at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is brought into communication state in which a game ball can flow down. a movable means that can be moved; a release determining means that determines whether a release condition that allows the communication state to be canceled is satisfied based on the determination result of the first determining means; and a release determining means that determines whether the communication state is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a maintaining means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined that the communication state is possible.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery triggered by a start winning, and grants a winning state that is advantageous to the player if the lottery results in a specific lottery result. In this conventional gaming machine, a bonus is granted to the player by having the gaming ball enter a specific ball entry area that opens (or expands) when a winning state is achieved. In addition, some such conventional gaming machines have multiple flow paths inside the ball entry area, and aim to increase interest during the winning state by varying the bonus granted depending on the flow path that the gaming ball passes through (for example, JP 2013-59445 A). Of the multiple flow paths, the flow path through which the gaming ball travels can be switched depending on, for example, the type of winning or the elapsed time.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it was sometimes impossible to completely control the direction in which the gaming ball traveled, and there was a risk that the gaming ball would not flow down in an optimal manner.

On the other hand, in the game machine G1, the entry of the game ball into the first channel is determined by the first determining means. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved by the movable means into a communicating state where the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other and the game ball can flow down. Based on the determination result by the first determining means, the release determining means determines whether a release condition that allows the communication state to be canceled is satisfied, and the maintaining means maintains the communication state until the release determining means determines that the communication state can be canceled. is maintained.

As a result, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is met, so there is an effect that the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

The gaming machine G1 includes a second determining means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is determined by the first determining means. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the condition is established when the number of game balls matches the number of game balls determined by the second determining means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second channel, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination means. The cancellation condition is satisfied when the number of game balls determined by the first determining means and the number of game balls determined by the second determining means match.

This makes it possible to maintain the connected state between the first and second flow paths until the game ball flows from one to the other. In other words, it is possible to prevent the connected state from being released while the game ball is flowing from one flow path to the other, and to ensure that the game ball flows down to the other flow path. This has the effect of allowing the destination of the game ball to be suitably controlled.

The gaming machine G3 in the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first determining means determines that the game ball has entered the game ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G3 has the effect that the release condition is met when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first discrimination means determined that a gaming ball has entered the game ball, and therefore allows the gaming ball to pass through the first flow path and the second flow path in a connected state during the predetermined period of time. This has the effect of preventing the connected state from being released while the gaming ball is flowing down one of the flow paths, and allowing the gaming ball to flow down in an optimal manner.

In the gaming machine G1, the release condition is met when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first determination means last determined that a gaming ball had entered the machine during the connected state of 1. The gaming machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first determining means last determined that a game ball entered during the first communication state. Therefore, the communication state can be canceled after all the game balls that entered the first flow path in the communication state are allowed to pass during a predetermined period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the game ball is flowing down any of the channels, and to allow the game ball to flow down suitably.

A gaming machine G5, which is any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, has an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state, and a variable member that changes the variable member from the closed state to the open state when a specific condition is met until a predetermined condition is met, and the first flow path is arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has entered the entry means will enter the ball.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable member is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state. When a specific condition is met, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the first flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball entering the ball entering means enters.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released before the game ball that has entered the ball entry means reaches the second channel. Therefore, when the ball entry means is in the open state, there is an effect that the game balls that have entered the ball entry means can be suitably caused to flow down.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, based on a presentation means by which a presentation is executed and a predetermined elapsed period having elapsed since the entry of a game ball was determined by the first determining means, the presentation means A game machine G6 characterized in that it has a performance variable means for varying the performance mode executed.

According to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the presentation mode executed by the presentation means is changed by the presentation change means based on the passage of a predetermined period of time since the first determination means determined that the gaming ball has entered the ball.

Thereby, it is possible to have the player shoot the game ball aiming at the first path, with one of the pleasures being to vary the performance mode performed by the performance means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G6, the presentation means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path, and during the predetermined elapsed period, the game ball that has entered the first flow path reaches the second flow path. A gaming machine G7 is characterized in that it is configured for a period longer than the period required to complete the game.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the presentation means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. The predetermined elapsed period is set to be longer than the period required for the game ball entering the first ball entering means to reach the second channel.

As a result, the presentation mode executed by the presentation means is changed after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the presentation means, so that a presentation can be executed that looks to the player as if the presentation mode had been changed when the game ball reached the presentation means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because a novel presentation can be realized. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the second flow path depending on whether a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to omit a sensor or other configuration for determining whether the ball has entered the second flow path. This has the effect of reducing the number of parts in the game machine, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine.

A gaming machine G8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G7, at least a portion of the second flow path is formed inside the presentation means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G7, gaming machine G8 has the advantage that at least a portion of the second flow path is formed inside the presentation means, so that the gaming ball can enter the presentation means as it passes through the second flow path. This makes it possible to realize a novel presentation in which the presentation mode executed by the presentation means is changed in response to the gaming ball entering the presentation means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G9 is characterized in that it has a second discrimination means for making a predetermined discrimination based on the gaming ball that has entered the second flow path in the gaming machine G1, a presentation means for executing a presentation, and a presentation variation means for varying the presentation mode executed by the presentation means based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination means based on the game ball that has entered the second channel. Based on the determination result by the second determining means, the performance mode executed by the performance means is varied by the performance variable means.

Thereby, in order to vary the presentation mode, it is possible to have the player launch the game ball so that the game ball enters the second channel. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G9, the presentation means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means determines that the gaming ball has reached the second flow path. Gaming machine G10.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the presentation means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, the second determining means determines that the game ball has reached the second channel.

As a result, the presentation mode executed by the presentation means is changed after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the presentation means, so that a presentation can be executed that looks to the player as if the presentation mode had been changed when the game ball reached the presentation means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because a novel presentation can be realized.

In the gaming machine G10, at least a portion of the second flow path is formed inside the presentation means, and the second determination means determines whether or not a gaming ball has flowed down the portion of the second flow path formed inside the presentation means. A gaming machine G11.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least a portion of the second flow path is formed inside the presentation means. Then, it is determined by the second determining means whether or not the game ball has flowed down the portion of the second channel formed inside the presentation means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel performance in which the performance mode executed by the performance means is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the performance means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machines G1 to G11, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means, it is determined whether it is release timing to release the communication state. The movable means includes a determination means, and when the determination means determines that the release timing has come, the movable means determines that the release condition is satisfied based on the release determination means determining that the release condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G12 characterized in that the communicating state is canceled by moving at least one of the first channel and the second channel.

Gaming machine G12 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G11. That is, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to a connected state by the moving means, the determination means determines whether it is the timing to release the connected state. When the determination means determines that it is the timing to release, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved by the moving means, and the connected state is released based on the determination by the release determination means that the release condition is established.

As a result, even if the release timing occurs, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is met, so even if the game ball advances to the first flow path just before the release timing, the game ball can be made to flow down smoothly.

In the gaming machine G12, the cancellation determination means determines that the cancellation condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific period of time has elapsed since the determination means determined that it was the cancellation timing. Game machine G13.

According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G12, the cancellation determining means determines that the cancellation condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific period of time has elapsed since the determining device determined that it was the cancellation timing. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first channel can be reliably discharged from the first channel and the second channel during the specific period until the release determining means determines that the release condition is satisfied. . Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls can be made to flow down in a suitable manner.

In the gaming machine G13, the specific period is longer than the period during which the gaming ball that entered the first flow path is discharged. Gaming machine G14.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G13, the gaming machine G14 has the effect that the specific period is longer than the period during which the gaming ball that entered the second flow path is discharged, so that the gaming ball that entered the first flow path just before it is determined that the release timing has arrived can be more reliably discharged while the communication state is maintained.

<Feature H group> (Control target changes depending on operating conditions (pocket LED control))
A gaming machine H1 comprising: a movable body on which a plurality of decorative parts are arranged; a movable means for moving the movable body; a variable means for varying the position of the decorative parts arranged on the movable body in response to the movement of the movable body; an operating body capable of following the movable body and on which a plurality of operating parts, the number of which is fewer than the decorative parts, is arranged; an operation control means for operating each of the plurality of operating parts arranged on the operating body in predetermined numbers; a determination means for determining a specific decorative part from the plurality of decorative parts; and a discrimination means for discriminating the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determination means, wherein the operation control means operates the operating part based on discrimination information by the discrimination means.

Here, gaming machines that use multiple performance components such as various gimmicks and display means to perform exciting performances are known. Some of these gaming machines can perform a wide variety of exciting performances by operating multiple performance components in one performance. However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be difficult to perform a unified performance using different performance components, so there is a risk that the player's interest may not be sufficiently improved. In addition, some conventional gaming machines can slide the performance components made of liquid crystal display devices provided on the left and right sides of the game board in a direction toward and away from each other. In these conventional gaming machines, the display mode displayed on the display screen of each performance component can be changed depending on the distance between the left and right performance components, thereby improving the interest (for example, JP 2014-239965 A). However, in such conventional gaming machines, the two performance components are simply operated in a symmetrical manner. This could lead to the risk of not being able to optimally set the movement of the performance components if the number of performance components is increased and symmetrical movement is not possible.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a plurality of decorative parts are arranged on a movable body, and the movable body is moved by a movable means. The position of the decorative part arranged on the movable body is varied by the variable means in accordance with the movement of the movable body. The actuating body moves following the movable body. A plurality of actuating parts smaller than the decoration part are arranged in the actuating body, and the plurality of actuating parts are each actuated by a predetermined number by an actuation control means. The determining means determines a specific decorative part from among the plurality of decorative parts, and the determining means determines the actuating part located at the position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determining means. Then, the actuation section is actuated by the actuation control means based on the discrimination information by the discrimination means.

This allows the operating parts to be operated in accordance with the arrangement of the decorative parts, so that the decorative parts and the operating parts can perform actions that have a sense of unity. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the actuating body is fixed to the movable body.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, since the operating body is fixed to the movable body, a sense of unity is achieved by the decorative part of the movable body and the operating part of the operating pair. The effect is that it can be done.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that in gaming machine H1 or H2, the operation control means executes the operation part determined by the determination means while the specific decorative part is moving at least from a first position to a second position different from the first position.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, while the specific decorative part is moving from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, the determining means determines that Since the actuating part is actuated by the actuation control means, the actuating part at a position corresponding to a specific decorative part can be controlled to be in an actuated state at least from the second position onwards. Therefore, it is possible to realize a unified operation by the decorative part and the actuating part, and there is an effect that the movements of the decorative part and the actuating part, which have different numbers, can be suitably set.

A gaming machine H4 is characterized in that it has a position discrimination means capable of discriminating the positions of each of the multiple decorative parts in any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, and the discrimination means discriminates the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part based on the position discrimination information discriminated by the position discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the positions of the plurality of decorative parts are determined by the position determining means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination means, the determination means determines the operating part at the position corresponding to the specific decorative part.

As a result, the actuating part can be operated in correspondence with the positions of the plurality of decorative parts, so that the decorative part and the actuating part can perform a uniform operation.

In the gaming machine H4, a plurality of protruding pieces are arranged on the movable body at predetermined positions, and each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one of the plurality of protruding pieces is It has a detecting means capable of detecting the one or more protruding pieces set corresponding to each of the movable positions, and the position determining means detects the one or more protruding pieces based on the detection result of the detecting means. A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it determines the position of a decorative part of a game machine H5.

Gaming machine H5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H4. That is, multiple protrusions are arranged at predetermined positions on the movable body. Each time the movable body moves to one of multiple predetermined movable positions, one or more of the multiple protrusions set corresponding to each of the movable positions is detected by the detection means, and the positions of the multiple decorative parts are determined by the position determination means based on the detection result by the detection means.

This has the effect of allowing the positioning of the decorative part to be determined by mechanically detecting the protruding piece using the detection means, thereby enabling more accurate determination.

A gaming machine H5, characterized in that different identification information is preset for each of the multiple decorative parts, and the decorative parts corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order, and the position discrimination means has an identification information determination means that determines the identification information of the decorative parts located at predetermined positions based on the detection result of the detection means, and determines the positions of the remaining decorative parts based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, different identification information is set in advance for each of the plurality of decorative parts, and the decorative parts corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Further, in the position determination means, the identification information of the decorative part located at a predetermined position is determined by the identification information determination means based on the detection result of the detection means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means Based on this, the positions of the remaining decorations are determined.

With this, the positions of all decorative parts can be determined simply by determining the identification information of a predetermined position, so it is only necessary to provide a detection means for detecting the decorative parts placed at a predetermined position. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

In the gaming machine H4, the movable means moves the movable body in a predetermined movable pattern, and a position information storage in which position information of the plurality of decorative parts is stored in correspondence with the movable pattern. and the position determining means each determines the positions of the plurality of decorative parts from the position information stored in the position information storage means based on information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A gaming machine H7 characterized by:

Gaming machine H7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine H4. That is, the movable body is moved by the moving means in a predetermined moving pattern. Corresponding to the moving pattern, position information of a plurality of decorative parts is stored in the position information storage means. Based on the information of the moving pattern in which the movable body is moved, the position of each of the plurality of decorative parts is determined by the position determination means from the position information stored in the position information storage means.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when determining the position of the decorative part, since the position of the decorative part can be determined by simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means. In addition, since there is no need to provide a detection means such as a sensor, the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced. This has the effect of reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is arranged on the front side of the operating body, and the operating part is configured with a light emitting means that emits light to the decorative part located on the front side. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, a movable body is arranged on the front side of the operating body, and the operating unit emits light to the decorative part located on the front side. Since it is constituted by means, it is possible to give a particular decorative part a shiny appearance by means of the actuating part. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative part can be made to stand out.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotation pattern for rotating the movable body. A game machine H9 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means based on a predetermined rotation pattern defined as a movable pattern. While rotating, the actuating portion corresponding to a specific decorative portion can be actuated. Therefore, there is an effect that the motion position of the rotational motion can be improved.

<Characteristics Group I> (Pocket position control)
In a gaming machine that includes a movable body movable within a predetermined movable range, a movable means that moves the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means that controls the movability of the movable means, the movable body: The gaming machine includes a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and when the movable body is moved to the plurality of predetermined positions, the plurality of detection units Among them, a detecting means capable of detecting one or more of the detecting sections configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions, and a predetermined number of the detecting sections detected by the detecting means. In this case, while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount, the position is determined based on the detection result detected by the detection means on the condition that the detection part detected by the detection means remains constant. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it has a discriminating means for discriminating information.

Here, gaming machines that can perform movable performances using movable means such as accessories are known. In this conventional game machine, accurate presentation operations were realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the detection means makes a false detection, there is a risk that the movable position of the movable means may be misjudged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, a plurality of detection sections arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions are provided on the movable body. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, one or more of the plurality of detection parts configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position is detected by the detection means. be done. When a predetermined number of detection parts are detected by the detection means, the number of detection parts detected by the detection means remains constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. Based on the detected results, the position information is determined by the determining means.

This allows the detection part to be identified more reliably, which has the effect of allowing the position information of the movable means to be determined accurately.

In the gaming machine I1, a determining means determines a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it has a notifying means for executing a notifying process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when the determining means determines that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a specific predetermined position is determined from a plurality of predetermined positions by the determining means. When the determining means determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means, the notifying means executes a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position.

This has the effect that the player can clearly recognize that the movable body has reached a specific predetermined position.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means are arranged such that a multiplier of 2 to the number of the detection means is greater than the number of the plurality of predetermined positions. I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means are arranged so that the multiplier of 2 to the number of detection means is larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence or absence of the detection section at the position where the detection means is arranged can be made different for all the predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of detection results by the detection means and each predetermined position can be made in one-to-one correspondence, there is an effect that the position of the movable means can be determined more accurately from the detection results by the detection means.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the movable body has a plurality of decorative parts arranged thereon, and the decorative parts are respectively arranged on the movable body in correspondence with the plurality of predetermined positions. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the following.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, gaming machine I4 has decorative parts arranged on the movable body in a number of predetermined positions, giving the movable body a decorative appearance. This draws attention to the movable body, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I4, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions at which the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles. Characteristic gaming machine I5.

Gaming machine I5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, the movable body is rotated by the moving means. A plurality of predetermined positions are arranged at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

This has the effect of making it possible to determine the position of the movable body at each predetermined angle when the movable body is rotating, thereby enabling more accurate rotation operations to be performed.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a determining means determines a specific predetermined position from among the plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a a notification means that executes notification processing indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved; and a determination based on establishment of a determination condition. and a benefit granting means that grants advantageous benefits to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result, and the determining means includes The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined based on the determination result of the determining means.

Gaming machine I6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines I1 to I5. That is, a specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from a plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the discrimination means discriminates that the movable body has been moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means, a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position is executed by the notification means. A judgment is executed by the judgment means based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and a privilege advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting means based on the judgment result of the judgment means being a specific judgment result. Also, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means based on the judgment result of the judgment means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to more clearly understand the result of the determination by the determination means, since the notification process can notify a specific predetermined position according to the result of the determination by the determination means.

The gaming machine I6 includes a selection means for selecting the predetermined position from among the plurality of predetermined positions, the stop of the movable body indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the The determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, A gaming machine I7 characterized in that, if the determination result is other than a specific one, the specific predetermined position is determined from a location other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, from among the plurality of predetermined positions, the selection means selects a predetermined position where the stop of the movable body indicates that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the determination means determines a specific predetermined position from the predetermined positions selected by the selection means. Further, when the determination result by the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the determination means determines a specific predetermined position from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

This allows the user to expect that the predetermined position selected by the selection means will be notified as a specific predetermined position, thereby drawing more attention to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the movable body has a plurality of decorative parts arranged corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notification means controls the movement of a notification member to the decorative part corresponding to the specific predetermined position to notify the player based on the movable body being moved to the specific predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of decorative parts are respectively arranged on the movable body corresponding to a plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the fact that the movable body has moved to a specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled to move the notification member to the decoration part corresponding to the specific predetermined position and notify the player.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the operation of the movable body and the operation of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature J Group> (Next Pocket Control)
a moving means for moving the movable body within a predetermined movable range, and having a plurality of decorative parts arranged at different positions; a moving means for moving the movable body within the movable range; a performance information determination means for determining predetermined performance information; and a movement control means for causing the moving means to move a specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts of the movable body to a predetermined performance position based on the performance information determined by the performance information determination means, wherein the gaming machine J1 further comprises a memory means for storing position information of the decorative parts arranged on the movable body, a discrimination means for discriminating the decorative part that is at the performance position when the movable body is moved by the moving means, and an identification means for discriminating the decorative part that will be moved to the performance position after the decorative part discriminated by the discrimination means based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, from the position information stored in the memory means.

Here, gaming machines that can perform movable performances using movable means such as accessories are known. In this conventional gaming machine, accurate presentation operations were realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such conventional gaming machines, the arrangement of the movable means cannot be accurately specified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, so the degree of freedom in performance operations may be reduced. . That is, there was a problem in that the player's interest in the game could not be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the arrangement information of the decorative parts arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decoration part at the presentation position is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the decoration portion located at the presentation position is placed in the performance position after the decoration determined by the determination means. The decoration part to be moved is identified by the identification means from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

As a result, it is possible to identify in advance that a specific decorative part will be placed at the performance position before the specific decoration part is placed at the performance position, so performance operations based on the performance information can be performed. The degree of freedom can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine J2, characterized in that in the gaming machine J1, the multiple decorative parts are set with identification information for identifying each of the decorative parts, and the specific decorative part determined by the performance determination means is set with the specific identification information.

Gaming machine J2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine J1. That is, identification information for identifying each of the multiple decorative parts is set. Specific identification information is set for a specific decorative part determined by the effect determination means.

This has the effect of increasing the freedom of presentation, since when specific identification information is set for multiple decorative parts, it is only necessary to move any particular decorative part to the presentation position.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative part is moved to the performance position, a member notifies the specific decorative part determined by the performance information determining means to the specific decorative part. A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying a player by moving the game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine J1 or J2, when a specific decorative part is moved to the production position, by moving the notification member to the specific decorative part, a specific Since the player is notified by the notification means that it is a decorative member, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the operation of the notification member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to identify in advance that a specific decorative member will be placed at the presentation position before the specific decorative member is placed at the presentation position, it is possible to identify in advance that a specific decorative member is placed at the presentation position. At this point, the notification member can begin to be moved to a particular decorative member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be moved to a specific decorative member more reliably.

In gaming machine J3, the notification means has a spherical body as the notification member, a holding means capable of holding the sphere at a holding position, and a case where the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released. a standby swing path that allows the sphere to swing at a position where it can be moved to the production position and wait for a predetermined period; and a standby swing path that allows the sphere to move from the standby swing path to the production position. A game machine J4 characterized in that it has at least a variable means for changing the direction of movement.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the notification means, the notification member is composed of a pair of spherical balls, and the spheres are held at a holding position by the holding means. When the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released, the sphere is swung in the standby swing path at a position where it can be moved to the performance position and is kept on standby for a predetermined time. The direction of movement of the sphere from the standby swing path to the performance position is varied by the variable means.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby swing path to the performance position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine J4, the notification means has variable control means for varying the variable means, and the variable control means determines the timing for varying the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is variable.

Gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine J4. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is varied by the variable control means. The timing for varying the variable means is determined and varied by the variable control means based on the identification result by the identification means.

As a result, it is possible to determine the timing to change the variable means before the specific decorative part is changed to the production position, so the movement time for the sphere to move from the variable means to the production position is taken into account, and the specific There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the presentation position while the decoration part is placed at the presentation position.

A gaming machine J6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines J1 to J5, the movable body has detection units arranged at multiple positions, the movable body has detection means capable of detecting the detection units arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions, and the discrimination means discriminates the decorative unit located at the performance position based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection means.

According to gaming machine J6, in any of gaming machines J1 to J5, detection units are arranged at multiple positions on the movable body. Detection means capable of detecting the detection units are arranged at a predetermined number of positions. A decorative unit located at a performance position is identified by a discrimination means based on a combination of detection units detected by the detection means.

This allows the detection means to mechanically detect the detection part, which has the effect of making it possible to more accurately distinguish the decorative part placed in the presentation position.

A gaming machine J7, which is any one of the gaming machines J1 to J6, is characterized in that the identification means determines the type of the decorative part that is to be moved to the performance position next to the decorative part determined by the determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 to J6, gaming machine J7 has an identification means for identifying the type of decorative part that will be moved to the presentation position next to the decorative part identified by the discrimination means, so that it is possible to identify in advance that a specific decorative part will be placed at the presentation position when the decorative part in front of the specific decorative part is placed at the presentation position. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom of presentation operations based on presentation information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<K group of features> (Identifies pockets based on outputs of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detection sections at a predetermined position, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a movable body that is moved by the movable means. a detecting means capable of simultaneously detecting the detection units arranged in a range over a predetermined period; a discriminating means for discriminating a detection result by the detecting means a plurality of times in a predetermined period; and a plurality of times by the discriminating means. A gaming machine K1 is characterized in that it has an identification means for identifying the determination result that satisfies a predetermined condition as a regular determination result.

Here, gaming machines that can perform movable performances using movable means such as accessories are known. In this conventional gaming machine, accurate presentation operations were realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that when an erroneous detection occurs by the detection means, the movable position of the movable means is misjudged, and the movable means cannot be properly controlled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a movable body provided with a plurality of detection sections at predetermined positions is moved by a movable means. With respect to the movable body moved by the movable means, detecting parts arranged within a predetermined range among the plurality of detecting parts at a predetermined detection position are simultaneously detected by the detecting means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detection means is discriminated multiple times in a predetermined period by the discriminating means, and among the plurality of discrimination results by the discriminating means, the discrimination result that satisfies a predetermined condition is identified by the discriminating means as a regular discrimination result. be done.

Thereby, when detecting the detection part of the movable body, the detection can be performed based on a determination result that satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the detection part can be detected accurately. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K1, a plurality of different decorative parts are arranged on the movable body, the detection means is configured in a predetermined number and is arranged corresponding to the arrangement intervals of the decorative parts, and the detection unit is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts.

Gaming machine K2 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine K1. That is, a plurality of different decorative parts are arranged on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement intervals of the decorative parts. A detection unit is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts.

Thereby, the detection section can be detected every time the movable body moves the arrangement interval of the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be detected periodically while the movable body is moving.

A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the multiple decorative parts in the gaming machine K2 are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals, and the detection unit is arranged on the decorative parts such that the multiple decorative parts obtained by dividing the multiple decorative parts into units corresponding to the predetermined number do not have the same arrangement relationship.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of decorative parts are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection units are arranged so that the plurality of decorative parts are divided into units corresponding to a predetermined number so that the arrangement relationship is not the same for each of the plurality of decorative parts.

This allows for a one-to-one correspondence between the arrangement of the detection part detected by the detection means and the arrangement of the movable body, which has the effect of allowing the arrangement of the movable body to be accurately determined from the detection results by the detection means.

Gaming machine K4 is one of gaming machines K1 to K3, characterized in that the detection means detects the detection section in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined amount.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines K1 to K3, gaming machine K4 has the effect that the position of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection units are detected, since the detection units are detected by the detection means in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined amount.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the identification means is characterized in that, when the multiple discrimination results by the discrimination means contain a predetermined specific ratio or more of identical discrimination results, the same discrimination results are identified as legitimate discrimination results.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines K1 to K4, gaming machine K5 has the effect that, when the results of multiple discriminations by the discrimination means contain a predetermined specific percentage or more of identical discrimination results, the discrimination means discriminates the identical discrimination results as legitimate discrimination results. Therefore, even if some of the multiple discrimination results become erroneous due to the influence of noise, etc., it is possible to prevent the erroneous discrimination results from being discriminated as legitimate discrimination results. This has the effect of enabling more accurate discrimination to be performed.

In the gaming machine K5, when the identification means identifies that the same discrimination results included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means are less than a predetermined specific ratio, an avoidance means for avoiding identifying a regular discrimination result from among the discrimination results of a second time; A gaming machine K6 comprising: detection control means for additionally detecting over the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the same discrimination results included in multiple discrimination results by the discrimination means are identified as being less than a predetermined specific ratio, regular discrimination is performed from among the multiple discrimination results. The avoidance means prevents the result from being identified. Then, when the avoidance means avoids identifying the normal discrimination result, the detection control means controls the detection unit so that the detection unit is additionally detected over a predetermined period of time.

This allows the identification means to identify the genuine discrimination result again based on the additional detection result by the detection means. This has the effect of making it possible to more reliably identify the genuine discrimination result.

<Characteristics L group> (Control to drop the ball into the target pocket)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification parts are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification part that is moved to a predetermined presentation position when the movable body is moved by the movable means. a discriminating means for discriminating information; a holding means capable of holding a performance element used for a predetermined performance at least until the predetermined performance is started; and when the holding of the performance element by the holding means is released; It is possible to detect a swinging means that can swing the performance body at a position that allows the performance body to be moved to the performance position, and a rocking state of the performance body that is swung by the rocking means. a determining means for determining, from the plurality of identification sections, the identification section to which the presentation object is to be moved based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; and moving means for moving the performance object to the identification part determined by the determination means based on the determination result by the determination means when the performance object is detected to be in a moving state. A gaming machine L1.

Here, gaming machines that are provided with a plurality of channels are known. Some of these conventional gaming machines are advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the flow path through which a ball such as a game ball travels. In addition, a swinging passageway is provided upstream of the branching position of each channel to allow the sphere to swing, and while the sphere is swinging in the swinging passageway, the player There is a method that can increase the expectation that the sphere will flow down into a flow path that is advantageous to the flow path (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-179166). However, in such conventional gaming machines, the mode of the swinging motion changes depending on the momentum of the ball entering the swinging path, so the swinging motion occurs before the player's expectations are sufficiently heightened. There were cases where the spheres flowed down from one channel to another. Therefore, there is a problem that the player's interest in playing the game may not be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a plurality of different identification parts are arranged on a movable body, and the movable body is moved by a movable means. The movable body is moved by the movable means, and the information of the identification part that is moved to a predetermined presentation position is determined by the discriminating means. The performance element used for a predetermined performance is held by the holding means at least until the predetermined performance is started, and when the performance element is released from being held by the holding means, the performance element can be moved to the performance position. The presentation body is swung by the swiveling means at a certain position. The rocking state of the performance body rocked by the rocking means is detected by the detection means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the determining unit determines the identification unit to which the performance object is to be moved from among the plurality of identification units. When the detection means detects that the rocking state of the performance body is a predetermined rocking state, the performance body is moved by the moving means to the identification part determined by the determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. Ru.

Thereby, in each predetermined performance, the performance body can be moved to the identification section after it is in a predetermined swinging state, so that the movement position of the performance body in the predetermined performance can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the swinging motion can be increased.

In the gaming machine L1, the performance body is composed of a sphere, and the swinging means has a swing path that allows the performance body to swing. L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance body is composed of a sphere. The swing means is provided with a swing path that allows the performance body to swing.

Thereby, it is possible to swing the performance body by rolling it back and forth on the swing path, so that the performance body can be swung simply by giving an initial velocity in the direction of the swing path. Therefore, there is no need to provide a special configuration for causing the performance body to perform a swinging motion, so there is an effect that the number of parts can be reduced.

In the gaming machine L2, the detection means includes a performance body detection means for detecting the performance body swinging on the swing path at a predetermined position, and a performance body detection unit that detects a swing width of the performance body below a predetermined width. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that it has a swing width detection means for determining whether the

Gaming machine L3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L2. That is, in the detection means, the performance body oscillating on the oscillation path is detected at a predetermined position by the performance body detection means, and the oscillation width detection means determines whether the oscillation width of the performance body is equal to or smaller than a predetermined width.

This allows the performance body to be moved to the performance position after the swing width of the swinging body becomes equal to or smaller than the predetermined width for each specified performance. This has the effect of preventing players from feeling uncomfortable with the movement of the performance body.

Gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the moving means in either game machine L2 or L3 has a swing piece that is formed as part of the swing path and has at least a swing groove for swinging the presentation body and a flow-down groove formed in front of the swing groove for causing the presentation body to flow down to the presentation position, and swing piece moving means that moves the swing piece from a first position where the swing groove and the swing path are connected to a second position where the flow-down groove is disposed on the swing path.

Gaming machine L4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by either gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, the moving means is provided with a swinging piece that is formed as part of the swinging path and has at least a swinging groove for swinging the presentation body and a flow-down groove formed in front of the swinging groove for causing the presentation body to flow down to the presentation position. The swinging piece moving means moves the swinging piece from a first position where the swinging groove and the swinging path are connected to a second position where the flow-down groove is disposed on the swinging path.

As a result, by simply moving the swinging piece moving means to the second position, the performance body can be flowed down from the flow groove to the performance position, so that the structure for moving the performance body to the performance position is This has the effect of simplifying the process.

Gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the moving means in gaming machine L2 or L3 has a swing piece that is a part of the swing path, and a swing piece tilting means that tilts the swing piece toward the performance position.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the moving means, a swinging piece constituted by a part of the swinging path is provided, and the swinging piece is tilted in the direction of the performance position by the swinging piece tilting means.

As a result, the performance body can be moved to the performance position simply by dropping the performance body from the tilted swinging piece, so the configuration for moving the performance body to the performance position can be simplified. There is an effect.

<Characteristics M group> (dark zone in roulette)
a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege granting means for awarding advantageous benefits to the player based on a determination result by the discriminating means being a specific determination result; an identification body in which different identification parts are arranged, a determination means for determining a particular identification part among the identification parts in the identification body, and a determination result by the discrimination means, when the determination result is the specific determination result, notification state setting means for setting the specific identification section to a notification state; and based on the establishment of a specific condition, the identification section of the identification object executes a specific effect that notifies the player of the determination result by the determination means. specific effect execution means, and the determining means divides the identification object into a plurality of areas, and divides the identification object into a high determination area in which a proportion of the identification parts is determined to be the specific identification part and the specific identification area. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the specific identification section is determined such that a low determination area is formed in which the identification section is determined at a low rate.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning decision is made, and the result of the decision is notified by a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position by rotating a rotating body with a number of different symbols arranged on the front side. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, as a result of the notification, a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can enter when a predetermined number of the same symbols (e.g., three) are lined up and stopped (for example, JP-A-7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game hoping that the predetermined number of the same symbols will stop, but since the number of combinations of winning symbols is the type of symbols arranged on the rotating body and is always constant, the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the malfunction of players quickly becoming bored.

According to the gaming machine M1, a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, and when the identification section determined as a specific identification section among the identification sections enters the notification state, a privilege is given to the player. There is a possibility that the part becomes a specific identification part, and the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the identification part determined to be a specific identification part. Furthermore, the identifier is divided into a plurality of regions, and a specific region is divided into a plurality of regions, and a high-determination region with a high percentage of determination by a specific identification portion and a low-determination region with a low percentage of determination by a specific identification portion are formed. Since the identification part is determined, the proportion of the specific identification part can be varied depending on the region of the identification object, and the degree of expectation for the specific identification part can be configured to vary even within the identification object. Therefore, it is possible to vary the player's expectations, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early.

A gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it has a moving means for moving the identifier in the gaming machine M1, and the notification state setting means moves the identifier by the moving means and stops the identifier determined to be the specific identifier at a predetermined position, thereby setting the identifier to the notification state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M1, gaming machine M2 has the effect of moving the identifier and bringing about a notification state in which a specific identifier is stopped at a predetermined position, thereby informing the player that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, so that the player can become interested in the position at which the identifier will be stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine M2, a presentation object, a moving means capable of moving the presentation object to the predetermined position, and a movement means capable of moving the presentation object to the predetermined position by the movement means in synchronization with the timing at which the identification object stops. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it has a movement control means for moving the gaming machine M3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M2, gaming machine M3 has the effect of easily notifying the player of the identification unit that has stopped at the specified position, since the presentation body is moved to a specified position in accordance with the timing of the identification body stopping.

In the gaming machine M3, the performance body has a rotating part, and a holding means capable of holding the performance body, and when the holding by the holding means is released, the performance body is swung by the rotating part. A gaming machine M4 comprising: a movable rocking path, and the moving means moves the presentation object from the rocking path to the predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, since the presentation object is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means after being swung on the swinging path by the rotating section, it is possible to identify which presentation object the presentation object is. By making the player interested in the movement of the parts, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the identification part that has stopped at a predetermined position.

The rotating part may be a member having a sphere, cylinder, arc shape, etc.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M4, if the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting means sets the specific identification section located next to the specific identification section determined to be the specific identification section. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that an undetermined identification unit is set to the notification state.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if the result is not a specific discrimination result, the specific identification section located next to the one determined to be the specific identification section. Since the identification section that is not present becomes the notification state, it is possible to make the player think that the specific identification section is about to enter the notification state, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature N group> (Control to stabilize the swing range of the ball)
A gaming machine N1 is characterized in having a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance, a performance body used as part of the performance executed by the performance execution means, a swinging means capable of swinging the performance body within a predetermined range, a discrimination means for discriminating the swinging state of the performance body when it is swung by the swinging means, and an adjustment means for adjusting the swinging force applied to the performance body based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where game balls can flow down, and one of them, which is the starting winning opening that is the trigger for starting the winning/failure judgment, is used to When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, a game is executed in which the variable prize winning device is opened, and the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In such a gaming machine, a flow path is formed that makes it easy to win a prize into a winning hole such as a starting winning hole, and a game ball that enters the flow path will fall from directly above the starting winning hole. be induced to do so. In addition, the inclination angle of the flow path is varied so that the ball flowing down the flow path that makes it easier to win a prize changes the ease with which the ball enters the starting prize opening, and the rolling speed of the game ball varies. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the game is configured so as to prevent the game from becoming monotonous (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-65977). Furthermore, there is a need for a gaming machine that suppresses the monotony of the game by increasing the interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to gaming machine N1, the rocking force applied to the presentation body is adjusted by the adjustment means based on the rocking state of the presentation body determined by the discrimination means, so that the presentation body can be rocked in a rocking state that can increase the player's interest, preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing the interest of the game.

The performance body may be swung by being pivotally supported by a support (thread, thin wires such as piano wire, thin shaft members, etc.) or by rolling or sliding on the sway path from the top of the sway path, which may be shaped like an arc. Here, the adjustment means may apply a force to the performance body or to the support when the performance body is swung by the support, and when the performance body is swung by the sway path, it may adjust the inclination of the sway path or apply a force to the performance body from the outside.

In the gaming machine N1, the discrimination means discriminates at least the swing width of the presentation body, and the adjustment means increases the swing force on the presentation body when the discrimination means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width. Gaming machine N2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine N1, gaming machine N2 has the effect of determining the oscillation width by a determination means, and if the oscillation width is equal to or less than a predetermined oscillation width, the oscillation force on the presentation body is increased, so that the oscillation state of the presentation body continues for a long time, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, when increasing the swinging force for the presentation object, the adjusting means adjusts the swinging force based on the determination result by the determining means that the swinging width is larger than the predetermined swinging width. A gaming machine N3 is characterized in that it stops the increase in the swinging force to the presentation body.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the increase in the swinging force by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the swinging width of the performance body becoming larger than the predetermined swinging width. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the swinging width of the presentation body from becoming excessively large, and the swinging width can be adjusted within a predetermined range, which has the effect of providing a stable presentation to the player.

Gaming machine N4 is one of gaming machines N1 to N3, characterized in that the adjustment means moves the position of the presentation body so that the potential energy relative to the presentation body is increased.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjustment means of gaming machine N4 moves the position of the presentation body so that the potential energy relative to the presentation body is increased, and this has the effect of increasing the swing range of the presentation body by converting potential energy into kinetic energy.

In any one of gaming machines N1 to N4, the performance body has a rotating part that can rotate and roll, and the swinging means is configured such that the rotating part repeatedly changes the rotating direction. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that it has a swinging path that allows it to rotate.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N4, the rotating part of the presentation body swings by rolling on the swinging path, so that the presentation body can be swung with a simple configuration. It has the effect of being able to.

A gaming machine N6 in the gaming machine N5, wherein the swing path is configured in an arc shape.

In addition to the effects of game machine N5, game machine N6 has the effect that the swing path is configured in an arc shape, making it easier for the rotating part of the performance body to swing.

A gaming machine N7 in the gaming machine N5 or N6, wherein the adjusting means increases the swinging force by varying the inclination of the swinging path in the direction in which the presentation body swings.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means increases the swinging force by varying the slope of the swinging path, so that the player can feel the swinging force of the performance body naturally. This has the effect of making it look like it is oscillating while maintaining the same amount of motion.

Gaming machine N8 is characterized in that the swinging means in any of gaming machines N1 to N7 has a holding means capable of holding the performance body at a position higher than the lowest position when the performance body is swung, and a release means capable of releasing the hold of the holding means.

According to gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is held at a higher position than the lowest position when swinging by the holding means, and Since the holding is released, there is an effect that the swinging of the presentation body can be started using potential energy.

Gaming machine N9 is characterized in that in gaming machine N8, the holding means holds the performance body in a position where it can be guided to the swing path when the release means releases the hold of the performance body.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, when the hold by the holding means is released by the release means, the presentation object is guided to the swinging path, so a driving force is applied to the presentation object using an electric machine or the like. Even without it, there is an effect that the performance body can be smoothly swung by its own weight.

In gaming machines N1 to N9, the adjustment means is characterized in that gaming machine N10 has a swing damping means that adjusts the swing width of the performance body to be equal to or less than a specific swing width when a specific condition is met.

According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N9, if a specific condition is satisfied, the swinging width of the presentation object is lower than or equal to a specific swinging width by the swinging damping means of the adjusting means. Since it is adjusted so that the amplitude of the swing can be intentionally varied and the effects can be varied, the player's interest can be improved.

<Feature O group> (Predetermine pocket position for dropping the ball)
a moving part having a plurality of different identification parts arranged thereon, a moving means for moving the moving part, a moving control means for moving the moving part by the moving means, a determining means for determining a moving pattern for moving the moving part, in which a stoppable range in which the moving part can be stopped is preset, based on the establishment of a moving condition, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when a specific identification part is stopped at a predetermined presentation position after being moved in the moving pattern, an identification part determining means for determining one of the identification parts from the identification parts set in the stoppable range based on the establishment of a specific condition when the moving part is moved in the moving pattern, and a stop control means for stopping the identification part determined by the identification part determining means at the presentation position at a specific stop timing.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged to determine hits, etc., and a combination of symbols that will stop at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a result of the determination. It is determined based on the rotational speed and is notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a game machine is proposed in which a game is executed in which a variable prize winning device is varied so that when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols come to a stop, a game ball can enter the game ball. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before it rotates, it is not possible to create innovative performances such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped depending on the state of the performance, etc., and the game becomes monotonous. The problem was that it got boring quickly. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and by providing a novel gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and prevent players from getting bored of it early. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress defects.

According to the gaming machine O1, the movable body is moved according to a preset movable pattern, and the stoppable range of the movable body is set to the stoppable range determined by the identification unit determining means based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. One identification part is determined from the set identification parts, and the movable body is stopped by the stop control means so that the identification part stops at the production position, so the stop position of the movable body is stopped until a specific condition is met. By providing a real-time performance to the player without being specified, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from becoming bored early.

The gaming machine O1 has a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and the stop control means controls the specific identifying section when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A game machine O2 characterized in that it is stopped at the performance position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O1, gaming machine O2 has the effect that when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a specific identification unit is stopped at the presentation position, so that the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be notified by the identification unit stopped at the presentation position.

A gaming machine O3, which is a gaming machine O1 or O2, characterized in that it has a setting means for setting the specific identification part from the plurality of different identification parts based on the establishment of a setting condition.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the specific identification section is set from a plurality of different identification sections by the setting means, so which identification section is set as the specific identification section? This has the effect of making the game more interesting and making the game more interesting.

A gaming machine O4, characterized in that in the gaming machine O3, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification parts based on the player's selection.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, at least one of the specific identification sections is set by the setting means based on the player's selection. It is possible to use a specific identification part, which allows the player to participate in the game and has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine O5 in the gaming machine O3 or O4, wherein the setting means sets the specific identification section based on a determination result by the determining means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines O3 and O4, gaming machine O5 has the effect of allowing the player to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means by the set specific discrimination unit, since the specific discrimination unit is set by the setting unit based on the discrimination result of the discrimination unit.

A gaming machine O6, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the determining means determines the movable pattern based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the discriminating means based on the discrimination result, so the movable pattern can be varied according to the discrimination result. There is.

A gaming machine O7 is any one of gaming machines O1 to O6, characterized in that it has an alarm for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the presentation position, and a guide means for guiding the alarm to the identification unit stopped at the presentation position.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the gaming machine O7 has the effect of informing the player of the identification unit stopped at the presentation position in an easier-to-understand manner, since the notification object is guided by the guidance means to the identification unit stopped at the presentation position.

A gaming machine O8, which is any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, is characterized in that the movable pattern has a variable setting period during which the identification part determined by the identification part determination means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, a variable period is set in the movable pattern in which the identification part determined by the identification part determining means can be varied. Therefore, the identification part can be made variable, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine O8 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and during the variable setting period, the identification section determined by the identification determining means is variable depending on the timing at which the operating means is operated. A game machine O9 featuring the following.

According to gaming machine O9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine O8, the identification part determined by the identification part determination means is variable depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation means, so that the player can operate the operation means in an attempt to stop a specific identification part at the presentation position, which increases the interest of the game. Furthermore, by varying the identification part determined depending on the timing at which the player operates, there is an effect that it is easy to control the identification part corresponding to the discrimination result to stop at the presentation position.

<Feature P group> (Broken nail discrimination)
A gaming machine P1 having a movable body that can be moved within a predetermined movable range, a movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means for controlling the movement of the movable means, wherein the movable body has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and the gaming machine has a detection means capable of detecting one or more of the plurality of detection units that are configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions when the movable body is moved to the predetermined positions, a discrimination means for discriminating movable position information of the movable body based on the detection result detected by the detection means, and an abnormality discrimination means for discriminating whether the detection result detected by the detection means matches a predetermined abnormal condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged to determine hits, etc., and a combination of symbols that will stop at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a result of the determination. It is determined based on the rotational speed and is notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a game machine is proposed in which a game is executed in which a variable prize winning device is varied so that when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols come to a stop, a game ball can enter the game ball. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-204318). The stopping position of the rotating body is generally determined by using multiple sensors, etc., but if a sensor failure occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at the wrong position. However, there were problems such as false notifications being given to players. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can detect malfunctions at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, one or more detection parts configured in a predetermined combination for each predetermined position among the plurality of detection parts is detected by the detection means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined based on the detection result detected by the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body has been moved based on the movable position information. In addition, the abnormality determination means determines whether the detection result detected by the detection means matches the abnormality condition based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, so even if an abnormality occurs in the detection means or the detection unit, the abnormality can be detected early. This has the effect of being able to detect and suppress erroneous movement of the movable body.

A gaming machine P2, which has a movable position information storage means for storing the movable position information determined based on the movable position information determined by the determination means, and a matching data setting means for setting in advance as matching data the detection results that would be detected when the detection unit is normally detected by the detection means at each of the plurality of predetermined positions, and the abnormality determination means determines whether the abnormality condition is met based on the movable position information previously determined by the determination means and stored in the storage means and the matching data when the movable position information is determined by the determination means as the predetermined condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P1, gaming machine P2 has the effect of being able to constantly monitor the movable position information when the movable body is normally moved, and is able to detect malfunctions at an early stage, since the abnormality determination means determines whether the movable position information determined by the previous determination means matches the comparison data and whether it matches an abnormal condition.

In the gaming machine P2, the abnormality determination means determines whether an abnormality exists by determining, based on the comparison data, whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the movable position information next to the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage means. A gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the collation data whether the movable position information determined by the determining means matches the movable position information next to the previous movable position information. Since the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, the abnormality can be determined each time the device is moved to a predetermined position, and there is an effect that the abnormality can be detected earlier.

In the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, and determines whether the abnormality condition is met based on the number of detection parts based on the detection result of the detection means. A gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it determines.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P1, gaming machine P4 has the effect of detecting an abnormality early because, when the movable body moves a predetermined amount, it is determined whether the abnormality condition is met based on the number of detection parts detected by the detection means. This allows abnormality detection to be performed every time the movable body moves a predetermined amount.

The gaming machine P4 has a detection number storage means in which the number of detections of the detection unit normally detected by the detection means when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount is stored in advance, and the abnormality determination means includes: A gaming machine P5, characterized in that it is determined whether the number of the detection parts detected by the detection means matches the number of detections stored in the detection number storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P4, gaming machine P5 has the effect of being able to more accurately determine abnormalities because the abnormality determination means determines whether the detection count matches the detection count previously stored in the detection count storage means.

<Feature Q group> (dividing LED lighting data)
A plurality of actuating parts, actuating means for actuating each of the actuating parts based on actuation data for actuating the actuating parts, and an actuation pattern for actuating each of the actuating parts based on establishment of a predetermined condition. an operation pattern determination means for determining an operation pattern; an acquisition means for acquiring operation data of each of the actuation units based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination means; and an acquisition means for acquiring the operation data acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it has a setting means for dividing and setting.

Here, gaming machines are known that include in their configuration elements for performance such as light emitting means such as LEDs and movable means such as accessories. In such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of performance members are used to perform a variety of performance operations in order to increase player's interest. In addition, in this conventional gaming machine, performance patterns of performance members, such as light emission patterns of the light emitting means and movable patterns of the movable means, are stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and then executed. A gaming machine is known that reads out a performance pattern corresponding to a performance and executes a performance operation of a corresponding performance member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-18495). However, when the number of effect members is increased, the amount of setting data for setting effect operations increases, resulting in an increase in processing load, which is a problem.

In contrast, according to gaming machine Q1, each of the multiple operating parts is operated by an operating means based on operation data for operating the multiple operating parts. An operation pattern for operating each operating part is determined by an operation pattern determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the operation data for each operating part is acquired by an acquisition means based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition means is divided and set by a setting means.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data to be divided and set each time, compared to when the operating data is set all at once by the setting means. In other words, the processing load for setting the operating data can be distributed, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

A gaming machine Q2 in the gaming machine Q1, wherein the setting means is capable of dividing and setting the operating data for each operating section.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q1, since the operating data is divided and set for each operating section by the setting means, there is an effect that the processing load can be more finely distributed.

Gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying the operation mode when the operation part is operated, and data specifying the operation part to be operated in that operation mode.

In gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines Q1 and Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying the operation mode when the operating part is operated and data specifying the operating part to be operated in that operation mode, so different operation modes can be set for multiple operating parts. This has the effect of diversifying the operation modes and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q3, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring operation data in which data designating a plurality of different operation modes is associated with data designating different operation parts.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q3, gaming machine Q4 has the effect of obtaining data specifying a plurality of different operating modes, each of which is associated with data specifying a different operating unit, so that different operating modes can be set for different operating units depending on the operating data obtained by the obtaining means. This has the effect of making it possible to further diversify the operating modes of the plurality of operating units.

A gaming machine Q5 in the gaming machine Q4, wherein the setting means divides and sets the operating data for each of the operating parts to which the same operating mode is set.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, the same operating mode can be set to the operating parts at the same timing, so the same operating mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the visual quality of each operating section immediately after setting the operating data can be improved.

Gaming machine Q6 is any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q5, characterized in that the operating unit is composed of a light-emitting means that emits light, and the operating data is composed of data for setting a light-emitting pattern by the light-emitting means.

Gaming machine Q6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines Q1 to Q5. That is, the operating unit is composed of a light-emitting means that emits light. The operating data is composed of data for setting the light-emitting pattern of the light-emitting means.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the light emission pattern of the light emitting means.

A gaming machine Q7, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, the operation data is set by a setting means using a serial communication method.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, the operating data is set by the setting means using the serial communication method, so data can be set with fewer wires than the parallel communication method. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

<Feature R Group> (The mission set by the player (selecting the winning combination) continues until the jackpot)
A gaming machine R1 having a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means which displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when identification information based on a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine further comprising a specific effect execution means which executes a specific effect which notifies the player that an advantageous bonus will be granted when a specific condition is established, the specific effect execution means continuously executing at least the specific effect spanning from the period during which the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed to the period during which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

There has been proposed a pachinko machine that executes an effect during normal gameplay notifying the player of whether or not they have won a jackpot, and executes an effect during bonus play (jackpot play) notifying the player of whether or not they will receive a bonus (e.g., a special bonus game state) that is awarded after the jackpot has ended (e.g., JP 2009-178292 A). In this case, because independent effects are executed for each game state, it is not possible to execute a sequence of effects notifying the player of a jackpot win and an effect notifying the player that a bonus will be awarded, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in gaming machine R1, a special effect is continuously executed to notify the player that a beneficial bonus will be granted from the period when the identification information based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed to the period when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the next bonus will be granted during the period when the bonus game is being executed by the special effect that is continuously executed. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the special effect that is continuously executed during the bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

In the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is established when a number of different sub-conditions are established, and the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance indicating that a predetermined number of the sub-conditions have been established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being the specific determination result. In the gaming machine R2,

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, a specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different minor conditions are met, and when a predetermined number of minor conditions are met, a specific performance is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the predetermined number of minor conditions have been met through the specific performance, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

Gaming machine R3 is characterized in that in gaming machine R2, the specific effect execution means executes a remaining specific effect as the specific effect, which indicates whether the remaining minor conditions among the plurality of different minor conditions have been met during the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, a remaining specific performance indicating whether the remaining minor conditions among a plurality of different minor conditions are satisfied is executed as a specific performance. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of remaining minor conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, making the player expect that the specific condition will be met, and the player's It has the effect of increasing interest.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R3, at least a normal bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a special bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus game are set as bonus games by the bonus game execution means. A gaming machine R4, further comprising a bonus game type determining means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, there is also a regular bonus game that is set as a bonus game, and a special bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the regular bonus game. This is determined by the bonus game type determining means. Therefore, the variety of bonus games that are advantageous to the player is increased, which has the effect of suppressing (preventing) the problem of the player getting bored early.

Gaming machine R5 is characterized in that in gaming machine R4, the remaining specific effect is executed to indicate that the remaining minor condition has been met during the bonus game, thereby indicating that the special bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R4, gaming machine R5 indicates that a special bonus game is being played when the remaining bonus performance is executed, which has the effect of providing players with a gaming machine that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the special bonus game in the gaming machine R4 or R5 is a game in which, after the bonus game, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is granted until a predetermined condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines R4 and R5, gaming machine R6 provides a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined condition is met after the bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest by providing a more advantageous state to the player.

Gaming machine R7 is any of gaming machines R2 to R6 that has a selection means that allows the player to select the minor condition.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R2 to R6, the player can select a minor condition using the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be increased.

<Characteristic S group> (Increase in roulette winning pockets)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and a privilege granting means that provides a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific determination result. In a gaming machine that has a display means for displaying a plurality of different identification information, and when the plurality of different identification information displayed on the display means is stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position, the player identification information determining means for determining specific identification information that notifies that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result; a performance execution means for performing a performance of stopping one piece of the identification information at the stop position after being displaced to the stop position; and when the performance execution means executes the performance, the determination means performs a determination. A gaming machine S1 comprising: variable setting means for variably setting the identification information determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determining means depending on the state.

Here, pachinko machines have been proposed that have a gameplay that awards a bonus game (e.g., a jackpot game) when a specific character from among multiple characters displayed on the roulette wheel stops at a specific stopping position (for example, JP 2004-73580 A). In this case, it is necessary to control the stopping position of the roulette based on the results of a lottery for a special symbol. For example, if the result of the lottery for a special symbol is a jackpot, a specific character from among multiple characters must be stopped at a specific stopping position, which causes the rotation of the roulette to move unnaturally, making it impossible to provide a favorable presentation to the player, and reducing the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, according to the gaming machine S1, in the performance executed by the performance execution means, one of the multiple identification information displayed on the display means is changed by the variable setting means to a specific identification information that notifies the player that the judgment result is a specific judgment result (i.e., that a special benefit that is advantageous to the player will be granted) depending on the state in which the judgment is executed by the judgment means. This makes it possible to change the specific identification information in the performance executed by the performance execution means. This has the effect of making it possible to provide a suitable performance for the player, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the gaming machine S1, the performance executed by the performance execution means has a predetermined period set in advance, and based on the elapse of a first period of the predetermined period, the performance is executed by the identification information determining means. A gaming machine S2 characterized in that specific identification information is determined.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance is executed by the performance execution means in a predetermined period that is set in advance. Specific identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the fact that a first period of the predetermined period during which the performance is performed has elapsed. As a result, the specific identification information is determined when the first period has elapsed, so that the identification information can be dynamically displaced in the performance executed by the performance execution means without any discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable performance to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

A gaming machine S3, which is the gaming machine S1 or S2, further comprising an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means based on establishment of an acquisition condition.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, so that the discrimination information can be reliably acquired. This has the effect of preventing the occurrence of a malfunction in which the performance execution means does not execute a performance even when the discrimination condition is established.

In the gaming machine S3, storage means stores at least the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination information stored in the storage means is stored in the discrimination condition corresponding to the discrimination information. and a prior determination means that performs determination before the determination is established, and the variable setting means is configured to vary and set the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means at least until the discrimination condition is satisfied. The discrimination information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the preliminary discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination information is variably set based on the discrimination result of the preliminary discrimination means. As a result, it is possible to change the identification information before the performance based on the discrimination information for which the identification information is to be changed is executed, so that the identification information can be changed without any discomfort in the performance executed by the performance execution means. can be dynamically displaced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable performance to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

<Feature T Group>(Bunny's leg effects)
a variable member for varying the opening of the ball entry means between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the open state; a variable member for varying the variable member between the open state and the closed state; a first flow path for allowing the game ball that has entered the opening to flow down and positioned in a position visible to a player; a displacement means for displacing the first flow path between a first position in which it is possible to allow the game ball that has entered the opening to flow down and a second position in which it is difficult to allow the game ball to flow down; and a displacement control means for moving the displacement means to at least the first position during the period in which the variable member is in the open state.

Here, there are known gaming machines that perform effects by moving movable parts called special effects on the game board to enhance the player's interest (for example, JP 2004-121464 A). In this case, there is a problem that the installation of the special effects results in the loss of installation space for winning slots and other features necessary for playing the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine T1, during the period in which the variable member is variable to the open state in which a game ball can enter the open portion of the ball entry means, the first flow path disposed at a position visible to the player is changed to the first position so that the game ball that enters the opening flows downward. Moreover, the first flow path can be displaced between a first position and a second position. As a result, when a game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position, making it possible to allow the game ball to flow down and into the opening of the ball entry means. When the game ball does not enter, the first channel can be displaced between the first position and the second position and used for performances, etc. Therefore, since the first channel can be used for production, it is possible to improve the player's interest and furthermore, it is possible to secure the installation space on the game board.

The gaming machine T1 includes a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable member is changed to the open state a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied. , wherein the displacement control means displaces the first flow path to the first position until a predetermined period has elapsed after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. T2.

According to gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine T1, a bonus game is executed in which the variable member is changed to the open state multiple times until a predetermined condition is met, and the first flow path is displaced to the first position until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the bonus game ends. Therefore, even if the gaming ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means has not finished flowing down, the first flow path is not displaced to the second position, so there is an effect that the gaming ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means can be allowed to flow down without clogging.

The gaming machine T1 or T2 has a performance execution means for performing a performance, and as one of the performances, the performance execution means controls the displacement of the first flow path outside the period in which the bonus game is performed. A game machine T3 characterized in that the game machine is displaced by a means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first channel is displaced as one of the effects outside the period in which the bonus game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of performances, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

The gaming machine T3 is provided with a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and the bonus game executing means executes the above-mentioned discrimination based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A bonus game is executed, and the effect execution means is characterized in that the first channel is displaced by the displacement control means as one of the effects indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Game machine T4.

Gaming machine T4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine T3. That is, when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, a bonus game is executed, and the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects indicating the discrimination result. Therefore, since it can be determined whether the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result by the effect of displacing the first flow path, the player will focus on the effect of displacing the first flow path, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

<Feature U group> (Time-out effect)
a game machine U1 having a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result; a state setting means for setting a special game state in which the discrimination condition is more likely to be established until a predetermined condition is established; an effect execution means for executing an effect for a predetermined period when the special game state is set by the state setting means; and an associated effect execution means for executing an associated effect associated with the effect executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined condition is not established within the period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means.

Here, there is a pachinko machine in which a special game state (for example, a probability-variable game state) different from the normal game state is executed for a predetermined period of time. In such a pachinko machine, a technique for notifying a player that the current game state is a special game state using a performance executed for a predetermined period of time has been proposed, in which a pachinko machine changes the progress of the performance executed for a predetermined period of time when it is determined that the timing at which the performance executed for a predetermined period of time ends differs from the timing at which the special game state ends (JP Patent Publication 2008-173320). In this case, when the timing at which the performance executed for a predetermined period of time ends differs from the timing at which the special game state ends, control must be performed to change the progress of the performance executed for a predetermined period of time, which creates a problem of a large processing load.

According to the gaming machine U1, a special game state is set in which the discrimination conditions are easily set until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the special game state is set, an effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, an accompanying effect associated with the effect is executed. Here, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the display period of the effect ends even though the special game state continues. In this case, an accompanying effect associated with the effect is executed by the accompanying effect execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player aware that the special game state is continuing. In addition, the effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, an accompanying effect associated with the effect is executed, so there is no need to perform control to change the content of the effect executed for the predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the effect can be reduced.

A gaming machine U2 is characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information that is determined by the discrimination means when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means at least until the discrimination condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U1, gaming machine U2 provides the following effects. That is, when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means, discrimination information is acquired, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until the discrimination condition is met. As a result, even if the discrimination condition is not met at the time when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means and the discrimination information is acquired, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) cases where the discrimination means does not execute discrimination even though a gaming ball has entered the ball entry means, which has the effect of suppressing (preventing) excessive disadvantage to the player.

Gaming machine U3 is characterized in that in gaming machine U1 or U2, the effect execution means executes a specific effect indicating the specific discrimination result during the remaining period based on the discrimination means discriminating the specific discrimination result during the period in which the effect is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U1 or gaming machine U2, gaming machine U3 executes a specific effect for the remaining period if a specific judgment result is obtained during the period in which the effect is executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to easily recognize that a specific judgment result has been obtained during the period in which the effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, a display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period that determines a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means. A gaming machine U4 comprising: a determining means, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The predetermined condition is established based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the predetermined number of determinations made by the determining means. As a result, during the period in which the special gaming state is set (i.e., the period in which a performance is performed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, or the period in which an incidental performance accompanying that performance is performed), based on the determination result. A dynamic display of identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the period in which the special gaming state is set, it is possible to draw attention to the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

<Characteristic Group V> (Lookahead during RUSH)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is used to satisfy a determination condition. a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until at least the discrimination condition is satisfied; and a display means for displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means. and a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display means; dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a dynamic display period storage means storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period that is longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more as the display period; and the dynamic display period; a first effect executing means for executing a first effect at a timing when a first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display period is determined by the determining means; When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result by the means being the specific determination result, the second dynamic display period is determined from the start of the second dynamic display period. A second display capable of executing the first effect at the timing when the first period has elapsed, and repeatedly executing the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period has elapsed. and a limiting means for limiting the number of consecutive executions of the first performance to less than the predetermined number of times when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is not the specific discrimination result. A game machine V1 featuring:

Here, a production (so-called pseudo-continuous notice production) has been proposed that suggests the player's expectation of winning the jackpot by stopping and displaying a predetermined display mode multiple times in one special symbol variation display (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-161390). In order to execute this pseudo-continuous notice performance, it is necessary to set the variation time of one special symbol variation to a time that allows the predetermined display mode to be stopped and displayed multiple times, and the number of special symbol variations per unit time. The problem was that there were fewer In addition, in pachinko machines that have a function that can store winning information of special symbols multiple times (retention memory function), a predetermined display mode is used to display a variable display of special symbols corresponding to multiple pieces of winning information that have been retained and stored. A presentation (so-called continuous notice presentation) that suggests to the player the level of expectation of winning a jackpot by displaying the game in a stopped state multiple times has also been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-207261). In order to execute this continuous notice performance, it is necessary to store multiple pieces of winning information for special symbols, so in pachinko machines where it is difficult to store multiple pieces of winning information for special symbols, or pachinko machines that do not have a hold memory function, There was a problem that the preview performance could not be executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the second dynamic display period is longer than a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period. In this case, the first effect is executed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses.

This makes it possible to have different dynamic display periods, the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period, while aligning the execution timing of the first performance executed in the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. This has the effect of increasing the variation in dynamic display periods while making the player aware that the first performance is being executed based on the second dynamic display period being set (i.e., the determination result being a specific determination result), thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Furthermore, the first performance is performed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and when the determination result is not the specific determination result, the number of times the first performance is continuously performed is limited. As a result, the first performance is not executed a predetermined number of times even though it is not the second dynamic display period (that is, the determination result is not a specific determination result), so that the gaming machine is easy to understand for the player. The effect is that it can be provided.

A gaming machine V2 in the gaming machine V1, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is configured to more easily determine the first dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine V1, gaming machine V2 is configured to easily determine a first dynamic display period that is shorter than the second dynamic display period. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display period from becoming too long. This has the effect of preventing the game time from being prolonged and preventing the player from becoming bored.

A gaming machine V3 in the gaming machine V1 or V2, wherein the first performance execution means executes the first performance based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. As a result, the first effect can be executed only when the first dynamic display period starts at a specific start timing, and the first effect displayed during the first dynamic display period can be executed during the second dynamic display period. This can be made to coincide with the timing at which the first effect is displayed during the display period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first effect is being displayed during the first dynamic display period or whether the first effect is being displayed during the second dynamic display period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine V4 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the performance period of the first performance.

According to gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the presentation period of the first presentation. This means that the first presentation is not executed multiple times during the first dynamic display period, and it is only necessary to control whether or not to execute the first presentation during the first dynamic display period. This has the effect of simplifying the control process for executing the first presentation during the first dynamic display period.

In addition, the first dynamic display period is shorter than twice the presentation period of the first effect, i.e., the presentation period of the first effect is longer than half the first dynamic display period. This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient presentation period for the first effect even if the first dynamic display period is short. This has the effect of making it easy for the player to recognize the first effect.

<Feature W group> (Random display of decorative designs)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a display means that displays identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. a dynamic display means, a performance execution means for executing a performance, a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to a player after the performance execution means executes a specific performance, and a display means for displaying the identification information. A gaming machine W1 characterized in that it has a display position determining means for determining a position to be displayed at each time the determining means executes a determination.

Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that notifies the player of the lottery results for special symbols using identification information displayed on a display means (for example, JP 6-134105 A). In this case, because the display means is made up of dot LEDs, the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means cannot be changed, which creates the problem of not being able to increase the interest of the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine that displays decorative symbols that change based on a lottery of special symbols on a display means, a pachinko machine that changes the display mode of the decorative symbols has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-2358336). In this case, while the special symbol is being changed, the display mode of the decorative symbol can be changed to various modes to increase the interest of the game, but the decorative symbol also changes to the predetermined timing when the special symbol stops being displayed. Since the special symbols are stopped and displayed at certain positions, the player can easily determine whether or not the special symbols have stopped (whether or not the special symbols have finished changing) just by checking the predetermined position. For example, when performing a series of performances using a plurality of special symbol variations, there is a problem in that the stop display of the decorative symbols displayed by the display means reduces the performance effect of the series of performances.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, an advantageous benefit is given to the player. Then, each time the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by the display position determination means based on the discrimination result. Thereby, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed can be changed every time the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, by using the display position determination means to determine that the display position of the identification information is to be moved to multiple locations at predetermined intervals, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at which display position the identification information is displayed at the timing when the identification information is stopped (timing when the special symbol stops). Therefore, for example, when a series of effects using multiple special symbols is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from easily understanding the display content of the identification information displayed by the display means (whether it has stopped or not), and this has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the series of effects.

Gaming machine W2 is characterized in that in gaming machine W1, the effect execution means causes the display means to display an effect pattern as part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect pattern is displayed.

Gaming machine W2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine W1. That is, the performance execution means displays the performance mode on the display means as part of the performance. Furthermore, the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the performance mode is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether it is stopped or not). This has the effect of enhancing the performance effect.

Gaming machine W3 is characterized in that in gaming machine W1, the effect execution means displays the effect pattern as part of the effect on an effect display means different from the display means, and the effect display means is configured with a display area larger than the display means.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance display means is configured with a display area larger than the display means, and the performance execution means displays a performance form that is a part of the performance on the performance display means as part of the performance. Thereby, it is possible to display a performance form that is part of the performance using the performance display means having a larger display area than the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance mode displayed on the performance display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Gaming machine W4 is any one of gaming machines W1 to W3, characterized in that it has a display position varying means for varying the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determining means while the identification information is being dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determining means is changed by the display position changing means during the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the displayed content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the effect execution means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period that can be determined multiple times by the discrimination means, and is displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is configured to perform the identification by the determining means while the performance is being executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine W5 characterized in that, when the determination result is determined, a period longer than the remaining period of the performance can be easily determined as the dynamic display period.

Gaming machine W5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines W1 to W4. That is, the performance execution means executes a performance for a predetermined performance period that can be determined multiple times by the discrimination means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the identification information to be displayed on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means is set so that, when a specific discrimination result is discriminated by the discrimination means while a performance is being executed by the performance execution means, it is easy to determine a period equal to or greater than the remaining period of the performance as the dynamic display period. This has the effect of preventing the identification information based on the specific discrimination result from being displayed in the middle of the performance, which would result in a decrease in the performance effect.

In the gaming machine W5, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the determination result of the determining means being a determination result other than the specific determination result. The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the performance period executed by the performance execution means is configured to be longer than a predetermined time period than the first period.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the determination result of the determination means being a determination result other than the specific determination result, and the dynamic display period is executed by the effect execution means. The presentation period is made up of a period that is a predetermined time or more of the first period. Thereby, in the case of a discrimination result other than a specific discrimination result, it is possible to increase the number of discriminations performed by the discrimination means per unit time, and there is an effect that discrimination efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, during the period of the effect executed by the effect execution means, the identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and since the display position of the identification information is determined by the display position determination means, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the presentation mode displayed on the presentation display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether it is stopped or not). This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Note that by selectively adopting the configuration described in any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the above-mentioned effects can be further enhanced.

Gaming machine W7 is characterized in that it has a state setting means for setting a special state in which the discrimination condition is easily satisfied until the end condition is satisfied in gaming machine W5 or W6, and the performance execution means starts the execution of the performance based on the special state being set by the state setting means.

According to gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines W5 and W6, a special state that makes it easier for the discrimination means to be established is set by the state setting means until the end condition is established. The performance execution means starts the execution of the performance based on the special state being set. This has the effect of enhancing the performance effect of the performance executed for a predetermined period in the special state.

<Feature X group> (Variable roulette addition depending on time period)
a special state setting means for setting the specific indicator to a special state different from normal when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that notifies a player of the discrimination result by the identifier of the identifier based on the satisfaction of a specific condition; an additional setting means for adding and setting the specific indicator based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during the execution of the specific effect; and a probability changing means for changing the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that has a game feature that grants a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character among a plurality of characters displayed on a roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-73580). However, since the number of predetermined characters is not changed (added) during the roulette game, the notification mode that indicates the player's expectation of jackpot does not change while the roulette game is in progress. During the execution of the roulette game, the player's desire to play decreases, and there is a risk that the player may become bored early.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A special status that is different from normal is set when a benefit that is advantageous to the user is granted). That is, when any of the specific identification parts is set to a special state different from normal, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while a specific performance is being executed, a specific identification section is additionally set. As a result, when a specific identification part is added and set in a specific performance, the player feels that there is a higher possibility that an advantageous benefit will be given, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest. .

Further, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is varied by the probability variable means. That is, the probability that a specific identification part is added can be varied. Therefore, since the probability of adding a specific identification part changes, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem of players getting bored early.

Gaming machine X2, characterized in that in gaming machine X1, the bonus granting means sets at least one of a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the probability varying means sets the probability of the predetermined condition being met higher when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine When a gaming state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition will be satisfied is set to be high. As a result, if the predetermined condition is likely to be satisfied, it is likely that a specific identification section is added. Therefore, since the player expects that the second gaming state is set by adding the specific identification section, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine X3, which is a gaming machine X1 or X2, has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, and an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the additional setting means determines whether the predetermined condition is established when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine X3, information is obtained that is determined by the determination means based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means (i.e., information for granting the bonus granting means is obtained), and when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is met (i.e., it is determined whether to add a specific identification unit). This has the effect of encouraging the player to enter the ball entry means, and increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

In the gaming machine A gaming machine X4 characterized in that it is determined that a condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A predetermined condition is met (ie, a specific identification part is added). Therefore, since the specific identification part is added based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, there is an effect that it is possible to give the impression to the player that the addition of the specific identification part is done fairly.

In the gaming machine X4, the gaming machine X5 is characterized in that the probability variable means varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be varied by the probability variable means. Therefore, since the probability of adding a specific identification part changes, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem of players getting bored early.

Gaming machine X6 is characterized in that in gaming machine X4, the probability varying means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of game balls that enter the lottery.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the gaming machine X6 varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means by setting a probability table set for each number of game balls that enter the lottery. Therefore, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, which has the effect of reducing the control load of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine The gaming machine X7 is characterized in that a second probability setting table is set in which a lottery probability is set relatively higher than that of the first probability setting table.

According to gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine X6, a first probability table is set based on the setting of a first gaming state, and a second probability setting table with a higher lottery probability than the first probability setting table is set based on the setting of a second gaming state. Therefore, by setting a probability table according to the gaming state, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, which has the effect of reducing the control load of the gaming machine.

<Feature Y group> (When predicting a win in the background performance, if you pause, stop it at a position where the win performance can be performed within 0.2 Y.)
a dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for which the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is displayed based on the result of the determination; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means; a performance dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display a performance; a stop control means for stopping the dynamic display of the performance by the performance dynamic display means when a period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is not performed by the dynamic display means continues for a predetermined period or longer; and a performance mode determination means for determining a specific performance mode as the mode of the performance dynamically displayed by the performance dynamic display means when the identification information based on the specific result of the determination is dynamically displayed, wherein the stop control means stops the dynamic display of the performance in a state in which the specific performance mode can be switched to and displayed.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when identification information based on a specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed, a specific presentation mode is dynamically displayed. In addition, when the dynamic display of identification information is not executed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a presentation such as a demo screen is dynamically displayed. In such gaming machines, when a demo screen is displayed, if the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, it is necessary to switch the presentation from the demo screen to a specific presentation mode. If it takes time to switch the presentation, the player may feel uncomfortable.

In addition, an effect has been proposed in which a character (icon) symbolizing a privilege (such as a jackpot) to be given to the player is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and the player is informed that the privilege will be granted by acquiring the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-236851). In this case, after the special symbol starts changing, that is, after the lottery result of the current special symbol is confirmed, a character (icon) symbolizing the benefit is displayed on the display screen and corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol. Since the effect (the effect of whether or not to acquire a character) is executed, a character (icon) is displayed on the display screen during the variation time of one special symbol, and then it is determined whether or not to acquire that character. There was a problem in that the result had to be displayed in an effect and the variation time of the special symbol had to be set for a long time.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the performance is dynamically displayed in a specific performance mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously executed for a predetermined period or more. If not, the dynamic display of the performance is stopped while the display can be switched to a specific performance mode. As a result, if the dynamic display of identification information is not executed continuously for a predetermined period or longer, even if the discrimination condition is met and the dynamic display is executed based on a specific discrimination result, the dynamic display of the production can be displayed by switching to a specific presentation mode. Therefore, since the performance can be performed in a specific performance mode without delay, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the specific presentation mode in gaming machine Y1 includes a notification mode indicating that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result during the period from the start to the first presentation period, and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the specific discrimination result is configured to be equal to or longer than the first presentation period.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Y1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific performance mode includes a notification mode that indicates that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result during the period from the start to the first production period, and when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result, The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be longer than the first presentation period. As a result, when performing a presentation based on a notification mode indicating a specific determination result, a dynamic display period longer than the first presentation period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display an effect in a notification mode that indicates a specific determination result, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

Gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the dynamic effect display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the effect across multiple dynamic displays of the identification information, and dynamically displays a performance mode that can be switched to the specific performance mode in accordance with the timing at which the dynamic display of the identification information begins.

According to the gaming machine Y3, it is possible to dynamically display the performance across multiple dynamic displays of the identification information, and it is possible to switch to a specific performance mode in accordance with the timing of starting the dynamic display of the identification information. The presentation mode is dynamically displayed. Thereby, when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, a production mode that can be switched to a specific production mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, it is possible to switch to a specific performance mode without delay after the dynamic display starts, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that there is no.

Among any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the performance is such that a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern are dynamically displayed at least simultaneously, and the specific performance mode is such that the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern are displayed in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in a specific performance mode, the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol that are dynamically displayed at the same time are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, by visually recognizing the contact between the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol, the player can recognize that a specific performance mode is being executed, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand for the player. effective.

<Characteristics AA group> (Roulette interruption control)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means for performing determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a determination result based on the determination result by the determination means. a determination period determining means for determining a period until determination; and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being determined as a specific determination result. In a gaming machine that has a plurality of identification means set with a plurality of different identification information, and among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the player is informed that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. an identification information determining means that determines the specific identification information to be notified, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined production period; a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in which a notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified, and when the specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means, the specific determination result by the discrimination means; a setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information selected in the specific performance based on the determination; A gaming machine AA1 characterized in that it has an interrupting means for interrupting the production period if the discrimination is not performed by the discriminating means.

Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that executes a specific performance regardless of the presence or absence of a change in special symbols during the period from the start of the time-saving gaming state until the end of the time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013 -236851). In this case, the specific performance will be started even if the special symbol is not changed during the time-saving game, so it is important not to change the special symbol for the specific performance that is executed only within the specific period during the time-saving game state. You can see it for a long time. Therefore, there has been a problem in that expectations for a particular performance are lowered.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AA1, the discrimination means performs discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and the determination period determination means determines the period until the discrimination result is determined based on the discrimination result. The bonus granting means grants a bonus based on the discrimination result being determined as a specific discrimination result. Then, among the multiple different identification information set by the identification means, the identification information determination means determines specific identification information that notifies the player that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, and notifies the player of the specific identification information. When a predetermined condition is met, the specific performance execution means executes a specific performance that notifies a notification mode indicating one selected identification information from the identification information set in the identification means during a predetermined performance period. When the specific performance is being executed by the specific performance execution means, the setting means sets the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means as the identification information to be selected in the specific performance based on the discrimination of a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means. Furthermore, if the discrimination means continues not to execute discrimination for a predetermined period during the performance period, the performance period is interrupted by the interruption means. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a specific performance executed using a predetermined performance period proceeds while the discrimination means is not making a discrimination, which has the effect of preventing the loss of anticipation for the specific performance executed during the performance period.

In addition, by interrupting the performance period, rather than executing control to change (extend) the content of the specific performance that is executed during the performance period so that expectations for the specific performance are not impaired, This has the effect of reducing processing.

In the gaming machine AA1, the performance period is set as a first performance period from the start until the first period elapses, and the interruption means is configured such that the determination is not executed for the predetermined period in the first performance period. A gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the game machine AA2 executes an interruption based on a continuation of a situation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA2, gaming machine AA2 provides the following effects. That is, the first presentation period is set to be the period from when the presentation period begins until the first period has elapsed, and the presentation period is interrupted by the interruption means based on the fact that a predetermined period of judgment has not been performed during the first presentation period. This allows the period during which it is determined whether or not to interrupt the presentation period to be part of the presentation period (first presentation period). Therefore, when the presentation period is resumed, it is possible to secure the predetermined presentation period, and there is an effect that a specific presentation can be performed without damaging the player's expectations.

In the gaming machine AA2, the interrupting means determines whether or not the determination by the determining means has been performed during the predetermined period until the first presentation period has elapsed, and if the determination has not been performed, The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the performance period is interrupted based on the elapse of the performance period.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AA1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the determination has not been performed for a predetermined period until the first performance period has elapsed, the performance period is interrupted by the interruption means based on the fact that the first performance period has elapsed. . This makes it possible to make the timing at which the performance period is interrupted constant. This makes it possible to keep the remaining performance period constant when the performance period is restarted, so there is an effect that the processing load for executing the specific performance after restarting can be reduced.

It is preferable that during the first presentation period, a predetermined presentation is executed regardless of the result of the determination by the determination means, and that the specific presentation is executed after the first presentation period has elapsed. This makes it possible to execute the specific presentation without giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the presentation period is interrupted.

A gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determination means determines the period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined so that the determination result is determined a predetermined number of times within the presentation period.

According to gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determining means so that the determination result is determined a predetermined number of times within the performance period. Thereby, the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed multiple times within the performance period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if a situation occurs in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is not executed within the performance period, that is, after the first discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the game ball does not enter the ball entering means and the next discrimination is Even if a situation in which the performance is not executed occurs, the performance period is interrupted by the interruption means, so that there is an effect that expectations for the specific performance during the performance period are not impaired.

<Features AB Group> (Differentiating the period during which push buttons can be accepted from the notification period)
a first period setting means for setting a first period within the valid period by the valid period setting means; and a delay means for delaying the execution of the effect by the effect execution means until the first period has elapsed if the operation means is operated during the first period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after a display device dynamically displays a discrimination symbol for a predetermined period of time, a symbol based on the determination result is stopped and displayed. During the period in which the determination symbols are dynamically displayed, the performance mode is changed based on the player pressing an operable operation means (for example, a button) as various performances, and the determination results are displayed in advance in the game. A gaming machine has been proposed that improves player's interest by displaying a preview display or the like to notify the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-185224). In this case, the period during which the player can operate the operating means is limited to the period during which the production mode can be changed and displayed, and when the period during which the operation is possible is notified to the player, the period is short and the effective period is There were problems such as the inability to operate the operating means within the game, making it difficult to play. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that allows easy playing of games.

According to gaming machine AB1, when a valid period is set for which an operation by the operating means is valid, if the operating means is operated within the valid period after the first period of the valid period has elapsed, an effect is generated. is executed. On the other hand, if the operating means is operated before the first period of the validity period has elapsed, execution of the effect will be delayed. Therefore, it is possible to set the valid period even if it is different from the start timing of the performance executed based on the operating means, and it is possible to set the valid period for a longer time, allowing the player to operate the operating means. Since the period is long, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

In the gaming machine AB1, the gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the performance executed by the performance executing means is determined in a performance mode based on a determination result by the determining means.

According to gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means is determined based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. In other words, the player can visually check the presentation mode of the presentation and thereby understand the discrimination result by the discrimination means. This has the effect of making the player interested in the presentation mode of the presentation, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means for displaying the presentation, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, an identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set, and that the determination result is a specific determination result for the player among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means. an identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to be notified; and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined execution period; a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect that is notified of a notification mode indicating the selected identification information; and when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means, the discriminating means determines the specific effect. and a setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information selected in the specific performance based on the determined result, and executing the performance. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the means executes a notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect.

According to gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific performance is being executed, when a specific discrimination result is determined by the discrimination means, a notification performance based on specific identification information that notifies that the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result by the performance execution means. is executed. As a result, if the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result during the execution of a specific effect, the discrimination result becomes A notification effect that allows the player to recognize the result is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance based on the operation of the operating means, and there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Sets the next roulette effect based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification parts are arranged, a movable means for movable the movable body, a movable control means for movable the movable body by the movable means, and a movable body based on establishment of a movable condition. a determining means for determining a movable pattern in which a stopable range in which the stoppage is possible is set in advance; and after being moved in the movable pattern determined by the determining means, the specific identification part is placed at a predetermined production position. a benefit granting means that grants a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the movable body is stopped; and a set in the stoppable range based on the establishment of a specific condition when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern. an identification part determining means for determining one of the identification parts from among the identification parts that have been identified; and a stop control means for stopping the identification part determined by the identification part determining means at the production position at a specific stop timing; The determining means determines a movable pattern in which the stoppable range to be stopped next is set in advance, corresponding to the identification section stopped by the stop control means. Game machine AC1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged to determine hits, etc., and a combination of symbols that will stop at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a result of the determination. It is determined based on the rotational speed and is notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a game machine is proposed in which a game is executed in which a variable prize winning device is varied so that when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols come to a stop, a game ball can enter the game ball. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by the first rotating effect, it is not possible to change the level of expectation for the next rotating effect depending on the stopping position, and the game becomes monotonous, resulting in players getting bored early. There was a point. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and by providing a novel gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and prevent players from getting bored of it early. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress defects.

According to the gaming machine AC1, among the multiple identifiers in the movable body, an identifier that falls within the stoppable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at a predetermined presentation position. The movable pattern is determined to be a preset movable pattern in which the next stoppable range is set when the movable body is stopped. In other words, the next stoppable range is determined when the movable body is stopped. Therefore, the expectation of whether a specific identifier will stop at the presentation position can be changed from the position where the movable body is stopped in accordance with the next stoppable range, and even if a specific identifier does not stop at the presentation position, the stopping position can be made interesting. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the movable pattern has a preset execution period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 has a preset execution period set for the movement pattern of the movable body. This has the effect of suppressing (preventing) the inconvenience of players quickly becoming bored due to the movement of the movable body becoming protracted.

Furthermore, according to the configuration including the gaming machine AC1, the next possible stop range is determined when the movable body is stopped, so even if the period in which the movable body is moved is within the preset execution period, The stoppable range can be determined based on the execution period. In other words, it is possible to define a stoppable range suitable for the period during which the movable body is movable (movable pattern), and for example, the identification part that does not reach the production position during the set period (movable pattern) is determined as the stoppable range. Never. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable motion of the movable body does not become unnatural, and a suitable performance can be provided without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

A gaming machine AC3, which is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, and the stop control means stops the specific identification part at the presentation position when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the specific identification part is stopped at the performance position, so that the discrimination by the discrimination means There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification section that stops at the presentation position.

A gaming machine AC4, in any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, further comprising a setting means for setting the specific identification section from the plurality of different identification sections based on establishment of a setting condition.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the gaming machine AC4 has the effect of making the player more interested in which identification part will be set as the specific identification part by the setting means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

A gaming machine AC5 in the gaming machine AC4, wherein the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification sections based on a player's selection.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification sections is set by the setting means based on the player's selection. It is possible to use a specific identification part, which allows the player to participate in the game, and has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine AC6 in the gaming machine AC4 or AC5, wherein the setting means sets the specific identification section based on a determination result by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC4 or AC6, the specific identification section is set by the setting means based on the determination result of the discriminating means. This has the effect of allowing the player to predict the determination result.

<Characteristic AD group> (Execute the bunny's foot effect after entering the ball)
A ball entry means having an opening into which a game ball can enter, an open state in which the opening of the ball entry means allows a game ball to enter, and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state. a variable member that is variable between the open state and the closed state; a variable means that is capable of changing the variable member between the open state and the closed state; a detection means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening; a guiding path for guiding the played game ball down for a predetermined period of time to the performance element where the performance is performed; A game machine AD1 characterized in that it has a performance variable means for changing a performance.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where game balls can flow down, and one of them, which is the starting winning opening that is the trigger for starting the winning/failure judgment, is used to When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, a game is executed in which the variable prize winning device is opened, and the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In such a game machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a passageway through which a plurality of game balls can pass is connected with a channel member through which the game balls can flow down, thereby causing the game balls to flow down to a predetermined position. (Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-133036). Furthermore, there is a need for a gaming machine that suppresses the monotony of the game by increasing the interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine AD1, the performance of the performance body is varied by the performance variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined period from when the game ball passing through the opening is detected until it reaches the performance body. By guiding the ball to the performance body, the performance of the performance body can be made variable. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand the timing at which the performance of the performance body is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that the guiding path is constituted by a visual recognition member through which the game balls flowing down can be visually recognized by the player.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, the guide path is configured so that the game ball flowing down inside can be seen by the player, so that the game ball being guided to the presentation object can be visually recognized. This has the effect of making it easier to understand the timing at which the presentation of the presentation object is changed.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the guide path is configured to be movable at least between a first position where the game ball can be guided to the performance element and a second position where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the performance element, When the movable means moves the guideway between the first position and the second position, and the variable means changes the movable member to the open state, the guideway moves from the second position to the second position. A gaming machine AD3 characterized in that it is movable to one position.

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is in the open state, the guiding path is moved to the first position, so the variable member is in the open state. This has the effect of being able to inform players more easily.

A gaming machine AD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, it has a discharge flow path that discharges gaming balls that enter the opening when the guide path is not moved to the first position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AD2 and AD3, gaming machine AD4 has the effect of being able to discharge gaming balls that have entered the opening through the discharge passage even if the guideway cannot be moved to the first position due to a malfunction or the like.

A gaming machine AD5 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable member is changed to the open state by the variable means until a predetermined condition is established, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD4, gaming machine AD5 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest because, when the judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

A gaming machine AD5, characterized in that it has a decision means for deciding whether to set a special game state advantageous to the player after the bonus game is played by the bonus game execution means when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result, and the presentation means announces the result of the decision by the decision means through the presentation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD5, gaming machine AD6 notifies the player whether a special game state is set by the presentation device, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous even during bonus play.

In any of the above gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is awarded.

In any of the above gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
631 Rotation motor 640 Rotation member (identifier)
677 Holding piece S214 Part of the benefit providing means S305 Part of the discrimination means S508 Part of the discrimination means S1116 Part of the benefit providing means S1706 Notification state setting means S1806 Movement control means S2004 Specific performance execution means S3025 Determination means

Among the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, which is equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine uses balls as a gaming medium, and is configured to require a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information and to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a determination is made as to whether a player has won or not, and the result of the determination is announced by rotating multiple rotating bodies, each of which has a number of different patterns arranged on the front side, which are lined up and rotated, and the combination of patterns that stops at a predetermined position.
As a result of this notification, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a variable winning device is changed so that a gaming ball can enter when a predetermined number of the same symbols (e.g., three) come to a halt (e.g., Patent Document 1: JP 7-204318 A).
In this conventional gaming machine, the player plays in the hope that a predetermined number of the same symbols will line up and stop, but since the number of combinations of winning symbols on the rotating body corresponds to the type of symbols arranged on each, and is always constant, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the problem of players becoming bored early on.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a discrimination means which performs a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus granting means which grants a beneficial bonus to a player based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, an identifier having a plurality of different identification parts arranged thereon, a determination means which determines a specific one of the identification parts in the identifier, an alarm state setting means which sets the specific identification part to an alarm state when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and a specific effect execution means which executes a specific effect which notifies the player of the discrimination result by the discrimination means using the identification part of the identifier based on the establishment of a specific condition, wherein the determination means divides the identifier into a plurality of regions and determines the specific identification parts so that a high determination region having a high proportion of being determined by the specific identification parts and a low determination region having a low proportion of being determined by the specific identification parts are formed within the region.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, which has a movable means for moving the identifier, and the alarm state setting means moves the identifier with the movable means and sets the identifier to the alarm state by stopping the identifier determined to be the specific identifier at a predetermined position.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, which has a presentation body, a moving means capable of moving the presentation body to the predetermined position, and a movement control means for moving the presentation body to the predetermined position by the moving means in accordance with the timing at which the identification body stops.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a plurality of different identification parts are arranged, and when an identification part determined to be a specific identification part among the identification parts reaches an alarm state, a bonus is granted to the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that all identification parts will become specific identification parts, and the degree of expectation can be varied depending on which identification part is determined to be a specific identification part.
Furthermore, the identifier is divided into a plurality of regions, and the specific identifier is determined so as to form a high determination region in which the proportion of the specific identifier is determined to be high and a low determination region in which the proportion of the specific identifier is low. Therefore, the proportion of the specific identifier varies depending on the region of the identifier, and the expectation for the specific identifier can be configured to vary even within the identifier.
This has the effect of providing variation in the player's expectations, preventing the game from becoming monotonous, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1. That is, the identifier is moved and a specific identifier is stopped at a predetermined position to enter an annunciation state, thereby announcing to the player that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, and the player can be interested in the position at which the identifier will be stopped.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, the presentation body is moved to a predetermined position in accordance with the timing at which the identification body stops, so that the player can be clearly notified of the identification part that has stopped at the predetermined position.

Claims (3)

a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition;
a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result;
an identifier in which a plurality of different identifiers are arranged;
Determining means for determining a specific identification part among the identification parts in the identification object;
notification state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a notification state when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result;
a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in which the identification section of the identification body notifies the player of the determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The determining means divides the identification object into a plurality of regions, and among the regions, a high determination region has a high percentage determined by the specific identification portion and a high determination region has a low percentage determined by the specific identification portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific identification portion is determined so that a low determination area is formed. a moving means for moving the identifier,
The gaming machine described in claim 1, characterized in that the notification state setting means sets the notification state by moving the identifier using the moving means and stopping the identifier determined to be the specific identifier at a predetermined position. The performance body and
a moving means capable of moving the performance object to the predetermined position;
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a movement control means for moving the performance object to the predetermined position by the moving means in synchronization with a timing at which the identification object stops.

Images